Digitized  by  the  Internet  Archive 

in  2010  with  funding  from 
Columbia  University  Libraries 


http://www.archive.org/details/manwonderfulinhoOOalle 


THE 


Man  Wonderful 


IN  THE 

HOUSE  BEAUTIFUL. 

(  REVISED  ) 

AN  ALLEGORY, 

TEACHING    THE    PRINCIPLES    OF    PHYSIOLOGY    AND 

HYGIENE,  THE  EFFECTS  OF  STIMULANTS    AND 

NARCOTICS,     AND     THE     BEAUTY     AND 

SACREDNESS  OF  THE  HUMAN  BODY. 


-BY- 


CHILION  B.  ALLEN,  A.  M.,  LL  B„  Nl.  D., 


Member  of  the  Bar  of  New  York  City. 

Member  cf  the  Broome  County  Medical  Society,  N.  Y. 


CHILION  R.  ALLEN 

CHICAGO,    ILL. 


©,?3 


<l 


COPYRIGHTED    BY 

CHILION  B.  ALLEN,  1891. 
All  rights  reserved. 


Entered  at  Stationers'  Hall, 
london,  england. 


For  private  circulation. 


CONTENTS. 

Part   First.— The   House   Beautiful. 

CHAPTER    I. 
Introductory. — The  Human  Body  compared  to  a  house,         9 

CHAPTER    II. 
The  Foundations. — The  Bones  compared  to  the  founda- 
tions of  a  house, 16 

CHAPTER    III. 
[*HE  Walts. — The  Muscles  described  as  the  walls  which 

pi'  e  shape  and  beauty,       .....  21 

CHAPTER    IV. 
The  Servants. — The  Muscles  also  act  as  faithful  servants,       28 

CHAPTER   V. 
Siting  and  Shingles. — A  description  of  the  Skin  and 

its  appendages,  .......       36 

CHAPTER    VI. 
The  Observatory. — The  Cranium  and  its  contents,       .       45 

CHAPTER   VII. 
The  Hall.— The   Mouth,  Teeth,  and  Salivary  Glands  as 

the  Hall  and  attendants,  53 

CHAPTER    VIII. 
The  Kitchen.— The  Stomach,  Gastric  Juice,  and  the  pro- 
cess of  digestion  described,        .....       59 

CHAPTER   IX. 
The  Butler's  Pantry.— The  Duodenum  thus  compared,      65 

CHAPTER   X. 
The    Dining- Room.— The  Small  Intestines  the  Dining- 
room  of  our  House  Beautiful 71 

(I) 


2  CONTENTS. 

CHAPTER    XI. 

PAG* 

THE  ENGINE. — The  Heart  and  its  workings  a   wonderful 

Engine,      .........       79 

CHAPTER    XII. 

The  Housekeeper. — The  Blood  as  an  industrious  House- 
keeper,      .  87 

CHAPTER    XIII. 

The  Laundry. — The  Lungs  and  the  mystery  of  washing 

the  blood  described,  ....  95 

CHAPTER    XIV.     ' 
THE  FURNACE. — The  Liver  as  afurnace  and  manufactory,     107 

CHAPTER    XV. 

The  Mysterious  Chambers. — The  ductless  glands,  as 
the  spleen,  supra-renal  capsules,  etc.,  thus  denom- 
inated and  described 11$ 

CHAPTER    XVI. 
The  Telegraph. — The  Nerves  a  marvellous  Telegraph      122 

CHAPTER    XVII. 

The    Phonograph. — The  Sympathetic  Nervous  system 

compared  to  a  Divine  Phonograph,  .  .129 

CHAPTER    XVIII. 
The  Burglar  Alarm. — The  Nerves  of  Sensation  give 

an  alarm  of  danger  to  the  House,      .         .         .         .134 

CHAPTER    XIX. 
The  Sixth  Sense. — Muscular  Sense  thus  named,   .        .     137 

CHAPTER    XX. 
The  Organ. — The  Larynx  and  Vocal  Chords  an  incom- 
parable musical  instrument,      .....     14) 


CoxTf.xts.  3 

CHAPTER    XXI. 

PAGE 

The  AUDITORIUM.-- A   description   of  the   External  and 

Middle  Ear 148 

CHAPTER    XXI 1. 

The  Whispering  GALLERY. —  The  Internal  Ear,  a  mar- 
vellous Whispering  Gallery,       ....  155 

CHAPTER    XXIII. 

The  Windows. — Hosv  the  eyes  serve  as  Windows  to  the 

House  Beautiful,         .......     16$ 

CHAPTER    XXIV. 

The    Double  Telescope. — How  the  eyes  resemble   a 

double  telescope, 175 

CHAPTER    XXV. 

Twin-Brother  Guardians. — Taste  described  as  one  of 

a  pair  of  guardian  brothers, 184 

CHAPTER   XXVI. 

The  Other  of  the  Twin  Brothers.— The  Sense  of 

Smell  thus  designated  and  described,         .         .  "91 

CHAPTER    XXVII. 

The  Facade. — How  the  Face  and   Figure  show  beauty, 

and  can  be  compared  to  the  facade  of  a  house,         .     196 

Part  Second.— The  Man  Wonderful. 
CHAPTER    1. 
Thk    Baby. — His  growth  and    development   as  the  Man 

Wonderful 205 

CHAPTER    II. 
Girlhood. — Its  needs  and  requirements,  .         .         .212 

CHAPTER    III. 
liOYHOOIi.  —  Its  needs  and  requirements,     ....     219 


4  CONTENTS. 

CHAPTER    IV. 

PAGE 

Manhood.— Man's  ability  to  do 224 

CHAPTER    V. 
Doubtful  Company. — Tea,  Coffee,  Opium,  and  Chloral 

Hydrate  treated  of  as  questionable  guests,        .        .     242 

CHAPTER   VI. 
Bad  Company. — The  Aboriginal  American,  Tobacco,      .     250 

CHAPTER   VII. 

The  Quack   Dentist   and   Medical  Assistant.— 

Tobacco  described  as  acting  in  these  capacities,       .     257 

CHAPTER    VIII. 
The  Dude. — The  Cigarette  described  under  this  title,      .     263 

CHAPTER    IX. 
The  Dandy. — The  Cigar  in  this  guise,      ....     266 

CHAPTER    X. 
Wicked  Company. — Wine  a  Quack  Doctor,     .        .        .     270 

CHAPTER    XI. 
Wicked  Company. — Beer  a  Shyster,  a  Deceiver,      .         .     279 

CHAPTER    XII. 

Wicked  Company. — Distilled  Liquor  a  Thief,  .        .     287 

CHAPTER    XIII. 
Wicked  Company. — Alcohol  a  Murderer,        .        .        .294 

CHAPTER    XIV. 
Good  Company. — Foods  thus  treated 308 

CHAPTER    XV. 
A  Royal  Guest. — Water, 315 

CHAPTER   XVI. 
'iiiE  Man  Wonderful, 318 


PREFACE. 

TEACHING  truth  by  means  of  allegory  has 
been  among  the  most  successful  of  the  many 
methods  employed  by  the  ablest  instructors. 
Jesus  taught  the  common  people,  who  heard  him 
gladly,  by  parables,  and  for  nearly  two  thousand 
years  these  parables  have  been  equally  pleasing 
and  instructive  to  all  classes  and  conditions  of 
men,  and  during  all  ages  they  will  remain  as  use- 
ful as  when  first  uttered.  If  the  sublime  truths  of 
Christianity  could  be  taught  allegorically,  why 
may  not  less  difficult  subjects,  which  underlie  our 
well  being,  be  made,  in  like  manner,  interesting 
and  practical  ?  The  object  of  this  work  is  to 
teach  the  important  truths  of  Physiology  and 
Hygiene  as  well  as  the  effects  of  Stimulants  and 
Narcotics  upon  the  human  system,  and  to  show 
the  wonderful  adaptability  and  beauty  of  the 
human  body  in  such  an  attractive  and  practical 
manner  that  it  will  be  acceptable  and  useful  to  all. 
It  is  hoped  that  this  allegory  will  secure  a  per- 
manent lodgment  in  the  minds  of  the  young,  and 
that  they  will  find  so  much  pleasure  and  advan- 
tage in  practicing  the  truths  of  science  here 
taught,  that  the  contemplation  of  the  vital  truths 
of  their  earthly  habitation  will  forever  remain 
pleasurable. 

Parents  should  take  a  deep  interest  in  these 
subjects,  because  the  observance  of  the  laws  of 
health  has  a  direct  and  lasting  influence  on  the 
(vi) 


The  Wigwam. 


Modern  Impkovuments. 


(8) 


PART     I. 

THE  HOUSE  BEAUTIFUL 


CHAPTER  I. 

INTRODUCTORY. 

1  In  the  early  history  of  the  human  race  men  lived 
in  caves  in  the  ground,  in  huts  made  of  earth  and 
logs,  or  in  wigwams  made  of  the  skins  of  animals. 
But  as  they  became  more  civilized  they  enlarged  their 
dwellings,  and  invented  many  things  to  make  them 
more  comfortable.  "  It  has  taken  centuries  of  growth 
to  produce  the  "modern  improvements"  of  gas.  wa- 
ter on  each  floor,  speaking-tubes,  stationary  tubs,  bur- 
glar alarms,  and  telephones. 

3  I  am  going  to  tell  you  of  a  wonderful  house  de- 
servedly called  the  "  House  Beautiful,"  which  is  built 
by  a  wise  Architect,  who  has  been  building  such 
houses  ever  since  the  human  race  existed,  and  whose 
great  skill  and  wisdom  is  proven  by  the  fact  that  He 
has  never*  added  a  room,  or  made  one  less,  or  changed 
their  arrangement.  And  what  is  still  more  remark- 
able, the  very  first  house  of  this  kind,  which  was 
owned  by  a  man  named  5  Adam,  a  gardener,  had  in  it 
allof  themodern  improvements,  as  haseach  succeed- 
ing one.  All  the  rooms  are  heated  by  a  furnace.  There 

(9) 


10  THE  HOUSE  BEAUTIFUL. 

are  water-pipes,  gas,  burglar  alarms,  a  system  of  tele- 
graphs and  telephones  ;  there  are  also  the  stationary 
tubs  in  the  laundry.  I  wonder  how  many  of  you 
have  guessed  what  this  "  House  Beautiful  "  is.  '  Some 
of  you  have,  I  know,  and  are  ready  to  cry  out,  "  It  is 
our  body." 

Maybe  you  have  always  thought  that  your  body 
was  you.  T  But  it  is  only  the  house  you  live  in.  So, 
was  I  not  right  to  say  that  you  each  live  alone  ?  And 
perhaps  you  will  be  more  ready  to  admit  that  I  was 
right  to  call  it  a  house  when  I  tell  you  of  what  this 
wonderful  body  is  composed.  9  The  buildings  which 
your  bodies  inhabit  are  made  of  wood,  brick,  or  stone, 
and  are  held  together  by  nails  or  mortar.  "  But," 
you  say,  "  that  is  not  the  way  with  our  House  Beauti- 
ful." Let  us  see.  9  Chemistry  is  the  science  which 
takes  things  to  pieces  and  finds  out  of  what  they 
are  made  ;  not  merely  breaking  them  up,  as  children 
do  their  toys  sometimes,  but  decomposing  them 
and  learning  what  things  are  put  together  to  make 
even  the  little  pieces.  9  Chemistry  tells  us  that  water 
is  made  by  uniting  two  gases — oxygen  and  hydrogen  , 
and  that  air  is  made  by  mixing  oxygen  and  nitrogen. 
Chemistry  takes  a  piece  of  glass,  and  tells  us  that  it 
is  made  by  uniting  silicic  acid  and  potassa  in  certain 
proportions.  "  But  how  is  potassa  made  ?"  ,0  There 
are  some  things  which  even  Chemistry  can  not  find 
out,  and  when  something  is  found  which  Chemistry 
can  not  take  to  pieces,  that  substance  is  called  an  ele- 
mentary substance,  or  an  element.  Elementary  means 
primary.     You  who  have  studied  about  colors  have 


WHAT  SUBSTANCES  IN  THE  BODY.  \\ 

learned  that  there  are  three  primary  colors,  red,  blue, 
and  yellow,  and  all  other  colors  are  made  by  uniting 
these  in  certain  proportions.  "  So,  in  the  formation 
of  the  world  and  all  that  there  is  in  it,  we  have  about 
sixty-three  elements.  In  building  houses  men  use 
iron,  plaster,  glass,  etc.,  and  the  Architect  of  our 
"  House  Beautiful"  has  used  the  same  materials.  It 
is  iron  that  gives  our  blood  its  rich  red  color,  which 
paints  such  a  charming  glow  on  the  cheeks  and  lips, 
and  iron  is  found  in  the  hair  and  in  the  bile  and  in 
various  parts  of  the  body.  Silica,  which  helps  to 
make  glass,  is  found  in  the  hair  and  nails;  and  potassa, 
the  other  helper  in  glass-making,  is  found  in  the  blood 
and  muscles,  and  in  the  fluids  of  the  body.  Mortar 
is  made  of  lime,  and  our  houses  would  not  keep  in 
repair  long  if  we  did  not  furnish  them  lime  for  the 
bones  and  teeth. 

I  told  you  that  there  are  about  sixty-three  known 
elementary  substances  found  in  nature  ;  but  of  these 
only  about  one-fourth  are  used  in  our  bodies.  ,2  They 
are  oxygen,  hydrogen,  nitrogen,  carbon  (that  is  what 
coal  is,  you  know),  sulphur,  phosphorus,  silicon,  chlo- 
rine, fluorine,  potassium,  calcium  (that  is  lime),  mag- 
nesium, and  iron. 

These  substances  are  not  found  in  the  body  in  the 
same  state  in  which  we  see  them  as  glass,  or  nails,  or 
sulphur.  As  you  grow  in  knowledge  you  will  learn 
in  how  many  wonderful  ways  all  things,  animate  and 
inanimate,  are  working  to  help  each  other  "  We 
can  not  eat  lime  or  silica,  but  plants  can,  and  then 
we  eat  the  plants  :  or  the  animals  eat  them,  and  wc 


12  THE  HOUSE  BEAUTIFUL. 

eat  the  animals  ;  and  so  the  lime  or  potassa  is  made 
over,  so  that  we  can  use  it  in  keeping  us  alive  and 
in  repair.  So,  although  it  may  seem  a  dry  study,  it 
really  is  of  importance  for  us  to  know  just  how  and  of 
what  we  are  made,  and  where  we  shall  find  the  right 
things  to  feed  ourselves,  in  order  that  we  may  grow, 
and  keep  strong  and  well.  u  Everything  of  which 
we  are  made  must  be  obtained  from  food,  and  if  we 
do  not  give  the  bones  enough  lime,  or  the  blood 
enough  iron,  we  get  out  of  repair,  which  we  call  being 
sick. 

With  this  thought  in  view  we  begin  to  study  a  lit- 
tle more  closely  into  the  construction  of  this  wonder- 
ful house  we  live  in.    "We 
find  that    every   organ    is 
"°    made  of  cells,  or  very  small 
bags,  filled  with  something 
J    that  looks  like  jelly.    This 
substance  has  a  long  name 

Structure  op  the  Cell.  1  •   t  .  • 

which  you  may  sometimes 
hear  grown  people  use.  ia  It  is  protoplasm.  And  you 
know  as  much  what  that  means  as  they  do.  The  cells 
which  contain  this  jelly-like  protoplasm  are  so  small 
that  they  can  only  be  seen  by  a  very  powerful  micro- 
scope. Although  so  small,  they  are  very  wonderful,  and 
do  what  some  bigger  things  can  not  do.  17  They  are  all 
the  time  dying,  and  in  some  strange,  wonderful  way 
they  have  the  power  to  make  other  cells  to  take  their 
places.  Just  as  if  your  mamma  died,  and  in  doing 
so  made  you  a  new  mamma  to  take  her  place,  so  ex 
actly  like  her  that  you  could  not  tell  the  difference, 


THE  CELLS.  lj 

and  never  knew  when  the  old  mamma  died,  and  the 
new  one  came.  This  is  going  on  all  through  our 
bodies  all  the  time.  Every  word  we  speak,  every 
thought  we  think,  every  motion  we  make,  destroys 
some  part  of  us,  and  if  the  new  material  which  comes 
to  take  the  place  of  that  which  is  worn  out  were  not 
just  like  that  which  it  replaces,  in  a  little  while  we 
would  be  so  changed  that  our  dearest  friends  would 
not  know  us.  Even  our  scars  are  made  over  from 
year  to  year  after  the  same  pattern. 

11  When  girls  and  boys  are  growing,  so  many  en- 
tirely new  cells  have  to  be  added  that  they  change 
their  outward  appearance,  so  that  children  differ  in 
looks  from  the  men  or  women  they  afterward  be- 
come. Yet  enough  of  the  original  pattern  remains 
to  preserve  something  of  a  likeness. 

It  is  strange,  but  true,  that  while  men  have  studied 
everything  else  with  the  greatest  interest,  they  have 
almost  forgotten  one  study  which  is  of  great  import- 
ance to  them  ;  19  the  study  of  these  houses  which 
they  inhabit  ;  how  they  are  made,  destroyed,  and 
kept  in  repair.  20  Such  knowledge  learned  in  early 
life  would  save  us  a  world  of  suffering,  and  enable  us 
to  do  far  more  good  than  we  can  do  if  by  ignorance 
we  let  these  wonderfully  beautiful  dwellings  fall  into 
early  decay.  People  sometimes  say  that  at  first  the 
Great  Architect  made  these  houses  larger  and  they 
lasted  longer.  Be  that  as  it  may,  it  is  tertain  that 
we  can  make  them  last  longer  if  we  learn  how  to  take 
care  of  them,  and  how  to  keep  them  in  repair,  by 
furnishing  the  cells  with  the  right  kind  of  food  in 
proper  quantities. 


H 


THE  HOUSE  BEAUTIFUL. 


"  Can  we  keep  these  little  cells  alive  longer  if  we 
hold  very  still.  And  would  that  keep  us  in  better  re- 
pair?" These  little  cells  are  made  to  live  a  certain 
length  of  time,  and  if  not  destroyed  by  activity  be- 
fore that  time,  will  die  then  anyway,  and,  if  not  re- 
moved, become  a  source  of  disease.  91  Exercise,  while 
it  destroys  the  tissue  which  the  cells  form,  also  helps 
to  carry  them  out  of  the  system  after  they  are  dead, 
and  thus  creates  a  demand  for  new  material  for  new 
cells.  23  This  demand  we  call  hunger.  It  is  far  bet- 
ter that  cells  should  be  destroyed  by  exercise,  and 
then  removed  from  the  body,  while  food  supplies 
material  for  new  cells,  than  that  they  should  be  left 
to  live  as  long  as  they  could,  and  die  of  old  age,  and 
then,  because  of  inactivity  of  the  body,  be  left  to  ob- 
struct the  system,  or  to  create  disease. 

So  you  need  not  be  afraid  to  work  or  play,  to  run 
and  jump,  or  to  help  papa  or  mamma,  for  that  will 
make  you  hungry.  And  the  cells  will  take  care  of 
themselves  if  you  give  them  wholesome  food  at  right 
times  and  in  right  quantities,  and  let  them  have  a 
chance  to  build  you  over  while  you  take  plenty  of 
sweet,  refreshing  sleep. 


CHAPTER  II. 

THE    FOUNDATION. 

1  The  first  thing  to  be  thought  of  in  building  a  house 
is  its  foundation.  How  strong  and  broad  it  shall  be 
made,  and  how  deep  it  shall  be  laid  in  the  earth,  de- 
pend upon  the  size  of  the  house  to  be  built.  A  small 
cottage  does  not  need  a  foundation  as  strong  as  a  mill 
or  manufactory.  When  the  great  bridge  across  the 
Mississippi  was  built  at  St.  Louis,  Mo.,  the  first  stones 
of  the  foundation  were  laid  one  hundred  and  six  feet 
below  the  surface  of  the  water.  And  that  wonderful 
structure,  the  Brooklyn  Bridge,  rests  on  a  foundation 
whose  lowest  stones  are  placed  seventy-eight  feet  be- 
low the  surface  of  the  water.  If  any  one  had  told 
the  engineers  of  these  massive  creations  of  man's  skill 
that  it  would  not  matter  what  the  foundations  were 
if  only  the  superstructure  looked  pretty,  was  painted 
and  finely  ornamented,  they  would  have  shaken  their 
heads  and  said,  "We  know  better  than  that.  We 
know  that  success  depends  upon  our  foundation." 

Even  so  our  success  in  life  depends  largely  upon 
having  a  good  foundation  for  our  "  House  Beautiful." 
By  this  foundation  we  mean  the  a  bones,  of  which 
there  are  about  two  hundred  in  the  body ;  and  when 
put  together  in  their  places, s  we  call  them  the  skeleton. 

(16) 


THE   TISSUES  SELECT  THEIR  OWN  FOOD.        xy 

They  are  of  various  shapes,  some  are  short,  some  are 
long,  and  some  are  irregular.  6  They  are  made  of  two 
kinds  of  matter,  earthy  and  animal.  "  If  you  put  a 
bone  into  the  fire  the  animal  matter  will  burn  out  and 
leave  the  earthy.  The  shape  of  the  bone  will  remain, 
but  if  you  touch  it,  it  will  fall  to  pieces.  7  Muriatic 
acid  will  dissolve  the  earthy  matter  and  leave  the  ani- 
mal matter,  and  then  you  can  tie  the  bone  into  a 
knot  without  breaking  it. 

8  In  little  children  the  bones  are  mostly  animal 
matter,  and  are  therefore  soft  and  will  easily  bend. 
'  They  begin  to  ossify  or  get  bony  in  little  points  by 
the  accumulation  of  calcareous,  or  limy  matter,  and 
these  points  get  bigger  until  they  come  together, 
and  at  last  there  is  no  part  of  the  ,0  bone  that  has  not 
its  proper  proportion  of  lime,  and  then  the  bones  are 
strong,  and  the  person  has  "  got  his  growth." 

11  The  earthy  matter  of  the  bones  is  principally 
phosphate  of  lime,  but  there  is  also  lime  in  other 
forms,  besides  magnesia  and  common  salt.  All  these 
things  must  be  obtained  from  the  food  we  eat 
■J  Would  it  not  be  funny  if,  when  your  papa  built  a 
house,  he  should  haul  a  big  pile  of  bricks  and  stone 
and  glass,  and  the  house  1S  would  help  itself  to  what- 
ever was  necessary  to  keep  itself  in  perfect  repair  ? 
Well,  that  is  just  what  your  "  House  Beautiful  "  does, 
only  you  have  to  keep  bringing  the  material  every 
day.  How  can  it  keep  itself  in  repair?  There  are 
some  things  which  we  know  are  done,  although  we 
are  not  able  to  explain  how.  We  know  that  grass 
grows,  but  no  one  knows  how  it  grows.      u  So  we 


xg  THE  HOUSE  BEAUTIFUL. 

know  that  every  tissue  of  the  body  selects  its  own 
food,  though  we  can  not  tell  how  it  knows  what  is 
the  food  it  needs.  Wise  men  have  studied  this  won- 
derful house,  and  have  learned  many  interesting 
Mnngs  about  it,  and  are  learning  more  every  day. 

Every  bone  is  covered  with  a  whitish  skin  or  mem- 
brane, which  is  called  the  periosteum  (that  is  a  Latin 
word,  and  means  15  "  around  the  bone  ").  "  This 
membrane  has  many  blood-vessels  running  through 
it,  which  go  into  the  bone  to  carry  it  its  food.  The 
periosteum  fits  close  to  the  bone,  and  its  cells,  in 
health,  always  produce  bone. 

If  the  periosteum  is  peeled  off  and  the  bone  taken 
out,  new  bone  will  be  formed,  so  that  we  might  call 
it  the  mother  of  bone. 

If  you  examine  a  long  bone  of  an  animal,  you  will 
see  on  the  side,  near  the  end,  a  little  hole ;  and  in 
the  enlarged  ends  of  the  bones  several  other  holes. 
17  These  are  to  admit  blood-vessels  to  the  inside  of  the 
bone.  Look  carefully,  and  you  will  see  that  the  bone 
is  hard  and  solid  on  the  outside,  but  if  you  cut  off 
the  end  you  will  see  that  it  is  spongy — that  is.  full  of 
holes — on  the  inside.  These  holes  are  also  to  carry 
blood-vessels,  and  if  you  examined  the  bone  with  a 
microscope  you  would  see  very  many  others  which 
are  so  small  as  not  to  be  visible  to  the  eye  without 
the  glass ;  and  all  these  are  canals  for  blood-vessels ; 
"  so  when  you  hear  people  talk  of  "  dry  bones  "  you 
will  know  that  such  bones  are  dead,  for  living  bonea 
are  full  of  blood,  and  are  eating  day  and  night  their 
breakfasts  and  dinners  of  lime. 


WHOLE   WHEAT  THE  BEST  BONE  FOOD.         I0, 

All  this  is  interesting  to  learn,  but  we  can  make  it 
more  than  interesting;  we  can  make  it  practical. 
That  is,  we  can  use  our  knowledge  to  our  own  ad- 
vantage. What  can  we  learn?'9  Knowing  that  the 
bones  of  babies  are  mostly  animal  matter,  called  car- 
tilage ox  gristle,  we  should  be  careful  not  to  lift  them 
by  their  arms,  since  their  soft  bones  are  very  easily 
injured.  I  have  seen  a  mother  who  would  lift  a  child 
by  one  arm,  or  raise  it  to  her  lap  by  taking  hold  of 
both  arms  instead  of  putting  her 20  hands  on  the  baby's 
sides,  under  its  arms.  Such  a  mother  did  not  know 
how  soft  her  child's  bones  were,  or  she  would  not  have 
been  so  unkind  to  it. 

11  In  old  people  the  bones  are  mostly  of  earthy 
matter,  and  therefore  will  break  more  easily.  "  We 
should  remember  this,  and  try  to  guard  old  folks 
from  getting  bad  falls.  Never  play  a  trick  on  grand- 
ma or  grandpa  that  will 
result  in  a  fall,  for  it*  is 
a  far  more  serious  thing 
for  them  to  fall  than  for 
you.  a3  Sometimes,  when 
children  do  not  have  the 
kind  of  food  that  furnishes 

..  Cells  with  Forkign  Matters. 

hme  for  the  bones,  they 

have  a  disease  that  is  called  "  rickets,"  and  that  means 
nothing  more  than  that  their  bones  are  too  soft,  and 
need  more  lime.  This  is  a  very  practical  matter,  and 
we  are  all  interested  in  learning  how  we  shall  give 
our  foundations  strength  and  firmness,  so  that  they 
shall  be  able  to  hold  us  up  and  keep  us  straight,  and 


20  THE  HOUSE  BEAUTIFUL. 

we   shall   grow   to   the   full  stature   of   manhood   or 
womanhood. 

M  The  best  bone-building  food  is  undoubtedly  the 
whole  wheat ;  and  by  that  I  mean,  not  the  white 
flour  such  as  most  people  use  in  making  bread,  but 
the  wheat  flour  before  it  is  bolted.  It  would  interest 
you  to  visit  a  mill  and  see  how  flour  is  made  ;  then 
you  would  understand  what  I  mean  by  bolting.  The 
Great  Architect  of  the  "  House  Beautiful  "  made  wheat 
to  contain,  in  nearly  the  right  proportion,  everything 
that  is  needed  to  build  up  the  body  and  keep  it  in 
perfect  repair.  25  But  when  men  grind  the  wheat  and 
bolt  it  they  take  out  of  it  nearly  all  the  bone-building 
material. 


CHAPTER   III. 

THE   WALLS. 

Have  you  never  seen  a  house  built  with  a  wooden 
tr.imework,  just  as  if  it  were  going  to  be  sided  on 
the  outside  and  the  spaces  between  the  studding 
filled  in  with  brick?  The  frame  gave  the  strength  to 
support  the  roof  and  to  hold  all  the  different  parts 
of  the  house  together,  while  the  brick  walls  gave 
solidity  and  warmth.  We  have  studied  something 
about  our  foundations,  how  they  are  made  largely  of 
lime;  'but  our  foundations  are  also  our  framework, 
extending  to  the  roof,  inclosing  the  rooms  inside, 
and  supporting  the  walls  without.  These  walls  are 
of  a  red  color,  resembling  in  tint  the  beautiful  Phila- 
delphia brick,  but  they  are  not  like  bricks  in  any 
other  respect.  *  Bricks  are  dead  and  inert,  and  when 
they  begin  to  wear  out  they  crumble  away,  and  if  left 
to  themselves  will  at  last  fall  to  pieces  and  become 
of  no  use.  8  The  walls  of  our  house  are  alive,  and 
although  they  are  all  the  time  wearing  out,  yet  they 
are  also  all  the  time  repairing  themselves ;  and  they 
do  it  so  quietly  and  gently  that  we  4  never  know  any- 
thing about  it,  unless,  as  sometimes  happens,  we  do 
not  give  the  housekeeper  the  material  needed  to  keep 

(21) 


22 


THE  HOUSE  BEAUTIFUL. 


the  walls  in  repair ;  then  they  tell  us  about  it  by  com« 
plaining  of  being  tired,  when  we  know  they  have  re- 
ally done  nothing  to 
tire  them. 

6  These  walls  are 
called  muscles,  and 
there  are  about  four 
hundred  of  them,  or 
more  than  that  many, 
but  that  is  an  easy 
number  to  remember, 
and  you  will  also  re- 
member that  there 
are  about  twice  as 
m  a  n  y  muscles  as 
bones,  and  that  will 
be  enough  for  you  to 
remember  now. 

8  I  think  1  did  not 
tell  you  how  the  frame- 
work of  our  house  is 
held  together.  It  is 
by  white  shining 
bands,  called  liga- 
ments. These  fasten 
the  bones  together 
very  much  as  do  the 
braces  of  a  house 
which  you  see  nailed 
at  the  corners  of  a 
wooden  house-frame,  or  where  two  pieces  of  wood  are 
joined  together,  end  to  end  ;  so  we  may  call  these  lig- 


The  Framework. 


THE  JOINTS. 


23 


aments  the  braces.  The  framework  of  our  House  Beau- 
tiful must  not  only  be  strong, T  but  it  must  also  be  mov- 
able, so  these  braces  should  not  hold  it  rigidly  in 
one  position,  but  allow  of  motion,  in  various  direc- 
tions, at  those  places  where  the  different  bones  come 
together,  which  are  called  joints.  '  Some  of  the  joints 
do  n  >t  move,  as  those  in  the  head.  These  are  called 
immovable  joints.  *  Of  the  movable  joints  there  are 
the  hinge  joint,  as  at  the  elbow  ;  and  the  ball-and- 


Knee-Joint  Anteriorly. 


Knbe-Joint  Posteriorly. 


socket  joint,  as  at  the  shoulder.  10  Where  the  ends  of 
the  bones  come  together  to  form  a  joint,  they  are  tip- 
ped with  cartilage,  so  they  will  be  smooth,  and  at  the 
same  time  elastic,  so  that  we  will  not  jar  the  brain 
when  we  jump. 

1  Sometimes,  as  at  the  knee,  they  are  enclosed  in  a 
sac,  and  then  bound  in  place  by  the  ligaments ;  "  but 
with  all  this,  they  would  not  move  if  it  were  not  for  the 
muscles.     So  it  is  time  for  us  to  begin  the  study  of  the 


24  THE  HOUSE  BEAUTIFUL. 

muscles.  A  book  which  I  have  just  looked  into  says 
"  A  voluntary  muscle  is  the  most  highly  organized, 
and  is  possessed  of  the  most  varied  endowments, 
of  all  living  structure."  I  wonder  if  we  can  find  out 
what  that  means?  I  think  it  means  something  like 
this :  That  muscles  are,  in  their  structure  and  in  the 
ability  they  have  to  do  things,  the  most  wonderful 
parts  of  our  beautiful  house.  1S  The  largest  part  of 
our  bodies  is  made  up  of  muscles,  and  they  use  up  the 
most  of  the  food  which  is  carried  to  all  parts  of  the 
house  by  the  housekeeper,  Blood. 

14  They  are  made  up  of  many  tiny  fibres,  and  you 
will  understand  what  fibres  are  if  you  will  take  a  spool 
of  white  cotton  and  untwist  a  thread.  You  will 
first  find  that  the  one  thread  is  made  of  three  finer 
threads  twisted  together,  and  each  of  these  is  made 
of  two  threads ;  and  if  you  pick  it  to  pieces  still  fur- 
ther you  will  find  that  each  of  these  is  made  of 
innumerable  short,  fine  pieces.  Each  one  of  these  is 
a  fibre.  16  Muscles  are  made  very  much  as  thread  is 
made,  of  little  bundles  of  fibres.  16  But  each  mus- 
cular fibre  is  wrapped  up  in  a  thin  blanket  of  its 
own.  17  This  blanket  is  called  a  sheath,  because  it 
incloses  the  fibre  as  the  sheath  of  a  sword  incloses 
the  sword.  ,6  This  sheath  of  the  fibres  of  muscle  is 
called  by  a  big  name, — sar-co-lem-ma.    ' 

19  These  little  fibres,  each  in  its  coat  of  sarco- 
lerrma,  are  gathered  into  bundles,  not  twisted  togeth- 
er as  thread,  but  lying  side  by  siJe,  and  it  is  these 
bundles  which  we  call  muscles.  Seventeen  hundred 
of  these  fibres  make  a  bundle  an  inch  across  in  you 


THE   TENDONS 


25 


young  folks,  but  they  grow  as  you  grow,  and  when 
you  are  of  full  stature  it  will  not  take  more  than  five 
hundred  to  make  an  inch.  ,0  They  are  made  up  of 
other  little  fibres  so  small  that  they  are  known  as 
fibrillar  or  little  fibres,  and  it  would  take  many  thou- 
sands of  them  to  make  a  bundle  an  inch  thick.  But, 
'  small  as  they  are,  fluids  circulate  through  them,  and 
it  is  in  them  that  oxygen  is  consumed  and  carbonic 
acid  given  to  the  blood  ;  and  heat  is  the  result ;  M  so 
these  fibrillar  might  be  called  stoves.  But  they  are 
more  than  stoves.  Are  they  electric  batteries?  On 
a  cold  day,  if  you  shuffle  your  feet  over  the  carpet, 
you  can  collect  enough  electricity  to  send  a  spark 
from  your  finger  to  the  nose  of  your  companion,  and 
make  you  both  jump.  But  now  I  want  to  talk  about 
the  bundles  of  fibres  which  are  our  walls  or  muscles. 

When  all  the  fibres  that  make  a  muscle  are  gathered 
together  they  are  inclosed  in  another  sheath,  which 
is  named  the  perimysium;  **  peri  meaning  around,  and 
mysium  the  muscles. 

"  Between  the  fibres  in  the  muscles,  and  between 
the  muscles  themselves,  fat  is  always  to  be  found. 
16  You  scarcely  need  to  be  told  that  the  muscles  are 
supplied  with  arteries,  veins,  and  capillaries.  The 
latter  are  smaller  in  the  muscles  than  elsewhere  in  the 
whole  system.  "  The  muscles  are  attached  to  the 
bones  by  strong  white  bands,  called  tendons.  You 
can  see  the  tendon  in  a  leg  of  beef  or  mutton.  It  is 
white  and  shining  and  hard,  not  at  all  like  the  red 
muscle  which,  in  an  animal,  we  call  the  lean  meat. 

"  These  muscles,  lying  in  various  layers  around  our 


26  THE  HOUSE  BEAUTIFUL. 

bones,  are  what  give  to  us  our  shape.  When  packed 
in  fat  they  give  a  beautifully  rounded  outline  to  the 
human  figure  ;  but  when  there  is  but  little  fat  the 
figure  looks  angular.  29  They  grow  with  use,  and  on 
the  arm  of  a  blacksmith  we  can  see  a  huge  muscle 
swelling  up  when  he  shuts  his  hand  and  bends  his  el- 
bow. On  the  legs  of  those  who  walk  or  run  a  good 
.  deal,  especially  if  they  walk  on  their  toes,  a  muscle 
swells  out  and  makes  a  fine  calf.  30  Around  the  trunk 
of  the  body  they  are  arranged  in  layers,  some  going 
around,  others  up  and  down,  and  still  others  in  a  di- 
agonal direction.  31  This  arrangement  makes  a  fine 
protection  for  the  internal  organs,  as  well  as  being  an 
excellent  plan  for  accomplishing  other  effects. 

There  is  one  practical  thing  which  you  can  learn 
from  this  study  of  the  muscles.  3"  If  you  think  that 
the  walls  of  your  especial  house  are  not  strong  enough 
nor  thick  enough,  you  can  make  them  both  thickt. 
and  stronger  by  using  them  judiciously ;  that  is,  ac- 
cording to  your  age,  strength,  and  condition.  83  But 
if  you  overwork  your  muscles,  the  cells  will  be  de- 
stroyed faster  than  they  can  be  renewed,  and  weak- 
ness instead  of  strength  will  be  the  result.  The  walls, 
instead  of  being  rebuilt  constantly  with  new  mate- 
rial, will  become  partly  filled  with  worn-out  matter. 
*4  Sometimes  it  is  rest  that  is  needed  to  build  the 
walls,  for  during  rest  the  old  material  is  removed  and 
fresh,  living  matter  put  in  its  place. 

"  It  is  wise  to  build  up  firm,  strong  walls,  for  we 
can  not  have  much  beauty  or  great  ability  for  useful- 
ness  with    soft,    flabby    muscular   tissues.      8a  If   we 


WE  NEED  STRONG   WALLS.  27 

should  see  a  man  putting  strong  iron  bands  around  a 
handsome  house,  we  should  at  once  take  it  as  a  con- 
fession  that  something  was  wrong  in  its  construction 
that  it  thus  needed  external  support,  and  we  should 
probably  blame  the  architect  who  had  erected  a  build- 
ing so  weak  that  it  could  not  stand  alone.  3T  But  the 
Architect  of  our  House  Beautiful  never  makes  such 
mistakes.  If  we  find  it  needful  to  put  on  external 
supports  it  is  an  evidence  that  we  have  not  properly 
used  our  muscles,  and  this  is  a  confession  of  weak- 
ness,  and  also  of  ignorance.  Let  us  trust  our  wise 
"Architect  and  use  the  muscles  He  has  given  us, 
wisely  use  them,  in  work  or  in  play,  and  at  all  times 
pride  ourselves  on  our  ability  to  stand  erect  and  walk 
uprightly. 


CHAPTER    IV. 

THE   SERVANTS. 

Did  you  ever  think  that  a  minister  and  a  servant 
are  the  same  thing?  l  A  minister  is  one  who  serves, 
and  a  servant  is  one  who  ministers  unto  another.  To 
be  a  servant  is,  therefore,  sometimes  a  very  high  call- 
ing, and  to  serve  well  may  be  the  most  important 
work  of  our  life.  2  The  happiness,  growth,  and  prog- 
ress of  the  world  depend  upon  its  servants,  both  pub- 
lic and  private  ;  and  the  comfort  and  welfare  of  our 
House  Beautiful  depend  upon  the  integrity  of  its 
servants.  They  are  comprised  under  two  heads : 
8  those  who  wait  for  orders  before  doing  anything, 
and  those  who  understand  always  what  is  required 
of  them,  and  work  night  and  day  without  waiting 
for  commands.  The  first  we  call  the  voluntary  mus- 
cles, the  second  the  involuntary  muscles.  4  It  is  the 
voluntary  muscles  which  have  grouped  themselves 
around  us  to  form  our  walls,  to  protect  us  from  in- 
jury, to  strengthen  our  framework,  and  which  carry 
us  from  place  to  place  as  we  order  them.  We  often 
laugh  at  the  snail  because  he  carries  his  house  on  his 
back ;  &  but  when  we  think  of  it,  we  see  that  we  do 
the  same  thing.  We  never  go  out  without  taking 
(28) 


MUSCLES  OF  THE  FROiVT  FIGURE. 


29 


Muscles  of  the  Front  Figure. 

B  Mastoid  Muscle  ;  B.  Deltoid — the  Muscle  covering  the  Shouldei  Joint ; 
C.  Biceps— Two-headed  Muscle  of  the  Arm  ;  D,  Pronator — Pronating  Muscle 
of  the  Arm  ;  E.  Supinator — S  pinating  Muscle  of  the  Arm  ;  F.  Flexor — 
Flexor  of  the  Wrist ;  G.  Palmaris — Bending  Muscle  of  the  Hand  ;  H.  Flex- 
or— Ficx  r  of  the  Wrist  ;  I.  Large  Muscle  of  the  Chest  ;  LL.  Rectus-- 
Straight  Muscle  ;  If.  Linea  Alba-White  Line  ;  OO.  Sartorius— The  Tailor's 
Muscle-  W    Rectus  Femoris — Straight  Femoral   Muscle. 


3 


30  THE  HOUSE  BEAUTIFUL. 

our  house  along.  In  fact,  the  owner  and  master  of 
the  House  Beautiful  can  never  go  away  from  home, 
so  it  is  no  wonder  he  sings, 

"  Be  it  ever  so  humble,  there  is  no  place  like  home," 

for  there  is  no  other  place  for  him  in  this  world. 
Ought  he  not,  then,  to  be  very  thankful  to  the 
strong,  willing,  ever-ready  servants  who  serve  him  so 
faithfully  all  his  life,  and  enable  him  to  enjoy  so  much 
more  than  he  could  without  their  aid?  I  hope  you 
will  not  get  tired  at  being  referred. back  to  something 
I  have  told  you  befoie.  The  only  way  we  can  un- 
derstand what  is  to  come,  is  by  remembering  what  we 
have  previously  learned. 

I  wish  now  to  recall  to  your  mind  how  many  of  the 
bones  are  made  long,  slender,  and  with  enlarged  ends. 

8  To  form  a  joint,  these  bones  are  placed  end  to  end 
and  held  together  by  ligaments.  7  Each  bone  has 
upon  each  end  a  firm  cushion  of  cartilage,  which  is 
somewhat  like  india-rubber,  and  these  cartilages  are 
oiled  by  a  fluid  which  is  made  right  there  where  it  is 
needed.  8  We  do  not  have  to  do  as  railroad  men  do, 
stop  every  little  while  and  run  around  with  an  oil- 
can to  oil  the  machinery ;  our  machinery  oils  itself. 

9  But  the  bones  would  not  stay  in  place  if  the  liga- 
ments did  not  hold  them  fast.  The  same  quality 
under  different  circumstances  has  different  names, 
It  is  said  of  a  donkey  that  he  always  wants  to  go  in 
an  opposite  direction  from  that  in  which  it  is  desired 
that  he  should  go.     This  disposition  in  a  donkey  i§ 


THE  SPINAL  COLUMN.  3! 

called  mulisliness  ;  ,n  in  a  boy  or  girl  it  would  be 
called  obstinacy;  "grown  persons  might  speak  of  it 
in  themselves  as  perseverance  ;  12  but  in  the  ligaments 
it  is  called  elasticity.  The  ligaments  like  to  have 
their  own  way ;  and  when,  by  any  movement  of  the 
muscles,  the  ligaments  are  stretched  or  bent,  they  at 
once  try  to  go  back  to  their  own  place  ;  I3  and  this 
very  resistance  to  change  is  of  great  use  to  us  in 
keeping  us  erect  or  upright.  14  If  you  feel  up  and 
down  your  back,  you  will  find  a  row  of  knobs  or  pro- 
jections, which  are  called  the  spinous  processes  of  the 
vertebra,  or  backbone.  lb  The  spinal  column  is  made 
up  of  twenty-six  bony  rings,  each  one  with  a  bony  han- 
dle, and  these  rings  are  placed  one  over  the  other, 
the  handles  all  turned  the  same  way.  The  ends  of 
these  handles  are  what  you  feel,  and  are  called  spines, 
or  spinous  processes.  16  These  spines  are  fastened  to- 
gether by  ligaments.  17  Between  the  rings  of  the 
backbone  there  are  cushions  of  cartilage,  which  al- 
low of  movements  in  various  directions.  18  When 
you  bend  forward,  all  these  cushions  on  the  front 
side  of  the  spinal  column  are  pressed  together,  and 
the  handles  on  the  other  side  are  pulled  apart  like 
the  sticks  of  a  fan,  and  the  ligaments  are  stretched. 
19  But  when  you  raise  yourself  into  a  standing  pos- 
ture, the  ligaments  contract,  'and,  by  their  elastic 
force  and  obstinacy,  we  are  held  upright  without  our 
having  to  think  about  it.  So  you  see  that  obstinacy 
in  the  right  may  not  be  a  bad  thing,  but  we  need  to 
be  very  sure  that  we  are  right  before  we  are  obsti- 
nate.    These  ligaments  are  never  at  a  loss  to  know 


•  2  THE  HO  USE  BE  A  U  TIF  UL . 

whether  they  are  right  or  not.  They  know  that  what 
they  want  to  do  is  the  right  thing  to  do.  20  Their 
business  is  to  resist  change,  that  is,  to  be  what  we 
nowadays  call  conservative,  and  this  for  us  is  pre- 
servative. 

2i  Sometimes  bones  get  out  of  place,  dislocated, 
the  surgeons  say,  and  these  ligaments  pull  with  all 
their  might  to  get  the  ends  of  the  bones  back  into 
place.  22  But  the  bones  don't  do  anything  to  help, 
and  while  some  of  the  muscles  are  helping,  23  others 
of  them  arc  pulling  in  a  wrong  direction,  so  that 
things  go  pretty  badly  until  a  skilful  surgeon  takes 
hold,  and  by  turning  the  bones  in  the  right  direction, 
and  in  right  relation  to  each  other,  the  ligaments  and 
muscles,  guided  in  their  efforts,  pull  the  bones  into 
place.  24  This  shows  us  that  it  is  necessary  to  have 
something  more  than  a  desire  to  help  ;  it  needs  also 
to  know  how.  Muscles  have,  to  some  extent,  this 
quality  of  elasticity.  20  They  have  also  tonicity,  which 
means  that  muscles  are  always  drawn  up  a  little  with- 
out our  drawing  them  up  by  our  will.  We  can  con- 
tract or  shorten  our  voluntary  muscles  as  we  wish  ; 
but  if,  when  we  were  not  using  them,  they  were 
not  in  the  least  contracted,  they  would  be  very  soft 
and  flabby;  and  it  is  because  they  are  always  con- 
tracted a  little  that  they  are  firm,  and  that  is  what  is 
meant  by  tonicity,  or  tone  of  a  muscle.  2G  Muscles 
have  also  sensibility.  But  that  does  not  mean  their 
ability  to  feel  pain  ;  it  means  that  when  we  take  hold 
of  anything,  the  muscles  are  able  to  judge  how  heavy 
it  is ;  or  when  we  push  against  a  thing,  they  tell  us 


CONTRACTILITY  OF  MUSCLE.  33 

whether  it  is  movable  or  whether  it  resists  pressure. 
It  is  by  the  sensibility  of  muscles  that  we  are  able  to 
judge  how  much  strength  it  will  take  to  accomplish 
something  which  we  wish  to  do  with  our  muscles. 

37  Contractility  is  the  fourth  property  of  muscle. 
This  is  the  shortening  of  the  fibres  of  which  the  mus- 
cle is  composed,  and  by  this  means  drawing  together 
the  two  points  to  which  the  muscle  is  attached.  A 
muscle  is  not  fastened  at  both  ends  to  the  same  bone, 
but  there  is  usually  a  joint  between.  We  can  study 
that  in  the  arm.  "The  muscles  that  move  the  arm 
below  the  elbow  are  fastened  at  one  end  above  the 
elbow  and  at  the  other  end  below.  39  When  the  mus- 
cle on  the  front  of  the  arm  contracts,  it  bends  the 
elbow ;  when  the  one  on  the  back  of  the  arm  con- 
tracts, the  elbow  is  straightened  out.  Sometimes 
when  your  mamma  wants  to  hire  a  girl  to  so  help  in  the 
house,  she  finds  that  the  girl  is  very  particular  to  in- 
quire just  what  work  she  will  have  to  do,  and  refuses 
to  do  anything  that  was  not  specified  as  her  work. 
Well,  the  servants  in  our  house  are  just  so  particular. 
The  muscle  that  bends  a  joint  will  never  straighten 
it,  and  so  it  is  necessary  always  to  have  two  sets  of 
servants,  who  may  be  said  to  be  opposed  to  each 
other,  to  work  against  each  other.  31  The  muscles 
which  bend  the  joints  are  called  flexors ;  those  which 
straighten  the  joints  are  called  extensors.  32  But,  al- 
though these  muscles  are  opposed,  they  never  work 
against  each  other  at  the  wrong  time.  They  do  not 
interfere  with  each  other's  work.  If  they  ever  do  get 
obstinate,  and  all  work  at  the  same  time,  that  makes 
the  limb  rigid  so  that  it  will  not  move  at  all. 


34  THE  HOUSE  BEAUTIFUL, 

8  In  contracting,  a  muscle  does  not  change  in  size, 
but  only  in  shape.  It  grows  shorter,  but  at  the  same 
time  it  grows  thicker  and  firmer.  If  we  think  how 
many  things  are  to  be  done  in  our  house,  we  will  not 
wonder  that  there  must  be  nearly  five  hundred  ser- 
vants, some  to  flex,  some  to  straighten  the  limbs, 
some  to  wink  our  eyelids,  others  to  move  our  tongue, 
to  nod  our  head,  to  bend  our  back,  to  help  us  straight- 
en up  again,  to  perform  all  the  varied  motions  which 
we  make  daily  without  thinking  much  about  it.  It 
will  be  impossible  to  describe  to  you  fully  all  the  mo- 
tions made  by  the  muscles,  but  we  will  consider  for  a 
moment  the  action  in  walking.  34  When  we  are  stand- 
ing erect  the  weight  of  the  body  rests  upon  the  arch 
of  the  foot,  and  the  heels  and  balls  of  the  toes  touch 
the  ground.  s6  The  muscles  of  the  leg,  thigh,  and 
body  keep  us  erect ;  but  when  we  wish  to  walk,  then 
by  muscular  action  38the  body  is  made  to  lean  forward, 
and  this  puts  the  two  powerful  muscles  which  form 
the  calf  of  the  leg  upon  the  stretch,  and  they  pull 
upon  the  tendon  at  the  heel,  and  lift,  not  only  the 
heel,  but  the  ankle-joint  and  the  whole  body,  and 
carry  it  forward ;  at  the  same  time  the  other  foot  is 
lifted  entirely  off  the  ground  and  swung  forward  so 
as  to  be  ready  to  take  the  next  step.  "  In  walking, 
running,  or  jumping,  we  are  protected  from  being 
jarred,  by  the  elasticity  of  the  bones  themselves,  by 
the  elasticity  of  the  muscles,  and  by  the  cushions  at 
the  ends  of  the  bones  and  between  the  rings  of  the 
backbone.  38  But  to  assist  us  in  moving  from  place  to 
place  is  not  all  that   these  servants  do  for  us ;    even 


FIBRES  OF  MUSCLE.  35 

rest  itself,  in  a  sitting  or  standing  posture,  is  due  to 
the  servants.  Stf  They  hold  us  up,  and  to  do  this 
must  be  in  a  state  of  tension  or  pulling,  which  we 
have  spoken  of  as  tonicity,  and  they  can  never  rest 
completely  unless  we  lie  down.  That  is  why  we  rest 
so  much  faster  when  lying  than  when  sitting  down. 
Therefore,  if  we  are  ever  in  a  hurry  to  get  rested,  we 
should  remember  this  fact.  40  The  servants  of  which 
I  have  been  speaking  are  those  which  wait  for  orders, 
and  are  called  voluntary  muscles.  41  The  involuntary 
muscles  take  charge  of  those  movements  which  are 
not  under  our  control,  such  as  digestion,  the  beating 
of  the  heart,  and  the  movements  of  respiration. 

I  have  told  you  that  the  fibres  of  muscles  are 
stoves,  but  they  are  something  more  surprising  than 
that,  according  to  the  theory  of  a  German  investi- 
gator, they  are  musical  instruments.  He  says  that 
the  contractions  of  muscles  produce  sound,  and  that 
he  has  really  been  able  to  hear  the  tones  thus  made, 
and  that  they  are  musical.  We  have  often  read  of 
the  "  music  of  the  spheres."  That  is  the  sound  sup- 
posed to  be  made  by  the  swift  rushing  of  the  earth 
and  other  planets  through  space.  The  Psalmist  says, 
"  The  morning  stars  sang  together,"  but  we  have  always 
thought  that  to  be  only  poetry  and  not  fact.  But 
why  may  it  not  be  true?  If  our  very  muscles  are 
singing  at  their  work,  we  are  set  to  music. 

What  a  wonderful  grand  chorus  must  arise  from  all 
the  active  limbs  of  man  and  animals ;  a  great  song  of 
praise,  pealing  forth  in  manifold  strains, 

"  It  is  he  that  hath  made  us  and  not  we  ourselves." 


36 


THE  II 0  USE  BE  A  UTIFUL. 


We  might  consider  the  hand  as  a  tool.  It  has  as 
many  as  thirty  muscular  servants  to  move  it.  By 
experiment,  you  will  find  that  the  fingers  do  not  act 
independently ;  this  is  because  they  are  very  inti- 
mately related  through  the  nerves.  One  nerve  goes 
to  the  thumb  and  to  the  outside-  of  the  first  finger ; 
another  supplies  the  inside  of  the  first  finger  and  all 


Deep  Layer  AwTEKior.Lv 


of  the  three  other  fingers.  The  hand  is  aided  by  the 
mobility  of  the  wrist,  which  is  made  up  of  eight  small 
bones  arranged  in  two  rows.  Those  muscles  which 
enable  us  to  grasp  solid  bodies  are  attached  above 
the  elbow,  and  also  along  the  two  bones  of  the  fore- 
arm. They  terminate  in  long,  slender  tendons,  which 
are  fastened  to  the  bones  of  the  thumb  and  fingers. 
The  muscular  servants  at  first  are  awkward,  but  train- 
ing enables  them  to  do  their  work  both  well  and 
rapidly.  Frequent  repetition  gives  such  ease  and 
rapidity  that  we  do  not  have  to  think  of  the  move- 


THE  HANDS. 


37 


ments  we  are  making.  Hence  we  say  that  muscles 
have  a  memory.  The  nerve  terminations  in  the 
fingers,  especially  at  the  ends,  are  so  numerous,  that 
the  sense  of  touch  is  very  acute.  Blind  people  learn 
tc  read  by  passing  the  finger-tips  over  raised  letters. 
A  printer  who  sets  ten  thousand  ems  in  a  day,  must 
make  not  less  than  thirty  thousand  motions  and  pos- 
sibly as  many  as  forty  thousand.  This  would  make 
his  hand  traverse  forty  or  fifty  miles  in  a  day;  yet  by 
his  touch  he  tells  an  "  m  "  from  an  "  n,"  and  a  "c" 
from  a  u  t  "  instantly.  Merchants  judge  of  the  propor- 
tion of  silk,  cotton,  or  wool  in  goods  by  the  feeling, 
and  those  who  count  money  judge  of  the  genuineness 
of  coin  more  l>y  the  touch  than  by  sight. 

The  fingers  are  armed,  protected,  and  ornamented 
by  nails.  There  are  animals  who  have  hands  like 
man's  with  the  exception  of  the  thumb.  Said  New- 
ton, "  In  want  of  other  proofs,  the  thumb  would. con- 
vince me  of  the  existence  of  a  God.  Without  the 
thumb  the  hand  would  be  a  defective  and  incomplete 
instrument."  "  The  superior  animal  is  in  the  hand, 
the  man  is  in  the  thumb" 

Beautiful  hands  are  those  which  lift  burdens  from 
weary  shoulders,  which  smooth  the  lines  of  care  from 
anxious  faces. 

"  Beautiful  hands  are  those  that  do 
Work  that  is  earnest,  and  brave,  and  true, 
Moment  by  moment  the  long  day  through." 


CHAPTER   V. 

THE   SIDING  AND   SHINGLES. 

WHEN  men  build  wooden  framework  for  houses, 
and  fill  in  between  the  studding  with  brick,  and  cover 
the  whole  with  siding,  little  do  they  think  that  they 
are  imitating  the  construction  of  our  House  Beauti- 
ful ;  but  they  are.  We  have  seen  this  in  studying 
the  walls  of  the  house,  and  you  will  notice  the  resem- 
blance still  more  as  we  consider  the  siding.  In  these 
later  years  builders  have  sometimes  discarded  the 
old-fashioned  weather-boarding,  and  have  substituted 
a  sheathing  of  rough  boards  covered  with  shingles, 
which  latter  overlap  each  other  as  on  a  roof,  except 
that  the  lower  ends  are  rounded  to  make  them  more 
ornamental.  They  are  then  protected  and  beautified 
by  a  coat  of  paint  of  any  desirable  color.  Although 
this  is  patterned  after  our  house,  it  does  not  begin  to 
equal  it.  Stiff  boards  fastened  on  with  nails  are 
good  enough  for  ordinary  houses,  but  would  never  do 
for  a  house  that  can  '  walk,  and  run,  and  jump,  and  sit 
down,  bend  over  on  one  side,  and  then  on  the  other, 
and  play  ball,  and  hop-scotch,  and  do  many  wonder- 
ful things.  2  Such  a  house  ought  to  have  a  covering 
that  will  bend  and  stretch  without  tearing,  like  india- 
rubber ;  that  is  just  what  it  does.  It  is  like  a  knit 
(38) 


WHAT  IS  THE  COMPLEXION? 


39 


garment  that  fits  every  part  of  the  body  at  all  times. 
*  The  spaces  between  the  muscular  walls  are  filled  in 
with  fat,  and  over  this  the  siding  or  skin  is  stretched 
and  fastened,  not  with 
nails  here  and  there, 
'  but  everywhere  rather 
loosely,  so  that  in  mov- 
ing it  will  not  break  its 
fastening,  nor  tear 
apart.  We  should  not 
find  it  much  fun  to  play, 
if  we  were  all  the  time 
pulling  out  the  nails, 
or  tearing  holes  in  our 
siding,would  we  ?5  The 
sheathingofour  House 
Beautiful  is  thecorium, 
ortrue  skin.6  Itiscom- 
posed  of  two  layers, 
one  of  which  is  made  of 
bundles  of  fibres  inter- 
lacing with  each  other 
in  every  direction. 
7  Some  of  these  fibres 
we  find  to  be  muscular, 
and  it  is  their  business 
to  pucker  up  the  skin 
into  what  we  call 
11  goose-flesh  "  when 
cold  air  strikes  the  skin.  This  is  thought  by  some 
•to  be  a  protection  to  the  nerves. 


Anatomy  of  the  Skim. 

i.  The  epiderma.  2.  Its  deep  layer,  the  rete 
mucosum.  3.  Two  of  the  quadrangular 
papillary  clumps  composed  of  minute  coni- 
cal papillae,  such  as  are  seen  in  the  palm  of 
the  hand  or  sole  of  the  foot.  4.  Deep  lay- 
er of  the  derma,  the  corium.  5.  Adipose 
cells.  6.  A  sudoriparous  gland  with  its 
spiral  duct,  as  are  seen  in  the  palm  of  the 
hand  and  sole  of  the  foot.  7.  Another  su- 
doriparous gland  with  a  straighter  duct, 
such  as  is  seen  in  the  scalp.  8.  Two  hairs 
from  the  scalp,  inclosed  in  their  follicles  : 
their  relative  depth  in  the  skin  is  preserved. 
9.  A  pair  of  sebaceous  glands,  opening  by 
short  ducts  into  the  follicle  of  the  hair. 


4Q  THE  HOUSE  BEAUTIFUL. 

8  The  layer  outside  of  this  is  called  papillary,  be- 
cause it  is  made  of  little  elevations,  or  papillae,  which 
contain  the  blood-vessels  of  the  skin.     9  You  can  see 

the  rows  of  these  papillse  on  the 
ends  of  your  fingers.  10  Above 
the  true  skin  is  a  membrane 
called  the  epidermis — epi,  upon, 
derma,  the  skin.     u  This  is  also 

The  Papiix*  of  the  Skin/      made    up    q{    twQ    jayers>  jn    the 

lower  of  which  is  found  the  coloring  matter  which  gives 
the  complexion  its  tint.  In  the  negro  this  pigment,  or 
coloring  matter,  is  nearly  black.  12You  have  often  heard 
it  said  that "  beauty  is  only  skin  deep  ";  but  complexion 
is  not  skin  deep,  for  when  this  inner  layer  of  the  epider- 
mis is  removed  it  is  found  that  the  true  skin  of  the  ne- 
gro does  not  look  different  from  that  of  a  white  person. 
13  The  outer  layer  is  called  the  horny  layer.  14  It  is 
made  of  hard,  flattened  cells  overlapping  each  other, 
and  these  are  the  shingles  on  our  walls.  18  The  use 
of  the  epidermis  is  to  protect  the  true  skin,  and  it  is 
thicker  in  some  places  than  in  others,  and  grows 
thicker  by  use. .  17  This  is  the  cause  of  callous  places 
on  the  hands  of  laborers.  18  Very  often  different 
parts  of  our  house  serve  more  than  one  purpose,  and 
this  is  true  of  the  skin :  it  not  only  protects  us  and 
keeps  us  warm,  but  it  also  helps  to  keep  us  cool. 

30  We  might  call  the  skin  the  manager  or  governor 
of  the  temperature  of  the  body,  which,  by  the  way, 
is  a  most  important  office,  for  if  the  blood  gets  too 
hot,  and  remains  so  for  any  great  length  of  time,  the 
owner  may  abandon  the  house  forever. 


THE  PERSPIRA  TION. 


41 


"  This  cooling  process  is  accomplished  by  the  sweat- 
glands,  which  are  located  under  the  true  skin.  M  They 
are  little  tubes,  which  at  one  end  open  obliquely  on 
the  surface,  and  at  the  other  end  are  coiled  up  in 
round  balls  under  the  skin.  23  If  all  these  coils  and 
tubes  were  straightened  out  and  laid  end  to  end,  the)' 
would  make  a  tube  over  ten  and  a  half  .miles  long. 
They  are  more  numerous  in  some  parts  of  the  body 
than  in  others.  '"  On  the  cheeks  there  are  about  five 
hundred,  while  on  the  forehead  there  are  more  than 
twelve  hundred  to  the  square  inch  ;  and  on  the  palms 
of  the  hand  more  than  three  thousand.  25  Upon  the 
whole  surface  of  the  body  there  are  over  two  millions 
of  these  little  doors,  through  which  vapor  is  con- 
stantly passing,  and  with  it  worn-out  material.  26  We 
don't  see  this  vapor,  and  so  it  is  called  "  insensible 
perspiration."  *7  But,  invisible  as  it  is,  it  has  been 
collected  and  weighed,  and  it  is  found  that  as  much 
as  two  pounds  are  eliminated  in  twenty-four  hours. 
28  During  severe  exercise  the  glands  act  more  rapidly, 
and  drops  of  water  collect  on  the  surface,  and  as 
much  as  four  or  five  pounds  have  been  thrown  off,  by 
a  laborer  when  working  before  a  hot  furnace,  in  an 
hour.  2J  Under  the  influence  of  external  heat  the 
glands  act  in  the  same  manner,  and  protect  the  body 
from  injury  by  covering  it  with  a  coat  of  moisture, 
so  that  men  have  even  been  able  to  stay  without 
harm  in  an  oven  hot  enough  to  roast  a  piece  of  meat, 
and  actually  to  remain  until  it  was  done.  What  a 
wise  and  beneficent  arrangement  for  us  it  is,  that  this 
regulator  of  the  temperature  of  the  body  is  always 


42 


THE  HOUSE  BEAUTIFUL. 


on  duty,  and,  without  instruction  or  any  forethought 
on  our  part,  keeps  the  body  always  at  ninety-eight 
degrees.  31  The  watery  parts  of  the  perspiration  are 
carried  off  in  vapor,  but  the  solid  materials,  about 
five  parts  in  a  hundred,  remain  upon  the  surface  of 
the  skin,  and  tend  to  stop  up  the  mouths  of  the 
glands ;  so  we  can  readily  see  the  importance  of  fre- 
quent bathing.  "  The  great  danger  arising  from 
closing  all  of  these  mouths  at  once,  is  illustrated  by 
the  well-known  fact  of  a  little  child's  death  having 
been  caused,  by  gilding  the  whole  surface  of  its  body 
that  it  might  represent  the  "  Gilded  Age."  34  The 
nails  are  appendages  of  the  skin,  and  have  two  layers 
like  the  epidermis.  95  The  under  layer  remains  always 
the  same,  but  the  outer  or  horny  layer  is  constantly 
growing.  36  The  nails  are  a  protection  to  the  ends  of 
the  fingers  and  toes,  and  are  also  very  useful  in  unty- 
ing strings,  opening  pocket-knives,  and  in  doing  other 
necessary  work. 

87  In  England  houses  are  sometimes  roofed  with 
straw,  which  is  put  on  so  thick  and.  close  that  it  will 
shed  rain.  This  kind  of  a  roof  is  called  a  thatch. 
86  Our  House  Beautiful  has  a  thatched  roof,  but  it  is 
made  of  hair  instead  of  straw.  This  roof  has  various 
colors :  it  may  be  brown,  or  black,  or  gray,  or  even 
white,  in  old  houses  ;  little  new  houses  have  no  thatch 
at  all.  In  very  old  houses  the  thatch  sometimes  gets 
all  worn  off.  This  we  call  being  bald-headed.  9  We 
ought  to  take  good  care  of  our  thatch,  keeping  it 
clean,  and  brushing  it,  to  keep  it  well  oiled.  40  There 
are  little  glands  at  the  root  of  each  hair  whose  busi- 


WHAT  DOES  THE  BIBLE  SA  Y? 


43 


ness  it  is  to  make  oil  for  it,  and  brushing  them  gently 
stimulates  them  to  work.  4l  If  \vc  furnish  the  oil,  they 
will  get  lazy  and  make  none,  and  no  oil  is  so  nice  for 
the  hair  as  that  which  these  glands  make. 

"  There  is  a  little  thatch  over  the  windows  of  our 
house  ;  in  fact,  when  we  come  to  study  into  the  mat- 
ter we  find  that  the  whole  house  is  covered  with  hairs. 
Upon  the  body  they  are  soft  and  downy,  and  almost 
colorless.  They  form  a  pretty  fringe  to  the  window- 
awnings,  and  they  grow  upon  the  faces  of  men,  and 
protect  the  throat,  and  make  a  strainer  under  the  nose 
which  we  call  a  mustache.  43  The  hair  is  an  appendage 
of  the  skin,  and  like  it  has  a  44  fibrous  substance  and 
epidermis.  45  The  downy  hairs  grow  from  the  true 
skin,  but  the  roots  of  the  larger  hairs  penetrate  much 
deeper.  40  Each  hair  rests  in  a  tiny  pocket,  at  the 
bottom  of  which  is  a  papilla  which  might  be  called 
the  mother  of  the  hair,  for  from  this  papilla  the  hair 
is  produced.  47  Each  hair  is  a  tube,  and  the  coloring 
matter  is  in  the  centre.  48  The  root  of  the  hair  is  a 
bulb,  and  a  little  oil  bottle  empties  into  each  hair- 
pocket  or  follicle.  49  These  oil  bottles  are  termed  se- 
baceous glands,  and  they  are  found  all  over  the  body 
as  well  as  on  the  head.  50  They  help  to  keep  the  skin 
soft  and  flexible. 

61  The  Bible  says  that  the  hairs  of  our  head  are  all 
numbered,  and  one  man  has  tried  to  find  out  how  many 
there  are.  He  did  not  count  every  hair,  but  he 
counted  how  many  grew  on  a  square  inch,  and  from 
that  he  made  an  estimate  that  there  are  one  hundred 
and  twenty  thousand  hairs  upon  the  head. 


44 


THE  HOUSE  BEAUTIFUL. 


St.  Paul  says  that  long  hair  is  a  glory  to  a  woman, 
and  all  women  are  justly  proud  of  a  wealth  of  long, 
soft  hair.  It  is  not  often  that  hair  grows  longer  than 
three  feet,  but  I  once  saw  a  woman  whose  hair 
leached  the  ground.  Men  are  equally  proud  of  a 
long  beard.  The  ancient  patriarchs  are  represented 
with  snowy  beards  reaching  down  over  their  breasts. 
I  once  saw  a  beard  three  feet  long.  The  beard  was 
held  in  great  honor  by  the  old  Romans.  Once  when 
a  horde  of  northern  barbarians  invaded  Rome  the  old 
men  of  the  senate  sat  motionless  until  one  of  the 
Vandals  plucked  a  senator  by  the  beard.  The  indig- 
nant Roman  avenged  the  insult  by  striking  the  in, 
suiter  dead,  and  universal  carnage  began.  The  beard 
was  given  man  as  a  protection  as  well  as  an  ornament, 
and  should  never  be  shaven.  A  great  deal  of  poetry 
has  been  written  about  hair,  from  the  golden  baby 
curls  to  the  "  frosty  pow  "  of  age.  Gray  hairs  come 
with  years  and  cares,  but  we  should  '  never  feel 
ashamed  of  them,  for  "  the  hoary  head  is  a  crown  of 
glory." 


CHAPTER  VI. 

THE   OBSERVATORY. 

We  have  watched  our  House  Beautiful  as  it  ad- 
vanced through  the  various  stages  of  erection,  from 
the  foundations  up  through  the  framework  and  walls 
to  the  outside  covering,  and  now  we  begin  to  ask 
how  it  is  to  be  completed.  '  And  we  find  that  this 
wonderful  structure  is  surmounted  by  an  observatory 
more  marvellous  than  any  other  part  of  the  building. 
1  For  it  is  here  that  the  Master  resides.  It  is  quite 
fashionable  to  have  a  portion  even  of  private  resi- 
dences extend  above  the  rest,  and  to  this  is  given 
the  name  of  an  observatory.  Generally,  there  are 
windows  on  all  sides,  and  often  the  roof  is  a  dome  of 
glass,  so  that  the  observer  may  look,  not  only  on 
every  side,  but  also  at  the  heavens  above. 

The  observatory  which  crowns  the  House  Beauti- 
ful is  a  marvellous  structure  ;  its  walls  are  more  com- 
plicated than  those  of  any  other  part  of  the  house. 
1  They  are  made  of  twenty-two  bones  firmly  locked 
together  so  as  to  make  them  very  solid. 

I  said  all  locked  together.  *  But  there  is  one  bene 
that  is  movable,  and  only  one.  That  is  the  one 
which  forms  the  lower  framework  of  the  pink  fold- 
ing-doors, we  call  it  the  lower-jaw.  Did  you  ever 
think  that  when  you  chew  your  food,  you  do  not 
4  (45) 


fi  THE  HOUSE  BEAUTIFUL. 

move  your  upper-jaw  at  all?  5  The  lower-jaw  is 
joined  to  the  rest  of  the  skull  by  a  rrfovable  joint  a 
little  in  front  of  the  ears.  You  can  feel  it  if  you  put 
your  finger  there  and  open  and  shut  your  mouth. 
6  The  bones  of  the  skull  are  divided  into  those  of  the 
face  and  those  of  the  cranium.  7  The  cranium  is 
formed  of  eight  thin,  beautifully  curved  bones.     8  The 


The  Skull 

t.  Frontal  bone.     2.  Parietal.     3.  Occipital.     4.  Temporal.     5.  Nasal.     6.  Malai 
7.  Upper  Maxillary.     8.  Ethmoid.     9.  Lower  Maxillary. 

one  at  the  back  is  called  the  occipital.  If  you  should 
ever  hear  that  some  one  had  injured  his  occiput,  you 
would  know  that  that  meant  the  back  of  the  head. 
"The  sides  of  the  head  are  formed  by  two  parietal 
and  two  temporal  bones.  10  The  upper  and  front  part 
is  formed  by  the  frontal  bone  which  makes  the  arches 
over  the  two  windows. 


THE  ATLAS.  47 

"  On  the  outside,  the  skull  is  covered  with  a  tough 
membrane  called  the  scalp,  to  which  is  attached  the 
beautiful  thatch  which  we  know  as  the  hair.  12r  As 
we  examine  this  observatory,  we  are  struck  with  the 
fact  that  there  are  no  skylights,  and  only  two  win- 
dows, and  they  are  both  close  together  and  on  the 
same  side. 

How,  with  this  arrangement,  is  the  observer  to  ob- 
tain an  extended  view  ?  I3  The  Architect  knew  well 
what  He  was  doing  when  He  mounted  the  observa- 
tory on  the  short,  slender,  circular  tower  known  as 
the  neck.  You  remember  how,  in  the  fable,  the  giant 
Atlas  held  up  the  sky  on  his  head  and  shoulders. 
14  Our  observatory  has  an  atlas  to  hold  it  up,  but  it  is 
not  a  giant,  only  a  ring  of  bone. 

15  It  is  the  very  upper  vertebra.  16  It  differs  from 
other  vertebra  in  not  having  so  much  bony  material, 
but  having  instead,  a  larger  hole  in  the  centre. 
"This  hole  is  divided  by  a  band.  16  Behind  this  band 
the  spinal  cord  passes  down  into  the  other  vertebrae 
below,  and  in  19  front  of  it  a  bony  point  of  the  second 
vertebra  passes  up  and  20  makes  a  pivot  on  which  tb? 
observatory  can  turn  round.  21  This  second  verte- 
bra is  called  the  axis. 

32  The  atlas  has  two  cup-like  depressions  on  its  upper 
surface  upon  which  fit  two  points  of  the  occipital 
bone  when  the  head  is  tipped  backward.  33  The  neck- 
is  formed  of  various  muscles,  whom  we  will  call  ser- 
vants, whose  "  business  it  is  to  move  the  head  in 
many  directions;  S5  so  that  our  observatory  can  be 
ruined  half  round    from  one  side  to  the  other,  it  can 


48 


THE  HOUSE  BEAUTIFUL. 


be  tipped  forward  so  that  the  windows  look  toward 
the  ground,  or  it  can  be  tipped  backward  so  26  that 
the  windows  are  directed  heavenward,  and  thus  no 
skylights  are  needed. 

"  The   cavity  of  the   skull  is  so  irregular  in  shape 
that   it   is   difficult   to   tell   how  large  it  is,  but  it  is 

quite  large  enough 
to  hold  a  quart  or 
three  pints  of  fluid. 
And  what  does  this 
cavity  contain? 
Something  which  has 
excited  the  wonder 
and  admiration  of 
the  wisest  men  of 
the  world.  During 
centuries  men  have 
studied  it,  and  yet 
not  much  has  been 
learned  about  it. 
28  We  know  it  under 
the  term  brain.  It 
is  very  difficult  to 
give  in  writing  a 
clear  idea  of  the  brain,  even  of  its  appearance  and 
shape.  If  you  could  see  a  brain  you  would  be  better 
able  to  understand  it,  but  as  you  can  not  we  must  be 
content  to  learn  all  we  can  by  a  description.  2a  First, 
we  find  that  the  bony  cavity  of  the  skull  is  lined 
with  a  dense  fibrous  membrane  called  the  dura 
mater. 


The  Brain. 

b,  a.  The  scalp  turned  down,  b,  b.  Cut  edges 
of  the  skull  bones.  3.  The  dura  mater  sus- 
pended by  a  hook.     4.  The  left  hemisphere. 


THE  BRAIN.  4g 

80  You  have  studied  Latin,  and  will  be  able  to 
translate  that,  hard  or  durable  mother. 

31  Inside  of  this  is  a  delicate  fibrous  membrane  almost 
like  a  spider's  web  for  thinness,  and  on  that  account 
is  called  the  arachnoid.  This  will  recall  to  your  mind 
the  fable  of  the  Princess  Arachne,  who  was  famed  for 
spinning,  and  because  she  rivalled  Minerva  was 
changed  by  that  goddess  into  a  spider. 

M  Inside  of  the  arachnoid  is  a  delicate  fibrous  mem- 
brane full  of  blood-vessels  which  is  called  the  pia 
mater \  or  soft  mother. 

And  now  we  come  to  the  brain  itself.  How  shall  I 
describe  it  to  you  ?  33  A  great  French  writer  says  it  is 
like  a  beautiful  white  camellia,  and  calls  it  the  flower  of 
flowers.  That  is  very  pretty,  and  yet  it  does  not  give  us 
a  very  definite  idea,  as  to  its  appearance.  The  brain  of 
a  chicken,  calf,  or  other  animal  would  give  you  some 
idea  of  how  the  brain  of  a  man  looks.  34  You  would 
see  that  it  is  a  rounded  mass,  not  unlike  dough  in 
color,  not  smooth  on  the  outside,  but  with  a  great 
many  little  creases  all  over  the  surface.  It  is  crum- 
pled, or  folded  up,  to  fit  into  the  irregular  space,  and 
if  stretched  out  smooth,  it  would  spread  over  a  far 
greater  surface. 

A  baby's  brain  is  more  nearly  smooth  on  its  outer 
surface  than  that  of  a  man.  As  the  baby  learns  and 
increases  in  intelligence,  its  brain  becomes  more 
wrinkled.  SB  The  number  and  depth  of  these  creases 
or  wrinkles  are  in  proportion,  it  is  said,  to  the  in- 
telligence of  the  person. 

37  The  brain  is  composed  of  white  98  matter  on  the 
3 


50 


THE  HOUSE  BEAUTIFUL. 


inside,  and  gray  matter  on  the  outside.  M  The  gray 
matter  is  made  up  of  cells,  *°  and  in  them  is  generated 
a  force  which  we  call  nerve  force.  These  cells  are  of 
two  sizes,  and  it  is  thought  that  the  larger  ones  direct 
muscular  movement,  and  the  smaller  ones  control 
the  powers  of  thought,  but  this  can  not  be  proven. 
41  The  white  matter  is  made  of  fibres,  and  conducts, 
the  nerve  force  from  the  cells.  "  The  brain  substance 
is  soft,  almost  like  jelly,  only  it  has  these  white  fibres 
running  through  it.  So  if  we  had  a  fine  gray  jelly, 
with  white  threads  through  it,  it  would  be  very  much 
like  the  brain  in  consistency. 

43  At  birth  the  brain  of  a  boy  weighs  about  eleven 
ounces,  that  of  a  girl  ten  ounces.  A  man's  brain 
weighs  about  forty-nine  ounces,  that  of  a  woman 
forty-four.  Some  people  think  that  the  size  of  the 
brain  has  much  to  do  with  the  intellect  of  the  person, 
and  they  tell  of  the  brain  of  Daniel  Webster,  and  of 
that  of  Abercrombie,  each  of  which  weighed  nearly 
sixty-four  ounces,  or  nearly  four  pounds. 

But  Gambetta  was  certainly  a  great  man,  and  his 
brain,  as  has  been  reported  in  the  papers,  weighed 
less  than  that  of  an  average  woman.  When  we 
study  the  different  parts  of  the  brain,  we  find  that 
the  very  important  parts  called  the  medulla  oblon- 
gata and  pons  varolii  are  larger  in  women  than  in 
men,  weighing  in  men  ninety-eight  hundredths  of 
an  ounce,  in  women  over  an  ounce. 

I  guess  after  all  that  it  is  quality,  not  quantity,  that 
determines  the  working  power  and  value  of  brain,  and 


GREAT  ^RA/N  OR  CtR&BkUM. 


51 


it  makes  little  difference  whether  that  brain  be- 
longs to  a  man  or  a  woman. 

"The  brain  is  divided  into  the  great  brain,45  which 
occupies  the  upper  and  front  part  of  the  cavity  of  the 
skull, and  is  eight-tenths  of  the  wholemass,  *6and  the 
small  brain,  which  is  located  at  the  lower  part  or  base 
of  the  skull.  "  The  two  are  connected  by  a  bridge 
called  the.  pons  varolii,  because  a  man  named  Varolius 
first  described  it.  What  girl  ever  dreamed  that  she 
had  a  bridge  in  her  head.  Is  it  any  wonder  that  she 
should  sometimes  have  the  headache?  The  lower 
brain  is  connected  with  the  spinal  cord  by  a  portion 
called  the  medulla  oblongata. 

The  cells  of  the  brain  are  little  points  of  matter, 
like  jelly,  each  with  a  dot  in  the  centre.  There  are 
nearly  a  billion  of  them.  Does  not  that  make  you 
exclaim,  "  Upon  my  word !  "  Some  of  these  cells 
have  one,  two,  or  three  tails,  while  others  are  tailless. 
i8  They  are  held  together  by  these  tails.  "  Where  a 
number  of  them  collect  in  a  cluster  they  are  called  a 
ganglion,  plural  ganglia.  60  The  white  fibres  connect 
not  only  the  cells,  but  the  ganglia,  and  thus  form  a 
kind  of  battery.  And  what  is  a  battery?  If  we  dis- 
solve bi-sulphate  of  mercury  in  water,  and  then  put 
into  it  a  piece  of  zinc  and  another  of  carbon,  the  fluid 
will  eat  up  the  zinc.  This  we  call  a  chemical  action, 
and  by  it  is  produced  an  invisible  fluid,  which  we  can 
feel  if  we  attach  a  piece  of  metal  to  both  carbon  and 
zinc.  This  fluid  we  call  electricity,  and  we  can  con- 
duct it  along  a  wire  any  distance  and  make  it  carry 
messages  for  us  to  every  part  of  the  world.     61  The 


52  THE  HOUSE  BEAUTIFUL. 

cells  of  the  brain  and  spinal  cord  act  as  such  a  bat- 
tery producing  a  nervous  fluid,  which  is  conducted 
along  the  white  fibres,  and  52by  this  means  the 
owner  of  the  house  is  enabled  to  communicate  with 
all  parts  of  his  dwelling,  as  well  as  with  the  out- 
side world. 


Note. —  Some  substances  seem  to  be  peculiarly  injuri- 
ous to  the  cells  of  the  brain,  and  among  the  most  harmful, 
tobacco  stands  first. 

Dr.  Seaver  of  Yale  College  is  waging  war  upon  the  habit 
of  tobacco  smoking.  He  is  the  physician  of  the  college 
and  the  professor  of  athletics,  a  man  of  science  who  fol- 
lows scientific  methods  in  any  investigation  he  undertakes. 
He  has  been  engaged  for  eight  years  in  observing  the  ef- 
fects of  tobacco  smoking  upon  the  bodies  and  minds  of  Yale 
students,  and  he  has  just  published  a  remarkable  budget  of 
statistics.  Dr.  Seaver  informs  the  public  that  the  students 
of  Yale  who  indulge  in  tobacco  smoking  are  inferior  in 
physical  vigor  and  mental  ability  to  those  who  do  not. 
According  to  his  reckoning,  the  smokers  have  less  lung 
power  than  the  anti-smokers;  they  have  less  chest-inflating 
capacity;  they  are  of  less  bodily  weight,  and  they  are  even 
of  less  height.  The  muscular  and  nervous  power  of  the 
smoking  students  is  noticeably  less  than  that  of  the  anti- 
smoking.  From  an  athletic  point  of  view,  therefore,  the 
Yale  professor  of  athletics  considers  himself  justified  in 
waging  war  upon  the  tobacco  habit.  Not  only  in  a  phys- 
ical way,  but  also  in  an  intellectual  way,  the  Yale  smokers 
are  inferior  to  the  anti-smokers.  The  smoking  habit  is 
disadvantageous  to  scholarship.  Of  those  students  who, 
within  a  given  time,  have  received  junior  appointments, 
only  5  per  cent  were  smokers,  and  very  few  smokers  re- 
ceived appointments  of  any  kind.  It  would  seem,  there- 
fore, that  the  brain  power  and  the  scholarship  of  the 
smokers  at  Yale  are  far  inferior  to  those  of  the  anti- 
smokers.  The  demonstrations  of  Dr.  Seaver  appear  to  be 
influencing  Yale  students.  He  is  able  to  report  that  70 
per  cent  of  the  senior  class  in  the  college  do  not  smoke, 
and  the  leading  athletes  do  not  smoke,  and  that  not  a  sin- 
gle candidate  for  the  rowing  crew  is  a  smoker. 


CHAPTER   VII. 

THE   HALL. 

A  GREAT  number  of  visitors  who  come  to  our 
House  Beautiful  are  intending  to  go  to  the  kitchen. 
1  They  enter  by  the  front  door,  perhaps  I  should  say 
doors,  for  there  are  two  of  them.  2  They  are,  or  ought 
to  be,  of  a  bright  red  color,  and  they  can  do  many 
remarkable  things.  9  They  can  whistle.  "Whistle?' 
Yes.  "  Doors  squeak  sometimes,  but  I  never  knew 
a  door  to  whistle."  These  doors  do  not  squeak.  The 
hinges  never  get  rusty.  They  oil  themselv.es.  But 
they  can  do  disagreeable  things :  they  can  whisper, 
and  they  can  pout ;  but  then  they  can  kiss. 

4  The  bright  red  covering  of  the  lips  is  called  mu- 
cous membrane,  and  like  the  skin  it  is  made  up  of 
two  layers.  6  It  is  more  delicate  than  the  skin,  and 
lines  all  cavities  which  communicate  with  the  outer 
air.  As  the  folding-doors  open  we  see  a  double  row 
of  attendants  waiting  to  receive  all  visitors.  When 
we  enter  the  office  of  a  hotel,  we  find  the  clerk  ready 
to  answer  our  questions  and  to  assign  us  a  room. 
A  servant  hastens  forward  to  take  our  satchel  and 
wraps,  and  another  to  show  us  to  a  room,  and  when 
being  so  waited  upon  we  feel  that  we  are  of  some  im 
portance. 

(53) 


54 


THE  HOUSE  BEAUTIFUL. 


6  Visitors  to  the  House  Beautiful  are  received  by 
thirty-two  attendants,  all  in  white  uniforms,  who 
proceed  at  once  to  remove  the  wraps  of  the  visitors, 
and  to  prepare  them  to  appear  before  the  cook  in  the 
kitchen,  who  is  quite  particular  about  his  guests. 
These  thirty-two  attendants  you  will  have  no  diffi. 
culty  in  recognizing  as  the  teeth.  7  The  four  in  the 
centre  are  called  the  incisors.    8  On  each  side  of  these 


d  e  /  g  h 

Permanent  Teeth. 
a.  Central  incisor,     h.  Lateral  incisor,     c.  Cuspid,  or  canine,     d.  First  bi-cuspid. 
t.  Second  bi-cuspid.    f.  First  molar,    g.  Second  Molar,    k.  Third  Molar. 

are  sharp,  strong  fellows,  who  are  called  eye-teeth, 
or  canines,  because  they  look  like  the  great  tearing 
teeth  of  the  dog.  *  Next  stand  two,  which  are  called 
bi-cuspids  (two-pointed),  because  their  roots  have  two 
points ;  10  and  next  to  these  are  three  strong,  broad 
fellows,  called  molars  or  grinders.  "  When  food  is 
put  into  the  mouth  the  incisors  cut  it,  the  canines 
tear  it,  and  the  molars  grind  it ;  and  that  is  not  all 


ftiE  SALIVARY  GLANDS. 


55 


for  back  of  this  double  row  of  soldierly  guards  is  one 
in  a  pink  uniform,  who  rolls  the  food  over  and  around 
and  says  "  That  tastes  good."  We  might  be  afraid  of 
hira  did  we  not  see  that  he  is  fastened  to  the  floor. 
He  has  an  important  work  to  do,  but  our  business 
just  now  is  with  the  strong  white  teeth. 


The  Salivary  Glands. 
i.  The  parotid  gland,  extending  fiom  the  zygomatic  arch  of  the  cheek-bone  to  the 
angle  of  the  jaw  below.     2.  Duct  of  the  parotid  gland.     3.  The  sub-maxillary 
gland.     4.  Its  duct.     5.  Sub-lingual  gland. 

12  In  little  new  houses  we  find  none  of  these  attend- 
ants, for  their  visitors  have  no  wraps  to  be  removed, 
and  do  not  need  to  be  ground  and  forced  to  be  fine 
enough  to  be  presented  to  the  cook.  ,s  But  a  number 
of  other  active  assistants  are  connected  with  the  hall. 
They  are  very  valuable  helpers  of  the  cook.  Their 
family  name  is  saliva,  and  their  home  is  in  the  sali- 


56  THE  HOUSE  BEAUTIFUL. 

vary  glands.  These  glands  are  called  sub-lingual t 
meaning  under  the  tongue ;  sub-maxillaryy  under  the 
jaw :  and  the  parotid,  near  the  ear. 

Down  in  the  dining-room 
appear  other  assistants,  who 
are  ready  to  perform  their 
work,  and  need  the  help  of 
the  saliva; 14  and  then  some 
little  fellows,  who  have  been 
lying  asleep  in  little  cradles 
in  the  gums,  wake  up  and 

Parotid  Gland.  begjn  tQ  push  thdr  way  Qut 

into  the  world.  15  Twenty  of  them  come  one  after  an- 
other, ten  above  and  ten  below, 1G  and  then  baby  is  ready 
to  begin  to  receive  the  same  kind  of  company  as  grown 
people.  Then,  and  not  till  then,  can  he  eat  firm,  dry 
foods  ;  ,7  for  without  a  mixture  of  saliva,  18  starch  can 
not  be  digested,  for  starch  must  be  changed  into  sugar 
before  it  can  be  used  in  building  up  the  house,  19  and 
this  is  done  by  the  saliva.  It  also  makes  dry  food  slip- 
pery, so  that  it  can  be  easily  swallowed.  About  three 
pints  of  saliva  are  secreted  in  twenty-four  hours.  20  Un- 
der these  twenty  teeth  there  are  thirty-two  other 
teeth,  also  asleep  in  their  pretty  pink  cradles ;  and 
after  seven  years  or  so  they  begin  to  want  to  see  the 
world,  and  one  after  another  they  push  at  the  first 
teeth  above,  until  they  get  loose  and  fall  out. 

I  think  we  ought  to  be  very  thankful  to  these  sec- 
ond teeth  that  they  do  not  all  grow  at  once,  and  so, 
perhaps,  leave  us  for  a  while  with  neither  the  old 
teeth  nor  the  new  ones.    They  take  it  quite  leisurely. 


THE   TEETH. 


57 


11  The  first  to  appear  is  the  first  molar,  at  about  six 
years  of  age.  22  The  middle  incisors  come  at  about 
seven  years  of  age.  "  The  other  incisors  at  eight. 
Then,  at  about  nine  years,  come  the  first  "4  bi-cuspids; 
and  the  second  bi-cuspids  at  ten.  The  canines  make 
thei;  appearance  at  eleven  or  twelve,  the  second  mo- 
lars at  twelve  or  thirteen,  while  the  last,  or  wisdom 


Infant  Teeth  and  Rudiments  of  the  Permanent. 

teeth,  do  not  come  until  from  the  seventeenth  to  the 
twenty-second  year  or  later. 

"  There  are  no  more  teeth  asleep  beneath  this  sec- 
ond set,  and  when  they  leave  us  wre  shall  have  no 
teeth,  unless  we  get  the  dentist  to  make  us  some, 
and,  skilful  as  he  may  be,  he  can  not  do  quite  as  well 
as  the  Great  Architect  did.  6  The  teeth  are  not  bone, 
but  a  fine  quality  of  ivory.     They  are  appendages  of 


58  THE  HOUSE  BEAUTIFUL. 

the  mucous  membrane,  just  as  the  hair  and  nails  are 
appendages  of  the  skin.  "  Each  tooth  sets  in  a  pocket 
in  the  gum,  which  is  lined  with  mucous  membrane. 

The  white  coat  of  the  teeth  is  a  hard  substance, 
called  enamel.  29  Inside  of  this  is  the  substance  of 
the  tooth,  which  is  a  hard  material,  called  dentine  or 
tooth-ivory.  so  This  is  hollow,  and  within  its  cavity 
are  blood-vessels  and  nerves. 

81  The  part  of  the  tooth  which  we  see  is  called  the 
crown,  that  which  is  enclosed  in  the  gum  is  the  fang, 
and  between  these  is  the  narrow  part  called  the  neck. 

88  We  sometimes  see  these  worthy  assistants  with 
uniforms  discolored  and  stained,  with  holes  in  them, 
and  looking  altogether  quite  disagreeably  neglected. 
As  we  can  not  have  them  renewed  when  they  wear  out 
we  ought  to  take  the  best  of  care  of  them.  If  food  is 
allowed  to  hide  between  the  teeth  it  decays  and  causes 
the  teeth  to  decay,  and  it  should  therefore  never  be 
permitted  to  remain,  and  at  the  same  time  it  should 
never  be  harshly  removed.  Pins  or  metal  toothpicks 
wear  out  the  enamel,  and  so  do  great  injury.  Quill 
or  wooden  toothpicks  are  the  only  ones  that  should 
be  employed.  These  pretty,  useful  servants  should 
not  be  used  for  such  work  as  cracking  nuts,  for  they 
may  be  broken  or  the  enamel  cracked,  in  so  doing. 
They  like  to  have  a  bath  every  day,  and  to  be  scrub- 
bed with  a  soft  brush  and  soap, — nice  white  soap,  of 
a  powder  made  of  soda  and  myrrh, — and  if  so  care 
fully  attended  will  take  great  pride  in  peeping  out, 
with  their  shining  white  faces,  from  behind  the  rosy 
folding-doors. 


CHAPTER  VIIL 

THE   KITCHEN. 

As  we  pass  the  white  attendants  who  welcomed  us 
we  enter  the  hall  and  looking  around  we  see  pink 
walls  on  either  side,  and  over  these  a  beautiful  arched 
roof  called  the  roof  of  the  mouth  or  the  hard  palate. 
At  the  back  of  the  hall  hangs  a  pink  curtain,  and 
beneath  it  is  an  arched  doorway,  and  from  the  mid- 
dle of  the  arch  we  see  hanging  down  a  "  little  red 
tongue."  '  This  "  little  tongue  "  is  called  the  uvula  and 
has  an  important  office.  Passing  under  the  arched 
doorway  we  enter  a  room,  which  has  no  floor,  and 
which  is  called  the  pharynx.  In  the  roof  of  the 
pharynx  is  an  opening  leading  into  the  nose.  This 
opening  is  just  back  of  the  uvula.  When  food  is 
being  swallowed,  the  two  halves  of  the  pink  curtain 
in  the  back  of  the  hall  are  drawn  together,  and  at 
the  same  time  the  uvula  is  stretched  back  and  closes 
the  opening  into  the  nose,  so  that  the  food  can  not 
find  an  entrance  there.  There  are  two  pairs  of  stairs 
leading  out  of  the  pharynx.  One  pair  of  these  stairs 
is  called  the  oesophagus  and  leads  into  the  kitchen. 
*  These  are  very  queer  stairs,  indeed.  You  did  not 
see  any  place  to  go  down,  for  the  walls  of  the  oesoph- 
agus lie  close  together;    but    3  as   the    food    passed 

(59) 


5o 


THE  HOUSE  BEAUTIFUL. 


into    the    pharynx,    an    opening 


i.  Upper  Jaw.  2.  Lower  Jaw.  3.  Tongue.  4 
Hard  Palate.  5.  CEsophagus.  6.  Trachea.  7. 
Parotid  gland.  8.  Sub-maxillary  gland.  9.  Stom- 
ach. 10.  Liver.  11.  Gall-bladder.  12.  Hepatic 
duct.  13.  Duodenum.  14.  Pylorus.  15.  Small 
intestines.  16.  Ileo-coccal  valve.  17.  Ascending 
colon.  18.  Transverse  colon.  19.  Descending 
colon.     20.  Rectum. 


appeared  in  xhe 
back  part  of  the 
throat,  and  the 
food  began  to  de- 
scend. Do  you 
notice,  as  we  go 
down,  that  the 
walls  expand  and 
then  close  behind 
us  to  push  us  in  ? 
Such  a  getting 
down- stairs  as  that 
you  never  did  see ! 
*  When  we  reach 
the  bottom  we 
find  a  little  round 
door  held  to- 
gether by  a  "  puck- 
ering string";  and 
when  it  opens  we 
find  ourselves 
looking  down  into 
the  kitchen  from 
the  ceiling.  Plow 
are  we  to  get  into 
the  room  ?  We 
must  just  drop 
dow  n.  "  Well, 
that  is  funny." 

Oh !  you  don't 
know  how  many 
strange  things  we 


THE  KITCHEN. 


6l 


shall  see  in  this  house.  It  is  more  wonderful  than 
any  fairy  castle  you  ever  heard  of.  And  the  best 
about  it  is,  that  all  I  tell  you  is  true.  Now  we  are  in 
the  kitchen,  and  the  door  in  the  ceiling  above  us  has 
closed.  We  look  about  us.  This  room  is  unlike  any 
you  were  ever  in.  5  It  is  not  quite  oval,  but,  as  scien- 
tific men  say,  it  is  "  irregularly  conical."  The  floor 
is  not  flat,  and  there   is  not  a  corner  in  it.     It  is  a 


Folljci.es  of  the  Stomach. 


good  deal  like  the  inside  of  an  egg  in  shape,  but  not 
in  color;  for  it  is  a  pretty  pink,  or  it  should  be. 
Sometimes  when  you  do  not  use  it  well  it  gets  a  fiery 
red.  It  was  quite  small  when  we  came  in,  but  did 
you  notice  that  it  began  at  once  to  grow  larger? 
You  have  read  of  enchanted  castles,  where  rooms 
grow  smaller;  and  this  one  grows  to  accommodate 
the  master  of  the  house ;  for  it  certainly  is  an  accom- 


62  THE  HOUSE  BEAUTIFUL. 

modation  to  have  the  kitchen  get  bigger  when  you 
send"  a  quantity  of  food  into  it ;  and  then,  after  the 
food  is  all  cooked  and  sent  to  the  dining-room,  it 
grows  smaller  and  folds  itself  up  as  it  was  when  we 
came  in.  How  does  it  do  it  ?  7  Do  you  see  that 
the  walls  are  not  smooth,  but  have  folds  in  them  ? 
1  That  is  so,  it  can  stretch  ;  and  when  the  kitchen  is 
full  the  walls  are  smooth.  Put  on  your  big  spectacles 
and  look  around. 

9  "  Oh !  the  walls  are  full  of  little  pits  or  hollows. 
And  they  are  all  over  the  floor,  too !  Some  have  six 
sides,  and  some  have  more."  Yes ;  it  looks  a  little 
like  a  honeycomb.  Those  hollows  are  the  kitchen 
cupboards.  "  And  where  is  the  cook?"  When  the 
kitchen  is  empty  he  is  never  there ;  but  as  soon  as 
we  send  down  a  particle  of  food  to  be  prepared,  he 
comes  and  opens  the  cupboards  and  takes  out  what 
he  needs,  and  goes  to  work.  "  What  is  his  name  ?  " 
Gastric  Juice.  "  But  what  is  the  matter?  "  The  kitch- 
en is  beginning  to  move.  14  There  are  three  walls  to 
this  room  ;  one  outside  of  the  other.  The  pink  in- 
side wall  is  called  a  mucous  membrane,  the  outside 
wall  is  a  serous  membrane,  and  between  these  is  a 
muscular  coat,  which  is  made  up  of  three  layers 
16  which  have  the  power  of  contracting  and  expand- 
ing. 16  The  outside  layer  contracts  the  long  way  of 
the  kitchen,  the  middle  layer  the  short  way,  and  the 
inside  layer  contracts  diagonally.  17  And  this  drawing 
together  and  stretching  out  of  the  walls  gives  the 
contents  of  the  kitchen  a  churning  motion,  back- 
ward, forward,  and  "  all  through  other,"  as  I  have 
heard  people  say. 


COLD   WATER  TUTS  THE  EIRE  OUT. 


63 


You  all  know  by  this  time  that  the  kitchen  is  the 
stomach,  and  the  cook  is  the  fluid  which  digests  the 
food.  1B  This  fluid  is  thoroughly  mixed  with  the  food 
by  the  churning  motion,  which  continues  as  long  as 
there  is  anything  in  the  stomach.  19  The  cook  has  a 
great  deal  of  work  to  do,  breaking  up  the  meat  and 
vegetables  and  dissolving  some  parts  of  them.  After 
two  or  three  hours  he  has  mixed  them  up  so  thor- 
oughly that  you  could  not  tell  meat  from  potatoes. 


Front  view  of  the  stom- 
ach, showing  the 
greater  extremity  and 
the  pyloric  extremity. 
A  portion  of  the  peri 
toneal  coat  is  turned 
back  to  show  the  mus 
cular  fibres.  1.  An- 
terior face  of  the 
oesophagus.  6  A  por- 
tion of  the  longitudi- 
nal fibres.  7.  The 
circular  fibres.  8. 
Oblique  muscular  fi- 
bres. 9.  Portion  ot 
the  duodenum. 


20  At  the  end  of  the  room  opposite  the  door  where 
we  entered  there  is  another  door,  also  held  shut  by 
a  string  (which  is  called  a  sphincter  muscle),  and  this 
leads  into  a  second  kitchen,  where  there  are  other 
assistants  of  the  cook,  about  whom  we  will  learn  in 
our  next  chapter. 

21  We  have  been  talking  about  solid  foods,  and  now 
I  will  tell  you  something  odd  about  what  is  done 
with  fluids  which  we  send  into  the  kitchen.  ?2  The 
walls  drink  them  up.    "How  queer!"    "  Yes  ;  and  the 


64  THE  HOUSE  BEAUTIFUL. 

cook  does  not  like  to  have  much  fluid  sent  while  he 
is  at  work,  as  he  must  wait  till  the  walls  have  ab- 
sorbed it  before  he  can  go  on  with  his  cooking. 
'*  Then,  too,  if  the  fluids  are  cold,  like  ice-water,  they 
out  his  fire  out,  and  he  has  to  wait  until  it  is  built 
up  again.  2S  He  can  not  work  unless  his  kitchen  is 
at  a  temperature  of  about  ninety-eight  degrees  Fah- 
renheit, and  that  we  should  call  summer  weather. 
The  kitchen  is  kept  at  that  temperature  all  the  year 
round,  no  matter  how  cold  it  is  out-of-doors,  or  how 
hot.  What  are  the  practical  things  we  can  learn  from 
this  visit  to  the  kitchen  of  the  House  Beautiful? 
26  First,  that  we  ought  to  chew  our  food  thoroughly, 
so  that  it  will  become  mixed  with  saliva,  and  as  much 
starch  as  possible  be  changed  into  sugar  before  it 
goes  into  the  stomach  ;  for  Gastric  Juice  does  not 
digest  starch.  That  the  big  guard  in  the  red  uniform 
deceives  us  sometimes.  He  gets  used  to  very  un- 
pleasant things,  such  as  tobacco  and  alcohol,  and  says 
they  are  good  ;  or  he  is  very  fond  of  sweets,  and 
coaxes  us  to  eat  too  much  of  them,  and  Gastric  Juice 
rebels,  and  says  he  has  too  much  to  do.  So  we 
should  not  always  listen  to  what  he  says.  "  Then 
we  should  not  send  too  much  food  into  the  kitchen, 
even  if  it  is  wholesome,  or  the  cook  will  get  too  tired 
to  do  his  work  well.  2B  We  should  not  send  down 
food  at  all  times  of  the  day  or  night,  but  should  be 
kind  to  the  poor  cook,  who  does  his  best  foi  us  all 
the  time,  and  who  needs  rest  as  well  as  we.  3l)  When 
he  is  busy  at  work  we  should  not  put  his  fire  out  with 
cold  water. 


CHAPTER    IX. 

THE   BUTLER'S   PANTRY. 

Between  the  kitchen  and  dining-room  in  our 
House  Beautiful  is  a  very  small  room,  which  I  have 
called  the  butler's  pantry.  The  door  between  this 
room  and  the  kitchen  is,  by  scientific  people,  known 
as  a  sphincter  muscle  ;  but  you  will  understand  it 
better  if  I  say  it  is  like  an  elastic  puckering  string  in 
the  top  of  a  bag.  If  you  pull  it  open  it  draws  itself 
shut.  '  This  door  is  called  the  pylorus,  a  word  made 
of  two  Greek  words,  '  meaning  a  guard,  and  a  gate, 
and  that  is  just  what  the  pylorus  is:  both  a  guard  and 
a  gate. 

3  As  fast  as  Gastric  Juice  prepares  the  food  it  is 
strained  through  this  gate  into  the  pantry.  The 
churning  motion  of  the  stomach  sends  the  food  round 
and  round,  and  the  pylorus  knows  just  what  to  let 
pass  through  his  gate.  4  If  a  particle  of  food  is  not 
thoroughly  cooked  or  digested  it  is  sent  back  for  Gas- 
tric Juice  to  work  at  some  more.  &  But  if  it  be  some- 
thing that  will  not  digest,  as  a  prune-pit,  and  it  keeps 
presenting  itself  at  the  gate  demanding  to  be  let 
pass,  after  a  while  the  pylorus  becomes  irritated,  and 
opens  the  gate  for  the  offending  substance.  Just  as 
mammas  sometimes  become  vexed  by  the  teasing  of 
their  children,  and  permit  them  to  have  what  at  first 

(65) 


66 


THE  HOUSE  BEAUTIFUL. 


they  refused.    It  is  not  wise  in  mammas  to  do  so,  but 

the  poor  pylorus 
does  the  best  it  can. 
If  this  happens  often 
the  'pylorus  becomes 
continually  angry  or 
irritated,  and  grum- 
bles even  when  good, 
well-digested  food 
asks  to  pass  by,  and 
so  the  master  of  the 
house  is  made  to 
suffer  pain.  It  some- 
times happens  that 
very  dangerous  ene- 
mies gain  admittance 
to  the  kitchen  and 
threaten  the  T  life  of 
the  master.  Then, 
if  possible  to  do  so, 
the  pylorus,  recog- 
nizing the  murder- 
o  u  s  character  of 
these  guests,  shuts 
up  tight,  and  says : 
"You  shall  not  go 
through";  and  an 
alarm  is  raised,  and 
some  very  stron^ 
servants  of  the  house 

cardiac  orifice  of  the  jj    rf  J 

t  extremity,  or  pit  of  ' 

to    the  help  of    the 


Vital  System 


A.  Heart.  B,  B.  Lungs.  C  Liver.  D.  Stom- 
ach. E.  Spleen.  >«,  m.  Kidneys,  g.  Blad- 
der, d.  is  the  diaphragm  which  forms  the 
partition  between  the  thorax  and  abdomen. 
Under  the  latter  is  the 
stomach,  and  at  the  righ 
the  stomach,  is  the  pyloric  orifice. 


SALIVA  DIGESTS  STARCH.  67 

pylorus,  and  the  intruders  are  forced  to  go  out  the 
way  they  came  in.  This  we  call  vomiting,  and  it  is  n 
very  disagreeable  process,  but  sometimes  very  benefi- 
cial ;  and  we  should  be  thankful  that  we  are  able  so 
to  expel  our  foes,  even  if  it  does  make  us  suffer. 

4  It  takes  from  three  to  five  hours  for  Gastric  Juice 
to  get  his  cooking  all  done  and  the  kitchen  empty, 
then  he  takes  a  rest,  and  other  servants  take  up  the 
process  of  preparing  the  food.  9  A  very  important 
work  is  done  in  the  butler's  pantry.  10  The  scientific 
name  of  this  room  is  the  duodenum,  so  called  from  a 
Latin  word  meaning  twelve,  because  it  is  about  as 
long  as  twelve  fingers  are  broad.  "  It  is  fitted  up  with 
a  very  great  number  of  shelves.  "There  are  two  as- 
sistants, who  begin  their  work  in  this  little  room. 
One,  named  Pancreatic  Juice,  has  his  home  in  a  room 
called  the  M  pancreas,  which  lies  back  of  the  stomach. 
The  other,  called  Bile,  comes  from  a  large  and  im- 
portant room  called  the  ,&  liver.  16  Each  of  these  as- 
sistants comes  along  a  little  hall  which  leads  from  his 
room,  until  they  meet  in  a  larger  hall,  and  go  on 
in  quite  a  friendly  way  to  their  work  in  the  pantry. 

17  Although  they  seem  to  be  such  good  friends  there 
is  in  reality  a  very  great  difference  between  the  two. 
Pancreatic  Juice  is  very  obliging,  and  will  do  any  kind 
of  work  that  needs  doing,  while  Bile  is  very  particular, 
and  will  have  little  to  do  with  anything  but  fats. 

18  All  the  food  we  eat  is  classed  under  four  kinds  : 
amylaceous,  that  is,  starchy ;  saccharine,  that  is,  con- 
taining sugar;  oleaginous,  fatty;  and  albuminous, 
that  is,  foods  containing  albumen — a  substance  like 


68  THE  HOUSE  BEAUTIFUL. 

the  white  of  an  egg.  '9  Saliva  digests  starch.  aa  Gas 
trice  juice  digests  sugar  and  albumen  ;  it  breaks  the 
albuminous  coverings  of  food,  and  that  may  be  said 
to  be  like  the  cook  peeling  the  fruit  and  vegetables; 
it  dissolves  some  kinds  of  food,  softens  others.;  it  cur- 
dles milk,  and  oily  substances  are  in  the  stomach 
churned  up  into  very  small  particles  ;  but  gastric  juice 
does  not  change  starch,  although  it  separates  it  from 
the  albuminous  material  that  may  surround  it.  "  Pan- 
creatic juice,  however,  does  not  select  his  work.  He 
does  not  ask  whether  the  food  is  albumen,  sugar, 
starch,  or  fat,  but  digests  each  and  all. 

22  Bile,  on  the  contrary,  is  just  as  aristocratic  as 
saliva,  and  condescends  to  notice  only  the  fats — that 
is,  as  far  as  preparing  food  for  the  dining-room  is  con- 
cerned ;  but  he  has  other  work  to  do  besides  that  of 
digestion.  93  It  is  his  business  to  see  that  everything 
goes  on  smoothly,  and  to  keep  things  from  spoiling. 
If  he  is  sick,  or  lazy,  and  neglects  his  work,  the  food 
is  apt  to  decompose,  and  spoiled  food  is  very  un- 
wholesome. 24  Sometimes  he  gets  worn  out  because 
he  has  so  much  fat  given  him  to  digest  that  he  can  not 
do  his  work  well,  and  he  complains  in  a  way  that  the 
master  of  the  house  learns  to  understand,  and  knows 
that  this  trusty  servant  is  out  of  temper,  even  if  he 
does  not  know  what  makes  him  so  ;  and  this  being 
out  of  temper  the  master  calls  "  biliousness." 

25  Fat  is  our  fuel.  We  need  fat  in  the  winter  to 
keep  us  warm  ;  but  as  the  2fl  warm  days  of  spring 
come  we  need  to  keep  up  less  fire ;  if  we  do  not  re- 
member this,  and  continue  to  eat  as  much  butter,  fat 


FAT  IS  0 UR  FUEL.  69 

meats,  and  rich  gravies  as  we  did  in  cold  weather,  we 
need  not  be  surprised  if  our  cooks  complain  and  wain 
us  that  we  are  not  using  them  well.  It  is  our  duty  to 
care  for  the  welfare  of  all  of  the  servants  who  work 
fur  us  so  faithfully  in  our  House  Beautiful.  We  should 
give  them  opportunity  to  rest ;  we  should  not  over- 
work them,  or  call  upon  them  to  do  impossible  things, 
and  so  make  them  angry ;  for,  although  they  always 
do  the  best  for  us  they  can,  yet  they  will  be  revenged 
upon  us  and  cause  us  to  suffer  if  we  abuse  them. 

You  must  not  think  that  all  this  time  while  the 
food  is  in  the  kitchen,  and  in  the  butler's  pantry,  that 
none  of  it  is  used  in  building  up  or  strengthening  the 
house. 

Most  all  cooks  have  a  way  of  taking  a  little  taste  of 
this  or  that  kind  of  food  while  they  are  at  work. 
Some  say  they  must  taste  now  and  then  so  as  to  know 
if  they  have  it  properly  seasoned.  But  it  is  not  the 
cooks  in  our  house  that  take  a  taste  now  and  then. 
They  attend  strictly  to  their  own  work.  It  is  the 
walls  of  the  kitchen  and  of  the  butler's  pantry  that 
help  themselves  to  the  food.  Do  you  say  that  you 
can't  believe  that  the  walls  of  a  house  could  eat 
food  ?  It  does  sound  strange  at  first.  But  it  is  true, 
nevertheless. 

Did  you  ever  come  into  the  "  old  house  at  home  " 
after  it  had  been  raining  for  some  days,  and  find  the 
brick  wall  on  one  side  all  wet  because  the  trough  at 
the  roof  leaked  on  the  outside  ?  Certainly  you  remem- 
ber that.  Now,  had  not  the  wall  been  eating  the 
water?     It  could  not  have  got  wet  in  any  other  way. 


nQ  THE  HOUSE  BEAUTIFUL. 

In  very  much  the  same  way  the  walls  of  our  House 
Beautiful  take  up  the  fluid  food. 

There  are  millions  of  little  mouths  which  are  opened 
to  take  up  the  food  which  goes  into  the  circulation 
direct,  and  this  strengthens  the  person  and  cheers  him 
up  if  he  is  suffering  for  food.  So  when  one  has  been 
a  longtime  without  food,  milk  or  soup  is  among  the 
best  things  to  give.  And  if  you  give  a  hungry  person 
food  you  will  now  know  that  millions  of  these  little 
mouths  are  saying  in  chorus,  I  thank  you,  I  thank 
you. 


CHAPTER  X. 

THE    DINING-ROOM. 

"  WHERE  is  the  man  who  can  live  without  dining  ?  '' 
asks  the  poet.  And  it  is  a  fact  that  the  subject  of 
dinners  occupies  a  large  share  of  the  thoughts  of  both 
the  old  and  the  young,  and  how  to  procure  them 
constitutes  the  chief  anxiety  of  a  great  portion  of 
mankind.  In  the  humble  cottage  and  in  the  grand 
mansion  the  dining-room  is  the  pleasant  centre  of 
attraction  for  the  family. 

And  our  House  Beautiful  has  a  dining-room,  which 
we  shall  find  worthy  of  a  visit.  '  It  opens  directly 
out  of  the  butler's  pantry,  and  is  a  long,  narrow  room, 
perhaps  an  inch  or  so  in  width,  and  about  twenty-five 
feet  long.  a  It  is  coiled  and  folded  up  like  a  rubber 
tube,  to  fit  in  a  space  which  is  called  the  abdominal 
cavity. 

This  dining-room  has  three  walls,  like  the  stomach. 
The  muscular  fibres  are  arranged,  some  running 
lengthwise  and  others  running  in  a  circular  manner 
around  this  tube.  The  inside  of  the  tube  is  lined  with 
a  thin,  soft,  flexible  membrane  or  skin,  which  is  folded 
or  plaited  up,  so  that  if  it  were  smoothed  out  straight 
ft  would  not  be  less  than  fifty  feet  long ;  and  il  s 
whole  surface  is  covered  with  a  vast  number  of  iii-f  !•• 
cupboards  called  follicles. 

(71) 


*2  THE  HOUSE  BEAUTIFUL. 

The  first  two-fifths  of  the  dining-room  is  called 
the  jejunum,  the  *  remaining  three-fifths  is  the  ileum, 
and  both  together  are  commonly  spoken  of  as  the 
small  intestines.  "The  dining-room  is  presided  over 
by  Intestinal  Juice,  another  member  of  the  Juice 
family,  7  and  his  duty  is  to  complete  what  the  others 
have  left  undone.  The  material  with  which  he  works 
is  found  in  the  little  follicles,  which  are  called  the 
follicles  of  Lieberkuehn,  and  which  are  set  close  togeth- 


FOLLICLES    OF   THE    ILEUM. 


er  through  the  whole  length  of  the  small  intestines. 
They  are  little  tubes  with  rounded  ends  below,  and 
opening  upon  the  inner  surface  of  the  intestine  by 
mouths. 

There  is  no  sound  of  bell  or  gong  when  dinner  is 
ready,  for  the  people  who  are  to  eat  are  never  away 
playing  croquet  or  riding  bicycles,  and  never  need  a 
half  hour's  warning  in  order  to  get  clean  faces  and 
smooth  hair  before  coming  to  the  table. 


THE  CHYLE. 


73 


They  are  always  in  the  dining-room,  and  are  usu- 
ally ready  to  eat.  They  are  very,  very  little  people 
indeed.  You  could  not  sec  them  without  your  big- 
gest spectacles.  They  are  so  small  that  there  are 
from  forty  to  ninety  of  them  in  the  one  hundred  and 
forty-fourth  part  of  a  square  inch.  Each  one  of  these 
*  little  folks  is  called  a  villus,  and  altogether  are  villi. 


The  Villi. 


Chvlification. 

A  diagram  of  the  mucous  membrane 
during  digestion  and  the  preparation 
of  chyle,  a.  A  villus,  turgid  and  erect ; 
its  protective  epithelium  cast  off  from 
its  free  extremity;  its  absorbent  ves- 
sels, lacteals,  and  blood-vessels  tur- 
gid, b.  A  follicle  discharging  its 
epithelial  cells. 


Absorption. 

A  representation  of  the  same  mucous 
membrane  when  chylification  is  not 
going  on.  a.  Protective  epithelium 
of  a  villus.  /•.  Secreting  epithelium 
of  a  follicle,  c,  c,  c.  Primary  mem- 
brane, with  its  germinal  spots,  or  nu- 
clei, </,  d,  e.  Germs  of  absorbent  vesi- 
cles.  /.  Vessels  and  lacteals  of  villus. 


They  are  attached  to  the  walls  of  the  dining-room, 
and  are  like  little  hairs,  so  close  and  fine  that  under 
the  microscope  they  make  the  walls  have  a  velvety 
look.  9  Each  villus  has  a  mouth,  and  sucks  up  the 
food  that  is  passing  through  the  dining-room.  ,0  The 
food  by  this  time  has  become  a  milky  fluid,  very  dif- 
ferent in  appearance  from  the  variety  of  articles  of 
which  it  is  made,  and  is  called  Chyle. 


74 


THE  HOUSE  BEAUTIFUL 


Custard  is  a  word  meaning  eggs,  milk,  and  sugar, 
beaten  together  and  cooked,  so  that  it  is  ready  to  be 
eaten.  And  chyle  is  the  name  for  all  the  food  we 
eat  after  it  has  been  beaten  and  churned  together  and 
prepared  by  our  various  cooks,  through  their  process 
of  cookery,  which  we  term  digestion,  for  the  use  of 


Mesenteric  Glands. 
i.  Thoracic  duct.  2.  Section  of  the  aorta.  3.  Glands  around  the  aor/a  which 
receive  the  lymphatics  from  the  intestine  and  give  off  vessels  to  the  thoracic 
duct.  4.  Superficial  lymphatics  on  the  intestine.  5,  5.  More  lymphatic  glands 
receiving  vessels  from  the  intestine.  6,  7.  Lymphatics  from  the  intestine  and 
mesentery. 

these  little  villi,  whose  whole  duty  is  to  eat  that  we 
may  live. 

11  It  is  really  true  that  they  eat  for  us  rather  than 
for  themselves,  and  so  they  do  not  keep  what  they 
have  eaten,  but  ia  pass  it  along  through  numerous 
little  halls  or  ducts  until  it  reaches  the  mesenteric 


PERIS  TA  L  TIC  A  C  TION.  7  5 

glands,  where  it  is  changed  or  manufactured  into  some- 
thing  more  like  blood,  and  then  it  passes  into  a  much 
larger  hall,  called  the  thoracic  duct,  up  which  it  goes 
to  the  left  side  of  the  neck,  where  it  enters  a  pipe 
known  as  the  jugular  vein,  which  is  carrying  blood  to 
the  heart. 

The  mesentery  is  a  broad  thin  membrane,  upon  one 
edge  of  which  the  small  intestines  are  attached.  The 
other  edge  is  gathered  up  in  a  space  about  six  inches 
in  length  and  fastened  to  the  spine  in  the  region 
known  as  the  "  small  of  the  back."  By  this  arrange- 
ment the  intestines,  while  left  loose,  are  also  kept 
from  becoming  tangled  with  each  other. 

Have  you  ever  wondered  how  the  food  you  ate  got 
into  your  blood,  and  became  blood  in  its  turn  ?  for 
you  all  know  that  if  the  food  did  not  become  blood 
it  would  do  you  no  good  to  eat.  13  And  now  you  can 
follow  a  mouthful  of  food  on  its  journey,  and  see  just 
what  will  happen  to  it  on  the  way.  You  can  see  the 
teeth  grinding  it  up  fine,  the  saliva  making  the  starch 
over  into  sugar,  the  stomach  churning  it,  while  gas- 
tric juice  dissolves  and  softens  and  breaks  up  a  part, 
and  digests  another  part.  Then  you  follow  it  into 
the  duodenum,  and  watch  the  effect  of  the  action  of 
pancreatic  juice  and  bile,  and  then,  passing  along  into 
the  small  intestines,  you  see  the  work  of  digestion 
completed  by  the  intestinal  juice,  and  the  milky  chyle 
sucked  up  by  the  benevolent  villi,  who  pass  it  along 
until  it  reaches  the  blood,  and,  mingling  with  it,  be- 
comes food  for  all  the  various  parts  of  the  body. 

I  have  said  that  the  tood  passed  along  through  the 


76 


THE  HOUSE  BEAUTIFUL. 


intestines  as  if  it  were  alive  and  could  walk  ;  M  but  in 
reality  the  food  is  moved  along  by  the  action  of  the 
walls  of  the  intestines,  which  draw  together  in  some 
one  place  and  then  pull  themselves  back  over  the 
contents,  which  are  thus  pushed  forward  a  little  ways  ; 

then  the  walls  im- 
mediately behind 
the  contents  con- 
tract and  pull  back, 
and  thus  they  keep 
pushing  the  food 
along.  '"'This 
motion,  which  is 
called  peristaltic 
action,  is  never  felt 
when  we  are  in 
health,  but  16  some- 
times when  we  have 
eaten 


something 
that  is  not  good  for 
us  the  intestines  are 
in  a  hurry  to  push 
it   along,    and   con- 
tract so   irregularly 
and  so  fast  and  with 
so  much  force  that 
pain  is  caused. 
After  dinner,  the  next  thing  always  is  to  clear  the 
table,  pick  up  the  fragments  that  are  suitable  to  be 
eaten,  and  throw  away  the  waste  pieces.  The  servants, 
who  eat  after  the  family,  dispose  of  many  ot  the  frag- 


Section  of  the  Ileum,  Turned  Inside  Out. 


EA  T  TO  LIVE. 


77 


merits,  and  that  which  is  not  fit  to  be  eaten  is  thrown 
into  the  scavenger-box.  In  the  House  Beautiful  there 
is  no  extravagance  or  wastefulness  ;  we  would  there- 
fore expect  to  find  some  way  provided  to  use  up  that 
which  has  been  left  by  the  villi.  And  we  do  find 
that  such  provision  has  been  made.  "  At  the  lower 
end  of  the  dining-room  a  little  trap-door,  which  has 
the  name  of  the  ileo-coecal  valve,  leads  into  18  a  room, 
broader  and  shorter  than  the  dining-room,  which  is 


Lacteals  of  Jejunum  and  Mesentbry. 

i.  Section  of  the  jejunum.  2.  Section  of  the  mesentery.  3.  Branch  of  the  superior 
mesenteric  artery.  4.  Branch  of  the  superior  mesenteric  vein.  5.  Mesenteric 
glands  receiving  the  lymphatics  of  the  intestines. 

known  as  the  Colon.  "Along  the  walls  of  this  room 
are  little  folks  called  Absorbents,  who  pick  out  of  the 
contents  of  the  Colon  that  which  is  eatable,  and  the 
waste  is  left  to  be  thrown  into  the  scavenger-box  or 
rectum,  which,  like  all  scavenger-boxes,  should  be 
emptied  every  day.  20  We  have  now  followed  the 
food  in  its  journeyings,  and  have  found  that  part  of 
it  is  cast  out  as  waste,  but  that  the  greater  part  is 


78 


THE  HOUSE  BEAUTIFUL. 


used  in  building  us  up,  in  making  us  grow,  or  in  keep- 
ing us  in  repair  ;  and  did  you  ever  think  how  kind 
our  Heavenly  Father  is  in   giving  us  such  delicious 

things  to  eat,  so  that 
the  duty  of  eating  in 
order  that  we  may  live 
is  made  a  pleasure  to 
us  ?  So  great  a  pleas- 
ure, in  fact,  that  we 
sometimes  almost 
think  that  we  live  in 
order  that  we  may  eat, 
and  so  allow  ourselves 
to  eat  things  that  are 
hurtful,  just  because 
they  taste  good,  or  we 

Abscrbents  of  t.ie  Colon.  cat       more      than       we 

really  need,  and  so  give  our  faithful  household  ser- 
vants more  work  to  do  than  they  are  able  to  perform. 
There  is  one  truth  we  should  all  remember.  21  It 
is  not  the  great  amount  of  food  we  eat  that  nourishes 
us,  but  the  amount  we  really  use.  If  we  eat  more 
than  the  cooks  can  properly  prepare,  or  than  the  villi 
and  absorbents  can  take  up  and  use,  we  have  done 
ourselves  an  injury.     Let  us  take  this  as  our  motto: 


"  I  eat  that  I  may  live." 


CHAPTER    XI. 

THE    ENGINE. 

The  House  Beautiful  possesses  a  wonderful  en- 
gine, which  never  rests  from  the  time  the  house  is 
first  occupied  until  the  tenant  moves  out  forever. 
And  that  is  one  way  in  which  this  house  differs  from 
all  others.  '  It  never  has  but  one  tenant,  no  matter 
how  long  it  may  stand.  '  As  soon  as  that  tenant 
moves  out,  the  house  goes  into  decay, 8  and  by  watch- 
ing the  engine  one  can  always  tell  whether  the  tenant 
has  moved  out.  If  he  has  only  gone  out  for  a  short 
time  the  engine  keeps  at  work ;  but  if  he  stays  too 
long,  the  engine  stops,  and  then  the  house  will  never 
be  inhabited  again. 

4  The  House  Beautiful  when  first  made  is  very 
small,  but,  unlike  all  other  houses,  it  grows  bigger  and 
bigger  for  about  twenty  years,  when  it  stops  growing 
larger,  but  grows  stronger  and  more  solid  (that  is,  if 
it  is  properly  taken  care  of)  for  ten  years  longer. 

Then  it  simply  keeps  itself  in  repair  for  a  number 
oi  years,  after  which  it  begins  to  grow  a  little  weaker 
year  by  year,  until  at  last  it  is  so  much  out  of  repair 
that  the  inhabitant  moves  away,  and  leaves  it  to 
decay. 

"  In  very  new  houses  the  engine  pumps  very  fast. 
*  When  about   one  year  old   it  will  make  about  one 

(79) 


8o 


THE  HOUSE  BEAUTIFUL. 


hundred  and  thirty  strokes  in  a  minute,  but  as  it 
grows  older  it  is  not  in  quite  so  much  of  a  hurry. 
7  When  three  years  old  it  will  make  nearly  one  hun- 
dred strokes  in  a  minute.     8  In  a  house  that  is  thirty 


The  Heart. 

At  external  view  of  the  heart,  a.  Left  ventricle,  b.  Right  ventricle,  c,  *,  /. 
Aorta  arising  from  the  left  ventricle,  g.  Arteria  innominata.  h.  Left  subclaviar 
artery.  *.  Left  carotid,  k.  Pulmonary  artery.  /,  /.  Its  right  and  left  branches. 
m,  m.  Veins  of  the  lungs,  n.  Right  auricle,  o.  Ascending  cava.  q.  Descend- 
ing cava.  r.  Left  auricle,  s.  Left  coronary  artery.  P.  Portal  veins,  which  re- 
turn the  blood  from  th:  liver  and  bowels. 

years  old  the  engine  will  make  about  seventy-five 
strokes  in  a  minute,  and  it  keeps  getting  slower  until 
at  eighty  it  will  scarcely  make  more  than  one  stroke 
to  every  second.  9  If  it  varies  greatly  from  this,  we 
know   that    something    is   wrong.      Sometimes    the 


LOCATION  OF  THE  HEART.  %x 

engine  gets  very  excited,  and  pounds  away  so  last 
that  it  may  be  almost  impossible  to  count  it ;  then 
we  generally  say  there  is  fever.  If  it  beats  much 
slower  than  it  should,  we  then  use  some  big  words, 
and  say,  "  There  is  great  depression  of  the  vital 
forces,"  and  try  to  imagine  that  we  have  explained 
the  matter  very  clearly. 

Everybody  appreciates  the  importance  of  this 
wonderful  engine,  which  we  call  the  10  heart,  and  the 
necessity  of  keeping  it  running  smoothly,  although 
there  are  many  who  do  not  know  just  where  it  is  lo- 
cated, or  do  not  understand  its  construction. 

"  Oh,  we  all  know  where  our  heart  is  !  "  Do  you: 
Well,  then,  of  course  you  can  tell  me  just  where  it  is. 

"  Why,  yes,  of  course  we  can.  It  is  on  our  left 
side." 

"Aha!  I  thought  you  did  not  know.  It  is  not  on 
your  left  side." 

"  I  should  like  to  know  where  it  is,  then  ;  for  I  can 
feel  mine  beating  on  my  left  side,  and  when  public 
speakers  refer  to  the  heart  they  always  place  the  hand 
on  the  left  side."  So  they  do,  and  in  so  doing  they 
place  the  hand  just  where  the  point  of  the  heart 
touches  the  left  side,  but  the  bulk  of  the  heart  lies 
higher  up,  and  more  nearly  in  the  centre  of  the  body. 
If  you  put  your  chin  down  as  low  upon  your  breast 
as  you  can,  it  will  touch  a  point  over  the  heart. 

Those  of  you  who  have  ever  seen  the  heart  of  an 
animal  will  have  a  good  idea  of  the  shape  of  the  hu- 
man heart.  It  is  a  good  deal  bigger  at  one  end  than 
at  the  other.     n  All  kindergarten  children  will  under 


82  THE  HOUSE  BEAUTIFUL. 

stand  me  if  I  say  it  is  irregularly  conical,  and  "  lies 
with  the  base  upward,  about  the  point  where  the  chin 
touches  the  breast,  and  the  apex  downward,  touching 
the  left  side  between  the  fifth  and  sixth  ribs.  About 
one-third  of  the  heart  lies  at  the  right  of  a  line  drawn 
through  the  centre  of  the  breast-bone.  Thus  you 
will  see  that  the  heart  lies  obliquely  across  the  chest, 
reaching  from  the  second  rib  on  the  right  side  to  be- 
tween the  fifth  and  sixth  ribs  on  the  left 

The  base  or  upper  end  of  the  heart  is  held  in  place 
by  the  larger  blood-vessels  which  lead  out  of  it,  and 
the  lower  and  smaller  end  is  left  free.  The  whole 
heart  is  enclosed  in  a  bag  or  sac  called  the  pericar- 
dium, which  is  a  serous  membrane.  Serous  mem- 
branes form  closed  sacs  wherever  there  are  parts 
which  would  rub  against  each  other.  They  are 
made  soft  and  slippery  by  a  fluid  which  prevents  fric- 
tion. 

Now  that  we  have  learned  the  location  of  our 
engine,  we  will  study  its  construction.  It  seems 
quite  a  simple  affair  as  we  examine  it,  yet  in  its  work- 
ings it  is  more  wonderful  than  any  other  engine 
that  was  ever  made. 

18  It  is  first  divided  by  a  partition  lengthwise  into 
a  right  and  left  side,  or,  as  we  sometimes  say,  a 
right  and  left  heart.  "  Each  side  is  then  divided  into 
two  rooms,  one  apparently  much  bigger  than  the 
other.  The  smaller  rooms  lie  above  the  larger  ones, 
and  are  therefore  at  the  base  of  the  heart.  Id  They 
are  called  respectively  the  right  and  left  auricles,  or 
ears,  because  they  have  something  the  shape  of  the 


DIVISIONS  OF  THE  HEART. 


83 


ear  of  an  animal.     u  The  larger  rooms  are  the  right 

and  left  ventricles. 


DlAGRAMATIC    REPRESEN  I  ATION    OF   THE    CIRCULATION    OF   THE    BLOOD. 

I.  kight  auricle.  2.  Right  ventricle.  4  and  5.  Venous  blood  going  to  the  lungs 
5.  Capillaries  of  lungs.  12.  Arterial  blood  going  to  upper  part  of  body.  13. 
Arterial  blood  going  to  lower  extremities.  14.  Capillary  circulation  betweeu 
arteries  and  veins.  15.  Venous  blood  returning  from  upper  part  of  body.  16 
Venous  blood  returning  from  lower  extremities.  % 


Though  the  construction  of  both  sides  of  the  heart 
is  alike  they  have  each  a  different  work  to   do,  dif 


84  THE  HOUSE  BEAUTIFUL. 

ferent  in  degree  but  not  in  manner.  18  The  right 
heart  deals  only  with  impure  and  soiled  blood,  the 
19  left  heart  only  with  pure  or  cleansed  blood. 

ao  A  large  pipe,  or  tube,  called  the  descending  vena 
cava,  brings  the  soiled  blood  from  the  upper  part  of 
the  body  to  the  right  auricle,  and  another  one,  called 
21  the  ascending  vena  cava,  brings  it  from  the  lower 
part  of  the  body  to  the  same  place. 

23  When  the  auricle  is  full,  its  walls  squeeze  together 
and  press  the  blood  into  the  ventricle.  24  There  are 
folding-doors  between  these  two  rooms,  and  they  are 
made  so  as  not  to  let  the  blood- flow  back  into  the 
auricle.  Have  you  ever  seen  a  gate  with  one  end  of 
a  rope  fastened  to  it  and  the  other  end  to  a  post  so 
that  the  gate  will  go  shut  but  never  swing  open  the 
wrong  way?  25  In  the  same  manner  these  folding- 
doors  are  tied  to  the  walls  of  the  ventricle  so  that 
they  can  never  swing  back  into  the  auricle.  When 
the  ventricle  is  full,  its  walls  contract,  and  the  blood 
presses  against  the  doors  or  24  valves  until,  they  are 
shut,  and  then  as  the  strings  hold  them  fast  so  that 
they  can  not  swing  back,  the  blood  is  compelled  to 
go  out  into  a  tube  called  the  pulmonary  artery,  which 
26  carries  it  away  to  the  laundry  to  be  washed. 

27  There  are  also  valves  at  the  entrance  to  this 
artery,  which  will  not  allow  the  blood  to  return  into 
the  ventricle.  They  are  called  semi-lunar  valves,  be- 
cause they  are  the  shape  of  a  half-moon. 

In  like  manner  the  pure  blood,  which  is  brought 
from  the  laundry,  through  pipes  called  pulmonary 
veins,  M  into  the  left  auricle,  is  sent  from  there  into 


SIZE  OF  THE   VENTRICLES.  85 

the  left  ventricle,  80  and  from  there  into  a  great  big 
tube  called  the  aorta,  31  from  whence  it  is  distributed 
throughout  the  body  to  give  up  its  nourishment, 
to  receive  waste,  and  to  return  again  through  the 
vena  cava  to  the  right  heart.  3a  There  are  only  two 
doors  between  the  left  auricle  and  ventricle.  They 
are  called  bi-cuspid  (two-pointed),  or  34  mitral,  because 
they  are  supposed  to  resemble  the  mitre  or  two- 
pointed  cap  worn  by  a  bishop  ;  S3  while  between  the 
right  auricle  and  ventricle  there  are  three  doors  which 
are  therefore  called  the  three-pointed  or  tri-cuspid 
valves.  86  The  walls  of  the  left  ventricle  are  much 
thicker  and  stronger  than  those  of  the  right,  because 
it  has  to  send  the  blood  a  much  greater  distance. 
Thus  you  will  see  that  there  are  two  circulations  of 
blood  from  the  heart,  the  right  ventricle  sends  the 
blood  to  the  lungs,  whence  it  returns,  after  being 
washed,  to  the  left  ventricle,  which  sends  the  blood 
through  the  whole  body. 

*a  It  is  estimated  that  each  ventricle  in  a  grown  per- 
son will  hold  about  three  ounces  of  blood,  and  as 
each  ventricle  fills  at  every  stroke  of  the  heart,  it  fol- 
lows that  six  ounces  of  blood  will  be  pumped  out  of 
the  heart  at  every  stroke.  "  We  learned  that  the 
heart  of  a  man  beats  about  seventy-five  times  in  one 
minute.  88  How  often  will  it  beat  in  an  hour?  "  Mul- 
tiply seventy-five  by  sixty,  and  you  have  four  thou- 
sand five  hundred  strokes  in  an  hour,  and  in  a  day  it 
will  beat  40  one  hundred  and  eight  thousand  times. 
*  Six  ounces  at  each  stroke  would  be  six  hundred  and 
forty-eight  thousand  ounces.     And  that  is  more  than 


g6  THE  HOUSE  BEAUTIFUL. 

twenty  tons.  Would  you  believe  it  possible  that  a 
man's  heart  does  as  much  work  as  that  in  twenty-fouf 
hours? 

"  And  does  it  never  rest  ?  " 

45  Yes,  it  rests  between  beats.  Just  think ;  only 
those  tiny  resting  spells  from  the  time  we  are  born 
until  we  die.  4S  It  rests  most  at  night,  because  we  are 
quiet  and  lying  down.  As  soon  as  we  sit  or  stand  up 
it  begins  to  beat  faster,  and  you  know  how  it  will 
pound  away  after  you  have  been  running  rapidly. 
Moderate  exercise  never  does  a  well  person  harm. 
But  when  great  physical  effort  is  put  forth  continually, 
as  by  men  who  are  engaged  in  walking-matches,  or 
rowing- races,  or  such  contests,  this  great  44  demand 
upon  the  heart  causes  it  to  hypertrophy  (that  is,  to 
grow  larger),  and  before  many  years  it  becomes 
weaker,  and  the  man  does  not  walk  or  row  as  he  once 
did,  and  at  last  he  fails  in  health  entirely ;  and  it  is 
all  because  his  heart  has  been  overtaxed  in  years  past, 
and  has  lost  power.  Let  us,  then,  remember  that  the 
engine  can  not  rest  like  most  parts  of  the  House 
Beautiful,  and  respect  its  wishes  by  not  giving  it  too 
much  to  do  in  too  short  a  time. 


CHAPTER   XII. 

THE      HOUSEKEEPER. 
"For  a  housekeeper  has  always  such  a  world  of  things  to  do." 

If  you  have  never  been  a  housekeeper,  you  never, 
theless  have  had  an  opportunity  to  see  how  busy 
housekeepers  always  are.  '  They  must  see  that  every 
member  of  the  family  is  provided  with  appro- 
priate food  and  clothes ;  that  the  whole  house 
is  kept  clean  and  in  order;  and  that  all  refuse  is 
quickly  removed.  They  must  keep  their  eyes  open 
to  observe  where  any  repairing  needs  to  be  done,  and 
see  that  it  is  done.  The  Housekeeper  in  our  House 
Beautiful  is  no  less  busy  looking  after  every  depart- 
ment. But,  strange  to  say,  she  does  not  decide  what 
repairs  need  to  be  made  ;  and,  stranger  still,  the  owner 
of  the  house  does  not  decide  that  question ;  in  fact, 
he  couldn't  if  he  would ;  and,  strangest  thing  of  all, 
1  each  part  of  the  house  knows  how  to  repair  itself. 
'  It  selects  the  material  which  it  needs,  and  receives 
it  from  the  Housekeeper,  if  she  has  it,  and  *  gives  to 
her  the  worn-out  pieces  which  she  takes  along  with 
her. 

6  Blood,  the  Housekeeper,  starts  out  from  the  left 
heart,  in  a  bright  scarlet  dress,  on  her  round  of  duty 
through  the  house.  *  This  bright  color  of  her  dress 
\s  made  up  of  innumerable  little  parcels,  called  7  the 

(87) 


8g  THE  HOUSE  BEAUTIFUL. 

red  corpuscles,  which  have  come  from  the  lungs 
loaded  with  oxygen  which  they  are  going  to  carry 
to  every  part  of  the  house.  8  These  corpuscles  are 
A   ^i  round    like    pieces     of 


^>2  ^^B       money,  only  they  are  thin- 


ner in  the  centre  than  at 
the  edges,  and  might  be 
more  truly  compared  to  a 
red  CorpusclIs.  rubber     ball    pressed   to- 

ft, represents  the  blood-corpuscles  as  seen  gether  On  tWO  Opposite 
on  theirflat  surface  and  edge.  B.  Con-  sJdeS.  9  They  are  SO  Small, 
geries  of  blood  corpuscles  in  columns. 

in  coagulating,  the  corpuscles  apply  that  three  thousand  five 

themselves  to  each  other,  so  as  to  re«*  hiinHred     of     them       lvinP1 

semble  piles  of  money.  t 

side  by  side,  would  make 
a  row  only  an  inch  long.  "  But,  besides  the  red 
corpuscles,  Blood  carries  with  her  little  white  glob- 
ules, called  white  corpuscles.  "  These  are  not  quite 
as  small  as  the  red  ones,  and  there  are  not  nearly 
so  many  of  them,  one  white  to  about  five  hun- 
dred red.  12  These  little  red  and  white  corpuscles 
float    along    in    a    fluid    called   the   serum,   which   is 

largely   made    up    of    water,    and 


which  contains  in  solution  all  the 


lVft 


material  for  building  up  the  body, 
such  as  albumen,  soda,  potassium, 


a,  ^*         magnesia,   iron,    and    many   other 

Cells  of  Human  Blood.     Substances. 

13  We  will  imagine  the  House- 
keeper, loaded  with  her  myriad  of  little  bundles,  start- 
ing out  from  the  left  heart  through  the  big  hall,  or  tube 
the  aorta.     M  A  pair  of  doors,  called  semi-lunar  valves 


THE  A  R  77<  AT/<  S  A  RE  E  L  A  S  77 C.  §9 

Jose  behind  her,  and  she  hurries  along,  very  tapidly  at 
first,  because  the  engine  has  sen:  her  out  with  great 
force.  15  From  this  large  passageway  smaller  ones  begin 
to  branch  off,  and  she  rushes  through  some  up  to 
the  head,  and  through  others  to  the  arms,  and  through 
others  to  the  stomach  and  all  the  internal  organs,  and 
down  even  to  the  ends  of  the  toes,  through  many 
halls  which  grow  smaller  as  they  become  more  nu- 
merous, just  as  the  branches  of  a  tree  get  smaller 
and  smaller  as  they  divide  and  subdivide  until  they 
end  in  tiny  twigs.  '6  These  halls  are  known  as  ar- 
teries, and  they  have  stiff  walls  which  make  them 
keep  their  shape,  but  the  walls  are  also  elastic  and 
will  stretch,  so  that  sometimes  tbey  can  contain  more 
blood  than  they  do  at  others.  The  blood  is  not  al- 
lowed to  stop  anywhere  on  the  way,  for  the  engine 
keeps  on  pumping  and  sending  it  along.  "  You  can 
feel  how  it  goes  in  waves  through  the  arteries  if  you 
put  your  finger  over  one  where  it  comes  near  the  sur- 
face, as  on  your  temple,  or  on  the  thumb  side  of  your 
wrist. 

After  a  time  the  halls  become  so  very  narrow  that 
the  little  red  corpuscles  can  only  squeeze  through  one 
at  a  time.  18  The  halls  are  then  called  capillaries,  and 
form  a  network  as  in  the  lungs.  19  It  is  here  in  the 
capillaries  that  Blood  leaves  her  bright  scarlet  dress 
and  puts  on  a  purplish  one".  20  She  has  given  up  oxy- 
gen to  keep  you  alive,  and  now,  with  dress  soiled  by 
carbonic  acid  gas  and  various  refuse  received  into  the 
blood  from  the  tissues,  she  begins  her  return  journey 
to  the  heart.     She  21  leaves  the  capillaries  by  a  num- 


00  THE  HOUSE  BEAUTtEUt. 

ber  of  small  hallways  which  merge  in  large  ones,  just 
as  the  rootlets  of  a  tree  are  merged  in  the  larger  roots, 
and  they  at  length  in  the  trunk.  M  If  Blood  is  com- 
ing from  the  feet  she  reaches  the  engine  through  the 
large  vein,  the  vena  cava  ascendens  ;  if  from  23  the  up- 
per part  of  the  body,  through  the  vena  cava  descen* 
dens.  24  The  veins  differ  from  the  arteries  in  their 
structure.  If  a  vein  is  cut  across,  its  walls  do  not 
stand  open,  as  do  those  of  the  arteries,  but  they  will 
fall  together.  "Then  the  veins  communicate  with 
each  other  everywhere  by  little  branches  which  pass 
from  vein  to  vein,  thus  making  the  veins  more  like  a 
network.  In  the  arteries  this  takes  place  occasionally, 
but  is  the  exception  rather  than  the  rule.  26  The  veins 
of  the  surface  of  the  body  are  provided  with  valves 
which  prevent  the  blood  flowing  backward.  The 
arteries  do  not  need  valves,  because  they  lead  from 
the  heart,  and  the  force  of  the  heart's  action  sends 
the  blood  along ;  but  in  the  veins  this  impulse  is  not 
so  strongly  felt,  and,  besides  that,  the  blood  from  the 
lower  extremities  has  to  climb  up-hill,  and  the  valves 
tend  to  prevent  it  slipping  down  again.  27  You  can 
see  how  hard  it  is  for  the  blood  to  climb  up  if  you 
hold  one  hand  hanging  down.  It  will  get  very  red, 
and  the  veins  will  show  full  of  blood.  Now,  if  you 
hold  it  over  your  head,  it  will  soon  get  white  again, 
because  the  blood  has  found  it  easy  to  run  down-hill. 
88  Through  the  veins  the  blood  runs  in  a  steady 
stream,  but  through  the  arteries  it  goes  in  jets,  or 
spurts.  "  The  remembrance  of  this  fact  is  useful  in 
accidents,  for  to  cut  an  artery  is  much  more  serious 


RAPIDITY  OF  CIRCULATION. 


91 


than  to  cut  a  vein,  and  we  can  judge  which  has  been 
cut  by  the  way  the  blood  flows  out.  30  The  arteries 
come  direct  from  the  heart,  and  if  one  is  severed  it 
could  soon  empty  the  whole  system  of  blood  ;  but  a 
cut  vein  would  have  to  empty  all  the  capillaries  be- 
fore it  could  carry  off  all  the  blood,  and  the  capillaries 
are  so  numerous  that  they  contain  more  than  31  five 
hundred  times  as  much  blood  as  the  arteries.  2  The 
entire  amount  of  blood  is  estimated  to  be  about  one- 
eighth  of  the  body,  so  that  in  a  man  weighing  one 
hundred  and  forty-four  pounds  the  blood  would  be 
about  eighteen  pounds. 

13  How  long  does  it  take  this  amount  of  blood  to 
pass  through  the  heart?  Many  calculations  have 
been  made  and  experiments  tried,  and  it  is  thought 
that  the  whole  amount  of  blood  passes  through  the 
heart  every  forty-eight  seconds,  or  nearly  one  minute. 
84  Of  course  the  blood  travels  faster  in  the  arteries  than 
in  the  capillaries  or  veins,  and  faster  near  the  heart  than 
at  a  distance  from  it.  35  In  the  large  arteries  near  the 
heart  it  is  estimated  to  move  at  the  rate  of  ten  or 
twelve  inches  every  second,  while  in  the  36  arteries  of 
the  foot  it  moves  only  two  and  a  quarter  inches  in  a 
second,  and  in  the  capillaries  at  the  rate  of  about  one 
inch  in  a  minute. 

If  you  could  see  the  blood  corpuscles  moving 
through  these  narrow  halls  you  would  find  much  to 
interest  you.  They  seem  to  know  so  well  what  they 
are  about.  ST  Sometimes  they  will  all  go  in  one  direc- 
tion for  a  while,  then  suddenly  they  will  turn  and  all 
go  the  other  way.     Sometimes  two  rows  meet  at  a 


92 


THE  HOUSE  BEAUTIFUL. 


point  where  the  narrow  halls  unite  to  form  a  larger 
one,  yet  not  large  enough  to  admit  more  than  one 
corpuscle  at  a  time,  but  there  is  no  crowding  and  jos 
tling.  3"  One  row  politely  waits  until  the  other  row 
has  passed  in,  then  they  will  follow  in  their  turn. 
39  Capillaries  exist  everywhere  in  the  body,  on  the 
surface,  and  in  all  the  internal  organs.  You  can  form 
an  idea  of  how  close  together  and  how  small  they  are 
by  seeing  a  person  blush.  40  The  capillaries  on  the 
surface  have  suddenly  dilated  from  a  mental  emotion, 
and  the  blood  has  rushed  into  them  in  such  great 
quantities  that  they  become  visible,  but  not  as  red 
lines  crossing  each  other,  with  white  spaces  between, 
but  in  one  uniform  flush.  If  you  prick  yourself  with 
the  finest  needle  you  pierce  a  capillary,  and  a  drop  of 
blood  oozes  out.  41  So  that  the  spaces  between  the 
network  of  capillaries  must  be  much  smaller  than  a 
needle-point.  And  that  reminds  me  of  a  peculiar 
disposition  our  Housekeeper  has,  to  run  away  when- 
ever she  has  a  chance.  4a  Let  ever  so  little  a  door  be 
opened  and  out  she  pops,  and  she  runs  until  some- 
thing stops  her.  43  And  what  does  stop  her?  If  it  is 
from  a  cut  finger  she  is  running,  and  you  go  to  mam- 
ma, and  she  ties  the  finger  up  with  a  cloth,  you  prob- 
ably think  that  mamma  stopped  her.  Or  if  it  were 
from  a  severe  wound,  where  an  artery  was  cut,  and  a 
doctor  was  called  to  stanch  the  blood,  you  no  doubt 
thought  that  the  doctor  stopped  her  ;  but  you  were 
mistaken  ;  she  stopped  herself.  All  the  mammas  and 
doctors  in  the  world  would  have  been  of  no  avail  if 
she  had  not  possessed  in  herself  the  ability  to  prevent 
herself  from  running  further. 


COAGULATION. 


93 


44  Blood  carries  with  her  a  substance  called  fibrin, 
that  is  usually  dissolved  in  the  blood,  and  is  a  food. 
So  long  as  Blood  stays  in  the  blood-vessels  fibrin 
does  not  interfere  with  her,  but  goes  quietly  where 
she  goes.  But  so  soon  as  she  escapes  from  the 
house  and  begins  to  run  away,  fibrin  tangles  around 
her  feet  and  holds  her.  4&  This  is  what  is  called  coag- 
ulating, or  forming  a  clot,  and  this  clot  acts  as  a  cork, 
and  stops  up  the  place  from  which  the  blood  is  flow- 
ing. 40  If  there  were  no  fibrin  in  tjie  blood  all  the 
bandages  that  mammas  or  doctors  could  apply  would 
not  stop  the  bleeding  ;  but  because  there  is  fibrin 
there,  the  bleeding  often  stops  if  nothing  is  done. 

47  It  is  in  the  capillaries  that  nutrition  of  organs 
takes  place.  Here  the  red  blood  corpuscles  give  up 
their  oxygen  and  take  up  carbonic  acid.  48  Here,  in 
some  mysterious  way,  the  different  foods  needed  by 
the  various  organs  pass  out  of  the  blood  into  the  tis- 
sues, and  the  waste  material  is  taken  into  the  blood  ; 
by  osmosis,  we  say.  Yet  this  does  not  clearly  explain 
it,  for  if  it  were  merely  osmosis,  why  will  certain  sub- 
stances held  in  the  blood  in  solution  pass  through  at 
one  point  and  certain  others  at  other  points?  "  Here 
a  nerve  says,  "  I  need  a  little  phosphorus,"  and  the 
phosphorus  leaves  the  blood  and  goes  to  the  nerve, 
and  the  worn-out  nerve  particles  are  passed  into  the 
capillaries.  60  Here  a  bone  says,  "  I  need  lime  and 
soda";  a  muscle  says,  61  "  I  need  albumen  ";  the  hair 
says,  M  "  I  must  have  iron  ";  and  the  nails  say,  63  "  Give 
me  silica";  and  each  one  gets  just  what  he  needs,  and 
nothing  else.     I  said,  "  Gets  just  what  he  needs,"  but 

7 


94 


THE  HOUSE  BEAUTIFUL. 


he  "  can't  get  it  if  it  is  not  in  the  blood,  and  some- 
times the  bones  do  not  get  what  they  need,  and  they 
get  soft  and  weak  and  bend  easily,  and  the  person 
perhaps  becomes  deformed,  has  bow-legs  or  a  crooked 
spine  ;  or  the  nerves  fail  to  find  their  food  ;  or  the 
muscles  theirs,  and  then  there  is  trouble  all  over  the 
house,  and  we  say,  "  It  is  sick." 

s  The  Great  Architect  has  provided  everything 
needful  to  keep  the  house  in  perfect  repair,  if  we  only 
have  the  wisdonruto  select  the  foods  which  contain  it. 
48  The  various  animals  given  us  for  food  ;  the  grains 
which  make  golden  our  field  in  autumn,  the  fruits 
which  hang  in  luscious  clusters  from  vine  and  tree, 
each  and  all  contain  the  various  elements  of  which 
our  wonderful  dwelling  is  made.  Ought  we  not  daily 
to  thank  Him,  and  to  live  so  that  our  House  Beautiful 
may  in  truth  be  a  fit  temple  for  the  indwelling  of  His 
Holy  Spirit? 


CHAPTER    XIII. 

THE   LAUNDRY. 

1  The  washerwoman  of  our  beautiful  house  is  a  very 
important  and  aristocratic  personage,  and  has  a  spe- 
cial  entrance  for  herself. 

She  has  also  a  very  pretty  name,  Aura. 

"  I  know  who  that  is.  Aura  is  a  Latin  word  mean- 
ing air." 

Yes.  And  2  here  she  comes,  all  sweet  and  pure  and 
bright,  and  she  enters  at  the  two  round  openings  un- 
der the  portico,  called  nostrils,  and  climbs  a  winding 
stairway,  up  and  back,  3  and  if  she  is  cold  this  warms 
her  somewhat,  4  and  if  any  foreigners,  such  as  parti- 
cles of  dust,  are  trying  to  enter  with  her,  they  are 
kept  out  by  guardsmen  stationed  there. 

She  now  enters  the  same  chamber  from  which  the 
kitchen  stairs  descend,  but  she  is  not  going  into  the 
kitchen. 

5  She  crosses  the  head  of  the  kitchen  stairs,  and  a 
little  trap -door  discloses  another  stairway,  down 
which  Aura  hastens  into  the  laundry.  6  This  stair- 
way is  called  the  trachea,  or  windpipe,  and  is  made 
of  about  sixteen  rings  of  7  cartilage  or  gristle,  which 
are  firm  enough  to  keep  the  passageway  always 
open.     8  Passing  into  the  chest,  the  trachea  divides, 

(95) 


56 


THE  HOUSE  BEAUTIFUL 


and   we   have  two  stairways,  9  leading,  one  into  the 
right,  the  other  into  the  left  division  of  the  laundry. 
10  These  are  called  the  bronchial  tubes,  and  they  in 
their  turn  divide  and   subdivide   until  they  become 


Trachea  and  Bronchial  Tubes. 

6.  Bifurcation  of  trachea  into  right  and  left  bronchial  tubes,  which  divide  and  sub- 
divide like  the  branches  of  a  tree.     9,12.  Trachea,     io.  Larynx. 

very  minute,  and  each  one  terminates  in  a  u  tiny  little 
tub  called  an  air-cell,  one  two-hundredth  of  an  inch 
in  diameter,  as  we  say,  12  meaning  that  two  hundred 
of  them  would  make  a  row  an   inch   long.     13  There 


THE  BROXC/IIAL    TUBES 


97 


are  six  hundred  millions  of  these  tiny  tubs,  and  that 
is  more  than  you  or  I,  or  any  one  else  can  compre- 
hend. 

M  The  walls  of  these  air-cells  are  so  thin  that  ten 


The  Air-Cells,  or  the  Stationary  Tubs  of  the  Laundry. 

.  A  bronchial  tube.     2,  2,  2.  Air-cells  or  vesicles.     3,  4.  A  bronchial   tube  and 
vesicles  laid  open. 

of  them  would  hardly  make  the  thickness  of  a  sheet 
of  w(riting-paper,  but  they  are  very  tough  and  strong. 

15  If  you  could  spread  this  thin  membrane  out  over 
a  flat  surface,  it  would,  if  Professor  Lindenau  is  cor- 
rect, be  enough  to  cover  ten  or  twelve  rooms  as  large 
as  your  mamma's  parlor,  if  that  is  fifteen  feet  one  way 
and  sixteen  feet  the  other. 

You  have  already  16  learned  how  the  blood  is  car- 
ried from  the  right  heart  to  the  lungs,  which  are  the 
laundry,  through  the  pulmonary  artery,  which,  on 
reaching  the  lungs,  divides,  and  divides  again  and 
again  until  the  little  tubes  are  17so  small  that  three 
thousand  of  them  could  lie  side  by  side  in  a  space  an 
inch  wide,  ,8and  so  beautifully  are  they  interwoven 
that  if  looked  at  through  a  microscope  they  resemble 
delicate  lacework.  19  These  wondrously  small  blood- 
vessels are  called  capillaries  (a  word   meaning  hairs). 


98 


THE  HOUSE  BEAUTIFUL. 


,0  and  they  encircle  the  outside  of  every  little  air-cell, 
or  tub,  S1  and  are  filled  with  the  soiled  blood  which 
has  come  to  the  laundry  to  be  washed.  "  But  the 
blood  is  a  liquid  ;    how  can  it  be  washed  ?  "    Ah  !  this 


The  Capillary  System. 

Representing  the  anastomoses  of  the  blood-vessels  which  form  the  capillaries,  as 
seen  in  the  web  of  a  frog's  foot  by  the  aid  of  the  microscope,  i,  i.  The  veins. 
2,  2,  2.  The  arteries. 

washing  of  the  blood  is  truly  wonderful,  but  I  hope 
to  explain  it  so  that  you  may  clearly  understand  it. 
"The  laundry  consists  of  two  large  rooms  located  in 
a  part  of  the  House  Beautiful  called  the  thorax 
or  chest.  23  These  rooms  are  elastic.  24  The  thorax 
has  a  floor  called  the  diaphragm.  It  is  not  a  level 
floor,  but  curves  upwards  so  that  on  the  upper  side  it 
is  convex,  and  on  the  under  side  concave. 

M  You  will  be  able  to   understand  that  this  makes 


HOW  WOMEN  BREATHE,  A.VD   WHY. 


99 


the  cavity  of  the  thorax  smaller  than  if  the  dia- 
phragm went  straight  across.  "  The  bony  walls  of 
the  thorax  are  the  spine  in  the  back  ;  the  sternum, 
or  breast-bone,  in  front,  and  the  ribs  on  the  sides. 
"  These  bony  walls  are  covered  with  muscular  walls, 
and  when  we  breathe  in  the  air  these  muscular  walls 
contract  and  raise  the  ribs,  and  the  diaphragm  de- 
scends in  the  middle,  becoming  more  nearly  level, 
and  thus  room  is  made  for  the  lungs  to  grow  larger. 
ss  When  we  breathe  the  air  out,  we  just  let  go,  as  it 
were,  and,  like  a  rubber  ring  that  has  been  stretched, 
the  ribs  fall  back  to  their  places,  the  diaphragm  rises 
to  its  place,  the  air  is  sent  out,  and  the  lungs  are 
ready  to  be  filled  again.  29  Breathing  in,  is  inspiration, 
and  as  it  requires  effort,  is  called  active ;  breathing 
out,  is  expiration,  and  as  it  requires  no  effort,  is  called 
passive.  so  Both  together  are  respiration.  We  some- 
times say  of  persons  that  they  have  expired ;  that 
means  that  they  have  breathed  the  air  out  of  their 
lungs,  never  to  breathe  it  in  again. 

81  And  now  I  will  tell  you  a  secret  that  many  of 
our  wise  physiologists  have  not  yet  found  out.  They 
say  that  men  breathe  differently  from  women  ;  that 
in  men  the  lower  end  of  the  sternum  moves  forward 
farther,  the  diaphragm  descends  lower  and  becomes 
more  nearly  straight,  and  the  walls  of  the  abdomen 
are  pushed  forward,  and  thus  rise  and  fall  with  each 
breath  ;  while  in  women  the  sternum  and  diaphragm 
are  less  movable,  and  therefore  the  upper  part  of  the 
chest  heaves  with  the  breathing.  And  they  say, 
"  "  Thus  we  have  two  types  of  breathing,  the  abdomi- 


r  00  THE  HO  USE  BE  A  U  TIF  UL. 

rial  or  masculine,  and  the  thoracic  or  feminine." 
Now  comes  my  secret.  33  If  you  should  dress  a  man 
tightly  about  the  waist  as  women  dress,  his  sternum 
and  diaphragm  would  not  be  movable  either,  and  in 
order  to  breathe  at  all  he  would  be  obliged  to  adopt 
the  feminine  type.  Good  teachers  of  music  and  elo- 
cution all  say  that  their  lady  pupils  nearly  always 
have  to  be  taught  how  to  breathe  with  the  abdomi- 
nal muscles  before  they  can  have  good  control  of 
their  voices.  35  All  babies  know  how  to  breathe,  and 
I  think  it  would  be  wise  for  all  girls  and  women,  in 
this  respect,  to  remain  as  little  children. 

38  When  Aura  entered  the  nostrils  she  came  with 
alacrity,  partly  because  she  had  received  an  urgent 
invitation,  and  partly  because  it  is  her  nature  to  rush 
into  every  place  that  is  opened  or  left  open.  Z1  She 
is  always  busy  trying  to  do  good  by  cleaning  up 
everybody  and  everything.  Many  washerwomen  have 
a  washing  fluid  which  they  consider  a  very  great 
assistance  in  removing  the  dirt  from  clothing.  38  Aura, 
too,  has  something,  but  it  is  neither  fluid  nor  crystal, 
it  is  a  gas,  with  which  she  not  only  removes  dirt  and 
impurities  from  the  blood,  but  she  also  uses  it  as  a  food 
with  which  to  build  up  the  tissues.  It  is  called 
oxygen. 

When  the  thorax  is  enlarged  Aura  rushes  in  to  fill 
the  laundry,  and  takes  with  her  oxygen  as  a  part  of 
herself.  S9  She  fills  every  air-cell,  and  at  once  receives 
from  the  blood  the  carbonic  acid  gas  which  made  it 
dark-colored  and  sluggish,  40  and  in  turn  gives  to  the 
blood  the  oxygen,  which  4I  makes  the  blood  a  brighr 


SHE  HE  7  UK XS   YOUR  FRIEND. 


IG< 


scarlet  color  and  endues  it  with  new  life-giving  proper- 
ties with  which  to  repair  the  body.  But  a  most  won- 
derful change  has  taken  place  in  Aura.  *'2  She  came 
in  your  friend  ;  she  is  sent  back  up  the  dark,  winding 


Heart  and  Lungs. 


The  anterior  aspect  of  the  anatomy  of  the  heart  and  lungs,  i.  Right  ventricle  ; 
the  vessels  to  the  left  of  the  number  are  the  middle  coronary  artery  and  veins. 
2.  Left  ventricle.  3.  Right  auricle.  4.  Left  auricle.  5.  Pulmonary  artery. 
6.  Right  pulmonary  artery.  7.  Left  pulmonary  artery.  8.  Remains  of  the  duc- 
tus arteriosus.  9.  Aortic  arch.  10.  Superior  cava.  it.  Arteria  innominata :  in 
front  of  it  is  the  right  vena  innominata.  12.  Right  subclavian  vein  ;  behind  it 
is  its  corresponding  artery.  13.  Right  common  carotid  artery  and  vein.  14. 
Left  vena  innominata.  15.  Left  carotid  artery  and  vein.  16.  Left  subclavian 
artery  and  vein.  17.  Trachea.  18.  Right  bronchus.  19.  Left  bronchus.  20, 
20.  Pulmonary  veins  ;  iS,  20,  from  the  root  of  the  light  lung  ;  and  7,  19,  20,  the 
root  of  the  left.  21.  Upper  lobe  of  right  lung.  22.  Its  middle  lobe.  23.  Its  in- 
ferior lobe.     24.  Superior  lobe  of  left  lung.     25.  Its  lower  lobe. 


stairway,  no  longer  sweet  and  pure,  but  soiled  and 
unclean  in  dress,  and  even  deadly  in  her  intentions. 
"  Should  you   invite  her  immediately  to  return,  she 


102  THE  HOUSE  BEAUTIFUL. 

will  accept  your  invitation,  but  she  does  it  as  youf 
enemy,  only  to  strike  at  your  very  life.  "  But  let  her 
go  away  for  a  time  and  shake  her  garments  in  the 
wind,  and  sun  them  in  the  light  of  heaven,  and  she  is 
again  your  friend. 

But  how  does  the  oxygen  get  into  the  blood,  and 
the  carbonic  acid  gas  get  out,  when  there  is  always  a 
thin  membrane  between  the  blood  in  the  capillaries 
and  Aura  in  the  air-cells  ?  It  is  by  osmosis.  45  If  you 
should  fill  a  tumbler  with  milk,  and  tie  over  the  top  of 
it  a  fresh  bladder,  so  tightly  that  the  milk  could  not 
run  out,  and  should  then  immerse  it  in  a  dish  of  wa- 
ter, you  would  find  that  the  milk  became  watery,  and 
the  water  milky ;  showing  that  milk  had  passed 
through  the  bladder  into  the  water,  and  water  had 
passed  into  the  milk.  This  is  called  osmosis,  or  the 
passage  of  fluids  through  animal  membrane.  46  And 
this  is  what  takes  place  in  the  lungs,  only  it  is  gases 
that  pass  in  and  out  instead  of  fluids.  It  is,  then,  by 
osmosis  that  the  blood  is  washed. 

This,  then,  is  what  Aura  has  to  do:  carry  oxygen 
into  the  lungs  and  bring  out  carbonic  acid ;  *7  and 
she  goes  in  and  out  about  twenty  times  in  a  minute, 
in  a  person  between  fifteen  and  twenty  years  of  age. 
Not  so  often  when  we  are  asleep ;  a  little  less  fre- 
quently as  we  grow  older,  but  more  frequently  when 
we  are  younger.  It  is  well  enough  to  remember  that 
every  time  we  breathe,  the  heart  beats  about  four 
times. 

Why  do  we  breathe?  "To  carry  air  into  the 
lungs."     That  is  true ;    but  that  is  not  all  the  truth 


TIDAL  AIR.  IO3 

*•  We  breathe  air  into  the  lungs  so  that  we  may  get 
oxygen  into  the  blood.  i9  Oxygen  is  the  most  im- 
portant food  of  the  body.  It  is  estimated  that  one- 
half  of  the  body  is  made  up  of  oxygen,  so  that  there 
is  a  constant  demand  for  it.  5U  We  can  not  feed  the 
lungs  two  or  three  times  a  day,  as  we  can  the  stomach  ; 
the  supply  must  be  constant.  We  often  think,  when 
we  are  hungry,  bl  that  it  is  the  stomach  that  is  asking 
for  food,  but  in  reality  it  is  every  part  of  the  body 
that  is  saying,  "  I'm  hungry."  So  with  thirst.  It  is 
not  merely  the  mouth  and  throat  that  want  water ; 
i§  it  is  the  blood  and  all  the  tissues  that  cry  out,  "  We 
are  thirsty."  And  when  we  feel  suffocated,  and  gasp 
for  breath,  it  is  a  cry  of  the  whole  body  for  oxygen. 
"  Sighing,  from  whatever  cause,  is  evidence  of  lack  of 
oxygen  in  the  blood  ;  the  same  is  true  of  yawning. 

64  You  must  not  think  that  the  lungs  are  filled  and 
emptied  at  every  breath,  for  it  is  not  so.  But  before 
I  say  more  on  this  point  I  must  talk  to  you  a  little 
about  cubic  inches.  Now,  don't  pout  and  say,  "  I 
don't  like  figures,  they  are  not  interesting,"  for  you 
may  be  mistaken  ;  and  you  ought  to  learn  about  cubic 
inches,  for  that  is  the  way  volume  is  measured.  "  Do 
you  know  what  -a  cube  is  ?  Baby's  letter  blocks  are 
cubes.  If  you  examine  them  you  find  that  each  one 
has  six  equal  sides,  and  all  its  angles  are  right  angles. 
If  each  side  is  an  inch  square  the  whole  block  would 
be  a  cubic  inch.  "A  pint  cup  holds  about  thirty 
cubic  inches,  and  "that  is  nearly  the  amount  of  air  that, 
in  a  grown  person,  goes  in  and  out  with  every  breath. 
"  This  we  call  tidal  air.     "  But  if  we  try,  we  can  take 


104 


THE  HOUSE  BEAUTIFUL. 


in  more  air — about  one  hundred  cubic  inches.  This 
is  called  complemental  air;  and  be  sure  you  spell  it 
with  an  e,  and  not  an  L  If  we  co  make  an  effort  we 
can  breathe  out  more  than  the  pint  of  tidal  air — about 
one  hundred  cubic  inches — which  we  call  reserve  air, 
for  we  have  it  in  reserve  to  use  when  we  run  or  work 
hard.  61  But  there  is  a  like  amount  which  we  can  not 
breathe  out,  which  is  called  residual  air, 82  so  that  you 
see  the  whole  capacity  of  the  lungs  is  about  eight 
pints,  and  this  we  call  the  vital  capacity ;  that  is,  our 
ability  to  live.  But  if  only  one-eighth  of  the  air  in 
the  lungs  goes  in  and  out  constantly,  how  can  the 
blood  get  oxygen  and  give  up  its  carbonic  acid  gas  ? 
You  will  understand  this  when  I  tell  you  that  the  Gas 
family  have  a  very  familiar  way  of  associating  with 
each  other.  63  If  you  fill  a  cup  full  of  water  you  can 
not  put  in  another  cup  full  of  water  or  milk  without 
making  it  run  over ;  but  that  is  not  the  case  with  the 
Gas  family.  You  could  fill  the  cup  with  oxygen,  and 
then  with  hydrogen,  and  then  with  nitrogen,  and  the 
cup  would  not  run  over.  Each  would  fill  it  full,  and 
yet  all  of  them  together  would  fill  it  no  more  than 
full.  64  This  is  called  the  diffusion  of  gases,  and  it  is 
because  they  mix  with  each  other  in  this  way  that 
oxygen  circulates  throughout  the  lower  parts  of  the 
lungs. 

66  There  are  millions  of  active  little  fellows  called 
Cilia,  which  are  like  little  short  hairs  growing  all 
along,  and  standing  out  from  the  bronchial  tubes,  who 
assist  in  this  work.  "6  They  are  always  in  motion, 
lashing  the  air  and  driving  it  from  within  outward: 


OXYGEN  A  FOOD.  105 

and  thus  aid  in  distributing  the  gases  upon  which  the 
aeration  of  the  blood  depends. 

What  a  fine  thing  it  is  that  all  this  wonderful  pro- 
cess  of  cleansing  the  blood  and  providing  oxygen  for 
the  tissues  is  not  dependent  upon  our  thought  ! 
Night  and  day  we  breathe  without  thinking  about  it. 
57  Yet  we  ought  to  think  about  it  enough  to  provide 
ourselves  with  as  pure  air  as  possible ;  to  give  our 
lungs  plenty  of  room  to  work ;  and  to  use  the  proper 
muscles  in  breathing. 

8  We  should  never  forget  that  oxygen  is  food  for 
the  blood  and  tissues,  and  should  be  as  free  from  poi- 
son as  any  other  food  of  the  body.  We  should  let 
Aura  come  freely  into  our  living  and  sleeping  rooms 
to  cleanse  them  of  all  impurities,  C9but  we  should  be 
careful  that  she  does  not  take  into  the  lungs  with  her 
any  such  poisons  as  tobacco ;  for  smoke  is  even  more 
hurtful  to  the  delicate  structures  of  the  lungs  than  to 
the  eye,  and  we  would  never  put  tobacco  smoke  into 
our  eyes. 

70  The  pollution  of  wells,  rivers,  and  lakes  is  punish- 
able by  law,  and  we  have  an  equal  right  to  demand 
that  the  air  we  breathe  shall  also  be  free  from  pollu- 
tion. It  is  more  than  rudeness,  it  is  morally  wrong ; 
and  is  it  not  even  a  crime  for  tobacco-smokers  to  poi- 
son the  air  which  their  neighbors  must  breathe  ?  We 
should  insist  upon  it  as  far  as  possible  that  Aura 
should  enter  the  laundry  of  our  House  Beautiful,  as 
pure  and  sweet  as  God  has  made  her.  71  We  should 
also  insist  upon  it,  by  night  and  day,  that  she  should 
enter  and  depart  by  the  door  which  has  been  provided 


1 06  THE  HO  USE  BEA  U  TIFUL. 

for  her,  and  never  by  the  pink  folding-doors,  unless  in 
a  great  emergency.  There  is  one  very  curious  thing 
about  her  coming  in  at  night.  7S  If,  while  we  are  asleep, 
the  folding-doors  drop  apart,  she  creeps  in  through 
them,  not  quietly,  like  a  thief  in  the  night,  but  with  a 
queer  noise,  a  gurgling,  rasping,  and  blowing  sound, 
as  if  she  were  trying  to  waken  us  up  to  shut  the  door. 
This  is  what  we  call  snoring,  and  is  not  only  an  un- 
pleasant but  an  unhealthful  habit.  7S  Be  sure  to  shut 
the  folding-doors  tightly  when  you  go  to  bed,  and 
keep  them  shut.  And  to  do  this  you  must  keep  them 
shut  during  the  day  when  not  obliged  to  open  them. 

74  It  gives  a  very  foolish  expression  to  the  face,  to  go 
with  the  mouth  open.  If  you  wish  to  look  and  feel 
brave  and  courageous,  close  your  lips  firmly  together. 
If  you  wish  to  keep  dust  and  germs  of  disease  out  of 
your  lungs,  keep  your  mouth  shut  when  you  breathe. 

75  If  you  wish  to  have  a  clear,  sweet  voice ;  to  avoid 
colds ;  to  look  as  if  you  knew  something ;  to  avoid 
sore  throats  and  coughs ;  in  short,  if  you  wish  to  be 
healthy,  wealthy,  and  wise,  shut  your  mouth  and  open 
your  eyes. 


CHAPTER   XIV. 

THE   FURNACE. 

I  HAVE  just  been  calling  on  a  lady  who  sat  in  a 
cheerful  room  by  an  open  coal  fire,  which  glowed  so 
brilliantly  in  the  grate  that  it  made  me  happy  just  to 
look  at  it.  When  I  spoke  admiringly  of  the  fire  and 
said  I  wondered  that  it  kept  the  room  so  warm,  the 
lady  replied  : 

"  Oh,  we  do  not  depend  altogether  on  this  fire  for 
heat.  We  have  a  furnace  in  the  cellar,  and  a  stove  in 
the  hall  besides." 

I  have  been  thinking  how  our  House  Beautiful  is 
warmed,  and  I  am  reminded  of  the  lady's  pleasant 
home,  and  how  much,  in  their  heating  apparatus,  the 
two  are  alike,  neither  depending  solely  upon  one 
means  of  generating  heat.  If  you  please,  we  will  first 
pay  a  visit  to  our  Furnace. 

1  We  find  it  located  on  the  right  side,  below  the 
Laundry,  and  even  below  the  floor  called  the  dia- 
phragm. In  fact,  it  hangs  from  this  floor,  fastened 
to  it  by  ligaments,  and  so  is  to  some  extent  movable. 
'This  Furnace  is  known  as  the  liver,  and  the  Physiol- 
ogy says  it  is  the  "  largest  gland  in  the  body." 

"  But  what  is  a  gland  ?  " 

That  is  right.  You  must  always  stop  me  when  I 
say  something  you  do  not  understand. 

(107) 


io8 


THE  HOUSE  BEAUTIFUL. 


*  Glands  are  organs  of  the  body  in  which  something 
is  manufactured  from  the  blood  as  it  passes  through 


The  Liver  in  Connection  with  other  Organs. 

a    Lungs.     3.  Heart.    5.   Liver.     6.  Gall-bladder.     8.  Stomach.      12.   Colon.     13 
Small  intestines. 

them.  The  salivary  glands  manufacture  Saliva,  one 
of  the  assistants  in  digestion.  4  The  liver  is  a  gland, 
and  manufactures   Bile.     It   also   makes  sugar;    and 


WHA  T  IS  A   GLAND? 


log 


v/here  so  much  manufacturing  is  going  on,  there 
must  of  necessity  be  a  fire.  'We  can  not  sec  the 
fire,  but  it  has  been  proven  that  the  blood  coming 
from  the  liver  is  warmer  than  that  going  to  it,  so  it 
certainly  was  warmed  in  passing  through,  and  there- 
fore we  are  justified  in  calling  the  liver  a  furnace,  are 
we  not?  even  if  we  can  not  tell  just  how  it  produces 
heat. 

"As  I  said,  it  is  the  largest  gland  in  the  body, 
weighing  from  three  to  four  pounds.  You  will 
remember  that  such  statements  are  always  made 
in  regard  to  a  grown  person,  and  for  children  are 
proportionately  less.  7  It  is  nearly  a  foot  broad  and 
half  a  foot  thick.  e  It  lies  just  behind  the  short, 
floating  ribs,  and  sometimes  when  they  are  squeezed 
by  a  tight  dress  or  corset  '  they  press  into  the  liver 
and  make  ruts  in  it,  and  then  it  complains,  10  sometimes 
by  a  pain  in  the  side,  sometimes  by  painting  the  out- 
side of  the  house  an  ugly  yellow  color,  and  making 
the  tongue  rough,  and  leaving  a  bad  taste  in  the 
mouth.  Then  people  say  they  are  "  "bilious,"  and 
that  always  means  that  the  liver  is  scolding  about 
something. 

There  are  many  wonderful  things  about  the  liver 
that  I  shall  leave  you  to  find  out  when  you  grow 
older  and  study  more  ;  12  but  I  will  tell  you  that  it  is 
divided  into  two  lobes,  the  right  lobe  being  six  times 
larger  than  the  left,  and  divided  from  it  by  a  deep 
fissure  or  crack. 

13  In  a  little  niche  in  the  right  lobe  there  is  nicely 
stowed  away  a  little  jug,  that  will  hold  about  "eight 

8 


I  io  THE  HOUSE  BEAUTIFUL. 

teaspoonfuls,  and  it  is  filled  with  the  bitterest  stuff 
imaginable,  the  bile  or  gall,  and  its  name  is  the  gall- 
bladder. Chickens  have  just  such  a  little  jug,  and 
a  cook  is  very  careful  not  to  spill  any  of  its  con- 
tents on  the  meat,  for  she  knows  it  would  not  be  eat- 
able if  flavored  with  gall.  This  is  where  Bile  stays 
when  not  needed  in  the  Butler's  Pantry  or  in  the  Din- 
ing-room. 

15 1  said  the  liver  is  divided  into  two  lobes,  but  in 
reality  there  are  various  fissures  which  divide  it  into 
five  lobes ;  and  it  has  five  ligaments  which  support 
it,  and  five  arteries  to  bring  the  blood  to  it,  and  five 
veins  to  carry  the  blood  away  from  it.  That  makes 
a  quartette  of  quintettes,  doesn't  it?  that  is,  four 
groups  and  five  in  a  group. 

Oh,  dear !  I  seem  to  be  all  the  time  having  to  cor- 
rect myself  in  this  article.  I  said  the  arteries  carried 
blood  to  the  liver ;  and  here  a  big  vein,  called  Portal 
Vein,  nudges  me  and  says :  16"I  think  you  forgot 
that  I  carry  blood  to  the  liver,  and  I  am  not  an 
artery,  I  am  a  vein."  I  am  very  glad  he  spoke  just 
then,  for  that  reminds  me  that  I  must  tell  you  about 
this  portal  vein. 

"  When  Blood  leaves  the  heart,  and  starts  to  go 
down  to  the  feet,  she  finds  a  great  many  passageways 
leading  downward,  but  they  do  not  all  go  to  the  toes. 
Some  of  them  end  in  capillaries  of  the  intestines,  and 
from  these  the  blood  is  gathered  up  in  veins  and  car. 
ried,  by  this  short  cut,  to  the  liver.  This  system  of 
veins  is  called  the  portal  system,  and  the  many  small 
veins  are  all  merged  in  a  large  one,  called  the  portal 


THE  PORTAL  SYSTEM. 


Ill 


vein.  It  is  supposed  that  the  blood  receives  from 
the  capillaries  of  the  intestines  some  impurities  that 
ought  to  be  gotten  rid  of  as  soon  as  possible,  so  they 
are  sent  at  once  to  be  burnt  up  in  the  furnace,  or  to 
be  cast  out  through  the  bile  duct  into  the  intestines, 
and  so  eliminated  from  the  system.  "  The  portal 
vein  divides  many  times  in  the  liver,  and  together 
with  minute  branches  of  another  vein  and  artery,  and 
a  duct  called  the  hepatic  duct,  forms  little  round 
knots,  which  are 
termed  lobules.  19  In 
and  between  these 
lobules  are  cells  of 
the  liver-substance. 
80  The  artery  known 
as  the  hepatic  artery 
(hepatic  means  be- 
longing to  the  liver) 
brings  the  blood 
which  nourishes  the 
liver.  21  The  hepatic 
duct  is  the  tube  which 
conveys  the  bile  either  to  the  butler's  pantry,  or,  when 
not  needed  there,  into  the  cystic  duct,  and  thence  to 
the  gall-bladder,  which  seems  to  serve  no  other  pur- 
pose than  that  of  a  jug,  in  which  the  bile  is  stored 
when  not  needed  in  digestion.  22  It  is  estimated  that 
as  much  as  two  pounds  of  bile  are  made  every  day  by 
the  liver  of  an  adult,  that  is,  a  grown  person.  u  A 
part  of  this  bile,  you  will  remember,  is  used  in  pre- 
paring fat  for  digestion,  and  a  part  is  probably  waste 


LOBULKS    OF    LlVHK. 


1 1 2  THE  HO  USE  BE  A  UTIFUL. 

material  from  the  portal  system.  Another  office  oi 
bile  is  to  keep  the  food  from  spoiling,  and  also  to 
make  it  slippery,  so  that  it  will  be  easily  moved  along 
through  the  intestines. 

*4  Just  how  or  where  the  bile  is  made,  our  wise  men 
have  not  yet  discovered  ;  but  it  is  probably  made  in 
those  wee  little  cells  in  and  between  the  lobules. 
25  And  in  these  same  cells  it  is  also  supposed  that  the 
sugar  is  made.  28  What  wonderful  little  live  kettles 
they  are !  How  is  it  possible  that  from  the  same 
blood  they  can  make  the  bitter  bile  and  the  sweet 
sugar?  It  is  more  amazing  than  any  fairy  tale  I  ever 
read.  i7  But  they  do  it,  and  we  have  learned  that 
they  make  the  sugar  out  of  the  starch  we  eat,  just  as 
saliva  changes  the  starch  to  sugar,  you  remember. 
And  we  have  learned  that  they  make  sugar  out  of  the 
albuminous  foods ;  and,  indeed,  it  would  seem  that 
some  forms  of  albumen  can  not  be  used  in  the  body 
unless  changed  into  sugar  by  the  liver. 

28  And  all  the  sweet  things  which  we  eat  have  to  be 
changed  into  liver-sugar  before  they  can  do  the  work 
they  have  to  do ;  that  is,  be  consumed  to  keep  us 
warm.  And  if  you  think  of  this  a  moment,  you  will 
see  why  it  is  best  not  to  eat  too  much  candy.  29  The 
liver  is  all  the  time  making  sugar,  and  at  the  same 
time  must  make  over  the  sweets  which  we  eat  into 
liver-sugar,  or  glycogen,  and  if  we  eat  a  great  deal  of 
candy,  we  give  the  furnace  too  much  to  do,  and  per- 
haps we  kindle  too  big  a  fire  and  have  what  we  call  a 
bilious  fever;  though  that  does  not  always  come  from 
eating  too  much  candy,  it  may  come  from  many 
other  causes. 


OXIDA  TION. 


"3 


It  is  supposed  that  this  glycogen  is  consumed  in 
the  lungs,  and  helps  to  keep  the  house  always  at  the 
same  temperature.  30And  that  is  another  astonish- 
ing fact,  that,  no  matter  how  cold  or  how  warm  the 
weather,  our  House  Beautiful  always  maintains  an 
equable  heat  —  about  ninety-eight  degrees  F.,  that 
means  by  the  thermometer  invented  by  Fahrenheit. 
Some  other  thermometers  do  not  measure  that  way, 
§p  we  use  the  F.  to  indicate  which  one  we  mean.  Nine- 
ty-eight degrees  is  pretty  warm  weather,  we  think,  in 
summer,  but  we  do  not  complain  because  our  House 
Beautiful  is  so  warm.  Indeed,  we  are  sick  if  it  gets 
one  or  two  degrees  colder,  and  also  if  it  gets  one  or 
two  degrees  warmer,  while  in  our  dwellings,  or  in  the 
weather,  we  can  endure  great  changes  without  injury. 

31  "  But  we  get  much  warmer  than  ninety-eight  de- 
grees when  we  run  fast,  do  we  not  ?  " 

We  feel  much  warmer,  but  in  reality  the  thermom- 
eter would  not  show  as  great  an  increase  of  heat  as 
we  would  suppose,  for  there  are  ways  provided  for 
cooling  us  off  when  we  get  too  warm,  of  which  we 
shall  speak  hereafter. 

But  this  fact  of  getting  warm  when  we  run,  shows 
us  another  way  in  which  heat  is  made  in  the  body. 
1  When  we  exercise  our  muscles  we  use  up  muscular 
tissue  faster  than  when  we  are  idle,  and  the  blood  cir- 
culates more  rapidly,  bringing  oxygen  to  build  them 
up  again,  and  this  oxidation  produces  heat.  33  You 
will  learn  when  you  study  chemistry  that  combustion 
is  oxidation.  When  it  proceeds  slowly,  as  in  iron, 
we  call  it  rusting ;  and  when  it  proceeds  rapidly,  as 


114 


THE  HOUSE  BEAUTIFUL. 


with  wood,  we  call  it  burning.  Whether  we  can  call 
it  burning  in  the  body  might  be  questioned,  so  we 
will  simply  call  it  oxidation,  and  understand  that  it 
produces  heat.  And  you  will  then  comprehend  why 
running  and  jumping  make  us  warm. 

34  Breathing  makes  us  warm  too.  We  may  not  be 
able  to  tell  how,  but  we  know  that  heat  must,  to 
some  extent,  be  manufactured  in  the  lungs,  or  breath- 
ing would  cool  us  off.  "  But  instead  of  the  cold  air 
cooling  us  very  much,  we  warm  it  in  our  lungs,  and 
we  stay  at  the  same  temperature.  The  ancients  used 
to  think  that  the  whole  use  of  the  lungs  was  to  cool 
us  off ;  but  we  know  better  than  that.  Through  them 
we  are  furnished  with  oxygen,  and  helped  to  keep 
warm.  Cold-blooded  animals,  you  know,  breathe 
very  little. 

86  So,  you  see,  we  have  three  modes  of  heating  our 
house  :  by  the  furnace,  by  the  laundry,  and  by  mo- 
tion. You  might  be  astonished  to  know  how  fast 
motion  will  warm  a  muscle.  "  Sawing  wood  for  five 
minutes  raises  the  temperature  of  the  biceps  muscle 
in  the  arm  two  degrees.  That  would  be  a  first-rate 
way  for  cold  boys  to  get  warm  ;  and  I  have  known  a 
broom  to  do  as  much  for  a  cold  girl. 


CHAPTER    XV. 

THE   MYSTERIOUS   CHAMBERS. 

ALL  houses,  that  are  worth  anything  for  a  story, 
have  a  mysterious  chamber, — often  with  a  secret 
door,  or  with  the  entrance-way  walled  up  so  that  no 
one  can  get  in, — and  every  one  wonders  what  strange, 
uncanny  thing  may  be  hidden  therein.  Our  House 
Beautiful  has  several  mysterious  rooms.  They  are  all 
open  to  inspection,  to  be  sure ;  yet  no  one  has  ever 
been  wise  enough  to  find  out  just  what  is  going  on 
in  them,  though  a  great  many  people  have  made 
guesses  at  it. 

1  We  have  been  told  that  secretion  is  making  from 
the  blood  a  new  material  that  is  not  found  in  that 
form  in  the  blood.  Bile  is  a  secretion  ;  so  is  gas- 
tric juice,  and  all  the  other  digestive  fluids.  2  Ex- 
cretion is  separating  from  the  blood  something  that 
already  exists  in  it  and  which  is  not  wanted  in  the  sys- 
tem, as  the  carbonic  acid  gas. 

Our  wise  men,  puzzling  over  these  mysterious  cham- 
bers, have  wondered  whether  they  could  be  for  the 
purpose  of  manufacturing  something, — that  is,  secre- 
tion ;  or  merely  for  getting  rid  of  waste, — that  is,  ex- 
cretion. s  But  all  excretory  organs  have  a  tube,  of 
duct,  for  carrying  off  the  excretion,  and  these  have 
none.     4  They  are  fitted  up  with  all  the  arteries,  capil- 

(115) 


I  X6  THE  HO  USE  BE  A  U  TiFL'L . 

laries,  and  veins,  but  no  waste-pipe.  They  are  there- 
fore called  ductless  glands.  5  There  is  nothing  new 
made  in  the  blood  as  it  passes  through  them,  hence 
they  are  not  for  secretion. 

6  One  of  these  puzzling  little  chambers,  called  the 
thyroid  gland,  is  located  in  the  throat,  a  little  above 
the  breast-bone,  and  is  fitted  to  the  front  of  the  tra- 
chea. It  is  divided  into  two  little  lobes,  or  rooms, 
each  about  two  inches  long,  and  half  an  inch  wide. 
These  rooms  are  divided  many  times  by  bands  of 
fibre,  so  that  they  are  filled  with  many  small  holes, 
a  good  deal  like  a  sponge,  and  they  are  supplied  with 
numerous  blood-vessels.  But  what  is  all  this  for  ? 
This  thyroid  gland  has  been  taken  out  of  animals,  and 
they  have  lived  and  apparently  kept  well.  It  is  often 
diseased  in  human  beings  without  causing  any  gen- 
eral disturbance.  Expert  chemists  have  analyzed  the 
blood  that  passes  through  it,  but  can  not  find  that  it 
is  in  the  least  changed.  We  shall  be  obliged  to  say 
that  we  do  not  know  of  what  use  the  thyroid  gland 
is  in  our  house.  7The  thymus  gland  is  another  duct- 
less gland,  which  is  not  found  in  the  House  Beautiful 
after  it  has  got  its  growth.  *  It  is  situated  partly  in 
the  thorax  and  partly  in  the  neck,  and  is  made  up  of 
little  masses  of  lobules  fastened  to  a  fibrous  cord,  and 
can  be  unravelled,  as  it  were.  In  little  babies  it  is 
quite  large,  and  keeps  on  growing  for  the  first  two 
years  of  life  :  then  it  begins  to  wither,  and  finally  dis- 
appears altogether.  It  would  seem  that  it  had  some, 
thing  to  do  with  growth,  though  we  do  not  know 
what ;  but  the  little  folks  keep  on  growing,  even  if 


SUPRA-RENAL  CAPSULES.  \\j 

we  don't  know,  and  none  of  us  can  tell  when  or  how 
this  strange  little  room  disappears.  The  house  does 
not  change  in  its  form,  and  we  are  unconscious  that 
we  have  one  room  less. 

9  There  are  some  tiny  little  chapels  at  the  base  of 
the  brain,  called  the  pituitary  body  and  the  pineal 
gland,  which  are  open  to  examination,  but  mysteri- 
ously closed  so  far  as  all  knowledge  of  their  use  is  con- 
cerned. ,0  Who  will  ever  find  out  and  tell  us  about 
them  ?  Perhaps  some  of  you  young  folks.  Who  can 
tell  ?  You  have  such  quick,  bright  eyes,  and  are  learn- 
ing from  us  such  wonderful  things ;  and  some  day 
you  will  study  for  yourselves,  and  in  turn  become 
our  teachers.  But  we  are  not  yet  through  with  the 
mysterious  chambers.  "  There  are  two  more,  termed 
the  supra-renal  capsules,  that  are  located  near  what 
we  call  the  small  of  the  back,  but  which  physiologists 
speak  of  as  the  lumbar  region.  These  capsules  are 
attached  to  a  couple  of  other  rooms,  called  the  kid- 
neys. They  are  in  shape  like  a  flat  triangle,  about  an 
inch  and  a  half  long.  They  are  proportionately  larger 
in  children  than  in  grown  people.  They  are  also  with- 
out ducts.  Their  walls  are  made  of  cells  inclosed  in 
tubes,  packed  closely  together.  The  interior  is  filled 
up  with  bands  and  holes,  quite  like  a  sponge,  and 
they  have  many  blood-vessels. 

A  great  doctor,  named  Addison,  thought  he  had 
discovered  what  these  supra-renal  capsules  were  for 
He  noticed  that  in  a  certain  disease  the  skin  became 
of  a  peculiar  brown,  and  he  found  that  in  most  of 
these  cases  the  capsules  were  disorganized,  or  in  a 


1 1 8  THE  HO  USE  BE  A  U  TIFUL. 

dying  condition ;  12  and  he  concluded  that  they  had 
something  to  do  with  the  formation  of  pigment  or 
coloring  matter ;  for  you  know  that  dyestuffs  are 
made  in  our  house  to  color  the  hair  and  the  skin,  giv- 
ing to  some  the  hair  and  complexion  of  the  blonde, 
to  others  that  of  the  brunette.  But  after  all  investi- 
gation, and  many  experiments  on  animals,  we  are 
told  that  diseases  of  the  supra-renal  capsules  do  not 
always  cause  a  bronzed  skin,  and  people  sometimes 
have  that  peculiar  color  when  the  capsules  are  healthy. 
They  also  tell  us  that  the  capsules  are  not  necessary  to 
life,  that  they  can  be  removed  without  serious  injury, 
and  there  they  leave  us,  still  asking,  "  What  are  they 
for?" 

15  But  now  we  come  to  the  last  and  largest  of  these 
mysterious  chambers.  It  is  a  ductless  gland  ;  it  is 
located  on  the  left  side,  above  the  hip,  and  is  called 
the  spleen.  18  In  a  grown  person  it  is  about  five 
inches  long  and  four  broad,  and  weighs  but  little  more 
than  six  ounces.  On  the  inside  it,  like  the  other  mys- 
terious rooms,  is  full  of  holes  like  a  sponge.  If  a 
spleen  is  cut  in  two,  on  the  surface  of  the  pieces  thus 
laid  open  to  view  there  can  be  seen,  with  the  naked 
eye,  little  round  or  oval  white  spots  which  have  a  big 
name,  the  malpighian  corpuscles.  They  are  little  cells 
which  grow  on  the  branches  of  the  splenic  artery,  like 
nuts  on  the  branches  of  a  leafless  tree,  and  they  are 
filled  with  capillaries.  This  makes  a  very  pretty  pic- 
ture when  we  look  at  it  through  the  microscope,  these 
little  clusters  of  cells  on  the  arteries,  but  we  do  not 
know  what  they  are  for.     17  This  whole  spleen  is  a 


THE  SPLEEN  A   CONUNDRUM. 


119 


conundrum  which  no  physiologist  has  yet  been  able 
to  guess.  They  have  noticed  that  while  the  little 
people  in  the  dining-room  are  very  busy  eating,  the 
blood-vessels  of  the  spleen  become  fuller  of  blood, 
and  they  have  guessed  it  was  a  sort  of  reservoir  for 
blood,  or  diverticulum,  they  called  it ;  a  place  to  which 
blood  might  be  diverted  or  turned,  if  there  was  dan- 
ger of  too  much  going  to  the  intestines.  They  have 
also  noticed  that  the  blood  coming  from  the  spleen 


Pancreas,  Spleen,  and  Duodenum. 

1.  The  spleen.  2.  Its  diaphragmatic  extremity.  3.  Its  inferior  portion.  4.  The 
fissure  for  its  vessels.  5.  The  pancreas.  6.  Its  head,  or  the  lesser  pancreas.  7. 
Duodenum.  8.  Coronary  arteries  of  the  stomach.  9.  The  hepatic  artery.  10. 
The  splenic  artery.     11.  The  splenic  vein. 

has  a  larger  proportion  of  white  corpuscles  than  else- 
where ;  and  they  have  guessed  that  it  was  a  place 
where  white  corpuscles  were  made.  l"  Then,  too, 
they  have  noticed  that  in  the  blood  coming  from  the 
spleen  there  were  fewer  red  corpuscles,  and  they  have 
guessed  that  it  was  a  place  where  red  corpuscles  were 
destroyed  ;  but  these  are  only  guesses.  No  one  says 
positively,  "  I  know  just  what  is  done  in  that  myste- 
rious chamber."  The  ancients  fancied  that  it  had 
something  to  do  with  the  temper,  and  when  a  person 


I2o  THE  HOUSE  BEAUTIFUL, 

was  ill-humored  they  called  it  being  splenetic,  or  full 
of  spleen.  Even  people  at  the  present  day  say,  if 
they  dislike  a  thing  very  much,  that  they  "  spleen 
against  it,"  showing  that  the  ancient  idea  has  fixed 
itself  in  the  language.  Those  ancients  had  some  very 
queer  ideas,  and  in  many  respects  we  are  much  wiser 
than  they ;  but  in  regard  to  the  spleen  modern  phys- 
iologists seem  to  know  little  more  than  the  ancients. 

ld  They  all  feel  sure,  however,  that  it  has  something 
to  do  with  moderating  the  appetite,  a  sort  of  regu- 
lator, as  it  were ;  for  they  find  that  dogs,  when  the 
spleen  is  removed,  are  voraciously  hungry,  and  eaf 
things  they  would  not  otherwise  touch  ;  but  they  act 
just  the  same  way  after  other  organs  are  removed,  so 
that  proves  nothing.  The  spleen  can  be  removed 
without  destroying  life,  and  one  eminent  physiologist 
says  that  is  really  all  we  know  definitely  about  it. 

Do  you  suppose  these  tantalizing  rooms  are  merely 
little  closets,  put  in  to  fill  up  niches  and  corners  that 
would  otherwise  be  empty,  and  that  they  serve  no 
real  purpose  in  the  household  economy  ?  I  don't 
think  so,  for  the  Great  Architect  never  makes  any- 
thing without  a  purpose,  although  we  are  not  always 
wise  enough  to  discover  what  that  purpose  is.  At 
one  time  our  whole  house  was  as  much  of  a  mystery 
as  these  few  chambers  now  are.  Through  many  cen- 
turies men  have  been  studying,  and  little  by  little  they 
have  learned  what  we  have  told  you  about  the  engine, 
the  laundry,  and  the  other  wonderful  apartments,  and 
wise  men  are  still  studying,  and  some  day  in  the  fu- 
ture some  one  will  explain  to  us  all  that  now  remains 


A  KP.  Y  TO   THE  MYSTERY.  I21 

a  mystery.  Physiologists  are  stimulated  to  study  by 
the  very  fact  of  mystery.  You  remember  that  Blue- 
beard gave  Fatima  a  key  and  told  her  not  to  open  a 
certain  room,  and  that  made  her  desire  very  much  to 
see  what  that  room  contained  ;  and  when  she  opened 
it,  she  found  it  full  of  the  dead  bodies  of  former  wives 
who  had  been  killed  for  yielding  to  their  curiosity. 
But  not  thus  will  be  rewarded  the  man  or  woman 
(and  I  wish  it  might  be  a  woman)  who  shall  unfold 
the  secrets  of  our  mysterious  chambers.  The  name 
of  that  discoverer  will  be  rendered  immortal.  The 
rooms  are  not  locked  ;  walk  in  and  examine  for  your- 
self. Somewhere  there  is  a  key  to  the  mystery,  a  clue 
to  the  unfolding  of  the  secret,  a  hidden  spring  which, 
once  touched,  will  reveal  some  wondrous  trans- 
formation to  our  gaze. 


CHAPTER     XVI. 

THE   TELEGRAPH. 

YOU  are  probably  aware  that  the  greatest  telegraph 
system  in  the  world  is  that  of  the  Western  Union 
Telegraph  Company,  the  secretary  of  which  has,  at 
my  request,  kindly  given  me  some  valuable  informa- 
tion  regarding  it.  There  are  about  fifteen  hundred 
telegraph  wires  which  enter  their  fine  twelve-story 
building  on  Broadway,  New  York.  There  are  two 
hundred  and  eighty  thousand  cells  employed,  in  all 
their  various  offices,  to  generate  electricity  and  keep  up 
a  current  over  nearly  half  a  million  miles  of  wire,  over 
which  pass  forty  million  messages  in  a  year.  These 
figures  are  overwhelming,  and  you  are  doubtful  about 
my  finding  anything  to  equal  that  in  our  little  House 
Beautiful.  Do  not  lose  courage,  young  friends,  but 
let  us  with  a  strong  faith  in  our  great  Master-builder 
begin  the  study  of  our  great  telegraph  system. 

1  Our  great  central  office  is  located  in  the  observa- 
tory, and  is  called  the  9  encephalon,  or,  as  we  know  it 
better,  the  brain.  Here  there  are  more  than  nine 
hundred  millions  of  cells  always  busy  making  our 
electricity,  which  we  call  "nervous  fluid,  and  sending  it 
off  over  myriads  4  of  little  white  threads  which  are 
our  wires,  and  which  are  known  as  nerves.  'Twelve 
pairs  of  these  nerve-cables  start  out  from  the  brain  or 

(122) 


THE  EKCEFIIALON. 


123 


central  office.     As  I  told  you,  the  great  central  office 
of  the  Union  Telegraph  Company  is  in  New  York ;  but 
in  Philadelphia,  Boston,  Chicago,  and  all  large  cities, 
there   are    great    offices 
scarcely  less  in    import- 
ance,   and    from    these, 
wires  go  to  smaller  way 
offices  in  all  parts  of  the 
country.  So  in  our  house 
we  have  a  series  of  branch 
offices.      7  They  are    lo- 
cated in   the   spinal  col- 
umn, from  which  8  thirty- 
one  pairs  of  nerve-cables 
are  sent  off. 

You  remember  9  how 
the  backbone  is  made 
up  of  twenty-six  bones 
placed  one  upon  the  oth- 
er, each  with  a  hole 
through  it,  thus  making 
a  10long  tube,  and  it  is  in 
this  tube  that  the  spinal 
cord  is  placed.  M  It  is 
made  of  the  same  mate- 
rial as  the  brain,  that  is, 
of  gray  cells  and  white 
connecting  matter. 

We  should  not  be  far  out  of  the  way  to  say  that 
there  are  more  nerve-cells  located  in  various  parts  of 
the  body  outside  of  the  brain,  than  are  found  in  the 


The  Nervous  System. 


124 


THE  HOUSE  BEAUTIFUL. 


brain,  so  that  we  may  reasonably  calculate  that  we 
have,  in  each  House  Beautiful,  two  billions  of  cells 
which  are  generating  nerve  fluid,  while  the  telegraph 
company  has  but  two  hundred  and  eighty  thousand 
for  all  their  offices,  great  and  small. 

13  In  the  brain  the  gray  cells  are  on  the  outside,  but 
:3in  the  spinal  cord  they  are  collected  on  the  interior 
14  and  surrounded  by  the  white  matter.  It  is  this 
16  white  fibrous  material  which  forms  the  connecting 
wires  or  nerves,  16and  they  issue  from  the  brain  and 
cord  in  17  fine,  white  threads,  and  are  distributed  to 
every  part  of  the  body.  18  In  certain  places  there  are 
little  bunches  of  nerve-cells  and  white  matter.  Each 
of    these   is  called  a  ganglion—  plural  ganglia — and 

19  each  may  be  considered  as  a  little  battery.  They 
are  all  very  closely  connected  with  the  grand  central 
office  in  the  head  by  the  nerve-fibres,  and  all  together, 

20  that  is,  the  brain  and  its  twelve  pairs  of  nerve- 
cables,  and  the  cord  and  its  thirty-one  pairs  of  nerve- 
cables,  are  called  the  cerebro-spinal  nervous  system. 

Telegraph  wires  are  insulated,  that  is,  21  kept  from 
touching  each  other,  sometimes  by  putting  them  up 
on  poles  at  a  distance  apart,  sometimes  by  wrapping 
each  wire  in  a  coating  of  lead  and  then  forming  them 
into  bundles  wrapped  in  another  sheath,  and  the 
whole  is  called  a  cable.  The  nerves  which  pass  from 
the  brain  and  spinal  cord  might  properly  be  called 
nerve-cables,  for  they  are  made  up  of  bundles  of  fibres 
and  each  fibre  is  a  nerve.  When  laid  together  in  a 
bundle  they  are  wrapped  in  a  sheath  called  22  the  neu- 
rilemma, and  the  whole   is  also  called  a  nerve,  and 


CONNECTION  OF  XERVE-CABLES 


12; 


sometimes  it  becomes  rather  confusing,  for  we  are  not 
sure  whether  a  single  nerve  is  meant  or  a  bundle.  So 
we  will  use  the"  term  nerve- 
cable  when  we  mean  a  bundle 
of  nerves. 

"  Each  nerve  is  a  minute 
tube,  or  tubule,  filled  with 
transparent  material,  which 
makes  it  look  like  a  glass  tube 
filled  with  a  clear  fluid.  This 
material  is  called  the  34  axis 
cylinder,  and ,J  through  it  nerve 
force  is  communicated. 

Each  fibre  goes  along  by 
itself  from  its  starting-point  to 
near  its  termination,  when  it 
divides  and  subdivides  and 
ends  in  *6  one  of  five  ways : 
either  in  a  fine  network,  or  in 
little  bunches  or  bulbs  like  the 
root  of  a  lily;  or  in  free  ends  ; 
or  in  expansions  called  end- 
plates. 

Sometimes  nerve-cables  get 
very  sociable,  "and  inter- 
change fibres  as  they  go  along, 
but  each  fibre  still  retains 
its  own  individuality.  It  merely  leaves  the  neu- 
rilemma of  its  own  cable  and  enters  the  neurilem- 
ma of  another  cable.  This  gives  them  a  wider 
connection.      It  is  like  getting  married,  which,  you 

9 


Minute  Nervous  Structure. 

The  microscopic  elements  of  the 
nervous  structure.  1.  Mode 
of  termination  of  white  nerve- 
fibres  in  loops  ;  three  of  these 
loops  are  simple,  the  fourth 
is  convoluted.  The  latter  is 
found  in  situations  where  a  high 
degree  of  sensation  exists.  2. 
A  white  nerve-fibre  from  the 
brain,  showing  the  varicose  or 
knotty  appearance  produced  by 
traction  or  pressure.  3.  A 
white  nerve-fibre  enlarged  to 
show  its  structure,  a  tubular 
envelope  and  a  contained  sub- 
stance—neurilemma  and  neu- 
rine.  4.  A  nerve-cell,  showing 
its  composition  of  a  granular- 
looking  capsule  and  granule 
contents.  5.  Its  nucleus,  con- 
taining a  nucleolus.  6.  A 
nerve-cell,  from  which  several 
processes  are  given  off;  it  con- 
tains also  a  nucleated  nucleus. 
7.  Nerve-granules. 


126 


THE  HOUSE  BEAUTIFUL. 


are  aware,  increases  the  number  of  our  relations,  and 
gives  us  a  wider  connection  and  more  extended  sym. 


Outer  border  of  white 
in  a  natural  state 


//  V \  \ 

d'  6  h   id 

Tubular  Fibre  or  Spinal  Nerve. 
*.  Axis  cylinder,  b.  Inner  border  of  white  substance,  c,  c 
substance,  d,  d.  Tubular  membrane.  B.  Tubular  fibres  ; 
showing  the  parts  as  in  A.  f.  The  white  substance  and  axis  cylinder  interrupted 
by  pressure,  while  the  tubular  membrane  remains,  g.  The  same  with  varicosities. 
h.  Various  appearances  of  the  white  substance  and  axis  cylinder  forced  out  of 
the  tubular  membrane  by  pressure,  i.  Broken  end  of  tubular  fibre,  with  the 
white  substance  closed  over  it.  K.  Lateral  bulging  of  white  substance  and  axis 
cylinder,  from  pressure.  /.  The  same,  more  complete,  gJ.  Varicose  fibres  of 
various  sizes,  from  the  cerebellum.  C.  Gelatinous  fibres  from  the  solar  plexus, 
treated  with  acetic  acid  to  exhibit  their  cell  nuclei.  B  and  C  are  magnified  320 
diameters. 

pathies.     So  a  nerve-cable  will  send  off  fibres  at  dif- 
ferent points  to  join  other  cables,  and  in  like  manner 


CONNECTION  OF  NERVE-CABLES. 


12/ 


it  will  receive  fibres  from  other  cables.  c'9  But  although 
fibres  arc  thus  sent  from  home,  as  it  were,  and  be- 
come members  of  other  cables,  they  never,  at  any 
point,  lose  their  identity  ;  they  are  one  fibre  from  the 
beginning  to  the  end,  although  through  them,  many 
cables  may  become  connected.  This  explains  why, 
when  we  are  hurt,  we  may  feel  it  in  more  than  one 
place.  It  becomes  a  sort  of  family  injury,  you  see, 
which  affects  all  the  members  of  the  family.      Some 


^ifA 


Nerves  from  the  Spinal  Cord. 
C.  Anterior  root.     D.  Posterior  root. 


one  hurts  Sarah's  boy,  and  all  of  Sarah's  family  and 
relatives  are  indignant  on  account  of  it. 

29  Nerve  fibres  are  of  two  kinds,  those  which  con- 
vey sensations,  as  the  sense  of  touch,  30or  the  feeling 
of  pain ;  and  those  which  convey  such  31  impressions 
as  will  produce  motion.  3a  They  never  interchange 
works.  A  nerve  of  sensation  never  conveys  a  com- 
mand to  produce  a  motion,  and  a  nerve  of  motion 
never  carries  a  sensation,  or  the  notice  of  a  sensation. 


I  2  8  7  HE  HO  USE  BEA  U  TIE  UL . 

A  nerve-cable  may  be  made  up  of  both  nerves  of  mo- 
tion and  nerves  of  sensation  ;  33but  although  they  lie 
side  by  side  they  do  not  communicate  to  each  other 
what  they  are  doing,  or  what  messages  they  are  leav- 
ing along  the  line.  34  They  always  go  to  headquarters 
for  information.  Of  the  nerve-cables  which  pass  out 
from  the  spinal  cord,  those  35  passing  out  from  the 
front  of  it  are  made  up  of  nerves  of  motion,  while, 
those  from  the  back  part  of  the  cord  are  nerves  3l1  of 
sensation.  In  thinking  this  over  you  may  have  some 
trouble  in  remembering  whether  the  nerves  of  motion, 
or  those  of  sensation,  come  from  the  front  or  anterior 
part  of  the  cord,  and  this  may  help  you  to  remember 
it.  When  we  make  motions  we  like  to  see  what  we 
are  doing;  so  we  will  remember  that  the  motor  nerves 
pass  out  from  the  front  of  the  cord.  We  can  feel 
without  seeing,  and  that  will  help  us  to  remember 
that  the  sensory  nerves  pass  out  from  the  back  or  pos- 
terior part  of  the  cord. 

By  this  wonderful  Telegraph  every  part  of  our 
House  Beautiful  is  connected  with  the  central  office 
in  the  observatory  or  head.  The  commands  for  any 
great  changes  in  the  movements  of  our  feet,  or  legs, 
or  hands,  or  arms,  go  from  this  central  office. 

Do  some  of  you  open  your  eyes  at  this,  and  say 
that  you  never  before  knew  that  you  had  within  you 
a  more  wonderful  telegraph  system  than  any  which 
man  has  devised  ?  But  you  have  it ;  and  what  is  even 
more  wonderful,  you  go  along  through  life  without 
thinking  about  it,  or  even  without  knowing  it,  and 
send  and  receive  dispatches  without  making  a  mistake 


CHAPTER  XVII. 

A  WONTDERFUL    PHONOGRAPH. 

DID  you  ever  see  a  phonograph?  Tt  is  a  wonder- 
ful little  invention.  '  A  sheet  of  tinfoil  is  wrapped 
around  a  cylinder  which  is  made  to  revolve.  This 
cylinder  is  enclosed  in  a  box,  and  the  waves  of  air, 
produced  by  the  human  voice,  directed  through  an 
opening  in  this  box,  cause  a  metal  point  to  vibrate, 
and  trace  a  waving  line  upon  the  tinfoil.  If  the 
tracer  be  returned  to  the  point  of  starting,  and  the 
cylinder  made  again  to  revolve,  the  tracer  will  follow 
the  track  it  first  made,  and  you  will  hear  repeated 
the  song  you  sang,  or  the  words  you  spoke,  no  mat- 
ter how  long  since  they  were  sung  or  spoken.  You 
may  think  that  I  will  have  to  try  very  hard  to  find 
anything  like  that  in  the  beautiful  house  which  we 
call  our  body.  '  It  will  not  be  just  like  it,  to  be  sure, 
but  it  will  be  very  much  more  wonderful.  It  is 
something  which  repeats,  not  what  we  have  told  it 
3  but  that  which  the  Great  Architect  has  written  in- 
delibly upon  it.  We  found  the  system  of  nerves 
which  start  from  the  brain  and  spinal  cord,  and  which 
we  call  the  cerebro-spinal  system,  to  be  of  great  in- 
terest. We  saw  that  they  formed  a  system  of  com- 
munication from  the  brain  to  all  parts  of  the  body 
and  that   the  brain,  and  the  bunches   of  nerve-cells 

(129) 


!  ^o  THE  HO  USE  BE  A  UTIFUL. 

called  ganglia,  were  the  centres  which  governed  and 
directed  the  sending  and  receiving  of  messages.  We 
will  now  study  a  system  of  nerves  which  do  not  re- 
ceive their  orders  from  those  general  offices,  the 
brain  and  cord,  but  find  their  orders  written  in  theif 
very  substance. 

4  This  is  the  sympathetic  nervous  system,  and  was 
so  called  because  it  was  supposed  to  bind  together 
all  the  various  parts  of  the  body  into  a  whole,  each 
part  sympathizing  with  every  other. 

The  sensory  nerves  of  the  cerebro-^inal  system 
start  out  from  the  back  part  of 5  the  spinal  cord,  and 
on  these  nerves  we  find  little  bunches  of  nerve-cells 
which  we  have  already  learned  to  call  ganglia. 
"  These  ganglia  are  the  beginning  of  one  division  of 
the  sympathetic  nervous  system  which  we  have  lik- 
ened to  a  phonograph. 

7  The  other  division  of  this  system  begins  in  the 
head,  also  in  ganglia  which  are  lodged  on  branches 
of  the  cerebro-spinal  system.  8  There  are  twenty- 
eight  or  thirty  of  these  ganglia,  and  they  9  pass  in  a 
double  row  down  in  front  of  the  spine  to  its  lower 
end.  °  You  see  that  the  two  nervous  systems  are 
thus  very  closely  connected  in  the  beginning,  and 
they  are  still  more  intimately  united  by  threads,  or 
fibres  which  pass  back  and  forth  between  them. 

11  In  every  part  of  the  body  we  find  the  ganglia  of 
the  sympathetic  system,  and  ,2  its  fibres  make  a  sort 
of  interlacing  network  through  every  internal  organ. 
They  are  in  the  13  mucous  membrane,  the  coats  of 
the  blood-vessels,  in  all   involuntary  muscles  such  as 


INVOLUXTARY  MOVEMENTS.  ^j 

the  stomach,  intestines,  and  heart,  and  even  in  the 
skin. 

14  In  some  places  a  great  many  fibres  from  differ- 
ent ganglia  mingle  together,  forming  a  fine  close 
network  which  is  called  a  plexus.  You  will  see  that 
this  makes  a  very  close  connection  between  the 
nerves,  from  which  all  these  different  fibres  come, 
and  enables  us  to  understand  how  trouble  in  one  part 
of  the  body  may  make  pain  in  a  part  quite  distant. 

We  have  now  learned  the  anatomy  of  these  nerves. 
That  is,  we  have  learned  their  construction.  We 
will  next  learn  their  physiology,  that  is,  their  work- 
ing. The  cerebro-spinal  system  receives  messages 
from,  and  carries  messages  to,  15  the  brain  ;  as  in  a 
telegraph  system,  messages  are  received  at  the  gen- 
eral office.  16  But  this  sympathetic  system,  although 
conveying  orders,  does  not  receive  them  from  the 
brain,  but  from  the  Great  Architect  himself. 

In  other  words,  the  orders  which  it  carries  do  not 
come  from  the  brain,  and  are  not  under  the  con- 
trol of  the  will.  There  are  many  things  17  going  on 
all  the  time  in  the  body  which  are  not  under  our 
control,  and  all  of  these  are  governed  by  the  sym- 
pathetic nervous  system.  18  We  breathe  night  and 
day,  whether  we  think  of  it  or  not.  This  action  of 
the  lungs,  taking  in  the  air,  and  sending  it  out 
again,  is  according  to  the  law  which  is  written  on 
the  substance  of  each  little  ganglion  of  the  sympa- 
thetic nervous  system,  just  as  the  tracings  are 
made  on  the  tinfoil  of  the  phonograph. 

9  We  can  indeed  govern  to  a  certain  extent  the 
action  of  the  lungs.    We  can  make  ourselves  breathe 


1 3  2  THE  HO  USE  BEA  U  TIF UL. 

fast  or  slow,  while  we  are  thinking  about  it ;  we  can 
even  refuse  to  breathe  at  all  for  a  time.  This  we  do 
through  those  fibres  which  pass  from  the  brain  and 
cord  to  the  ganglia  of  the  sympathetic.  But  we  have 
only  a  very  limited  control  of  our  breathing.  As 
soon  as  we  think  of  something  else  our  lungs  pass 
wholly  under  the  control  of  the  sympathetic  system, 
and  we  breathe  without  thinking  that  we  are  breath- 
ing. And  what  a  wise  arrangement  it  is.  For  if  we 
had  to  think  of  it  all  the  time  we  should  not  be  able 
to  do  anything  else,  not  even  to  eat,  or  talk,  or  play. 
Up  to  20  a  certain  point,  swallowing  is  under  the  con- 
trol of  the  brain,  but  after  the  food  has  entered  the 
oesophagus  it  is  then  no  longer  subject  "  to  the  com- 
mands of  the  brain,  but  to  the  sympathetic  nerves, 
and  does  itself,  or,  as  we  say,  becomes  involuntary. 

It  is  well  to  remember  this  fact,  and  to  put  nothing 
into  the  mouth  which  it  would  be  dangerous  or  hurt- 
ful to  swallow. 

22  Digestion  is  a  process  that  is  wholly  involuntary. 
As  soon  as  food  enters  the  stomach,  the  nerves  of  the 
M  sympathetic  system  begin  to  trace  the  orders  that 
have  been  divinely  impressed  upon  them,  and  com- 
mand the  secretion  of  gastric  juice,  and  the  churning 
of  the  food  by  the  stomach.  When  it. is  digested, 
they  feel  the  impression  that  it  must  be  passed  along 
into  the  duodenum  ;  "4  and  here  the  order  is  given 
that  pancreatic  juice  must  be  furnished;  lhat  bile 
must  be  squeezed  out  of  the  gall-bladder  into  the 
gall-duct,  and  sent  where  it  is  needed.  26  In  this  way 
the  food  is  passed  along  into  the  small  intestines, 
taken  up  by  the  villi, 26  transferred  through  mesenteric 


THE  KIDNEY  ASSISTS.  13^ 

glands  to  OT  the  thoracic  duct,  and  then  emptied  into 
18  the  jugular  vein  at  the  2fl  left  side  of  the  neck.  This 
routine  is  repeated  everyday;  and  every  time  food 
is  taken  into  the  stomach  the  tracer  is  moved  back 
to  the  starting-point  and  repeats  the  divine  orders. 
In  this  process  of  digestion  all  of  the  contents  of  the 
intestines  are  not  absorbed.  30  Some  of  them  are  not 
nourishing,  and  are  passed  down  into  the  scavenger- 
box,  which  is  the  large  intestine  or  colon.  Through 
this  same  system  an  order  is  sent  to  a  couple  of 
strainers  called  8l  the  kidneys,  which  are  located  in 
front  of  the  small  of  the  back,  and  in  obedience  to 
this  order  they  separate  from  the  blood  32  the  watery 
portion,  which  has  become  waste  matter,  and  send  it 
out  into  a  store-room  called  the  bladder,  where  it 
stays  until  a  command  comes  from  the  brain  for  its 
removal.  The  more  solid  contents  of  the  colon,  which 
are  to  be  cast  out  as  waste,  pass  down  into  a  portion 
of  the  bowel  called  the  rectum,  and  are  expelled  from 
the  body.  You  may  well  imagine  that  this  casting 
out  of  waste  material  is  an  important  part  of  physical 
housekeeping.  No  good  housewife  allows  waste  to 
accumulate  about  the  house.  In  the  emptying  the 
waste  pipes  of  our  bodily  dwelling,  we  find  the  closest 
connection  between  the  two  nervous  systems.  Until 
the  moment  that  this  material  is  ready  to  be  thrown 
out  of  the  body,  the  sympathetic  system  has  worked 
without  consulting  the  brain.  But  now  word  is  sent 
from  that  general  office  that  the  doors  shall  be  opened 
and  the  waste  expelled.  This  order  is  a  very  import 
ant  one,  and  should  at  once  be  heeded,  if  we  wish  to 
preserve  a  clean,  healthful  dwelling. 


CHAPTER   XVIII. 

THE     BURGLAR    ALARM. 

Man's  inventive  genius  has  devised  a  delicate  elec- 
trical instrument,  which  he,  no  doubt,  has  believed  tc 
be  something  entirely  new.  It  is  called  a  Burglar 
Alarm.  It  consists  of  an  electrical  battery  connected 
by  wires  to  every  door  and  window  of  a  dwelling.  As 
soon  as  the  last  door  is  closed  the  current  of  electric- 
ity is  established,  and  everything  is  supposed  to  be 
safe.  If  a  door  or  window  is  opened  the  current  is 
broken  and  a  bell  sounds  the  alarm,  telling  in  what 
part  of  the  house  an  entrance  is  being  attempted. 
Of  course  the  man  who  lives  in  the  house  lies  awake 
to  see  if  his  alarm  works  right,  for  he  would  not  want 
to  spend  so  much  money  and  then  have  a  failure. 

If  he  hears  the  alarm  he  is  at  once  greatly  fright- 
ened, for,  as  this  machine  is  a  Burglar  Alarm,  the  ring- 
ing of  the  bell  implies  that  a  burglar  is  at  hand,  and 
at  once  the  man  jumps  out  of  bed  and  into  a  few  of 
his  garments,  and  then  into  a  closet  and  shuts  the 
door.  He  knows  that  burglars  always  want  the 
most  valuable  thing  in  the  house,  and,  without  doubt 
that  is  himself.  His  timid  little  wife,  who  knows  that 
she  is  of  no  account,  and  therefore  in  no  danger  from 
burglars,  goes  down-stairs  to  see  what  is  the  matter, 
and  finds  that  the  burglar  is  Bridget,  who  had  the 
(134) 


NEK  VES  OF  SENSA  TION.  \  3  5 

toothache,  and  was  going  to  the  kitchen  for  her  drops. 
When,  a  few  nights  after,  the  real  burglar  does  come, 
he  opens  neither  window  nor  door,  but  cuts  out  a 
large  pane  of  glass  and  thus  effects  an  entrance,  and 
neither  the  alarm  nor  its  owner  know  anything  of  his 
presence. 

No  such  good-for-nothing  '  Burglar  Alarm  has  been 
put  into  our  House  Beautiful,  but  one  so  perfect  in 
the  certainty  of  its  workings  was  put  into  the  first 
house,  that  the  same  kind  has  been  put  into  each  suc- 
ceeding one.  2You  have  already  learned  that  bat- 
teries are  placed  in  the  Observatory,  3  and  in  the  Tel- 
egraph you  studied  the  general  construction  and  dis- 
tribution of  wires.  *  Some  of  these  same  batteries 
and  wires  are  used  in  the  Burglar  Alarm,  5  and  the 
connection  with  every  part  of  the  house  is  so  minute, 
that  you  can  not  put  the  point  of  the  smallest  needle 
upon  the  skin,  without  the  owner's  being  aware  of  it 
and  warning  you  to  stop.  8  The  nerves,  which  act  as 
the  wires,  start  out  from  the  posterior  part  of  the  spi- 
nal cord,  and  are  known  as  nerves  of  sensation,  and 
when  they  are  irritated,  or  injured,  we  feel  pain,  and 
this  is  the  alarm. 

7  Pain  is  our  very  good  guardian  and  friend,  who  is 
ever  on  the  alert  to  warn  us  when  danger  threatens 
our  house.  '  We  do  not  like  his  warnings,  but,  never- 
theless, we  should  always  heed  them,  for  he  never 
speaks  without  a  good  reason. 

9  The  nerves  of  sensation  end  in  the  skin  in  tiny 
bulbs  called  tactile  corpuscles.  10  These  are  found  in 
greatest  numbers  in  the  palms  of  the  hands,  on  the 


136  THE  HOUSE  BEAUTIFUL. 

palmar  surface  of  the  fingers,  and  on  the  soles  of  the 
feet.  "  If  we  look  at  the  ends  of  our  fingers  we  can 
see  little  rows,  or  lines,  which  are  the  papillae  of  the 
skin,  and  it  is  in  these  papillae  that  the  nerves  of 
sensation  end.  M  The  tactile  corpuscles  do  not  exist 
in  all  of  the  papillae,  and  they  are  in  greater  propor- 
tion in  some  parts  than  in  others.  13  On  the  ends  of 
the  fingers  there  are  about  four  hundred  papillae  and 
one  hundred  tactile  corpuscles,  "  while  on  the  second 
joint  of  the  finger  there  are  only  forty  corpuscles,  to 
the  square  inch.  In  the  skin  of  the  forearm — 1B  that 
is,  the  arm  between  the  wrist  and  elbow — 16  these  cor- 
puscles are  rare.  This  shows  why  some  parts  of  the 
body  are  more  sensitive  than  others.  Pain  is  not 
the  only  sensation  we  have.  18  We  can  tell  whether 
things  are  warm  or  cool  as  well  as  whether  they  burn 
or  freeze.  We  can  judge  of  the  shape  of  things,  and 
of  their  surface,  whether  they  are  rough  or  smoot'h. 
We  can  feel  pleasure  in  the  touch  of  velvet,  as  well  as 
pain  from  the  touch  of  a  very  rough  surface. 

19  The  sense  of  touch  has  been  so  highly  cultivated 
in  deaf  people,  that  they  experience  pleasure  from  the 
music  at  a  concert  by  placing  their  finger-tips  upon 
the  backs  of  the  benches. 

Thus  our  Burglar  Alarm,  like  other  senses,  at  one 
time  gives  us  protection,  and  at  another  gives  us 
pleasure. 


CHAPTER   XIX. 

THE    SIXTH    SPECIAL    SENSE. 

'You  have  doubtless  been  told  that  you  have  five 
senses,  and  perhaps  you  will  be  surprised  when  I  tell 
you  that  you  have  a  sixth  sense.  3  You  can  tell  me — 
even  if  your  eyes  are  shut — whether  you  are  sitting 
or  standing ;  whether  your  feet  are  crossed  or  not; 
whether  the  palms  of  your  hands  are  turned  toward 
the  earth  or  sky. 

How  was  the  knowledge  of  the  position  of  the 
muscles  communicated  to  the  brain  ? 

4  When  you  are  told  to  bring  in  a  pail  of  water, 
you  do  not  stop  to  think  how  much  effort  you  must 
put  forth,  to  lift  it.  You  really  take  no  thought,  but 
you  take  hold  of  the  pail.  5  You  do  not  have  to  try 
twice  before  you  succeed  in  lifting  it,  nor  does  it  fly 
into  the  air  because  you  applied  too  much  force  ;  but 
you  put  forth  just  the  right  amount  of  strength  to 
lift  it  easily. 

6  It  is  this  sixth  sense  which  knows  for  you  how 
much  force  to  use  ;  whether  an  object  is  fixed,  or  mov- 
able, and  also  the  position  of  your  muscles.  T  This 
we  call  Muscular  Sense.  8  By  Muscular  Sense  you 
learn  the  weight  of  different  substances.  '  So  acute 
^oes  this  sense  become  by  cultivation,  that  a  differ- 

(i37) 


138 


THE  HOUSE  BEAUTIFUL. 


ence  ol  one-sixteenth  in  the  weight  of  two  articles  — 
as  two  pieces  of  coin — can  be  detected. 

Step  into  a  bank  some  day  and  watch  the  teller 
counting  gold  pieces.  See  how  rapidly  he  counts, 
and  yet  the  instant  he  touches  a  coin  that  lacks  the 
required  weight,  his  muscular  sense  detects  it,  and 
it  is  thrown  out  with  unerring  certainty. 

10  Through  muscular  sense  we  have  a  knowledge  of 
what  we  are  walking  upon — whether  the  grass,  the 
stone  pavement,  a  board  walk,  or  an  ash-heap. 

Sometimes  we  appreciate  our  powers  better  after 
we  have  lost  them.  "  It  may  seem  strange,  but  it  is 
true,  that  if  a  person  has  lost  this  muscular  sense,  in 
his  back  and  legs,  he  can  not  walk  across  a  room  with 
his  eyes  shut,  without  staggering  like  a  drunken  man. 
12  If,  with  his  eyes  closed,  he  attempts  to  stand  erect, 
he  will  fall  over.  This  shows  you  how  one  sense 
assists  another.  -13  The  eyes,  in  a  measure,  take  the 
place  of  this  lost  sense. 

14  A  person  who  has  lost  Muscular  Sense  needs  to 
pay  very  close  attention  to  everything  which  he 
undertakes  to  do.  15A  mother  thus  affected  could 
hold  her  child  in  her  arms  so  long  as  she  thought  of 
holding  it ;  but  as  soon  as  any  one  began  talking  to 
her,  and  directed  her  thoughts  away  from  the  baby, 
her  arms  relaxed  and  the  child  began  to  fall.  You 
can  see  that  muscular  sense  is  very  important,  if 
without  it  you  can  not  hold  a  child  safely  in  your 
arms,  or  walk  steadily  across  the  floor.  16  My  neighbor, 
who  has  been  blind  some  eighteen  years,  is,  with  his 
two  brothers,  a  dealer  in  live  stock,  sheep,  horses,  and 


TRUE  COURAGE. 


139 


cattle.  He  feels  of  the  sheep,  and  judges  of  the 
quality  of  the  wool  ;  he  lifts  them,  and  judges  of  theii 
weight,  and  decides  on  their  value.  He  feels  the 
horses  all  over,  judges  of  their  size,  form,  condition, 
and  speed,  and  describes  them  better  than  his  part- 
ners who  have  eyes,  seldom  making  a  mistake  even 
in  the  color  of  the  animal.  His  is  the  best  judgment 
of  the  three,  and  his  brothers  always  acquiesce  in  his 
decisions. 

17  Muscular  sense  is  always  well  developed  in  those 
persons  who  perform  feats  of  physical  strength. 
Recently  in  one  of  the  great  fires  in  New  York  city, 
near  the  post-office,  a  young  woman  was  seen  to 
come  to  one  of  the  front  windows  in  the  third  story. 
She  stepped  into  the  window  and  stood  erect  upon 
the  sill.  In  a  few  moments  the  smoke  came  pouring 
out  of  the  same  window,  and  flames  were  surround- 
ing her.  She  must  move.  She  could  not  retreat. 
She  saw  that  the  next  window  was  not  on  fire,  and 
if  she  could  reach  it,  she  had  one  more  chance  of 
rescue.  She  spread  out  her  arms  upon  the  perpen- 
dicular wall,  passed  along  a  projection  not  three 
inches  wide  and  reached  the  window.  No  human 
being  could  have  done  this  without  so  great  an  emer- 
gency, to  stimulate  muscular  sense  to  its  utmost 
capacity. 

The  crowd  below  gazed  in  amazement.  Here 
again  she  stood  upright  upon  the  window-sill,  from 
which  she  would  have  fallen  in  a  moment  under  any 
other  circumstances.  '  The  firemen  tried  to  make  her 
understand  that   they  would  take  her  down   with  a 


140 


THE  HOUSE  BEAUTIFUL. 


ladder,  if  she  had  courage.  She  nodded  that  she  un- 
derstood, although  their  voices  could  not  be  heard 
While  they  were  bringing  the  ladders,  another  young 
girl  jumped  from  another  window,  with  the  expecta- 
tion of  alighting  upon  a  canvas  held  by  a  number  of 
men  below.  In  her  descent  she  struck  a  telegraph 
wire,  which  turned  her  over  and  over,  and  she  was 
killed  in  the  fall.  The  girl  stood  in  the  window  un- 
moved. The  fire  now  appeared  behind  her.  The 
ladders  came,  but  were  too  short.  A  fireman  ran  to 
the  top  of  the  ladder,  and,  standing  upon  the  topmost 
round,  could  only  reach  high  enough  to  take  her  by 
the  ankles.  "  Can  you  be  perfectly  cool  ?"  he  cried 
to  her,  "  and  make  yourself  as  stiff  as  a  piece  of 
iron?"  "Yes,"  she  said.  "Then  I  will  lift  you 
down,"  he  replied.  He  took  her  two  ankles  in  his 
two  hands,  and  lifted  her  up,  she  being  perfectly  erect, 
and  stepped  down  from  one  round  to  another,  until 
he  placed  her  feet  upon  the  ladder;  and  then  taking 
her  in  his  arms  brought  her  safely  to  the  ground  amid 
the  tears  and  embraces  and  shouts  of  the  assembled 
multitude.  Neither  of  these  two  ever  before  knew 
how  great  were  the  powers  of  their  Muscular  Sense. 


CHAPTER    XX. 

THE   ORGAN. 

If  you  were  asked  to  name  the  '  finest  musical  in- 
strument you  have  ever  heard,  what  would  it  be  ? 
Some  of  you  would  think  of  the  violin,  some  of  the 
flute,  and  others  of  the  piano.  But  what  if  you  should 
be  called  upon  to  tell  why  it  was  the  finest  instrument, 
and  to  describe  how  it  is  made,  what  then?  You 
might  not  be  able  to  describe  it,  and  probably 
you  would  only  be  able  to  say  that  it  is  best,  be- 
cause you  like  it  best.  I  can  tell  you  of  an  instru- 
ment, which  I  think  the  finest  of  all  instruments,  and 
I  will  try  to  describe  it  to  you,  and  tell  you  why  it 
is  the  most  wonderful  of  all  instruments. 

2  Please  put  your  finger  on  your  throat,  and  you  will 
feel  a  little  protuberance  called  Adam's  apple.  I 
guess  when.  Adam  was  called  upon  to  tell  why  he  ate 
the  apple,  he  was  in  such  a  hurry  to  say  that  Eve  was 
to  blame,  that  he  attempted  to  swallow  a  quarter  of 
the  apple  whole,  and  it  stuck  in  his  throat.  At  any 
rate,  there  it  is  in  the  throats  of  all  of  Adam's  sons 
and  daughters.  It  is  larger  in  the  throats  of  men 
than  of  women.  It  is  called  the  larynx.  3  It  is  a  firm 
sort  of  a  box,  situated  just  at  the  top  of  the  trachea 
or  windpipe  ;  it  is  a  box  with  sides,  but  without  a  top 
or  a  bottom.     4  It  has  a  lid  which  can  close  it  at  the 

10  (141) 


142 


THE  HOUSE  BEAUTIFUL. 


top,  but  it  usually  stands  open.  This  lid  is  called  the 
epiglottis.  It  is  6  open  to  admit  air,  which  must  pass 
through  the  larynx  and  trachea  into  the  lungs,  6  and 
it  closes  when  food  passes  across  the  top  of  the  larynx, 
on  its  way  to  the  oesophagus  and  to  the  stomach. 

7  Near  the  top  of  the  larynx  two  bands  or  chords  of 
fibrous  tissue  stretch  across  it  from  front  to  back.  8  They 
lie  parallel  with  each  other,  leaving  a  little  crack  be- 
tween them.     There  would  be  a  space  between  them 

and  the  walls  of  the 
larynx,  but  it  is 
closed  by  a  mem- 
brane and  by  mus- 
cles. 

9  If  you  will  put 
the  tips  of  your 
thumb  and  fore- 
finger together  in 
each  hand,  and  then 
put  your  hands  side 
by  side  so  that  the  thumbs  lie  parallel,  but  not  quite 
touching,  you  will  have  a  very  good  representa- 
tion of  the  larynx,  10  your  thumbs  being  the  vocal 
chords ;  only  you  want  to  fill  up  the  spaces  between 
your  thumbs  and  your  fingers,  so  that  the  air  can  only 
come  between  your  thumbs.  n  This  opening  is  called 
the  opening  of  the  glottis,  and  the  space  below  is  the 
glottis.  1S  When  we  breathe,  the  glottis  gets  larger 
as  the  air  comes  in,  and  smaller  as  it  goes  out. 

How  is  this  done  ?  At  the  back  of  the  larynx  the 
chords  are  attached  to  two  small  pieces  of  cartilage 


•c 


The  Organ. 


VARIA  TIONS  OF  TONE.  j^i 

shaped  like  a  triangle,  the  bases  of  which  are  fast  to 
the  larynx  and  can  be  rotated,  so  that  their  opposite 
angles  can  be  more  widely  separated  from  each  other 
and  thus  the  chords  are  drawn  apart. 

Now,  if  your  thumbs  were  thin,  delicate  ribbons- 
remembering  always  that  the  space  between  thumb 
and  finger  is  filled  in  with  muscle — as  the  air  passed 
through  between  these  they  would  be  moved  back 
and  forth.  I3  That  is  called  vibrating,  and  this  vibrat- 
ing, M  if  sufficiently  rapid,  would  make  a  sound  which 
we  call  a  tone. 

You  have  often  stretched  a  string  across  a  window, 
and  listened  to  the  music  which  the  wind  made  by 
blowing  over  it  and  vibrating  it.  You  found  that 
the  tone  varied  with  the  length  of  string,  ,5  a  short 
string  making  a  high  tone,  a  long  string  a  low  tone. 
The  tone  also  varies  with  the  tension  and  size  of  the 
string.  In  the  piano,  strings  of  different  sizes  and 
lengths  are  used  to  make  the  different  tones.  16  If  our 
larynx  is  to  be  a  musical  instrument,  it  must  be  able 
to  make  tones  of  different  pitch,  or  it  will  be  of  little 
account.  But  we  have  only  two  strings  to  use  ;  how 
can  we  vary  them  in  length  and  size  ? 

7  There  are  nine  little  muscles,  so  arranged  that 
they  can  draw  the  chords  nearer  together  or  farther 
apart,  and  at  the  same  time  tighten  or  loosen  them  ; 
the  tighter  they  are  drawn,  the  higher  the  tone,  as  you 
found  in  your  ^Eolian  harp. 

18  In  sounding  a  low  tone  the  glottis  is  left  quite 
open,  and  the  vocal  chords  are  loose.  The  nearer  the 
chords  are  brought  together,  the  narrower  the  glottis  ; 


144 


THE  HOUSE  BEAUTIFUL. 


and  the  tighter  the  chords,   the  higher  will   be  the 
tone. 

19  In  a  flute  a  column  of  air  is  made  to  vibrate, 
"  and  the  pitch  of  the  note  varies  with  the  size  of  the 
opening,  and  with  the  length  of  the  vibrating  column 
of  air,  within  the  flute. 

21  The  human  voice  is  made  by  forcing  air  through 
the  opening  between  the  chords. 

22  We  find  that  in  low  sounds  the  column  of  air  is 
shortened  by  the  lowering  of  the  larynx,  and  in  high 
sounds  it  is  lengthened  by  the  raising  of  the  larynx. 

23  If  you  could  draw  out  one  of  the  reeds  of  your 
melodeon,  or  parlor  organ,  you  would  find  it  to  be  a 
piece  of  brass,  with  a  brass  tongue  which  vibrates 
with  the  movement  of  the  air.  The  smaller  the 
tongue,  the  more  rapid  the  vibrations  and  the  higher 
the  tone.  So  with  the  24  vocal  chords,  the  shorter  and 
thinner  they  are,  the  higher  the  pitch  ;  the  muscles 
draw  them  together  and  stretch  them  tightly,  and  the 
15  air,  coming  from  the  lungs  and  passing  through  the 
glottis,  makes  them  vibrate,  and  they,  in  turn,  cause  the 
column  of  air  in  the  trachea  to  vibrate. 

The  piano  and  violin  have  each  a  2R  sounding-board, 
which  helps  to  develop  the  volume,  and  the  quality  of 
tone. 

There  is  in  the  frontal  bone,  above  the  eyes,  a  cavity 
filled  with  air,  that  communicates  with  the  nasal  pas- 
sages, and  which,  together  with  the  throat  and  mouth, 
forms  a  sounding-board  and  gives  resonance  to  the 
voice. 

In  a  church  organ  we  have  a  boy  to  blow  the  bel- 


THE  RANGE.  OF  THE   VOICE.  [45 

lows  and  pump  in  the  air.  '27  The  bellows  of  the 
voice  are  the  lungs,  and  the  boy  who  pumps,  is  a 
"combination  of  muscles,  located,  not  only  around  the 
lungs,  but  also  in  the  abdomen.  Many  people  never 
learn  to  use  the  abdominal  muscles  in  breathing,  and 
therefore  they  never  have  the  most  complete  control 
of  their  vocal  organ. 

We  all  know  that  there  is  a  difference  in  the  M  quality 
and  pitch  of  different  voices.  30  Sometimes  the  tra- 
chea is  short  and  wide,  and  then  the  vocal  chords  will 
be  long,  and  their  vibrations  will  be  slow,  and  that  will 
produce  the  low  tones  of  a  bass  voice. 

If  the  trachea  is  longer  and  narrower,  the  chords 
will  be  shorter,  and  will  31  vibrate  more  rapidly,  and 
this  will  give  the  quality  and  compass  of  a  baritone, 
or  tenor  voice.  s~  If  now  the  chords  are  smaller  in 
size  we  w  ill  have  a  contralto  voice,  and  if  still  smaller, 
a  soprano  voice.  Ss  Thus  you  see  that  our  very  sim- 
ple instrument  of  two  strings  has  developed  wonder- 
ful capabilities  in  the  production  of  a  great  variety  of 
sounds.  s4  The  range  of  the  human  voice  is  about 
four  octaves,  that  is,  from  the  lowest  bass  tone  to  the 
highest  soprano  tone.  35  The  average  range  of  a  sin- 
gle voice  is  about  two  and  a  half  octaves.  Madame 
Parepa  Rosa,  as  well  as  Patti,  had  a  compass  of  three 
octaves.  The  ability  to  sing  high  or  low  is  not  the 
only  difference  in  voices,  36  for  even  in  making  tones 
at  the  same  pitch,  there  is  often  a  marked  difference 
in  quality.  This  is  called  the  timbre  of  the  voice. 
37  It  depends  upon  the  formation  of  the  chords  and 
f-he  larynx,  and  not  less  upon  the  knowledge  of  how 


r^6  THE  HOUSE  BEAUTIFUL. 

to  use  the  abdominal  muscles,  and  how  to  place  the 
chords  in  order  to  make  the  required  tone.  One  may 
have  a  very  good  organ  and  not  know  how  to  use  it, 
or  else  use  it  in  a  wrong  way  and  so  not  develop  it  to 
the  best  advantage.  3R  A  good  teacher  can  change  the 
timbre  of  a  voice,  by  teaching  the  owner  how  to  use 
the  muscles  by  which  it  should  be  worked.  39  The 
strength  of  the  voice  depends  partly  upon  the  degree 
of  vibration  of  the  chords,  and  partly  upon  the  re- 
sounding qualities  of  those  parts  which  act  as  a 
sounding-board. 

Are  you  able  to  see  why  this  organ  is  the  most 
wonderful  of  all  musical  instruments?  40  It  is  like  a 
violin,  because  it  has  strings  which  are  made  to  vibrate, 
sometimes  producing  a  higher  or  lower  note,  and  in 
both  voice  and  violin  the  long  string  makes  the  low 
tone,  and  the  same  string  tightened  a  higher  tone. 

41  It  is  like  a  piano,  because  it  has  strings  vibrating 
in  connection  with  a  sounding-board. 

42  It  is  like  the  flute,  because  it  has  a  column  of  air 
in  a  tube,  which,  put  into  vibration,  causes  a  tone. 
,3  It  is  even  more  like  an  organ,  for- there  we  have  a 
column  of  air  put  into  motion  by  a  vibrating  body. 
In  the  church  organ  each  tone  is  produced  in  a  differ- 
ent pipe,  each  pipe  producing  but  a  single  tone.  But 
the  pipe  in  our  organ — the  trachea — can  be  made 
longer  or  shorter,  or  larger  or  smaller,  as  is  needed. 
It  is  really  wonderful  how  many  different  tones  can 
be  produced  by  this  simple  little  instrument.  *  The 
manner  of  producing  the  tones  is  not  more  wonderful 
than  is  the   beauty  of  the  tones  produced.     Neithei 


THE  PERFECT  HUMAN  VOICE.  \tf 

flute,  violin,  or  organ  can  make  such  fascinating 
sounds  as  the  perfectly  attuned  and  properly  ediu 
cated  human  voice. 

The  most  perfect  human  voice  can  be  heard  dis- 
tinctly above  thousands  of  other  voices  singing  at  the 
same  time,  because  the  multitude  of  voices  will  not 
be  so  perfectly  accurate.  This  was  demonstrated  by 
Mme.  Parepa  Rosa  at  the  Boston  Jubilee,  where  the 
precision  and  mathematical  accuracy  of  her  tones,  en- 
abled them  to  be  heard  in  the  midst  of  more  than  a 
thousand  singers,  and  nearly  as  many  instruments. 

It  must  have  been  after  attending  such  a  glorious 
and  almost  divinely  inspiring  Symposium,  that  Raphael 
conceived  and  painted  that  masterpiece  of  art,  where 
St.  Cecilia  is  represented  as  singing,  with  her  beautiful 
face  turned  heavenward,  while  kneeling  men  and 
hushed  angelic  choirs,  forget  the  loveliness  of  her  face, 
in  listening  to  the  ravishing  tones  of  her  human  voice, 


CHAPTER   XXI. 

THE    AUDITORIUM. 

The  visitor,  in  entering  one  of  our  finest  houses, 
passes  through  a  porch,  or  vestibule,  into  a  hall,  and 
is  then  shown  into  a  reception-room,  where  he  waits 
until  his  name  is  taken  to  the  gentleman  of  the  house. 
This  room  might  properly  be  called  the  auditorium, 
because  in  this  room  are  heard  all  desires  and  re- 
quests. As  a  rule,  such  rooms  are  furnished  with  a 
few  easy-chairs,  a  lounge,  a  magazine,  and  a  few  pa- 
pers with  which  to  while  away  the  time  of  waiting. 

In  this  house,  not  made  with  hands,  which  we  in- 
habit, we  can  find  two  rooms  which  correspond  to 
this  auditorium.  They  are  so  connected  with  each 
other,  and  that,  too,  without  an  opening  between 
them,  that  whatever  happens  in  the  one  is  at  once 
known  in  the  other. 

Looking  upon  the  sides  of  the  Observatory  we  can 
see  the  porches  which  protect  the  entrances  to  our 
double  auditorium.  They  are  very  pretty  little  por- 
ticoes, of  a  peculiar  semi-circular  shape,  a  pearly  pink 
in  color,  and  are  ornamented  with  carvings  or  mould- 
ings, strange  hollows,  and  ridges,  which  surround  a 
deeper  part,  in  the  centre  of  which  is  the  entrance. 

1  This  portico  is  called  the  pinna,  or  external  ear. 
This  indicates  that  there  is  an  internal  ear.  2  The 
(148) 


THE  MIDDLE  EAR. 


149 


pinna  is  attached  to  the  observatory  by  ligaments, 
3  and  each  has  three  servants,  or  muscles,  but  they 
do  little  work.  One  is  called  4 "  the  servant  who  raises 
the  ear";  another,  "the  servant  who  pulls  the  ear 
back";  but  you  can  tell,  by  trying,  that  they  are  of 
6  very  little  account,  in  moving  the  ears  in  any  direc- 
tion.    I  have  seen  people  who  had  these  servants  sj 


Structure  of  the  Ear. 

1.  Auditory  canal.     2.  Drum  of  ear.     3.  Hammer.     4.  Anvil.     5.  Stirrup,     6.  Mia 
die  ear.    7.  Vestibule.     14.  Eustachian  tube. 

well  trained,  that  they  would  move  the  ears  as  they 
were  ordered. 

In  the  centre  of  "the  pinna  is  a  round  doorway, 
without  a  door  to  close  it.  There  are, 7  however,  some 
guards  stationed  there  to  keep  out  intruders.  This 
6  doorway  leads  into  a  hall,  or  passage,  which  is  very 
much  like  a  tunnel.     It  is  a  cylindrical  channel  lead- 


i£o  THE  HOUSE  BEAUTIFUL. 

ing  into  a  bone,  which  is  so  extremely  hard  that  it  is 
called  9  the  petrous,  or  rocky  portion  of  the  tempo- 
ral bone. 

10  This  bony  canal  is  called  the  auditory  canal,  and 
is  lined  inside  with  membranes,  like  tapestry,  so  that 
we  do  not  see  the  walls.  It  is  not  a  straight  canal, 
but  "  at  first  it  goes  up  a  little  in  order  to  get  ovei 
a  bony  prominence ;  then  it  goes  down  a  little,  and 
all  the  time  it  is  going  a  little  forward.  1J  It  also 
gets  somewhat  smaller  as  we  proceed. 

We  soon  reach  the  inner  end,  for  13  it  is  only  an 
inch  and  a  quarter  long,  and  here  we  ,4  find  our  way 
stopped  by  a  flesh-colored  curtain.  It  is  not  such  a 
portiere  as  fashionable  ladies  have  nowadays  in  their 
houses,  that  are  hung  on  rods,  with  rings  which  slip 
easily,  and  let  one  pass ;  but  it  closes  up  the  hall  just 
like  the  bottom  of  a  box.  There  is  no  way  to  get 
through  it.  15  It  will  not  move,  and  there  is  no  open- 
ing in  it.  We  are  stopped  here,  and  we  have  not 
reached  the  reception-room.  But  come  with  me,  and 
I  will  show  you  how  we  can  get  around  on  the  other 
side  of  that  curtain.  We  will  enter  16the  round  doors 
under  the  portico  of  the  nose,  and  go  back  into  the 
pharynx,  which  is  the  upper  and  back  part  of  the 
throat.  If  we  then  look  up  a  little,  and  to  one  side, 
we  will  see  a  small  round  opening.  This  is  the  en- 
trance to  another  passageway,  leading  to  the  audi- 
torium or  reception-room. 

This  18hall  is  about  as  long  as  the  one  leading  from 
the  pinna,  and  is  1T  called  the  eustachian  tube.  Here 
we  are  then,  behind  the  curtain,  and  "in  the  audito- 


A  HAMMER  AND  ANVIL  IN    1  HE  EAR.* 


t  Si 


rium,  or  middle  ear,  which  is  an  irregular  cave  hol- 
lowed out  of  the  20same  rocky  bone.  The  usual  vis- 
itors  do  not  come  in  as  we  did.  Whoever  gets  in 
nere  must  pass  directly  through  the  substance  of  this 
curtain, 21  which  is  called  the  drum  of  the  ear,  because 
it  is  tightly  stretched  across  a  round  opening.  It  is 
not  stretched  straight  up  and  down,  but  22the  top 
leans  outward,  so  that  the  floor  of  the  canal  is  longer 
than  the  ceiling. 

The  auditorium,  where  we  now  are,  has  its  own  pe- 
culiar furniture.  There  are  no  easy-chairs,  or  books, 
or  pictures.  23  First  there  is  the  drum  we  have  been 
talking  about,  but  there  is  no  use  in  having  a  drum  if 
we  have  no  drum-sticks.  Well,  a  hammer  will  answer, 
will  it  not  ?  And  here  we  find  a  tiny  one  fastened, 
56  along  the  length  of  its  handle,  to  the  drum-head, 
from  the  top  to  the  centre.  The  head  of  the  hammer 
is  at  the  top,  and  so  close  that  it  can  touch  it,  we 
find — can  you  guess  ? — an  anvil.  24  So  you  see  that 
the  head  of  the  hammer  plays  on  the  anvil,  and  the 
handle  plays  on  the  drum-head.  Is  it  any  wonder 
that  boys  and  girls  are  so  fond  of  noise  when  they 
have  two  reception-rooms  apiece,  each  fitted  up  with 
drums,  hammers,  and  anvils?  You  might  as  well  give 
a  baby  a  rolling-pin  and  looking-glass  to  play  with, 
and  expect  nothing  to  be  broken,  as  to  furnish  a  child 
with  two  drums,  two  hammers,  and  two  anvils,  and 
expect  no  noise  to  be  made.  I  have  not  yet  told  you 
of  all  the  strange  furniture  that  we  find  in  the  audi- 
torium. "  You  know  that  a  stirrup  is  a  part  of  a  sad- 
dle.    One  of  the  strangest  places  I  ever  knew  of  for 


I  5  2  THE  HO  USE  BE  A  UTIFUL. 

keeping  a  saddle  is  under  the  bed,  and  I  think  it  is 
about  as  odd  to  keep  a  stirrup  in  a  reception-room. 
One  in  each  auditorium  makes  a  pair,  doesn't  it?  I 
wonder  if  that  is  why  children  are  so  fond  of  riding 
that  they  will  even  ride  a  broomstick,  if  they  can 
have  no  other  steed  ? 

I  sometimes  have  a  good  laugh  when  I  think  of  all 
the  odd  things  which  I  find  to  tell  you  about  in  this 
beautiful  house  of  ours.  Now  you  can  not  guess  for 
what  this  stirrup  is  used.  You  have  sometimes  seen, 
no  doubt,  old  coats  or  hats  used  to  stuff  in  a  window 
where  part  of  the  glass  was  broken  out,  but  I  am  sure 
you  never  saw  a  stirrup  used  to  close  up  the  whole 
window  in  the  place  of  glass.  27  That  is  how  the  stir- 
rup in  this  auditorium  is  used.  The  base,  or  foot 
part  of  it,  fits  snugly  into  an  28  oval  window  called  the 
fenestra  ovale. 

29  The  hammer,  the  anvil,  and  the  stirrup  are  tiny 
bones  which  are  so  30  arranged  as  to  touch  each  other. 
It  is  necessary  to  keep  the  31  drum  of  the  ear  in  tune 
like  a  musical  instrument,  and  this  is  done  by  32  three 
servants  or  muscles.  s3  Two  of  them  are  attached  to 
the  hammer,  and  one  to  the  stirrup.  84  When  they 
act,  the  centre  of  the  drum-head  is  drawn  in  a  little ; 
the  tiny  bones  are  firmly  pressed  against  each  other, 
and  the  stirrup  presses  against  the  membrane  in  the 
oval  window.  By  this  action,  the  tension  of  the  parts 
is  such  that  a  wave  of  air,  s6  striking  the  drum 
head,  communicates  its  force  to  the  hammer,  and 
through  the  hammer  to  the  anvil,  and  through  this  to 
the  stirrup,  and  through  the  pressure  of  the  stirrup 


EARS  MUST  BE  k'TPT  IN   TUNE.  ^3 

against  the  membrane  in  the  oval  window  to  the  fluid 
which  is  in  the  internal  ear. 

There  is  a  difference  in  the  position  of  the  drum 
of  the  ear  in  different  individuals,  and  it  has  been 
observed  that  those  persons  are  best  musicians,  in 
whom  it  is  more  nearly  vertical.  When  the  ear  is  tuned 
to  hear  the  highest  notes,  an  octave  or  more  above 
the  ordinary  range  is  distinctly  recognized  ;  while  at 
the  same  time  low  tones,  that  before  were  heard,  are 
now  not  audible. 

30  The  auditorium,  or  middle  ear,  is  filled  with  air 
of  the  same  density  as  the  outer  air,  and  is  9T  in  com- 
munication with  it  through  the  eustachian  tube,  by 
means  of  which  we  entered  the  auditorium.  There 
are  three  servants  who  have  charge  of  this  tube. 

Sometimes  a  sudden  concussion,  as  by  a  blow  or 
from  jumping,  causes  partial  deafness  or  pain  in  the 
ear.  It  is  well  to  remember  that  38  swallowing,  or 
moving  the  jaws  sideways  a  number  of  times,  may 
relieve  the  difficulty,  by  restoring  the  equilibrium  be-" 
tween  the  air  in  the  middle  ear  and  the  external  air. 

The  density  or  pressure  of  the  outside  air  varies 
with  every  change  in  the  weather,  and  if  that  in  the 
auditorium  was  not  of  the  same  density,  the  drum 
could  not  vibrate  so  perfectly,  and  of  course  one 
could  not  hear  as  well.  This  equilibrium  is  kept  per- 
fect through  the  eustachian  tube. 

Is  it  not  wonderful  that  our  ears  must  be  kept  in 
tune  like  a  musical  instrument,  and  that  this  is  ac- 
complished  by  means  of  two  membrane   drums,  in 


1 54  THE  HO  USE  BE  A  UTlPuL 

connection  with  six  little  bones,  in  the  form  of  two 
hammers,  two  anvils,  and  two  stirrups  ? 

It  is  almost  beyond  our  comprehension  how  we  can 
use  this  ingenious  device  of  delicate  parts  so  as  to 
hear  everything,  as  we  do,  without  knowing  how  it  is 
made,  or  how  arranged,  or  how  managed  ;  for  those 
who  know  nothing  about  it  appear  to  hear  quite  as 
well  as  those  who  know  the  most  about  its  construe- 
tion.  But  the  most  wonderful  fact  is,  that  the  Great 
Architect  who  gave  it  to  us  has  made  it  so  perfectly, 
that  it  keeps  in  order  so  many  years. 

"  Strange  that  a  harp  of  ten  thousand  strings 
Should  stay  in  tune  so  long  ! :' 


CHAPTER   XXII. 

THE   WHISPERING  GALLERY. 

If  you  should  ever  visit  the  Capitol  at  Washington, 
you  would  observe  that  a  portion  of  the  building  is 
round  and  raised  above  the  roof.  This  is  called  the 
dome,  but  it  might  well  be  called  an  observatory,  for 
from  it  you  obtain  a  fine  view  of  our  magnificent  pub- 
lic buildings,  which  are  not  surpassed  by  any  in  Eu- 
rope. The  space  within  the  dome,  from  the  floor  to 
the  top,  is  called  the  rotunda.  A  small  gallery  runs 
around  the  inside  of  this  rotunda  at  a  height  of 
nearly  two  hundred  feet  above  the  floor,  and  it  is  in 
this  gallery  that  we  are  called  upon  to  listen  to  the 
echo  of  a  whisper.  If  you  stand  at  one  point  and 
whisper  ever  so  softly,  your  friend,  who  is  standing 
on  the  opposite  side  of  the  gallery,  can  hear  the 
sound  much  more  distinctly  than  you  can;  for  the 
round  walls  reflect,  or  throw  back  the  sound-waves, 
and  concentrate  them,  at  one  point,  where  they  be- 
come very  loud  and  distinct. 

There  is  a  famous  whispering  gallery  in  St.  Paul's 
Cathedral,  in  London,  and  there  are  others  in  other 
public  buildings  in  Europe. 

You  will  '  be  surprised  when  I  tell  you  that  within 
our  Observatory  we  have  a  whispering  gallery.     But 

(i55) 


r eg  THE  HOUSE  BEAUTIFUL. 

knowing,  as  you  do,  who  the  Great  Architect  is,  you 
will  not  question  my  statement  that  it  surpasses  all 
whispering  galleries  made  by  man.  It  is,  not  only, 
more  ingenious  in  its  construction,  but  it  is  far  more 
perfect  in  its  workmanship  and  is  eminently  practical 
and  useful. 

In  order  to  enter  this  Whispering  Gallery,  we  will 
start  from  a  2  chamber  in  the  Observatory  among  the 
brain  cells,  called  the  fourth  ventricle.  Here  we  find 
'two  little  white  threads  which  form  the  clue  to  guide 
us.  *  They  together  form  what  is  known  as  the  soft 
portion  of  the  seventh  pair  of  nerves.  This  nerve 
winds  affectionately  around  the  mother  of  all  nerves, 
6  gently  kisses  its  sister,  the  facial  nerve,  and  then 
modestly  covering  itself  in  its  sheath,  hides  itself  in 
the  6  stony  portion  of  the  temporal  bone.  7  There  it 
divides,  and  a  portion  of  it  goes  8  to  the  vestibule. 

In  9  studying  the  Auditorium,  we  found  that  the 
force  of  the  sound-waves  was  10  transmitted  through 
the  chain  "  of  tiny  bones  until  it  reached  the  12  stirrup 
which  closed  the  oval  window.  If  now  we  pass 
through  this  oval  13  window,  we  enter  the  vestibule, 
which  is  the  first  division  of  the  14  Whispering  Gallery, 
or  internal  ear.  15We  have  already  reached  the 
same  place  from  the  opposite  direction,  following  the 
nerve  as  a  guide.  This  1G  vestibule  is  the  entrance  to 
a   strange  series  of  winding  galleries,  known  as  the 

labyrinth,  which  means  a  place  full  of  windings. 

The  first  thing  which  attracts  18  our  attention  are 
two  sacs,  or  bags,  which  fill  nearly  two-thirds  of  the 
vestibule.     One  of  these  is  large  and   of   an   !0  oval 


THE  LABYRINTH. 


is; 


'-vz 


shape,  and  is  called  the  utricule ;  the  other,  small 
and  round,  is  80  called  the  sacule.  These  bags  contain 
little  ai  six-sided  bone  stones,  which  have  the  name  of 
"  otoliths  or  otoconia.  And  what  are  they  for?  That 
is  another  riddle  which  our  wise  men  have  not 
guessed.  We  know  that  "they  exist  only  in  man 
in  mammals,  and  in  reptiles. 

The  labyrinth  of  the  left  ear,  laid  open  to 
exhibit  its  cavities  and  the  membranous 
labyrinth,  i.  Cavity  of  the  vestibule.  2. 
Ampulla  of  the  superior  semi-circular  canal. 
4.  The  superior  canal,  with  its  contained 
membranous  canal.  5.  Ampulla  of  the  in- 
ferior canal.  6.  Termination  of  the  mem- 
branous canal  of  the  horizontal  semi-circu- 
lar canal  in  the  sacculus  communis.  7.  Am- 
pulla of  the  middle  semi-circular  canal.  8. 
The  same  canal  with  its  membranous  canal. 
9.  Common  canal.  10.  Membranous  com- 
mon canal,  it.  Otoconite  of  the  sacculus 
communis.  12.  Sacculus  proprius  ;  its  oto- 
conite is  seen  through  its  membranous  par- 
ieties.  13.  First  turn  of  the  cochlea.  14. 
Extremity  of  the  scala  tympani,  correspond- 
ing with  the  fenestra  rotunda.  15.  Lam- 
ina spiralis.  18.  Half  turn  of  the  cochlea. 
19.  Lamina  spiralis,  terminating  in  its  falciform  extremity.  The  dark  space  in- 
cluded within  the  falciform  curve  of  the  extremity  of  the  lamina  spiralis  is  th« 
helicotrema.     20.  The  infundibulum. 

Opening  out  of  the  vestibule  24  are  five  small,  round 
doors,  and  one  large  one.  If  we  enter  any  one  of 
these  small  doors,  we  find  "ourselves  in  a  cylindrical, 
membranous  passage,  which  is  surrounded  by  26  a 
similar  one  of  bone.  27  There  are  three  of  these  pas 
sageways,  and  each  28  contains  nothing  but  a  little 
fluid,  and  some  of  these  six-sided  ear  bones  or  oto- 
liths. They  2a  curve  round  much  like  the  bow  in  the 
yoke  of  an  ox,  and  following  any  of  these  windings, 


The  Labyrinth. 


i58 


THE  HOUSE  BEAUTIFUL. 


we  are  brought  again  to  80the  vestibule  from  which 
we  started.  That  portion  of  the  nerve  which  comes 
to  the  vestibule  is  31  distributed  to  little  hair-like  pro- 
cesses which  are  found  among  the  otoliths.  3a  These 
stones  are  found  so  near  the  nerves,  that  some  think 
them  to  be  at  the  ends  of  the  nerves ;  but  33  since  we 
have  found  out  that  we  can  hear  without  them,  we 
are  compelled  to  say  that  we  do  not  know  what  the 
otoliths  are  for. 

The  cochlea  divided  parallel  with  its 
axis  through  the  centre  of  the  modio'us. 
i.  Modiolus.  2.  The  infundibuium. 
3,  3.  Cochlear  nerve.  4,  4.  The  scala 
tympani  of  the  first  turn  of  the  cochlea. 
5,  5.  Scala  vestibuli  of  the  first  turn  ; 
the  septum  between  4  and  5  is  the  lam- 
ina spiralis.  8.  Loops  formed  by  fila- 
ments of  the  cochlear  nerve  on  the 
lamina  spiralis.  9,  9.  Scala  tympani  of 
the  second  turn  of  the  cochlea.  10,  10. 
Scala  vestibuli  of  ihe  second  turn.  1:. 
Half  turn  of  the  scala  vestibali  ;  the 
dome  over  it  is  the  cupola.  14.  Heli- 
cotrema  ;  a  bristle  is  passed  through  it, 
in  front  of  which  is  the  hamulus. 


The  Cochlea. 


On  one  side  of  the  34  vestibule  begin  two  pairs  of 
winding  stairs,  or  rather  inclined  planes,  divided  by  a 
wall.  Ascending  them,  85  winding  around  twice  and 
a  half,  we  find  the  same  arrangement  at  36  the  top,  as 
in  a  snail-shell ;  in  fact,  it  is  just  like  a  snail-shell,  and 
is  called  ,7  the  cochlea,  or  screw.  Looking  more 
closely,  we  discover  that  the  88  wall  between  these 
two  inclined  planes  is  hollow,  and  inside  of  it  3wis  an- 
other little  stairway.  Mystery  upon  mystery  !  Let 
us  investigate. 

"This  stairway  is  filled  with  a  fluid,  and  extending 


PILLARS  OF   THE  ORGAN  OF  CORTI. 


'59 


'  all  the  way  to  the  top  are  two  rows  of  queer,  tiny- 
club  shaped  bodies,  "standing  with  their  big  ends  up- 
permost and  leaning  against  each  other.  4;|  Thus  they 
form  a  covered  way  or  arcade  between  them.  44  There 
are  about  nine  thousand  of  these  hair-like  pillars,  and 
46  they  are  so  short  that  it  would  take  two  hundred  of 
the  longest,  or  five  hundred  of  the  shortest,  to  make 
an  inch  in  length.  4*  A  strange  thing  about  it  is,  that 
the  shortest  ones  are  at  the  bottom,  where  there  is 


Two  Pillars  of  the  Organ  of  Corti 

The  one  to  the  left  is  known  as  the  external,  the  next  one  as  the  internal  pillar  of 
the  Organ  of  Corti.  They  are  separated  so  as  to  see  their  form,  the  upper  and 
lower  extremities.  The  little  round  spots  at  the  base  are  cells.  When  arited, 
as  seen  at  the  ri;4ht,  the  space  between  them  is  the  arcade. 

the  most  room,  47  and  the  longest  at  the  top,  where 
the  space  is  least.  46They  are  called  the  pillars  of 
Corti,  because  a  man  named  Corti  first  described  them. 
"All,  together,  they  are  known  as  the  Organ  of  Corti 
*°  The  second  branch  of  the  nerve  goes  to  the 
cochlea;  where,  breaking  up  into  innumerable 
branches,  it  winds  up  the  spiral  stairway,  and  spreads 
out  between  two  thin,  bony  plates.  Here  these  little 
threads  pass  through  a  knot  of  51  nerve-cells  called  a 
ganglion,  after  which  they  become  so  minute  that  we 


i6o 


7 HE  HO USt   BEAUTIFUL. 


can  not  follow  them  ;  but 62  it  is  believed  that  they  end 
in  the  organ  of  Corti,  that  wonderful  instrument,  that 
arrangement  of  rods  like  the  strings  of  a  miniature 
harp. 

But  how  is  it  that  we  hear?  If  you  throw  a  stone 
nto  a  lake  or  pond,  or  even  into  a  tub  of  water,  you 
a  ill  see  waves  start  from  the  point  where  the  stone 


ShCTION    OF  THE    ORGAN    OF    CORTI    FROM   A   DoG. 

At  the  left  of  the  figure,  on  the  lower  border,  enters  the  nerve,  and  a  small  nerve- 
fibre  passes  across  the  figure  to  a  hair-cell,  and,  in  so  doing,  passes  over  the  ar- 
cade, above  the  centre  of  which  can  be  seen  the  union  of  the  two  pillars  of  the 
Organ  of  Corti. 

entered  the  water,  and  following  each  other  from  this 
point,  they  will  form  an  ever  widening  circle.  The 
same  is  53  true  of  the  air,  except  that  we  can  not  see 
the  waves. 

If  you  stand  in  the  centre  of  a  room  and  clap  your 
hands,  waves  of  air  will  be  created  which  will  radi- 
ate from  that  point  in  every  direction.  If  you  strike 
M  the  head  of  a  drum,  the  sound  waves  will  be  larger 


A  MUSICAL  X ■< >/■/■;.  1fil 

than  if  you  strike  a  stone  wall.     That  is  because 
the  head  of  the  drum  can  vibrate  more. 

These  sound  waves  "strike  the  drum  of  the  ear 
and  cause  it  to  vibrate.  M  Irregular  shocks  commu- 
nicated through  the  air  produce  what  we  call  noise 
11  When  the  shocks  arc  such  that  we  can  count  them, 
we  call  them  strokes.  But  if  they  are  very  rapid,  as 
when  made  by  the  wings  of  a  bee,  5M  we  have  a  hum 
or  buzz  produced  or,  possibly,  a  musical  note.  '  The 
uniform  vibrations  of  the  strings  of  a  piano,  or  violin, 
produce  air-waves,  which  are  conveyed  to  our  internal 
ear,  and  which  we  recognize  as  musical  tones. 

Music  is  a  secret  which  the  trembling  strings  whis- 
per to  the  air,  and  the  air  tells  it  again  to  this  won- 
derful instrument  which  we  find  in  the  Whispering 
Gallery,  this  miniature  harp  with  its  thousands  of 
strings,  which  in  turn  whispers  it  to  our  conscious- 
ness. "  But  how  do  the  pillars  of  Corti  reveal  this 
secret  borne  on  the  air-wave?"  "  How  can  they 
whisper  it  again  to  the  Lord  of  the  mansion  ? 

If  I  take  a  tuning-fork  which  gives  a  note  of  the 
pitch  which  we  designate  as  "  A,"  and  which  we  know 
has  a  given  number  of  vibrations  in  a  second,  and 
fasten  it  upright  on  the  table,  and  ten  feet  away  from 
it  fasten  another  of  the  same  pitch  in  the  same  posi- 
tion, and  then  draw  the  bow  of  a  violin  across  the 
first  one,  you  will  hear  it  sing.  If  now  I  put  my  hand 
upon  it,  and  stop  its  vibrations,  you  will  still  hear  the 
same  tone,  and  will  find  that  it  comes  from  the  other 
tuning-fork,  which  has  not  been  touched  by  the  bow. 
This  proves  that  the  second  fork  has  heard  what  the 


X62  THE  HOUSE  BEAUTIFUL. 

first  was  saying,  and  is  repeating  it  to  you.  80  These 
tones  are  called  tones  of  influence,  I  will  give  you 
another  illustration.  Take  a  piece  of  hard  wood,  and 
place  one  end  on  the  sounding-board  of  a  piano,  and 
passing  the  wood  up  into  the  third  story,  place  upon 
the  upper  end  a  violin,  and  the  music  made  upon  the 
piano  in  the  first  story  will  be  audibly  repeated  by  the 
violin  in  the  third  story. 

The  little  pillars  of  Corti,  which  stand  bathed  in  a 
fluid,  are  so  made  that  they  61  are  acted  upon  by 
the  tones  of  influence,  just  as  the  tuning-fork  and 
violin  were.  And  they  are  ever  whispering  to  us 
the  62  tones  carried  to  them,  by  the  vibrations  of  the 
external  air,  through  the  auditory  canal,  and  the 
mechanism  of  the  middle  ear,  the  drum,  the  ham- 
mer, the  anvil,  and  the  stirrup.  As  there  are  nearly 
nine  thousand  of  these  little  whisperers  they  can 
repeat  to  us  nearly  every  tone  that  can  be  made. 
They  stand  waving  to  and  fro  in  the  fluid  which  sur 
rounds  them,  and  it  is  believed  that  the  stirrup  press- 
ing upon  the  membrane  of  the  oval  window,  and  thus 
upon  the  fluid  in  the  labyrinth,  conveys  the  impres- 
sion made  by  the  air  in  waves  without,  to  these  rods, 
the  organ  of  Corti,  in  which  the  nerves  end  ;  and  that 
they  convey  an  impression  to  the  brain,  which  we  call 
the  sensation  of  hearing. 

It  is  wonderful  how  this  organ  of  Corti  repeats  to 
us  the  most  varied  shading  of  tones.  The  same  note 
may  be  produced  upon  the  violin,  the  flute,  the 
piano,  the  violoncello,  and  yet  the  whispers  inform 
us  correctly  which  is  which.     The  number  of  instru* 


TONE   WAVES.  1 63 

ments  may  be  greatly  increased,  but  still  the  tones  of 
influence  whisper  to  us  of  every  instrument,  and  every 
change  that  it  makes.  8S  It  is  possible  for  the  human 
ear  to  recognize  tones  varying  from  forty  vibrations 
in  a  second,  to  thirty-eight  thousand  per  second. 

64  The  best  ear  has  a  range  of  about  eleven  octaves. 
66  Six  or  seven  octaves  is  the  usual  limit.  There  are 
persons  who  are  not  able  to  hear  anything  beyond 
the  middle  "  E  "  of  the  piano-forte. 

Such  an  one  66  could  not  hear  the  chirp  of  the  com- 
mon sparrow,  which  is  pitched  fully  two  octaves 
above  that  note,  much  less  could  he  hear  the  song  of 
:he  cricket,  or  the  squeak  of  the  bat,  which  is  still 
higher  by  another  octave. 

These  highest  tones  must  be  produced  by  very  iit- 
tie  waves,  so  small,  in  fact,  that  we  might  think  them 
of  little  importance,  but  we  would  be  mistaken. 
When  we  stand  upon  the  sea-shore  and  listen  to  the 
beating  surf,  we  easily  recognize  the  power  and  force 
of  water.  And  we  might  imagine  that  there  are  no 
waves  more  destructive  than  those  of  water.  But 
did  you  ever  think  how  quiet  and  harmless  is 
the  vast  ocean  when  left  alone  ?  "  The  waves  of 
air  are  the  disturbing  element  which  produce  the 
waves  of  water.  It  is  not  always  the  large  waves 
that  do  the  most  harm.  fl8  It  is  the  small  wave  that 
awakens  envy,  hatred,  malice,  and  revenge.  It  is  the 
small  wave  which  speaks  in  slander  that  is  more  de- 
structive than  tempests.  The  tiny  waves  of  a  whisper 
may  wound  a  heart  or  ruin  a  life. 

But  waves  are  a  blessing,  as  well  as  a  source  of 
harm. 


r64  the  house  beautiful. 

99  The  agitation  of  ocean  tends  to  its  purification. 
,0  The  air  of  cities  would  soon  be  unfit  to  breathe  if 
it  were  not  changed  by  the  wind.  Many  good  people 
have  become  deadened  in  conscience  to  a  great 
wrong,  as  slavery  in  the  old  times,  and  intemperance 
at  the  present  day ;  and  a  great  deal  of  agitation  is 
needed  to  awaken  them  and  drive  away  the  stagnant, 
poisonous  mental  air  which  is  stifling  them.  As  the 
ocean  and  earth  need  agitation  to  keep  them  pure,  so 
men  need  moral  agitation  to  keep  their  minds  health- 
ful, and  their  perceptions  clear.  All  this  agitation 
comes  through  the  brave  spoken  words,  that  are  com- 
municated to  us  by  the  vibrations  of  the  wonderful 
harp  of  many  thousand  strings  located  in  our  marvel- 
lous Whispering  Gallery. 


CHAPTER   XXIII. 

THE   WINDOWS. 

A  HOUSE  which  had  no  opening  for  the  admission 
of  light  and  air,  and  through  which  the  inhabitants 
could  not  get  a  glimpse  at  the  world  without,  would 
indeed  be  a  dismal  place.  You  may  be  sure  that  the 
Architect  of  our  House  Beautiful  never  made  such  a 
blunder  as  to  forget  the  Windows.  '  To  be  sure  there 
are  only  two  of  them,  but  they  are  so  ingeniously 
constructed  that  they  are  able  to  do  the  duty  of  half 
a  dozen.  They  are  located  on  the  2  front  side  of  the 
Observatory,  under  the  porticoes  made  by  the  arches 
of  the  frontal  bone.  The  portico,  which  protects  the 
*  stairway  used  by  Aura,  the  washerwoman,  separates 
these  windows  one  from  the  other,  and  also  serves  as 
a  protection  to  them.  They  are  still  further  *  pro- 
tected by  a  bony  projection  below  them.  The  6  hollow 
within  these  walls  is  called  the  orbit  of  the  eye,  and 
'  the  eyeball  nearly  fills  it.  7  Behind  the  eyeball  is  a 
cushion  of  fat,  and  around  it  is  a  strong  fibrous  mem- 
brane which  helps  to  8  hold  it  in  place,  but  not  too 
firmly,  for  it  must  be  able  to  turn  here  and  there,  and 
up  and  down. 

9  The  eyes  are  such  very  precious  and  important 
things  that  great  pains  have  been  taken  to  keep  them 

(165) 


1 66  THE  HOUSE  BEAUTIFUL. 

from  injury.  In  Each  of  these  beautiful  windows  has 
over  it  an  awning  which  is  very  movable,  n  and  lets 
itself  down  over  the  windows  if  any  danger  threatens. 
These  awnings  are  very  delicate,  and  are  12  trimmed 
along  the  edge  with  a  long  fringe.  13  This  fringe 
is  not  altogether  for  looks,  but  acts  also  as  a  guard, 
or  protection,  u  warning  of  the  approach  of  intruders, 
and  trying  to  sweep  them  away.  These  awnings  are 
moved  up  and  down  by  1B  servants,  one  of  whom  lets  it 
drop,  and  another  raises  it,  and  all  this  without  noise 
or  rattle  of  ropes,  or  any  hitch  in  the  working  of  it 
which  would  try  your  patience.  Smoothly  16  they 
play  up  and  down,  during  all  your  waking  hours,  and 
when  you  go  to  17  sleep  they  fold  themselves  softly 
over  the  Windows,  keeping  out  the  light  and  guard- 
ing them  from  harm,  until  you  awaken  in  the  bright, 
cheerful  light  of  another  day.  You  will  recognize 
these  awnings  as  the  18  eyelids.  19  The  Windows 
themselves  are  round,  not,  however,  like  the  little 
round  windows  you  sometimes  see  in  the  cornice  of 
a  house,  nor  like  the  port-holes  in  the  side  of  a  ship, 
which  are  rilled  with  a  glass  called  a  "bull's-eye"; 
but  they  are  round  like  a  ball,  and  like  the  home- 
made balls  of  yarn,  with  leather  covers,  they  too,  have 
a  firm  covering  or  coat  on  the  outside. 

20  The  eye  is  not  a  perfect  sphere,  but  is  a  little 
longer  one  way  than  the  other,  2I  and  its  longest 
diameter  is  from  front  to  back.  2a  The  outside  cover- 
ing, which  corresponds  to  the  leather  covering  of 
the  boy's  ball,  is  firm  and  white,  and  encloses  five- 
sixths  of   the    eyeball.     It    is    called    the    "sclerotic. 


THE  SCLEROTIC. 


167 


It  is  the  white  part  which  we  see  when  we  look  into 
the  eye,  and  which  we  call  the  24  "  white  of  the  eye." 
It  is  opaque ;  "that  is,  it  will  not  let  the  light  pass 
through  it.  M  The  other  sixth  of  the  eyeball  is  covered 
with  a  transparent  coat  called  the  cornea.  M  It  is  not 
thicker  than  a 
sheet  of  writing- 
paper,  and  yet S9  it 
is  even  stronger 
than  the  sclerotic 
coat.  "  Trans- 
parent not  only 
means  that  light 
can  pass  through 
it,  but  that  we 
can  see  objects 
through  it.  If  it 
only  permitted 
light  to  pass,  and 
we  could  not  see 
through  it,  we 
should  call  it 
translucent ;  but 
the  most  perfect 
crystal,  or  French 
plate-glass,  is  not  more  beautifully  transparent  than 
the  cornea. 

We  all  like  to  have  beautiful  curtains  at  our  win- 
dows, and  the  most  beautiful  are  those  which  do  not 
obstruct  the  light.  The  wonderful  windows  of  our 
beautiful  house  are  "provided  with  curtains,  butin- 


DlSSECTION  OF  THK  EYEBALL. 
Showing  its  second  tunic,  and  the  mode  of  the  distri- 
bution of  the  venae  vorticosae  of  the  choroid.  After 
Arnold.  1.  Part  of  the  sclerotic  coat.  2.  The 
optic  nerve.  3,  3.  The  choroid  coat.  4.  The 
ciliary  ligament.  5.  The  iris.  6,  6.  The  venae 
vorticosae.  7,7.  The  trunks  of  the  venae  vorticosae 
at  the  point  where  they  have  pierced  the  sclerotica. 
8,  8.  The  posterior  ciliary  veins,  which  enter  the 
eyeball  in  company  with  the  posterior  ciliary  arte- 
ries, by  piercing  the  sclerotia  at  9.  10.  One  of  the 
long  ciliary  nerves,  accompanied  by  a  long  ciliary 
vein. 


f68  THE  HOUSE  BEAUTIFUL. 

stead  of  being  on  the  inside,  they  are  on  the  outside 
of  the  windows.  They  are  made  of  a  81  delicate  lace* 
like  membrane,  which  lines  the  inside  of  the  awnings, 
8*  both  upper  and  lower,  and  is  doubled  back  across 
the  eyeball.  These  curtains  have  a  nicer  name,  I 
think,  than  madras  or  scrim.  "  They  are  called  the 
conjunctiva. 

The  M  sclerotic  and  cornea  together  may  be  called 
the  first  coat  of  the  eye ;  and  S5  the  second  coat,  lying 
just  inside  of  this,  is  the  choroid.  86  It  is  black  in  color, 
so  that  it  will  absorb  the  rays  of  light,  and  3T  it  covers 
the  same  part  of  the  eyeball  that  the  sclerotic  does. 
88  You  can  easily  see  that  this  leaves  a  circular  open- 
ing in  front,  39  which  is  covered  on  the  outside  by  the 
cornea.  40  The  edges  of  this  circular  opening  in  front, 
in  the  choroid  coat,  are  gathered  into  folds  or  plaits, 
which  are  41  called  the  ciliary  processes.  Just  42  lapping 
over  these  a  little,  and  joining  with  the  choroid  coat, 
is  a  very  important  servant  of  the  eye,  known  as 
the  ciliary  muscle.  4S  It  is  a  ring  of  muscular  fibres, 
about  an  eighth  of  an  inch  wide,  that  44  decreases  the 
size  of  the  central  opening  by  just  its  width. 

Of  late  it  has  become  very  fashionable  to  have  cur- 
tains to  doors,  as  well  as  to  windows,  and  we  give 
them  the  fine  French  name  of  portiere,  and  feel  quite 
proud  of  them,  because  we  think  they  are  like  those 
of  which  we  read  in  romances  of  the  olden  time.  But 
all  this  time  our  House  Beautiful  has  had  portieres 
more  wonderful  and  beautiful  than  Persian  tapestry, 
and  more  delicate  even  than  those  of  fairy  lore. 
"  They  have  a  Latin  name,  iris,  which  means  4fl  rain- 


THE  IRIS.  i6g 

bow,  so  that  you  may  imagine  that  they  are  very 
beautiful. 

The  iris  is  a  circular  curtain,  47  and  has  a  round 
opening  in  the  centre.  "  Small,  is  it  ?  "  Yes,  only 
M  an  eighth  of  an  inch  across ;  but  then  49  the  curtain 
is  only  half  an  inch  from  side  to  side.  It  is  "some- 
times gray,  sometimes  brown  or  blue,  or  even  olive 
green,  for  it  must  match  the  rest  of  the  house,  you 
know,  and  it  is  generally  B1  colored  so  as  to  harmonize 
with  the  color  of  the  shingles,  and  that  of  the  outside 
of  the  house,  which  we  call  the  complexion.  But  it 
has  happened  that  one  of  these  curtains  was  blue,  and 
the  other  brown ;  and  I  have  seen  them  where  half 
of  one  was  blue  and  the  other  half  hazel. 

I  saw  in  a  paper  the  other  day  that  it  is  now  not 
fashionable  to  have  two  windows,  even  in  the  same 
room,  curtained  alike,  and  perhaps  the  person  who 
had  a  different  colored  iris  for  each  eye  was  prepar- 
ing to  be  in  the  present  aesthetic  style.  J  The  open- 
ing in  the  centre  is  called  the  pupil  of  the  eye,  and 
around  this  opening,  on  the  inner  edge  of  the  iris,  M  is 
a  muscle  whose  office  it  is  to  close  the  pupil  a  little 
when  too  much  light  comes  into  the  eye,  and  around 
its  outer  border  is  another  muscle  to  make  the  pupil 
larger  when  too  little  lierht  enters  the  eve. 

Wouldn't  your  mamma  be  glad  if  her  parlor  cur- 
tains  would  shut  themselves  when  the  light  was  com- 
ing in  too  strong  on  her  carpet  ?  °4  We  never  have 
to  take  any  thought  about  these  rainbow  curtains  ot 
ours.     They  appear  to  manage  themselves. 

We  have  now  learned  of  two  coats  of  the  eye,  but 


I  yo  THE  HO  USE  BE  A  UTIFUL. 

there  is  still  a  third,  65  called  the  retina,  which  we  will 
explain  more  fully  by  and  by. 

But  what  makes  the  eyeball  ?  We  have  thus  far  had 
nothing  but  its  coverings.  Inside  of  all  these  coats 
is  a  6'  glassy  body,  called  the  6T  vitreous  humor,  a  little 
more  solid  than  jelly,  69and  almost  spherical.  It 
would  be  entirely  so  were  it  not  60  hollowed  out  a 
little  on  the  front  side,  much  as  your  rubber  ball 
would  be  if  you  were  to  dent  it  in,  on  one  side,  with 
your  thumb.  61  This  hollow  comes  right  behind  that 
part  of  the  eye,  which  is  covered  by  the  cornea  and 
the  iris,  and  in  it  is  placed  the  62  crystalline  lens.  You 
almost  know  what  that  is  by  its  name.  Crystalline, 
like  very  clear  glass  ;  and  a  lens,  do  you  know  what 
that  is  ?  A  lens  is  a  glass  which  has  the  power  of 
making  things  look  either  larger,  or  smaller,  than  their 
normal  size.  A  concave  lens  makes  them  look  small- 
er, and  is  shaped  like  a  saucer.  e8A  convex  lens 
bulges  out  like  the  bottom  of  a  saucer.  If  you  put 
two  convex  lenses  together  you  have  a  84  double  con- 
vex lens,  and  that  is  what  the  crystalline  lens  is. 

66  It  is  placed  behind  the  pupil,  so  that  all  the 
"light  which  enters  the  eye  must  pass  through  the 
lens.  It  is  held  in  place  by  a  88  transparent  circular 
membrane,  called  the  fl7  suspensory  ligament.  The 
outer  edge  of  this  ligament  fits  in  between  those  folds 
of  the  choroid  coat  called  the  ciliary  processes,  and 
thus  completes  the  second  coat  of  the  eye. 

Let  us  now  imagine  the  eye  in  place,  and  see  if  we 
can  gain  a  clear  idea  of  its  construction.  Beginning 
on  the  inside,  there  is  first  the  transparent,  jelly-like, 


CONSTRUCTION  OF  THE  EYE.  \y\ 

vitreous  humor,  hollowed  out  in  front  to  receive  the 
crystalline  lens.  This  vitreous  humor  is  encircled  by 
three  coats  :  the  retina  inside,  the  choroid  in  the  mid- 
dle, and  the  sclerotic  on  the  outside ;  each  leaving  a 


Section  of  the  Eye. 

Showing  the  two  chambers  of  the  eye  connecting  through  the  pupil.     The  lens  ; 
vitreous  humor,  retina,  and  optic  nerve. 

circular   space    in    front    of   the  crystalline   lens  un- 
covered. 

"The  suspensory  ligament  which  divides  to  enclose 
the  lens  completes  the  choroid  coat.  The  cornea 
completes  the  sclerotic.  In  front  of  the  lens  hangs 
the  70  circular  rainbow  curtain,  the  iris,  its  outer  edge 


172 


THE  HOUSE  BEAUTIFUL 


united  to  the  71  sclerotic  and  cornea  at  their  point  of 
union.  The  iris  divides  the  chamber  of  the  eye  into 
two  rooms  ;  one  before  it  called  the  72  anterior  cham- 
ber, and  one  behind  it  called  the  posterior  chambei 
of  the  eye.  You  see  the  cornea  bulges  out  a  little. 
like  a  watch  crystal,  so  that  leaves  quite  a  space  in 
front  of  the  iris.  The  posterior  chamber  is  made  by 
the  curving  of  the  lens  from  the  iris  which  hangs 
straight  down  before  it.  Both  of  these  chambers  are 
filled  with  aqueous  or  watery  humor. 

What  would  you  think  of  windows  that  would  wasli 
themselves  constantly,  so  that  they  would  always  be 
bright  and  clear  ?  Wouldn't  that  be  a  fine  arrange- 
ment ?  73That  is  what  these  windows  do  for  them- 
selves all  the  time.  74  There  is  a  small  ovoid  body 
lodged  up  under  the  awning  and  portico,  out  of  sight, 
called  the  lachrymal  gland,  which  secretes  76a  watery 
fluid.  This  is  the  76  tear  gland,  and  has  "  six  or  more 
ducts  leading  from  it.  78The  watery  fluid  is  collected 
in  a  little  bag,  and  is  always  ready  for  use.  79  A  little 
of  it  is  constantly  pressed  out  upon  the  eyeball.  80The 
awning  drops  frequently,  which  we  call  winking,  and 
this  fluid  prevents  friction  of  the  parts,  and  at  the 
same  time  washes  off  any  dust  which  may  have 
touched  the  eye,  thus  keeping  it  moist  and  adding 
much  to  its  brilliancy. 

If  you  will  look  at  the  margins  of  the  upper  and 
lower  lids,  near  the  nose,  you  will  see  a  couple  of 
small  points.  These  are  called  8! puncta,  which  means 
points,  and  they  are  the  openings  into  the  lachrymal 
canals,  which  carry  off  the  excess  of  fluid,  after  it  has 


APP  EX  DACES  OF   THE  EYE. 


173 


Appendages  of  the  Eye. 


washed  the  eye.  They  lead  into  the  nose,  and  this 
explains  why  the  handkerchief  is  often  useful  when 
the  eyes  are  disturbed.  Along  the  M  margins  of  the 
lower  lids  can  be  found  little  openings  which  are  out- 
lets for  glands  which  secrete  an  83oily  fluid,  which  is 
continually  poured  out  along  the  edges  of  the  lids. 

t.  The  superior  tarsal  catilage.  2.  The 
lower  border  of  the  cartilage,  on  which 
are  seen  the  openings  of  the  Meibomian 
glands.  3.  The  inferior  tarsal  cartilage  ; 
along  the  upper  border  of  this  cartilage 
the  openings  of  the  Meibomian  glands 
are  likewise  seen.  4.  The  lachrymal 
gland — its  superior  or  orbital  portion. 
5.  Its  inferior  or  palpebral  portion.  6. 
The  lachrymal  ducts.  7.  The  plica  semi- 
lunaris. 8.  The  caruncula  lachrymalis. 
9.  The  puncta  lachrymalia  of  the  lachry- 
mal canals.  10.  The  superior  lachrymal 
canal.  11.  The  inferior  lachrymal  canal. 
12.  The  lachrymal  sac.  14.  The  dilatation  of  the  nasal  duct,  where  it  opens  into 
the  inferior  meatus  of  the  nose.     15.  The  nasal  duct. 

You  know  that  water  and  oil  will  not  willingly  asso- 
ciate together,  and  so  the  water  which  comes  down 
to  wash  the  eyeballs  keeps  away  from  the  edge  of  the 
lids  because  thy  are  covered  with  oil.  M  This  keeps 
the  water  from  running  down  over  the  cheeks,  and 
so  it  must  go  down  through  the  lachrymal  canal  into 
the  nose,  where  it  will  do  no  harm.  Sometimes,  how- 
ever, this  canal  gets  stopped  up,  and  then  the  fluid 
must  flow  over  the  cheeks,  and  we  then  call  it  tears. 
If  it  continues  long  the  cheeks  will  "become  sore  and 
painful,  and  look  bad,  and  the  eyes  too  will  get  sore. 
There  are  times  when  from  some  emotional  excite- 
ment, as  when  there  e6  is  sorrow  or  grief,  the  glands 

12 


T74  THE  HOUSE  BEAUTIFUL, 

which  supply  the  tears  are  pressed  upon  so  hard  that 
the  tears  flow  in  great  quantities  over  the  cheeks,  and 
this  we  call  crying,  or  weeping.  Did  you  ever  think  of 
it,  that  while  animals  seem  to  feel  sorrow  for  the  loss 
of  their  young,  "  man  is  the  only  animal  that  can 
weep  over  the  sorrows  of  others  ?  He  alone  can 
shed  tears  of  sympathy,  and  he  alone  can  feel  the 
relief  from  such  an  expression  of  sympathy  from  oth- 
ers. A  child  related  to  her  mother  how  she  consoled 
a  companion  who  mourned  the  death  of  a  brother : 
"  I  could  not  say  anything,  but  I  put  my  head  down 
by  hers  and  cried  with  her,  and  she  felt  comforted." 

We  should  be  thankful  that  we  are  able  to  weep 
with  those  who  weep,  as  well  as  to  rejoice  with  those 
who  rejoice.  Our  beautiful  windows  will  shine  all 
the  brighter  because  they  have  been  washed  by  the 
tears  that  have  fallen  for  others'  woes. 


CHAPTER  aXIV. 

THE   DOUBLE   TELESCOPE. 

In  the  midst  of  the  millions  of  nerve-cells  which 
fill  the  dome,  which  we  have  styled  the  Observatory, 
sits  the  master  of  the  house,  the  '  Man  Wonderful,  in 
darkness,  and  in  a  silence  broken  only  by  the  gentle 
whisperings  of  that  wondrous  many-stringed  harp, 
the  organ  of  Corti.  Light  never  enters  his  seclusion, 
he  2  never  ventures  forth  from  his  narrow  abode  until 
he  quits  the  House  Beautiful  forever.  Shut  in  as  he 
is,  he,  3  however,  does  not  remain  ignorant  of  the 
outer  world,  for  over  his  complicated  telegraph  sys- 
tem he  is  constantly  receiving  messages  concerning 
everything  that  is  around  him.  4  Originating  among 
these  nerve-cells  are  twelve  pairs  of  nerve-cables. 
*  These  constitute  the  cerebral  nervous  system. 

8  We  have  learned  how  through  his  Telegraph  sys- 
tem he  becomes  acquainted  with  himself,  and  to  some 
extent  with  the  outer  world  ;  T  but  by  far  the  greater 
part  of  his  information,  about  things  outside  of  him- 
self, which  the  German  style  the  "  Not  me,"  comes  to 
him  over  the  nerves  which  connect  with  the  Tele- 
scopes. 8  The  great  importance  of  tnese  "j  en  ;cojj<  a 
is  -v.dicated  by  the  fact  that  the  second,  third,  iourm, 

(175) 


176 


THE  HOUSE  BEAUTIFUL. 


and  sixth  pairs  of  nerves  and  one  of  the  three 
branches  of  the  fifth  pair  are  all  employed  in  the 
transmission  of  messages  to  and  from  them. 

You  all  know  what  a  telescope  is,  D  an  instrument 
so  made  that  you  can  look  at  distant  objects,  at  dif- 
ferent distances,  by  lengthening  or  shortening  its  cyl- 
inder. In  observatories  the  telescopes  are  so  10  large 
and  heavy,  that  ropes  and  pulleys  are  necessary  to 
change  the  position  so  as  to  see  different  objects.  "  If 
such  a  telescope  were  endowed  with  the  power  to 
change  its  position  and  lengthen  or  shorten  its  tube 
just  when  it  was  needed  without  any  direction  from 
the  owner,  it  would  be  considered  a  marvel  of  skill ; 
but  how  much  more  marvellous  would  it  be  if  there 
were  two  such  telescopes  which,  having  such  power, 
should  work  always  accurately  together. 

"  It  is  such  a  pair  of  Telescopes  that  is  used  by  the 
Man  Wonderful  in  the  House  Beautiful.  Through 
them  he  receives  the  greatest  amount  of  his  informa- 
tion, l2  and  you  know  them  as  the  eyes.  13  Each  eye 
is  moved  by  six  muscles.  When  the  eyes  are  directed 
to  one  side,  an  external  muscle  of  the  one  eye  and  an 
internal  muscle  of  the  other  work  together.  One 
muscle  is  particularly  worthy  of  being  named,  as  it 
works  over  a  pulley.  "It  is  called  the  superior  ob- 
lique and  is  attached  to  the  upper  part  of  the  eyeball, 
16  and  its  action,  in  connection  with  its  fellow,  the  in- 
ferior oblique,  is  to  rotate  the  eyeball.  The  most 
"  important  of  the  nerves  which  go  the  eyes  are 
the  optic  nerves.  They  have  their  "  origin  in  the 
cells   in   that   portion    of  the   brain    known    as  the 


THE  OPTIC  COMMISSURE. 


177 


Muscles  of  the  Eyeball. 


corpora  quadrigemina.  "  Coming  forward  from  cithci 
side  of  the  brain  they  cross  each  other  like  the  letter 
X.  The  point  where  they  cross  is  called  the  optic  com- 
missure. 

It  is  of  the  greatest  interest  to  remember  how  the 
nerve  threads  or  fibres  are  distributed  and  arranged 
within  this  optic  commissure.     First,  "some  fibres  go 

View  of  the  ocular  group,  taken 
from  the  outer  side  of  the  right 
orbit.  1.  A  small  fragment  of 
the  sphenoid  bone  around  the 
entrance  of  the  optic  nerve  into 
the  orbit.  2.  Optic  nerve.  3. 
Globe  of  the  eye.  4.  Levator 
palpebrae  muscle.  5.  Superior 
oblique.  6.  Its  cartilaginous 
pulley.  7.  Its  reflected  tendon. 
8.  Inferior  oblique.  9.  Supe- 
rior rectus.  10.  Internal  rectus, 
almost  concealed  by  the  optic  nerve,  n.  Parts  of  the  external  rivlaj,  showing  its 
two  heads  of  origin.  12.  Extremity  of  the  external  rectus  at  its  insertion.  13,  In- 
ferior rectus.  14.  The  tunica  albuginea,  which  is  formed  by  the  expansion  of  the 
tendons  of  the  four  recti  muscles. 

from  the  right  to  the  left  side  of  the  brain  ;  second, 
some  go  from  the  right  side  of  the  brain  to  the  left 
eye  ;  third,  some  go  from  the  right  side  of  the  brain 
to  the  right  eye ;  fourth,  some  go  from  the  right  eye 
to  the  left  eye,  and  all  pass  through  this  optic  com- 
missure. 

The  same  arrangement  is  true  of  the  fibres  which 
start  from  the  left  side  of  the  brain.  J0  These  fibres 
all  enter  the  posterior  or  back  portion  of  the  eyeball, 
through  one  opening.  Once  inside  of  the  eyeball, 
they  spread  out  and  connect  with  the  21  cells  of  the 
retina,  each  fibre  ending  in  a  cell  ■"  Reviewing  the 
connection  of  the  eyes  with  each  other  and  with  the 


i;8 


THE  HOUSE  BEAUTIFUL. 


brain,  we  see  that  a  nerve-fibre  goes  from  a  cell  in 
one  eye  to  a  ceil  in  the  other ;  that  a  nerve-fibre  goes 
from  a  cell  in  one  eye  to  a  cell  in  each  side  of  the 
brain  ;  that  a  nerve-fibre  goes  from  a  cell  in  one  side 
of  the  brain  to  a  cell  in  the  other  side  of  the  brain. 

23  It  would  not  be  pos- 


sible to  connect  the  eyes 
more  intimately.  24  At 
the  point  where  the  optic 
nerve  enters  the  eye,  light 
makes  no  impression 
upon  the  retina,  and  it  is 
called  the  blind  spot. 
*5  About  one-eighth  of  an 


inch  external  to  the  en- 
trance of  the  optic  nerve, 

The  posterior  segment  of  a  transverse  sec-     jg   faQ   central  axis  Qf    the 
tion  of  the  globe  of  the  eye,  seen  from 

within,    i.  The  divided  edge  of  the   eyeball,  and  at  this  point 

three  tunics.     The  membrane  covering     fa  •       26  an     oyaJ     SDOt. 

the  whole  internal  surface  is  the  retina.  ir 

2.  The  entrance  of  the  optic  nerve  with  Its  horizontal  diameter 
the  arteria  centralis  retinae  piercing  its 
centre.  3  3.  The  ramifications  of  the 
arteria  centralis.  4.  Foramen  of  Soem- 
mering, in  the  centre  of  the  axis  of  the 
eye  ;  the  shade  from  the  side  of  the  sec- 
tion obscures  the  limbus  luteus,  which 
surrounds  it.     5.  A  fold  of  the  retina,  _ 

which  generally  obscures  the  foramen     yelJOW  Spot  01   boemmer- 
after  the  eye  has  been  opened. 


Posterior  Segment. 


is 27  one-eighth  of  an  inch, 
its  vertical  diameter  is 
one- thirty -sixth  of  an 
inch.     28  It   is  called  the 


ing.  29  In  the  centre  of  this 
spot  is  a  depression  known  as  the  fovea  centralis.  This 
depression  is  exactly  in  the  centre  of  vision.  It  is  this 
little  point  which  catches  the  light  from  the  centre  of 
every  object  that  we  look  at.  a°  The  optic  nerve  forms 
a  layer  of  the  retina,  that,  at  the 3'  yellow  spot  of  Soem- 


179 

of  an 
thick- 


THE  G ANGLIC' X  CELLS. 

.Tiering,  is  not  more  than  onc-fifty-thousandth 
inch  in  thickness,  M  but  becomes  progressively 
er  from  this  central 
point  to  the  periphery 
of  the  retina.  33  Rest- 
ing upon  this  are 
nerve-cells  which,  at 
the  yellow  spot,  34  are 
eight  layers  deep,  but 
which  grow  progres- 
sively thinner,  so  that 
at  the.  periphery  there 
is  but  one  layer  of 
cells.  "These  are 
known  as  the  gan- 
glion cells.  38  Each 
one  sends  a  filament 
to  the  layer  formed 
by  the  expansion  of 
the  optic  nerve,  which 
is  continuous  with  the 
nerve-fibre.  "  These 
ganglion  cells  send 
out  filaments  in  the 
other  direction  which 
go  forv  a rd,  through 
different    granular 

|.,,.ori:.      3*  „ ,,  J     «-»-. — ,,  ,       The  interna]    limiting  membrane  of  the  retina 
iiiycio  dllLl      LUIUUS-  ,      ,  ,,.,       .  ,     ,  .      ,. 

*  L  lb  seen  at  the  bare.      1  he  tour  rounded  bodies 

Cles,  and  COnneCt  With         above  are  in  the  vesicular  layer. 

the  rods  and  cones  which  form  the"  first  layer  of  the 
retina.  ••  These  rods  and  cones  are  minute  slender  cyl- 


Lc0  THE  HOUSE  BEAUTIFUL. 

inders,  standing  with  a  free  end  pointing  toward  the 
centre  of  the  eyeball.  41  Light  in  entering  the  eye 
strikes  first  upon  the  ends  of  these  innumerable  needle- 
like bodies,  and  through  them  the 42  impression  is  trans- 
mitted to  the  eighth  coat  of  the  retina,  which  is  the 
first  one  we  examined,  and  is  the  expansion  of  the 
optic  nerve.  When  the  light  from  the  centre  of  an 
object. does  not  strike  directly  upon  the  centre  of  the 
eye,  which  we  have  learned  is  the  yellow  spot  of  Soem- 
mering, "3  the  eye  involuntarily  changes  its  position  in 
order  that  the  light  may  be  received  upon  the  centre 
of  this  spot,  the  fovea  centralis. 

44  In  order  to  effect  this  change  a  message  must  be 
sent  from  the  eye  through  the  optic  nerve  to  the  cells 
in  the  brain.  45  This  message  must  be  transmitted 
through  the  third,  fourth,  and  sixth  pairs  of  nerves 
48  to  the  muscles  which  control  the  movements  of  the 
eye.  Then  the  eye  is  properly  adjusted.  Alt  this  is 
dowe  without  the  knowledge  or  direction  of  the  mas- 
ter of  the  house. 

47  Whenever  too  much  light  enters  the  eye  a  mes- 
sage must,  in  like  manner,  be  sent  to  the  brain  and 
word  received  in  return  for  the  muscles  to  contract 
the  opening  in  the  iris,  and  make  the  pupil  smaller. 
"  When  the  object  is  too  near,  or  we  wish  to  see  more 
distinctly,  a  message  is  sent  to  the  brain,  and  an  order 
received  that  the  49  ciliary  muscles  shall  contract,  and 
thereby  make  the  crystalline  lens  more  convex,  and 
bring  into  action  the  microscopic  powers  of  the  eye 
M  Such  messages  as  these  are  constantly  being  sent, 
and  perhaps  many  of  them  at  one  and  the  same  time, 


A  BEAUTIFUL  PICTURE. 


1S1 


and  all  these  changes  go  on  harmoniously,  both  eyes 
acting  exactly  alike.  If  the  master  had  to  take 
thought  of  the  movements  of  his  eyes  he  would  have 
little  time  for  anything  else. 

We  have  studied  the  outside  of  the  eye  and  have 
admired  those  beautiful  windows  with  their  rainbow- 
colored  curtains,  with  lace  ones  over,  and  the  delicate 
fringed  awnings  for  protection  ;  but  if  we  take  a  glass 


Section  of  the  Lens,  showing  the  Mechanism  of  Accommodation. 


The  right  side  of  the  figure  shows  the  lens  adapted  to  the  vision  of  a  near  object  • 
the  lens  is  thicker,  The  left  side  shows  it  adapted  to  vision  at  infinite  distances 
— (Fisk.) 

called  an  ophthalmoscope  and  look  through  the  pupiJ 
into  the  eye,  we  shall  find  that  all  its  beauties  are  not 
external. 

"The  artery  which  supplies  the  eye  enters  with 
the  optic  nerve.  6S  It  divides  and  subdivides,  and 
spreads  out  upon  the  retina  like  the  branches  of  a 
beautiful  scarlet  vine  trained  against  a  wall,  and  the 
M  light  reflected  from  these  gives  the  whole  eye  a  del- 
icate pink  hue,  a  picture  not  revealed  to  ordinary 
gaze,   but    none   the   less   of    incomparable    beauty. 


(g2  THE  HOUSE  BEAUTIFUL. 

What  is  light  ?  '  I  can  not  answer  this  question.  1 
know  that  light  passes  through  transparent  glass,  but 
I  can  not  comprehend  it.  But  we  are  taught  that  it 
is  a  mode  of  motion.  Another  mode  of  motion  is 
heat.  We  know  that  B5  light  passing  through  the 
air  creates  caloric  or  heat.  When  it  passes  through 
glass  the  heat  is  increased.  If,  then,  where  the  me- 
dium has  more  density  there  is  more  heat,  are  we 
not  justified  in  believing  that  it  is  friction  which 
causes  heat  ?  And  if  there  is  friction  must  there  not 
be  something  to  cause  friction  ? 

We  can  see  and  feel  the  effects  of  waves  of  water. 
We  can  not  see,  but  we  can  feel,  the  effects  of  waves 
of  air.  We  can  also  weigh  the  atmosphere  and  know 
that  we  have  a  pressure  of  fifteen  pounds  to  the 
square  inch.  But  here  is  a  something  which  we  can 
neither  see,  feel,  nor  weigh.  Can  we  in  any  way  de- 
monstrate that  it  has  power  ?  6B  Analysis  shows  that 
it  has  rays  of  light  and  heat,  as  well  as  chemical  rays. 
We  know  that  it  causes  plants  to  grow,  and  a  machine 
has  been  constructed,  called  a  "  radiometer,  which, 
placed  in  a  vacuum,  runs  simply  by  the  force  of  the 
rays  of  light.  58  Light  has  been  analyzed  and  found 
to  be  compounded  of  the  colors  of  the  rainbow.  And 
it  has  been  found  that  69  the  color  of  light  is  deter- 
mined solely  by  its  wave  length.  B0  The  length  of  a 
wave  of  red  light  is  about  one-thirty-nine-thousandth 
of  an  inch,  and  that  is  the  longest  wave.  6:  Light 
travels  at  the  rate  of  192,000  miles  in  a  second.  We 
have  only  to  multiply  this  distance  by  39,000  and  we 
will  have  the  number  of  red  waves  of  light  that  will 


WAVES  OF  LIGHT.  183 

strike  the  eye  in  a  second.  And  this  makes  about 
^74,000,000,000,000  (four  hundred  and  seventy-four 
trillions)  of  red  waves  that  strike  the  eye  in  a  second.* 
These  multitudinous  waves  striking  against  the  ends 
of  the  rods  and  cones,  and  through  them  transmitted 
to  the  brain  cells,  produce  the  sensation    known  as 

light. 

. » 

*  TyndaU. 


CHAPTER   XXV, 

TWIN-BROTHER   GUARDIANS. 

Politeness  requires  that  when  we  visit  our 
friends,  we  should  rap  at  the  door,  or  ring  the  bell, 
and  wait  to  be  admitted.  If  we  are  calling  upon  a 
stranger,  we  are  often  requested  to  state  our  business 
before  we  are  permitted  to  see  the  master  of  the 
house.  There  must  then  be  certain  persons  whose 
employment  and  duty  it  is  to  scan  those  who  desire 
admittance  to  the  dwelling,  and  state  what  is  the 
pleasure  of  the  master.  These  persons  might  well 
be  called  the  Guardians  of  the  house.  If  the  grocer's 
boy  comes  with  food,  it  is  accepted,  unless  it  is  not 
what  was  ordered  or  is  in  some  way  defective.  The 
servants  are  apt  to  form  their  judgments  from  their 
own  personal  likes  or  dislikes,  and  their  opinion  may 
not  always  be  correct.  Yet  the  master  of  the  house 
must  rely  upon  their  judgment  to  some  extent,  or  the 
servants  will  be  of  little  use  to  him. 

It  is  not  to  be  expected  that  a  house  so  valuable 
as  our  House  Beautiful  would  be  left  unguarded. 
There  are  several  guards  stationed  in  different  parts 
of  the  house  who  watch  over  its  welfare.  '  One  of 
these  is  stationed  in  the  lower  front  hall.  a  He  is  a 
(184) 


TASTE  LIVES  IX   THE    TOXGUE. 


I85 


Soft,  smooth,  supple  individual,  and  wears  a  pink  uni- 
form, arid,  like  all  the  servants  of  this  3  house,  is  never 
allowed  a  day  out.  He  is  ever  on  duty,  though  he 
often  puts  his  head  outside  the 
door  to  rake  a  peep  at  the  world. 
He  is  so  soft  and  nice  when  you 

Vie.  tongue  and  its  papillae  are  shown.  1.  The 
raphe,  which  sometimes  bifurcates  in  the  dorsum, 
as  in  the  engraving.  2,  2.  Lobes  of  the  tongue  ; 
the  rounded  eminences  on  this  part  of  the  organ 
and  near  its  tip  are  the  fungiform  papilla; ;  the 
smaller  papilla?,  among  which  the  former  are  dis- 
persed, aie  the  conical  and  filiform  papilhe.  3. 
Tip  of  the  tongue.  4,  4.  Its  sides,  on  which  the 
papillae  are  arranged  in  fringed  and  lamellated 
forms.  5,  5.  The  A-shaped  row  of  papilla;  cir- 
cumvallify.  6.  Foramen  coecum.  7.  Mucous 
glands  at  the  head  of  the  tongue.  8.  Epiglottis. 
9,  9.  Fraera  epiglottidis.  10,  10.  Greater  cornua 
of  the  hyoid  bone. 

please  him,  that  you  might  fancy 

that    he    could   never   be    cross ; 

4  but  if  he  does  not  like  people, 

he  never  hesitates  to  say  so,  and 

he  turns  them  out  of  the  house  at  once.    "Sometimes, 

on  a  long  acquaintance,  he  becomes  attached  to  those 

who  at  first  were  very  disagreeable  to  him. 

You  8  have  not  forgotten  that  repairs  are  constantly 
going  on  in  our  house,  and  that  nearly  everything 
needed  to  build  it  up  is  brought  to  the  lower  front 
door.  T  Here  it  is  examined  by  this  guard,  who  de- 
cides whether  it  suits  him  to  let  it  pass  or  not. 
"  He  can  not  always  make  a  final  decision,  but  submits 
the  matter  to  the  owner  of  the  dwelling  for  his  opin- 
ion.     B  "  This  tastes  good,"  he  says,  "  I  think  you  bet- 


Tun  TONCL'E. 


r86  t&e  house  beautiful, 

tei  let  it  pass ";  or,  "  This  does  not  taste  good,  I 
would  rather  you  would  not  admit  it."  The  owner 
likes  to  please  this  guard,  who  has  the  rather  long 
name  of  10  Gustatory  Sense,  and  generally  refuses  to 
admit  those  whom  Gustatory  Sense  dislikes.  But 
there  are  times  when  he  must  decline  to  be  guided 
by  the  opinion  of  another,  and  must  decide  by  his 
own  reason  whether  the  article  shall  be  admitted  or 
not. 

11  Gustatory  Sense  is  such  a  long  name,  that  he  is 
generally  called  Taste.  12  Taste  has  to  be  carefully 
watched.  He  does  not  always  know  just  what  is 
needed  in  the  house,  and  makes  his  decision  from 
his  own  personal  likings.  ls  He  is  fond  of  sweets,  and 
sometimes  sends  so  much  of  them  into  the  kitchen, 
that  the  cook  complains  that  he  can  not  dispose  of 
them,  and,  by  and  by,  perhaps  the  other  assistant 
cooks  get  soured  with  being  "  overworked  in  digesting 
so  much  sweet,  and  they  rebel  and  say,  "We  will  not 
have  it,"  and  they  call  in  some  powerful  muscular  ser- 
vants to  aid  them,  and  they  send  the  ,6  offending  sub- 
stance back  up  the  kitchen  stairs  and  out  at  the  front 
door,  16  and  Taste  does  not  like  that  at  all.  He  never 
relishes  anything  after  the  cooks  have  been  working 
at  it. 

17  If  the  muscles  are  not  sufficient  to  send  out  the 
offending  material,  the  owner  of  the  house  may  call 
in  a  helper,  whose  name  is  designated  by  the  two  let- 
ters, Dr. ;  ,8  and  he  gives  something  which  Taste  would 
gladly  put  out  of  the  house  at  once,  but  he  is  com- 
pelled   to   let    it   pass,    ind    when    it    gets    into    the 


IV E  M  US  T  GO  VERN  TA  S  TE.  j  87 

kitchen,  it  causes  such  a  great  disturbance,  that  an 
extra  effort  is  made  to  get  rid  of  this  new  intruder, 
and,  in  the  accomplishment  of  it,  the  I8  obnoxious 
sweet  is  also  sent  out,  and  poor  Taste  feels  that  he 
has  a  hard  time  of  it.  You  "would  think  that  he 
would  learn  by  this  experience  to  avoid  that  mistake 
again,  but  the  truth  is,  that  when  he  has  once  ac- 
quired a  liking  for  a  substance,  he  will  accept  its 
company,  no  matter  how  much  trouble  it  may  cause 
in  the  house. 

"  It  is,  therefore,  important  not  to  allow  him  to 
make  objectionable  acquaintances,  for  he  may  become 
so  intimate  with  them  that  he  becomes  very  unhappy 
unless  he  can  have  their  constant  society.  "  Unfor- 
tunately we  can  not  discharge  him,  although  he  may 
make  us  a  great  deal  of  trouble  or  even  pain.  We  can 
only  take  charge  of  him,  and  a3  not  allow  him  to  be- 
come master  of  the  house.  u  He  will  grumble  very 
loudly,  and  complain  that  he  is  very  miserable  because 
we  do  not  trust  him,  and  sometimes  he  induces  other 
servants  to  join  in  this  fault-finding;  the  only  way 
then  to  do,  is  not  to  listen  to  any  of  them,  but  give 
them  to  understand  that  *s  Reason,  not  Taste,  is  mas- 
ter ;  and  when  he  has  been  taught,  by  Science  or  Ex- 
perience, that  certain  things  are  harmful,  we  will 
listen  to  his  advice  and  not  to  that  of  Taste,  who  self- 
ishly, at  such  times,  cares  only  for  his  own  pleasure 
and  not  for  our  real  good. 

"  When  people  live  in  a  simple  and  wholesome  man 
ncr,  the  judgment  of  Taste  is  usually  to  be  trusted 
"  He  will  always  say  that  milk   is  good,  that  he  likes 


j  88  THE  HO  USE  BE  A  UTIEUL. 

plain  bread  and  butter,  and  simply-cooked  vegetables 
and  meats.  But  28  if  he  is  accustomed  to  having 
everything  dressed  up  very  fine  for  his  pleasure,  he 
loses  the  ability  to  judge  of  the  worth  of  honest, 
wholesome,  plainly-dressed  visitors,  and  decides  that 
he  prefers  appearances  to  reality.  29  He  is  quick  to  be 
educated  in  wrong  habits.  So  it  is  very  important 
that  we  should  be  careful  to  give  him  a  good  educa- 
tion. 8o  I  have  seen  little  people  whose  Gustatory 
Sense  said  that  he  would  not  admit  bread  into  the 
house  unless  it  wore  a  coat  of  sugar  or  honey,  and  as 
papas  and  mammas  know  bread  is  very  necessary  to 
life,  they  sometimes  think  that  they  will  be  31  obliged 
to  listen  to  the  demands  of  Taste,  or  the  little  beauti- 
ful house  will  get  out  of  repair.  32  So  in  order  to  get 
all  of  the  substances  needed  for  repairs,  the  cooks  are 
obliged  to  dispose  of  too  much  of  something  not 
needed. 

If,  when  "he  insists  upon  having  all  of  his  com- 
pany dressed  up,  he  were  deprived  of  all  company  for 
a  while,  he  would  be  very  much  pleased  to  receive  a 
call  from  a  piece  of  very  dry  bread,  and  would  say, 
"  O,  how  good  that  tastes." 

There  are  several  bad  habits  into  which  Taste  may 
fall.  He  34  enjoys  "  good  things  "  so  well  that  he  often 
gets  into  the  habit  of  tasting  too  frequently.  He  is 
not  satisfied  with  what  he  gets  at  the  table,  but  he 
must  be  tasting  between  meals,  and  this  creates  a 
great  deal  of  trouble  in  the  house.  35  The  cooks  get 
out  of  patience  because  he  keeps  them  all  the  time  at 
work,  so  that  they  get  very  little  chance  to  rest,  and 


PAPILLJE  OF  THE   TONGUE. 


189 


no  one  likes  to  be  always  working  hard.  But,  s"if 
Reason  does  not  govern  this  little  fellow  in  the  pink 
uniform,  instead  of  being  our  guardian,  he  becomes 
our  destroyer.  Sometimes  he  is  not  content  to  eat  a 
fair  amount  at  meal-time,  but  calls  for  more  and  more 
until  he  fills  his  poor  kitchen  so  full  that  it  "  can  not 


filiform.  fungiform.  circum  vallate. 

The  Three  Kinds  of  Papillae  of  the  Tongue  Magnified. 

1  ne  fungiform  termination  of  nerves  is  found  on  the  end  and  border  of  the  tongue  ; 
the  filiform  on  the  middle,  and  the  circamvallate  on  the  back  portion  of  the 
tongue.  An  artery  and  vein  can  be  seen  going  into  each  papilla  ;  the  artery  is 
farthest  to  the  left. 

squeeze  together,  and  the  master  is  made  to  feel  very 
uncomfortable,  to  say  the  least,  and  often  he  is  caused 
to  suffer  pain  and  disease.  3H  Another  bad  habit  is  to 
call  for  food  so  fast  that  the  owner  is  obliged  to  eat 
as  fast  as  he  can,  to  gratify  Taste's  desire  to  feel  some 
thing  good  passing  over  him  all  the  time.  39  This  is 
the  cause  of  indigestion,  because  40  food  that  is  swal- 

13 


190 


THE  HOUSE  BEAUTIFUL. 


lowed  so  rapidly  can  not  be  well  masticated,  and  that 
makes  more  work  for  the  cooks,  and  the  result  is  that 
they  can  not  do  their  work  well, 41  and  so  the  house  is 
not  well  repaired.  42  If  Taste  did  but  know  it,  he 
would  enjoy  much  more  to  let  the  food  stay  longer 
in  the  mouth,  and  turn  it  over  and  over,  chewing  it 
well,  and  so  obtain  a  full  taste  of  all  the  sweetness. 

43  A  very  common  bad  habit  of  his  is  desiring 
all  food  to  be  rich  in  quality,  full  of  sugar  or  fats 
or  spices,  all  of  which  he  soon  acquires  a  taste  for, 
and  says  things  are  poor  and  not  good  unless  contain- 
ing a  large  quantity  of  these  things.  He  makes  a 
mistake  in  calling  them  good,  for  they  are  44  not  good, 
unless  they  are  needed  to  keep  the  house  in  repair  or 
to  keep  it  growing.  If  we  desire  that  Gustatory  Sense 
shall  be  truly  our  guardian,  we  must  keep  him  from 
acquiring  these  bad  habits,  or  he  will  in  time  become 
our  master,  and  a  very  tyrannical  master  he  is,  I 
assure  you. 


CHAPTER   XXVI. 

THE   OTHER  TWIN-BROTHER. 

1  One  of  the  guardians  of  our  house  makes  his  home 
in  the  upper  part  of  the  winding  stairway  used  by 
Aura  in  going  to  the  laundry, — we  might  say  in  the 
third  story.  2  A  German,  named  Schneider,  first  dis- 
covered his  hiding-place  in  a  3  pink  membrane,  which 
is  therefore  called  the  Schneiderian  membrane.  4  Gus- 
tatory Sense  presides  over  the  foods  and  drinks.  He 
is  a  very  good  guardian,  but  he6 can  not  examine 
those  companions  of  Aura  who  go  in  by  the  winding 
stairway,  and  he  is  therefore  assisted  by  his  6  twin- 
brother,  Olfactory  Sense,  called  familiarly  Smell. 

7  Aura,  whom  you  will  remember  as  a  washerwoman, 
is  also  a  very  important  and  helpful  person,  but,  like 
some  others,  has  relatives  whom  we  can  not  altogether 
trust,  for  she  is  related  to  the  8Gas  family,  some  of 
whom  are  very  dangerous.  You  will  remember  that 
'carbonic  acid  gas  is  such  a  deadly  foe  to  life  that  it 
is  constantly  being  thrown  out  of  the  house.  10  Some 
of  these  dangerous  gases  Smell  always  detects,  and 
notifies  the  master  of  the  approach  of  harm.  "  Aura, 
although  a  relative  of  the  Gases,  and  intimate  with 
them,  is  nevertheless  always  trying  to  prevent  them 

(191) 


fQ2  THE  HOUSE  BEAUTIFUL. 

from  doing  harm,  and  acts  as  a  peacemaker  between 
them  and  us.  If  you  go  into  a  cellar  that  has  been 
shut  for  a  long  time,  Smell  tells  you  that  a  bad  air  has 
accumulated  there.  12  Open  the  window  and  admit 
Aura ;  and  she,  13true  to  her  nature,  begins  to  purify 
and  cleanse  the  place,  and  render  the  bad  air  harm- 
less. There  are  circumstances  in  which  Smell  is  not 
able  to  do  his  duty  in  detecting  the  foes  of  the  house- 
hold. One  of  these  is  "  when  connection  has  been 
cut  off  between  him  and  the  master,  as  is  the  case  in 
a  bad  cold.  ,&At  this  time  we  also  find  it  difficult 
to  tell  the  true  taste  of  foods.  Indeed  it  is  often 
difficult  to  decide  whether  the  idea  we  have  of  a  sub- 
stance is  formed  from  the  opinion  expressed  by  Taste 
or  Smell,  they  are  so  closely  related.  That  which  we 
suppose  to  be  the  flavor  of  onions  or  garlic  is  in  re- 
ality their  odor. 

Sometimes  '6  Smell  seems  to  have  lost  his  conscience, 
and  associates  with  bad  odors  without  saying  any- 
thing about  them.  17  If  you  sleep  at  night  with  doors 
and  windows  closed,  in  the  morning  you  wake  up  not 
feeling  rested.  But  Smell  says  nothing  to  you  of  bad 
air.  He  has  been  associating  with  it  all  night,  and 
has  got  accustomed  to  it.  But  go  out  into  the  fresh, 
clear  morning  air  for  a  brisk  run,  and  then  return  to 
your  room,  and  then  Smell  suffers  a  spasm  of  con- 
science, and  exclaims  :  "  O,  1H  what  a  dreadful  atmos- 
phere ;  I  can  not  endure  it."  Then  he  continues,  in 
quite  a  dictatorial  manner:  "  Don't  you  know  that  you 
have  been  washing  your  blood  in  this  air  for  hours? 
Do  not   breathe   it   over  again.     It  is  poison.     You 


SMELL  AND    TASTE    TWIN -BRO'l  HERS. 


193 


have  nearly  smothered  me  already.  I  shudder  to  think 
how  you  have  been  compelling  me  to  smell,  all  night 
long,  the  ,9  waste  matter  which  your  body  has  been 
casting  off.  2oYou  would  not  drink  water  which  you 
had  used  for  washing  your  clothes,  or  even  your  faces ; 
yet  that  is  cleanly  compared  to  breathing,  again 
and  again,  the  air  that  has  been  used  for  washing 
your  blood." 

When  Smell  does  wake  up,  he  is  apt  to  be  pretty 
severe  in  his  scoldings,  and  more  than  that  he  is  right, 
too.  "  But  what  shall  we  do  ?  We  must  breathe  at 
night."  That  is  true,  and  we  should  be  careful  to  ad- 
mit plenty  of  fresh  air  to  breathe.  Don't  be  afraid 
of  night  air  in  your  bedrooms.  It  is  all  the  kind  of 
air  you  can  get  at  night,  and  to  have  it  coming  in 
pure  and  fresh  is  far  better  than  to  be  shut  up  with 
a  small  quantity,  and  breathe  it  over  and  over  again. 
It  is  not  necessary  that  you  should  have  a  21  draft 
through  ;  if  you  only  have  an  opening  somewhere  the 
air  will  be  constantly  changing.  We  can  prove  this 
by  experiment. 

Most  gases  are  lighter  than  air,  and  consequently 
have  a  tendency  to  rise.  !2  When  we  fill  a  cup  with 
them  we  have  to  turn  it  bottom  up  so  as  to  hold 
them.  23  But  carbonic  acid  gas,  the  gas  which  is  be- 
ing thrown  off  from  the  lungs  constantly,  is  **  heavier 
than  air,  and  can  be  put  into  a  cup  that  is  right  side 
up.  It  can  be  poured  from  one  cup  into  another, 
just  as  water  can,  and  we  prove  this  by  splitting  a 
lighted  taper  into  the  cup.  If  it  be  full  of  carbonic 
acid  gas  the  light  will  not  burn,  and  a  gas  which  is  so 


194 


THE  HOUSE  BEAUTIFUL. 


deadly  to  light  is  equally  deadly  to  life.  2fi  Although 
this  gas  is  heavier  than  air,  if  we  leave  a  cupful  of  it 
standing  open  we  shall  find,  after  a  time,  that  it  has 
climbed  out  of  the  cup,  and  diffused  itself  throughout 
the  air  of  the  room  ;  so,  although  it  sinks  to  the  bot- 
tom of  our  bedrooms,  yet  if  we  leave  an  opening 
somewhere  it  will  climb  out,  although  it  would  be 
better  if  the  opening  were  near  the  floor. 

To  become 
acquainted 
with  the  smell 
of  a  substance, 
the  nerve  of  the 
,7  Schneiderian 
membranemust 
come  in  contact 
with  some  of  its 
particles.  :8How 
very  small  these 
particles  must 
be  is  shown  by 
the  fact  that  a 
grain  of  musk- 
perfumed  a 
room  for  nearly  forty  years  without  losing  any  appre- 
ciable weight.  29  In  cases  of  contagious  diseases,  the 
germs  of  that  disease  are  floating  through  the  air  and 
sometimes  Smell  can  detect  them,  although  none  of  the 
other  senses  can  recognize  their  presence.  We  often 
think  that  if  we  have  covered  up  a  disagreeable  odor  by 
a  pleasant  one  we  have  remedied  the  trouble.    This  is 


Nerves  of  the  Nose — Righi   Side. 

Nerve  of  special  sense  spread  out  through  the  Schnei- 
derian membrane. 


OXYGEN   THE  DISINFECTANT. 


195 


a  mistake.  A  handkerchief  saturated  with  attar  of  roses 
might  prevent  Smell's  detecting  the  odor  of  perspira- 
tion, but  it  would  not  have  been  removed  by  the  per- 
fume. Nothing  would  do  that  but  a  bath.  3U  In  the  same 
way  many  of  our  so-called  disinfectants  only  cover 
up  poisonous  odors.  They  do  not  remedy  the  evils. 
The  best  and  only  perfectly  effectual  disinfectant  is 

oxygen,  Aura's  powerful  washing  preparation. 

Olfactory  Sense  is  not  only  a  guardian,  warning  of 
danger,  but  he  also  gives  pleasure  to  the  master  of 
the  house.  He  does  this  partly  by  the  assistance 
which  he  gives  to  Taste  in  appreciating  the  good 
qualities  of  foods ;  he  has  also  the  power  to  com- 
municate many  pleasant  things  himself.  He  under- 
stands the  language  of  the  flowers,  and  interprets  the 
sweet  whisperings  of  the  lily  and  rose,  and  of  the 
aromatic  balsams  and  pines,  and  repeats  over  and 
over  again  the  dying  song  of  the  new-mown  hay. 

Even  he  whose  ears  are  closed  to  melodious  sounds, 
whose  eyes  are  sealed  from  glimpses  of  blue  sky  and 
all  the  wonders  of  earth,  is  not  altogether  comfort- 
less, for  the  wonders  of  air  can  yet  be  revealed  to 
him,  and  through  this  faithful  friend  and  guardian 
he  can  be  protected  from  some  evils  and  cheered  by 
some  blessings  that  come  to  him, 

"  Like  the  sweet  south  that  breathes 
Upon  a  bank  of  violets 
Stealing,  and  giving  odour." 


CHAPTER  XXVII. 

THE   FA£ADE. 

EVERY  child  has  noticed  the  fanciful  resemblance 
between  the  front  of  a  house  and  the  human  face. 
That  child  surely  did,  who  seeing  a  fringe  of  icicles 
along  the  gable  asked,  "  Mamma,  who  banged  that 
house's  hair?"  'The  front  of  a  house  is  called  the 
facade,  and  that  means  the  house's  face.  2  The 
facade  is  usually  more  finished  than  the  other  sides 
of  the  building.  s  It  may  be  ornamented  with  col- 
umns and  arches,  or  decorated  with  carvings,  and 
statues,  and  sculpture,  so  as  to  become  a  work  of  art ; 
to  see  which  people  will  travel  across  seas,  and  to  re- 
member which  will  be  a  joy  forever. 

James  Ferguson,  in  his  History  of  Architecture, 
says  :  "  It  may  be  safely  asserted  that  a  building  is 
beautiful  and  perfect,  exactly  in  the  ratio  in  which 
the  same  amount  of  concealment  and  display  of  con- 
struction is  preserved,  and  where  the  same  symmetry 
is  shown  as  between  the  right  and  left  sides  of  the 
body.  In  short,  there  is  no  principle  involved  in  the 
structure  of  man  which  may  not  have  been  taken  as 
the  most  absolute  standard  of  excellence  in  architect- 
ed) 


WHA  T  IS  BE  A  UTY?  igj 

ure."  Is  not  this  a  proof  that  we  have  wisely  called 
our  body  the  House  Beautiful?  It  is  often  difficult 
to  tell  what  it  is  that  makes  an  object  beautiful.  4  It 
is  not  any  one  thing,  but  a  union  of  many  quali- 
ties.  In  the  highest  works  of  nature  we  find  symme. 
try  a  most  striking  quality.  6  In  man  this  symmetry 
is  very  marked.  Each  outside  half  of  the  body  is 
like  the  other  half. 

6  Many  people  think  that  a  thing  is  beautiful  if  it 
is  useful.  It  is  true  that  when  nature  makes  any  of 
her  works  more  useful,  she  at  the  same  time  makes 
it  more  beautiful.  To  ornament  the  outside  merely, 
without  adding  something  practical,  is  not  to  make  a 
thing  beautiful.  7  We  might  think  that  the  founda"- 
tions  of  our  house  were  not  beautiful,  but  they  are 
useful,  and  more  than  that,  they  add  to  our  grace  and 
dignity.  The  very  way  in  which  the  skeleton  is  put 
together  makes  the  outside  of  the  house  look  well, 
and  enables  one  to  walk  with  grace.  "  The  cat  and 
deer  can  not  move  inelegantly.  The  dancing-master 
can  not  teach  a  badly  built  man  to  walk  well."  You 
will  be  better  able  to  appreciate  the  grace  and  con- 
venience of  the  foundations,  if  you  imagine  that  the 
bone  of  the  arm  might  have  been  made  square,  with 
sharp  corners,  and  bolted  on  at  the  shoulder.  Study 
the  formation  of  the  whole  body.  "  See  how  beauti- 
fully the  ribbon-like  muscles  taper  down  to  the  ten- 
dons which  are  inserted  into  the  bones,  giving  that 
charmingly  graceful  outline  which  all  admire.  See 
how  noiselessly  they  play  against  each  other  under  the 
flexible,  elastic  walls.     9  A  statue  can  give  us  the  same 


198 


THE  HOUSE  BEAUTIFUL. 


beauty  of  outline,  but  it  can  not  give  us  beauty  of 
motion. 

10  The  beauty  of  the  human  form  arises  from  its 
being  suited  to  the  needs  of  the  master.  "  Did  you 
ever  read  of  a  world  of  chance?  I  have,  and  in  that 
world  things  happened,  having  no  intelligence  to 
direct  them,  as  in  this  world  which  God  governs. 
Men's  bodies  grew  in  strange  fashion.  Sometimes 
the  arms  were  square,  and  the  shoulders  like  a  flat- 
iron.  Sometimes  the  bones  were  solid  and  as  heavy 
as  lead.  Perhaps  the  head  was  the  shape  of  a  tea- 
box,  while  one  ear  was  on  the  back  of  the  head,  and 
the  other  upon  the  forehead.  One  eye  was  in  the 
middle  of  the  hand,  and  the  other  under  the  arm.  I 
fancy  that  no  one  of  us  would  like  to  live  in  such  a 
world,  nor  would  we  find  much  to  admire  in  a  house 
so  badly  and  irregularly  constructed.  ,a  One  ought 
surely  never  to  find  fault  with  their  bodies,  so  beau- 
tifully contrived,  and  made,  as  it  is  said,  in  the  image 
of  God.  To  be  beautiful,  things  should  be  appropri- 
ate. What  is  very  pretty  in  one  thing  is  not  at  all 
pretty  in  something  else.  r  The  peaceful  shepherd 
watching  his  flock  in  the  field  does  not  need  the 
strength  and  muscular  development  of  the  warrior. 

We  would  not  be  pleased  to  see  the  proportions 
of  a  man,  which  signify  14  energy  and  vigor,  given  in 
exchange  for  the  roundness  and  delicacy  of  the 
womanly  form  which  especially  typify  grace.  We 
even  expect  and  admire  a  different  form  in  youth 
from  that  of  age.  ,6  In  boyhood  we  look  for  activity 
and  swiftness ;  in  manhood,  for  dignity  and  strength. 


BE  A  UTY  OF  FORM .  j  gg 

18  111  the  wrestler  we  examine  the  strength  of  the 
arms  ;  in  the  racer  we  look  at  the  development  of  the 
legs,  and  call  each  beautiful  when  we  see  that  the 
body  is  adapted  to  its  work. 

17  But  this  fitness  for  its  special  work  is  not  enough 
to  account  for  all  of  our  admiration  for  the  House 
Beautiful,  the  human  form.  We  must  add  something 
which  we  can  not  see,  or  touch,  and  yet  which  makes 
itself  felt.  ls  This  is  the  character  of  the  inhabitant. 
"  Every  spirit  makes  its  own  house,"  says  Emerson. 

If  the  man  who  lives  in  a  house  is  its  builder,  we  can 
form  something  of  an  opinion  about  him.  ,9  So  we 
can  tell  something  about  the  Man  Wonderful  who 
dwells  in  our  House  Beautiful  by  looking  at  its  out- 
side. ao  We  can  tell  whether  he  is  gay  or  sad,  whether 
he  is  strong  or  weak,  whether  he  is  old  or  young. 

When  we  see  n  a  tender  babe  we  think  of  innocence 
and  helplessness.  The  figure  of  the  lad  or  youth  in- 
dicates hope  and  activity.  That  of  man  indicates 
strength,  thought,  and  courage.  That  of  woman,  del- 
icacy, modesty,  and  tenderness. 

But  to  be  wholly  beautiful  there  must  be  a  22  unity 
of  design.  That  is,  things  must  seem  to  belong  to- 
gether. As  a  philosopher  puts  it,  "  Short  legs,  which 
constrain  us  to  short,  mincing  steps  are  a  kind  of  per- 
sonal insult  to  the  owner,  and  long  stilts  put  him  at  a 
disadvantage,  and  force  him  to  stoop  to  the  level  of 
mankind." 

But,  "do  we  ever  speak  of  the  beauty  of  a  person 
whose  face  we  have  not  seen  ?  What  makes  the  fea- 
tures of  the  countenance  of  such  great  importance  ? 


200  THE  HOUSE  BEAUTIFUL. 

u  It  is  by  the  expression  of  the  face  that  we  judge  of 
character.  We  form  an  opinion  of  the  spirit  by  the 
facade  of  its  house.  There  can  be  no  beauty  which 
does  not  seem  to  mean  something.  25  We  even  talk 
of  things  that  have  no  life  as  if  they  had  mind.  We 
say  the  elm  expresses  protecting  strength ;  the  vine, 
clinging  weakness.  We  speak  of  the  flaunting  dahlia 
and  the  modest  violet,  as  if  their  peculiarities  were 
the  effect  of  thought,  or  the  expression  of  character. 

It  is  a  fact 2C  that  a  certain  feeling  will  give  a  certain 
expression  to  the  face,  and  it  is  true  that  an  expres- 
sion of  face  will,  often,  create  a  corresponding  feel- 
ing. Try  it.  '27  Frown  and  pout  and  you  will  find 
your  mind  taking  on  the  feelings  which  your  face  ex- 
presses. Smile,  put  your  face  into  the  expression  of 
gentleness  or  mirth,  and  it  will  be  next  to  impossible 
to  be  cross  or  angry. 

The  aa  attitudes  of  the  body  are  also  indicative  of 
different  feelings.  It  has  been  claimed  that  every 
feeling  which  can  be  expressed  by  29  language  can  also 
be  expressed  by  gesture  and  attitude. 

In  pantomime  a  whole  story  is  told  without  a 
spoken  word,  by  gesture  and  action  alone.  80  Statues 
which  were  chiselled  hundreds  of  years  ago  tell  their 
story  of  joy  or  grief  to  us,  as  plainly  as  they  did  to 
those  who  created  them,  or  who  first  looked  upon 
their  almost  speaking  figures  and  faces. 

Public  speakers  know  the  force  of  81  gesture.  An 
audience  may  be  convulsed  with  laughter  simply  by  a 
grimace,  and  how  much  can  be  said  by  the  human 
hand.      It   beckons  to  approach,  it  warns  off,  it  de- 


THE  FACE  EXPRESSES  CHARACTER.  201 

fends,  it  threatens,  it  entreats,  it  caresses,  it  blesses. 
53  Much  of  the  beauty  of  the  Facade  depends  upon 
the  form  of  the  head,  the  proportions  of  the  three 
divisions  of  the  face:  the  curve  of  the  eyebrows,  the 
character  of  the  nose,  the  size  and  form  of  the  mouth  ; 
the  roundness  or  squareness  of  the  chin  and  jaw,  and 
the  manner  in  which  the  head  is  set  upon  the  shoul- 
ders. "These  features,  when  the  eyes  are  in  repose, 
will  always  have  the  same  expression.  34  But  the  gen- 
eral expression  of  the  face  changes  under  the  influ- 
ence of  strong  feeling. 

We  may  see  "  the  brow  contracted  with  anger  or 
pain  ;  or  the  eyebrows  raised  in  attention,  or  admira- 
tion, or  astonishment.  "  But  it  is  in  the  eye  that  the 
feelings  are  most  clearly  revealed.  The  man  looks  out 
of  his  windows  and  we  see  3:  his  thoughts.  We  need 
no  words  to  tell  us  that  he  is  angry,  or  sad,  or  happy. 
He  can  tell  his  thoughts  in  words,  but  in  spite  of 
himself,  often,  they  are  written  on  his  face  and  figure. 
r  Attitude  and  gesture  are  the  unspoken  language  by 
which  the  face  and  form  express  the  character  and 
feelings  of  the  mind.  But  the  attitude  which  may  be 
admired  in  one  will  not  always  awaken  the  same  feel- 
ing, if  seen  in  another. 

*  The  gestures  and  tones  of  the  minister,  in  the  pul- 
pit, may  awaken  our  admiration,  but  when  closely  im- 
itated by  a  little  child  will  only  cause  a  smile. 

In  the  "coloring  of  our  house  there  is  a  unity. 
The  eyes,  hair,  complexion,  the  eyebrows,  all  have  a 
correspondence  and  a  meaning. 

We  judge  of  temperament,  tastes,  and  characteris- 


202  THE  HOUSE  BEAUTIFUL. 

tics  by  this  coloring,  and  we  have  an  opinion  whe- 
ther there  is  a  healthy  body  by  the  color  of  the 
skin. 

"  It  is  the  soundness  of  the  bones  that  ultimates  it- 
self in  a  peach-bloom  complexion  ;  health  of  consti- 
tution that  makes  the  sparkle  and  power  of  the  eye." 

•'  The  color  of  the  face  changes  with  the  feelings. 
Joy  brings  a  charming  glow,  modesty  gives  a  delicate 
flush,  while  42  anger  dilates  the  capillaries  and  surges 
the  cheeks  with  a  dark,  unlovely  red,  or  it  contracts 
the  capillaries,  and  the  cheeks  grow  deadly  pale.  "  He 
was  white  with  rage,"  we  sometimes  say.  And  this 
is  a  more  deadly  form  of  that  baneful  passion  than 
that  which  covers  the  face  with  a  glow. 

43  But  color,  like  expression,  should  be  appropriate. 
The  color  of  the  baby  is  not  pleasing  on  the  face  of 
youth,  nor  the  complexion  of  man  charming  on  the 
face  of  woman.  44  Ruskin  says  we  do  not  appreciate 
the  sacredness  and  nobleness  of  color.  "  What  would 
the  world  become,"  asks  he,  "  if  the  blue  were  taken 
from  the  sky,  the  gold,  sunshine  and  verdure  from  the 
leaves,  the  crimson  from  the  blood  which  is  the  life 
of  man,  the  flush  from  the  cheek,  the  darkness  from 
the  eye,  the  radiance  from  the  hair?  If  they  could 
see,  but  for  an  instant,  white  human  creatures  living 
in  a  white  world,  they  would  soon  feel  what  they  owe 
to  color.     Of  all  gifts  to  man  color  is  the  holiest,  the 

most  divine,  the  most  solemn And  the  purest 

and  most  solemn  minds  are  those  which  love  color 
most." 

This  is  a  consoling  thought.     We  all  desire  to  be 


HEALTH  GIVES  CHARMS. 


203 


beautiful,  and  color  is  an  element  of  beauty.  45  Health 
gives  the  most  charming  tint,  and  health  is  largely 
within  our  grasp  if  we  obey  the  laws  which  have 
been  made  to  govern  our  bodies.  48  No  matter  how 
irregular  our  features,  if  lighted  up  by  the  glowing 
hues  of  health,  they  will  have  a  charm.  Add  to  this 
the  beauty  of  expression,  the  shining  out  of  a  noble 
spirit,  and  we  can  well  spare  mere  beauty  of  outline. 
The  beautiful  soul  transfigures  the  plain  face.  Artists 
say,  no  face  is  perfectly  symmetrical  ;  the  nose  is  not 
in  the  middle,  the  eyes  not  exactly  equal.  But  what 
does  it  matter  if  the  spirit  has  high  ambitions,  thinks 
great  thoughts,  plans  great  deeds  to  benefit  mankind. 
"  Tis  no  matter  whether  his  nose  is  parallel  with  his 
spine,  as  it  ought  to  be,  or  whether  he  has  a  nose  at 
all,  whether  his  legs  are  straight,  or  whether  his  legs 
are  amputated,"  says  the  philosopher  Emerson. 4T  Beau- 
ty  lies  then  in  our  own  hands.  We  can  make  our  house 
what  we  will.  Face  and  figure  may  tell  of  low,  base 
thoughts  that  mar  the  most  perfect  features,  or  they 
may  portray  gentleness  and  love,  or  grandeur  of 
thought  and  ambition  that  will  ennoble  the  plainest 
face. 

4?  Pausing  before  the  facade  of  St.  Peter's  at  Rome, 
or  that  of  the  beautiful  cathedral  at  Milan,  with  its 
5,000  marble  statues,  or  that  of  the  most  perfect  of 
all  cathedrals  at  Cologne,  with  its  magnificent  towers 
and  Gothic  architecture,  you  will  be  hushed  with  ad- 
miration  and  awe.  You  will  marvel  at  the  skill  of 
those  who  planned  and  builded  such  masterpieces, 
and  then  you  will  remember  that  they  are  dead,  and 


204 


THE  HOUSE  BEAUTIFUL. 


the  works  of  their  hands  are  gradually  crumbling 
into  decay.  49  But  the  House  Beautiful  can  grow  more 
and  more  lovely  while  the  inhabitant  every  day  ana 
hour  carves  with  delicate  skill  some  fine  tracery  upon 
its  walls,  or  moulds  more  clearly  the  lines  which  show 
a  divine  beauty  and  harmony. 

60  Truly  no  work  of  man's  hand  can  equal  this  beau- 
tiful  house,  the  work  of  Divine  Wisdom ;  and  we 
ought  to  praise  Him,  that  in  spite  of  all  inherited 
defects  of  constitution  or  configuration,  we  can,  by  the 
aid  of  His  will  working  in  us  to  do  His  pleasure,  re- 
mould our  features  into  an  expression  of  divine 
beauty. 

If  we  study  to  know  the  construction  of  this  our 
wondrous  dwelling-place,  and  to  learn  the  laws  which 
govern  its  workings  ;  if  then  with  religious  care  we 
obey  every  law  as  it  has  been  revealed  to  us  ;  if  we 
keep  from  our  minds  all  unlovely  feelings,  ail  ungen- 
erous emotions,  and  respect  ourselves  as  the  crea- 
tions of  God's  skill,  and  therefore  holy,  and  to  be 
sacredly  guarded  and  cherished  ;  if  we  entertain 
only  those  nobler  thoughts,  those  worthy  ambitions 
whose  moulding  touches  trace  in  ever  deepening 
lines  upon  the  face  an  expression  of  immortal  excel- 
lence, we  shall  be  rewarded  with  the  physical  health 
which  gives  beauty  of  outline  and  coloring,  with  the 
vigor  which  is  expressed  by  vivacity  and  strength, 
and  with  those  spiritual  graces  which  add  beauty  of 
expression,  and  then,  and  not  till  then,  will  our  bod- 
ies, in  the  highest  sense,  be  "Our  House  Beautiful." 


PART     II 

THE  MAN   WONDERFUL 


CHAPTER     I. 

THE   BABY. 


OUR  House  Beautiful  is  finished.  From  foundation 
to  cupola  it  is  complete.  We  have  gone  through  its 
various  rooms,  have  examined  their  construction  and 
purpose.  2  We  have  admired  the  wisdom  and  skill 
that  planned  and  created  so  marvellous  a  dwelling. 
'  But,  as  we  look  at  it,  we  see  that  the  windows  are 
closed,  the  house  is  still.  Where  and  who  is  the  ten- 
ant? You  will  never  see  him.  Will  the  house  then 
never  be  inhabited  ?  4  Oh,  yes ;  but  you  will  never 
see  the  inhabitant.  'You  will  catch  glimpses  of  him 
peeping  out  of  the  windows ;  you  will  hear  him  speak, 
and  he  will  hear  you;  6you  will  become  acquainted 
with  his  likes  and  dislikes,  and,  through  his  actions, 
with  his  motives  and  thoughts  ;  you  will  see  him  carry 
out  plans  which  he  has  made;  you  will  please  or  of- 
fend him  ;  you  will  love  or  dislike  him  ;  but  you  will 
never  see  him. 

7  The  Man  Wonderful  who  is  to  live  in  this  House 
Beautiful   8  is  a   more    marvellous   study  than  is   his 
H  (205) 


2o6  THE  MAN  WONDERFUL. 

dwelling.  He  will  take  possession  of  it,  and  little  by- 
little  we  will  become  acquainted  with  him.  9  When 
first  he  comes  to  dwell  in  the  house,  he  is  a  stranger 
to  himself,  his  home,  and  to  the  world. 

His  house  is  very  small,  and  not  altogether  com- 
plete ;  u  for  there  are  no  white  soldiers  to  receive  his 
visitors,  and  in  his  dining-room  certain  attendants  are 
wanting.  His  guardians  of  the  Sense  family  are  not 
at  all  educated ;  "  his  hundreds  of  muscular  servants 
are  untrained ;  and  he  12  is  incapable  of  giving  them 
any  commands.  13  At  times  the  windows  are  opened 
a  little,  but  the  Man  does  not  seem  to  look  out  of 
them.  14  Only  the  folding-doors  seem  to  be  in  per- 
fect working  order,  and,  judging  from  the  sounds  that 
issue  forth,  the  Man  Wonderful  is  principally  a  voice. 

16  No  young  creature  is  so  perfectly  helpless  as  the 
human  baby.  16  Calves  and  colts  can  run  as  soon  as 
born,  and  the  chick  of  the  hen  or  quail  will  often  run 
with  the  shell  on  its  back.  17  But  the  infant  Man,  if 
left  to  himself,  must  inevitably  perish.  18  He  can  not 
seek  his  food ;  he  can  not  even  turn  himself  over  un- 
aided ;  and  for  months  he  can  not  move  himself  from 
one  place  to  another.  1B  He  is  simply  a  brute,  and 
superior  to  all  other  brutes  only  in  his  vocal  powers. 
They  are  his  only  20  prophecy  of  greatness.  Very 
slowly  he  will  gain  possession  of  his  powers,  but  by 
and  by  he  will  develop  that  which  will  make  us 
ashamed  that  we  Vave  called  him  a  brute. 

21  It  was  doubtless  the  design  of  the  Architect  that 
the  House  Beautiful  should  be  inhabited  until  it  grew 
old   and   gradually  fell   into   decay.     Then   the   Man 


THE  BABY. 


20; 


Wonderful  was  to  vacate  his  dwelling  and  move  into 
the  M  House  not  made  with  hands,  eternal  in  the 
heavens." 

,2  But,  too  often,  the  house  is  vacated  by  its  infant 
tenant  before  it  has  had  time  to  reach  its  full  devel- 
opment. "  We  may  find  some  apology  for  this,  be- 
cause nature  has  made  the  young  of  the  human  race 
so  helpless.  *'  But  man  has  the  advantage  over  brutes, 
in  that  he  has  reason  and  should  be  able  to  study  the 
laws  of  the  body  and  obey  them,  and  thus  largely 
"prevent  premature  vacation  of  these  little  houses. 

16  The  first  need  of  the  body  is  clothing.  ,7  The 
woollen  garment  of  the  lamb  is  a  model  one.  It  fits 
perfectly ;  it  is  not  too  tight ;  it  does  not  bind  the 
body  in  anyplace;  it  does  not  interfere  with  entire 
freedom  of  limbs  ;  it  is  soft,  and  loose,  and  warm  ; 
there  is  no  superfluity  of  material.  These  are  the 
qualities  needed  in  the  clothing  of  the  infant. 
"Bands  that  restrict  the  use  of  arms,  or -legs,  or 
stomach,  are  as  bad  for  the  baby  as  they  would  be 
for  the  lamb.  Babies  are  made  to  live  and  be  happy, 
"and  are  always  as  happy  as  they  are  permitted  to 
be.  30  If  they  are  unhappy,  it  is  because  something  is 
wrong  in  their  dress,  their  food,  or  the  circumstances 
which  surround  them. 

31  We  all  know  that  there  are  persons  whose  very 
presence  does  us  good,  and  others  whose  personal  at- 
mosphere is  disagreeable.  This  invisible  something 
which  people  carry  about  with  them,  we  might  call 
personal  magnetism,  or  electricity.  It  matters  little 
what  we  call  it  ;  we  know  that  it  exists.     b"  The  baby 


2o8  THE  MAN  WONDERFUL. 

feels  this  influence  very  keenly,  and  refuses  to  be  quiet 
with  some  people,  while  with  others,  equally  strange, 
it  seems  contented  and  happy.  If  held  too  long,  even 
by  one  whom  it  likes,  S3  the  child's  own  electrical  con- 
ditions become  disturbed,  and  it  cries.  If  taken  by 
some  one  else,  or  put  down  where  it  can  recover  its 
own  electrical  state,  it  will  become  quiet.  84  This  ex- 
plains why  a  stranger  can,  sometimes,  quiet  a  child, 
which  all  the  mother's  care  has  failed  to  still. 

35  The  next  demand  of  the  child  is  food,  which  na- 
ture has  provided  in  the  most  perfect  form.  3G  Regu- 
lar habits  of  feeding  secure  health,  and  also  establish 
regular  habits  of  sleeping.  The  sleep  of  a  child  is  sa- 
cred. You,  who  now  know  so  well  what  is  going  on  in 
the  house  when  the  windows  are  closed  and  the  mas- 
ter is  asleep,  who  can  imagine  the  3?  busy  servants  go- 
>ng  swiftly  about  the  house  building  up,  or  repairing 
the  wear  and  tear  of  life,  38will  never  disturb  the 
sleep  of  a  child  by  needless  noise,  or  jolting,  or  rock- 
ing; but,  J9  putting  it  away  in  a  quiet,  darkened,  well 
ventilated  room,  will  leave  it  to  the  gentle  care  of 

"Tired  nature's  sweet  restorer,  balmy  sleep." 

40  But  now  we  begin  to  catch  a  glimpse  of  the  inhabi- 
tant of  the  house.  We  see  him  peep  from  the  windows. 
11  He  is  beginning  to  get  acquainted  with  the  world  and 
with  himself.  His  little  fists  play  about  his  face  with 
no  intent  or  purpose,  but  always  with  the  result  of 
training  some  of  his  many  servants.  42  As  yet  he  has 
no  consciousness  that  he  is  getting  acquainted  with 
himself,  43  even    his  voluntary  movements  are  made 


HE  SITS  ALOXE.  2OQ 

as  unconsciously  as  the  working  of  his  lungs,  or  the 
beating  of  his  heart.  He  does  not  know  that  he 
ought  to  exercise  in  order  to  grow,  and  yet  he  keeps 
always  in  motion. 

Why  is  it?  44  The  burning  of  coal  produces  heat; 
certain  chemical  changes  produce  the  invisible  agent 
known  as  electricity ;  and  we  can  believe  that  chang- 
ing food  into  tissues  of  the  body  may  produce  an- 
other intangible  agent,  the  source  of  this  constant 
activity  which  exists  in  the  young  of  all  animals. 

They  do  not  reason  about  it,  but  they  obey  the 
inborn  impulse  to  exercise,  because  without  it  they 
will  not  grow.  "  As  the  baby's  chief  business  is  to 
grow,  we  must  give  him  a  little  46 "  wholesome  neg- 
lect," and  a  little  judicious  education. 

47  First,  he  must  learn  to  sit  alone,  and  all  we  can 
do  is  to  put  him  on  the  floor,  prop  him  up  with  pil- 
lows and  leave  him  to  his  instincts.  After  a  time  we 
find  the  pillows  can  be  dispensed  with. 

48  After  many  tumbles  baby  learns  to  turn  himself 
over,  face  downward,  and  essays  to  crawl  like  a  snake. 
What  is  there  in  this  little  wriggling,  squirming, 
crawling  thing  to  foreshadow  the  grand,  kingly  man, 
standing  erect,  and  feeling  himself  akin  to  the  im- 
mortal ?  49  The  upward  tending  instinct  is  there,  how- 
ever, and  manifests  itself  by  impelling  50  the  child  to 
rise  on  all  fours ;  51  after  months  of  such  lowly  prog- 
ress, he  stands  on  his  feet  and  exults  in  his  success ; 
and  well  he  may,  for,  to  accomplish  it,  he  has  trained 
many  helpful  muscles  in  their  functions.  And  now 
papa  hears  the  delightful  news  that  "  baby  has  taken 
a  step  alone,  you  must  see  him." 


2I0  THE  MAN   WONDERFUL. 

The  step  is  taken,  and  awakens  as  much  applause 
as  the  most  amazing  feat  of  the  acrobat,  and  deserves 
it  even  more. 

R2  Walking  is  really  a  dangerous  performance,  and 
only  becomes  safe  by  practice.  Dr.  Holmes  calls 
walking,  53  "  perpetual  falling  with  perpetual  re- 
covery." 54  Running  is  still  more  difficult:  the  falling 
being  more  rapid,  the  recovery  must  also  be  more 
rapid,  and  there  is  a  point  of  time  when  both  feet  are 
off  the  ground  at  the  same  instant.  Remembering 
the  number  of  servants  that  must  be  trained,  and 
that  they  must  work  harmoniously,  we  shall  better 
appreciate  the  greatness  of  the  accomplishment  of 
the  feats  of  walking  and  running. 

We  often  say  that  a  child  is  getting  old  enough  to 
go  to  school  and  learn  something,  but  in  truth  55  a  per- 
son never  learns  in  any  later  five  years  of  life  as  much 
as  he  does  in  the  first  five.  66  Every  external  object  is 
his  teacher.  57  The  gay  and  noisy  rattle,  which  he 
jingles  aimlessly,  is  teaching  his  eye,  and  ear,  and 
hand;  "the  doll  develops  his  powers  of  imitation; 
the  baby-jumper  prepares  the  way  for  walking ;  the 
rocking-horse  teaches  balancing  himself  in  a  sitting 
position  while  in  motion  ;  59  the  swing  adds  to  this  the 
continuing  of  motion  by  constantly  changing  the 
centre  of  gravity,  and  incidentally  develops  courage. 
The  skipping-rope  teaches,  not  only,  activity,  but  time, 
decision,  regularity,  promptness ;  rolling  the  hoop 
educates  eye,  and  hand,  and  judgment,  in  measuring 
the  strength  of  the  stroke  ;  60  playing  marbles  teaches 
weight,  and  the  application  of  force  with  a  definite 


A/A  S  l  Ek  Of  HIS  SER I  'A  XTS.  2 1 1 

object  in  view  ;  ball-playing  does  this  still  better  and 
gives  more  activity  to  the  muscles.  "  Repeating  a 
task  makes  it  easier  to  perform,  and  at  length 
the  movements  necessary  to  it  may  become  mechan- 
ical, or  as  we  say,  automatic.  After  a  few  months  of 
practice,  the  child  has  no  longer  to  think  of  his  feet 
in  walking;  they  move  automatically,  and  it  is  the 
same  with  his  games.  They  have  educated  his  mus- 
cles, until  they  have  learned  to  do  their  work  without 
the  conscious  supervision  of  the  master  of  the  house. 

6"The  child  is  becoming  master  of  his  servants. 
But  the  education  of  the  muscles  is  continued.  The 
ball-playing  becomes  more  scientific,  his  jumping  has 
a  more  definite  aim. 

To  these  teachers  may  be  added,  "  calisthenics, 
which  add  the  delight  of  music,  and  education  in 
rhythmical  movements.  Here  the  feet  are  first  taught 
to  move  in  regular  sequence,  under  the  direction  of 
the  judgment.  In  this  we  have  much  of  the  aes- 
thetic, the  poetry  of  motion  and  attitude,  the  charm 
of  swift-changing  muscular  positions,  and  the  pictur- 
esqueness  of  kaleidoscope  groupings. 


CHAPTER    II. 

GIRLHOOD. 

WITHOUT  doubt  the  title,  "  The  Man  Wonderful," 
includes  also  "  The  Woman  Wonderful,"  and  as  the 
11  boy  is  father  of  the  man,"  the  girl  must  necessarily 
be  the  2  "  mother  of  the  woman."  Whatever  the 
woman  is  to  become,  must,  to  a  great  extent,  be  de- 
termined by  the  training  of  her  girlhood.  3  Her 
House  contains  the  same  rooms,  and  as  many  servants 
who  must  be  trained  if  they  are  to  be  made  of  use. 
The  same  laws  govern  her  body  as  govern  his.  "  It 
is  built  in  the  same  way,  needing  food,  and  sleep,  and 
air,  and  exercise,  in  order  to  "  live,  thrive,  and  grow." 
She  has  the  same  need  of  a  strong,  healthy  body  as 
he  has,  and  can  obtain  it,  only  by  the  same  means. 
*  The  girl  who  has  not  a  strong,  well-developed  body 
and  skilfully  trained  muscles,  has  not  been  well  edu- 
cated. 6  Girls  learn  to  walk,  to  talk,  to  run  and  romp, 
just  as  boys  do,  and  can  learn  in  no  other  way.  But 
after  a  time  a  new  influence  is  brought  to  bear  upon 
them,  with  the  effect  of  curtailing  their  liberty  and 
substituting  indoor  quiet  for  outdoor  exercise.  "  It 
is  not  ladylike,"  is  the  motto  of  life,  T  and  girls  begin 
to  pride  themselves  upon  their  delicate  complexions 
and  slender  white  hands,  8  while  boys,  caring  nothing 

(212) 


GIRLHOOD.  213 

for  these  things,  continue  to  take  a  pride  in  what  they 
can  do,  not  in  how  they  look.  Which  is  the  nobler 
pride  ?  A  girl  can  be  strong  and  full  of  vigor  without 
necessarily  being  coarse  or  rough.  Freedom  from 
nature's  brown  color  does  not  signify  refinement  or 
culture.  Delicacy  does  not  necessarily  mean  weak- 
ness. The  most  beautiful  9  hands  are  those  which 
can  do  something ;  not  merely  delicate  fancywork, 
but  real,  needed,  every-day  skilled  labor. 

"  Life  is  real, 
Life  is  earnest," 

l*  and  the  greater  part  of  it  is  not  to  be  spent  in 
books.  Therefore,  girls  should  be  taught  those  things 
which  will  enable  them  to 

"  Be  up  and  doing, 

With  a  heart  for  any  fate, 
Still  achieving,  still  pursuing, 
Learn  to  labor  "  and  be  great. 

The  education  of  the  hands  is  often  postponed  too 
long.  "  Very  little  people  can  be  taught  to  do  little 
tasks,  and  take  great  pleasure  in  doing  them.  12  Moth- 
ers often  puzzle  over  the  question  of  how  to  amuse 
their  children,  when  the  most  successful  way  to  ac- 
complish that  object  would  be  to  give  the  child  some- 
thing to  do.  Is  a  child  ever  so  happy  as  when  it  im- 
agines it  is  "  helping  mamma  "  ?  With  tiny  broom 
and  duster  the  girl  follows  from  room  to  room,  whisk- 
ing the  broom  and  flourishing  the  duster,  chattering 
blithely  all  the  while.     "A  little  careful  training  can 


214 


THE  MAN  WONDERFUL. 


make  the  tiny  hands  capable  of  doing  the  work  well, 
and  the  useful  education  of  the  servants  is  begun. 
Playing  14  "  keep  house  "  is  not  so  attractive  as  the 
real  dish-washing ;  and  making  mud  pies  never  such 
"  fun "  as  baking  real  bread  or  cake.  It  may  try 
mamma's  patience  at  first,  but  her  reward  is  sure, 
when  the  clumsy  little  fingers  become  helpful  and 
skilful.  15  A  girl  of  eight  can  be  a  good  sweeper,  and 
duster  of  furniture,  can  set  table  and  wash  dishes  ; 
know  how  to  knit,  to  sew  a  plain  seam,  or  fasten  on 
a  button  ;  can  run  errands,  make  purchases,  knowing 
whether  she  receives  the  right  change  ;  can  wipe  up 
an  oil-cloth  or  "  straighten  a  room  "  without  interfer- 
ing with  school  duties  or  hours  of  play.  A  little  later 
she  can  be  taught  some  of  the  mysteries  of  cooking 
and  baking. 

16  A  girl  of  fourteen  should  be  able  to  darn  her  own 
stockings,  put  a  patch  neatly  into  a  worn  garment, 
and  begin  to  learn  the  art  of  cutting  out  garments. 
I  have  known  girls  of  less  years  who  could  do  beauti- 
ful work  upon  a  sewing-machine,  who  had  not  im- 
paired health  by  constant  indoor  labors,  but  who 
loved  to  romp  as  well  as  girls  who  had  not  such  ac- 
complishments. "  The  minutes  that  are  often  spent 
in  idle  personal  decoration  would  be  sufficient  for  a 
girl  to  gain  this  practical  knowledge.  And  who  can 
measure  the  advantage  it  may  be  to  her  in  later  life  ? 
,fe  The  daughters  of  the  Queen  of  England  have  found 
this  kind  of  manual  skill  most  valuable. 

Our  public  schools  should  be  arranged  with  a  view 
to  teaching  girls  those  things,  which,  as  housekeepers, 


CHRISTIAN   WOMAN  SQCIEZE  LIFE.  $\t 

they  will  be  called  upon  to  do,  or  to  superintend,  all 
through  life.  An  hour  a  day,  three  or  more  days  in 
a  week,  would  suffice  to  instruct  them  in  mending, 
knitting,  repairing,  or  making  new  garments.  Cut- 
ting scientifically,  and  fitting  properly,  would  be  easily 
learned  where  they  were  gathered  in  classes  under  a 
competent  teacher ;  and  if  that  teacher  were  in- 
structed in  the  anatomy  and  physiology  of  the  hu- 
man body,  the  art  of  dressmaking  would  assume  a 
more  scientific  character,  and  natural,  healthful  figures 
would  be  the  aim  of  girls,  instead  of  the  deformities 
propagated  by  the  dressmaker — deformities  which 
called  forth  the  criticism  of  the  Chinese  woman,  who 
said  :  "  Christian  woman  say  wicked  to  squeeze  feet. 
Chinese  woman  squeeze  feet.  Very  wrong,  but  Chris- 
tian woman  squeeze  life.  Chinese  woman  no  squeeze 
life.  Life  here  " — indicating  the  delicate  waist  of  a 
fashion-plate  figure — "Christian  woman  squeeze  God's 
life." 

Girls  are  as  ambitious  to  be  helpful  as  are  boys. 
They  only  need  a  chance  to  prove  their  ability.  Many 
girls  who  are  thought  dull  in  books  would,  in  an  in- 
dustrial department  of  school,  develop  talents  of  which 
their  teachers  would  be  proud.  It  would  not  be  dif- 
ficult to  fit  up  a  room  where  cooking  could  be  practi- 
cally taught.  It  is  strange  that  we  practical  Amer- 
icans have  neglected  this  so  long.  What  use  is 
there  in  knowing  the  science  of  chemistry  if  we  do 
not  utilize  it  ?  The  cooks  of  a  nation  have  an  influ- 
ence on  its  health,  its  manners,  and  its  morals.  A 
knowledge  of  the  true  art  of  cookery  would  help  to 


2l6  THE  MAN  WONDERFUL. 

solve  the  great  problem  of  intemperance.  It  is  fool- 
ish to  send  to  England  for  iron  when  our  hills  are  full 
of  iron  and  coal ;  it  is  foolish  to  raise  the  cotton  crop 
of  the  world  and  send  it  to  France  and  England  to 
be  manufactured  ;  and  it  is  equally  foolish  to  possess 
the  most  abundant  and  varied  food  supply  of  the 
world  and  be  obliged  to  send  to  France  for  skilled 
cooks. 

In  such  an  industrial  department  of  public  schools, 
sewing-machines,  and  writing-machines,  should  be  a 
part  of  school  furniture.  19A  girl  who  understands  the 
use  of  a  sewing-machine,  who  can  cut  dresses  by  rule, 
who  can  measure  and  cut  for  a  grown  person  or  a 
child,  has  a  feeling  of  self-dependence  that  is  worth 
more  than  a  moneyed  inheritance ;  and  one  who  can 
manipulate  a  writing-machine  has  a  business  educa- 
tion that  secures  her  against  lack  of  employment. 

Girls  have  20  ingenuity  which  should  be  cultivated. 
They  can  learn  to  use  tools  and  construct  many  things 
for  themselves  that,  perhaps,  otherwise  they  could  not 
have.  A  girl's  hand  has  just  as  many  muscles  as  a 
boy's,  and  they  are  just  as  capable  of  being  trained 
as  his.  21  It  may  not  be  well  to  train  them  just  alike 
in  all  respects,  but  what  harm  can  come  from  a  boy's 
learning  to  use  a  needle,  or  a  girl's  learning  to  drive  a 
nail?  Both  may  find  the  knowledge  of  great  value 
to  them  at  some  time. 

M  A  boy  should  not  be  laughed  at  because  he  trains 
himself  in  work  that  is  done  in  the  household,  nor 
should  a  girl  be  ridiculed  because  she  likes  the  more 
active  sports  and  work  of  life.      Girls  have  naturally 


frOWT  BE  DEPENDENT.  2l/ 

as  great  a  love  for  motion  as  boys,  and  need  it  as 
much  for  their  development.  Unfortunately,  the  bur- 
den of  sex  is  laid  upon  them  unduly.  A  girl  ought 
never  to  be  called  a  M  Tom-boy  "  because  she  runs  and 
climbs  ;  or  a  boy  sneered  at  because  he  washes  dishes. 
8  The  girl  obeys  a  God-given  impulse  of  activity  ;  the 
boy,  probably,  does  violence  to  his  own  wishes  in  or- 
der to  lighten  the  burden  of  mother  or  sister  ;  and 
both  are  worthy  of  commendation. 

The  words  2I  of  blame,  "  It  is  not  lady-like,"  or  "  It 
is  not  genteel,"  should  be  changed  to  "  It  is  not 
right,"  "  It  is  not  noble,"  and  then  we  should  be  bet- 
ter able  to  understand  whether  the  active  instincts  of 
the  girl  are  to  be  blamed. 

As  girls  ?5  approach  the  years  when  they  leave 
school  they  should  begin  to  think  of  the  actualities 
of  life.  At  that  age  a  boy  decides  upon  a  trade  or  a 
profession.  He  expects  to  take  care  of  himself. 
The  same  ambition  is  equally  praiseworthy  in  a  girl. 
26  There  is  no  more  reason  why  girls  should  plan  to 
be  dependent  than  that  boys  should  make  the  same 
plan.  "  A  trade  is  a  fortune  to  a  girl,  as  well  as  to  a 
boy,  and  every  girl  should  be  able  to  do  something  so 
well  that  she  can  earn  her  own  bread,  and  that,  too, 
although  she  can  see  no  possibility  of  the  need  of 
such  skill ;  the  need  may  arise.  What  that  work  may 
be,  her  own  inclination  or  talent  can  decide. 

A  wide  "variety  of  employments  are  open  to 
women,  from  dressmaking  to  doctoring,  from  teach- 
ing to  preaching.  Women  can  be  architects  and  plan 
dwellings  to  suit  the  need  of  the  housekeeper  better 


2i8  THE  MAN  WONDERFUL. 

than  men.  They  can  decorate  and  furnish  houses  as 
a  business ;  they  can  learn  telegraphy,  stenography, 
nursing,  farming,  raising  of  small  fruits,  gardening, 
raising  of  bees,  poultry,  or  silk  culture.  They  can 
practice  law,  make  bonnets  or  books,  but  in  whatever 
line  they  labor  the  skilled  hand  is  desirable.  Even  in 
the  professions  a  knowledge  of  manual  labor  is  ad- 
vantageous. That  novelist  can  best  touch  the  heart 
of  the  people,  who  knows  in  reality  what  are  the 
trials  and  labor  of  the  people.  The  minister  can 
minister  more  skilfully  if  he  can  meet  the  working 
folks  on  their  own  level. 

A  knowledge  of  29  practical  work  broadens  the 
thoughts,  increases  the  sympathies,  gives  a  wider 
horizon,  and  adds  to  the  value  of  the  individual.  30  A 
girl  who  can  play  on  the  piano  and  cook  beefsteak 
properly,  is  more  of  a  woman  than  one  who  can  do 
only  one  of  these  two  things.  A  girl,  as  well  as  a 
boy,  should  desire  to  be  a  ruler  of  the  material  forces 
of  the  world,  and  not  to  be  ruled  by  them.  31  She 
should  be  ambitious  to  be  a  producer,  and  not  merely 
a  consumer.  She  should  exist  to  make  herself  felt, 
not  merely  to  be  looked  at ;  to  be  praised  for  the 
work  which  she  does,  instead  of  being  wondered  at 
for  the  work  that  is  done  for  her. 

To  be  useful  is  more  womanly  than  to  be  idle.  To 
have  practical  accomplishments  is  to  be  endowed  with 
gifts  which  shall  unlock  many  gates  of  happiness. 
19  Read  Solomon's  picture  of  a  virtuous  woman,  in  the 
last  chapter  of  Proverbs,  and  see  what  a  price  he  set 
upon  skilled  labor. 


CHAPTER  III. 

BOYHOOD. 

1  THERE  is  an  inborn  pleasure  in  accomplishing 
something,  manifested  in  the  child  by  its  playing  at 
work,  and,  later,  by  its  attempting  to  do  actual  work. 
The  wagon  made  of  a  match-box,  mounted  on  wheels 
of  spools,  gives  more  real  satisfaction  than  the  most 
expensive  boughten  express-wagon,  however  gayly 
painted.  2  This  desire  to  do,  should  be  carefully  cul- 
tivated by  parent,  guardian,  and  teacher. 

The  world  of  books  is  very  charming,  and  the 
world  of  work  no  less  so.  3  The  lives  of  the  majority 
of  people  must  be  spent  in  doing  rather  than  in  study- 
ing. Theory  is  good,  but  practice  is  better;  *  and  a 
valuable  addition  to  all  our  schools  would  be  an  in- 
dustrial department,  where  pupils  could  spend  a  part 
of  each  day  in  the  practical  application  of  the  theories 
taught  in  their  books.  6  Such  schools  have  been  found 
of  immense  value  in  Germany,  and  would  surely  be 
no  less  so  in  a  country  which  boasts  of  being  a  land 
of  doers,  as  does  America. 

8  Hours  of  work  alternating  with  hours  of  study, 
give  a  more  symmetrical  development  of  mind  and 
body,  and  the  7  boy  does  not  need  to  leave  school  so 
young  in  order  to  learn  his  trade.  8  He  learns  the 
use  of  tools,  and  working  in  wood  and  metals.     At 

(219) 


220 


THE  MAN  WONDERFUL, 


the  same  time  that  he  is  studying  the  science  of 
Natural  Philosophy  and  the  laws  which  govern  wood 
and  metals,  9  he  is  becoming  a  skilled  workman,  and 
not  the  follower  of  a  routine.  With  such  a  school 
system,  10  there  would  be  less  need  for  compulsory 
laws  of  education.  Parents,  knowing  that  their  chil- 
dren were  learning  trades  while  still  "  in  school, 
would  see  no  reason  for  shortening  their  school-days, 
but,  on  the  contrary,  would  find  every  reason  for 
lengthening  them. 

These  industrial  departments  can  unite  the  import- 
ant teachings  for  both  boys  and  girls  and  need  not 
confine  either  sex  to  one  department  alone.  12  Girls 
can  learn  to  use  tools ;  under  the  modest,  timid 
grace  of  the  maiden  may  hide  the  skill  of  the  sculp- 
tor ;  and  the  13  boy  may  have  a  talent  which  may 
make  him  a  cook  able  to  command  a  salary  equal  to 
that  received  by  a  member  of  Congress. 

14  True  education  is  a  leading  forth  of  the  natural 
talents  of  the  individual,  not  the  cramming  with  for- 
eign material.  To  educate,  then,  is  to  15  develop  both 
mind  and  body.  16  The  ancient  Greeks,  who  believed 
man  to  have  but  the  one  nature,  cultivated  the  physi- 
cal as  a  means  of  gaining  mental  and  moral  power. 

17  To  cultivate  the  mind  and  neglect  the  body,  is  to 
dull  the  tools  which  the  mind  must  use.  18  To  culti- 
vate the  body  and  neglect  the  mind,  is  to  increase 
the  strength  and  power  of  the  tool,  and  weaken  the 
force  which  should  guide  and  direct  it. 

19  In  our  colleges  are  young  men  who  are  pos- 
sessed  with  an  idea  of  championship ;  they  are  not 


BOYHOOD.  221 

striving  to  develop  a  symmetrical  body,  beautifully 
poised  and  perfectly  balanced,  in  the  hope  that  it  will 
be  a  "  support  to  their  higher  powers  of  mind,  a 
foundation  for  the  most  useful  mental  and  spiritual 
manhood  ;  '"''  but  they  are  thinking  how  they  can  ac- 
quire that  development  of  arms  and  legs  which  shall 
render  their  picked  "  nine  "  the  superior  of  any  other 
colkge  "  nine." 

It  is  true,  no  doubt,  that  often  the  effort  to  rebound 
from  the  inertness  of  the  student  leads  to  the  other 
extreme,  of  over-cultivation  of  the  body.  a  The 
golden  mean  would  be  better  found  if  mental  and 
physical  education  were  carried  on  together.  a3  The 
separation  has  evil  results,  making,  on  the  one  hand, 
the  mere  student  a  weak,  nervous  dyspeptic ;  and 
on  the  other,  the  gymnast  a  mere  supple  animal,  and 
developing  a  low  standard  of  manhood. 

84  For  purposes  even  of  war  or  dominion,  there  is 
no  longer  need  of  extreme  development  of  physical 
strength.  "  Through  false  methods  of  development 
there  is  positive  injury  to  the  body. 

In  the  rowing  contest,  for  example,  the  strength  is 
so  long  and  powerfully  exerted  that  exhaustion  fol- 
lows. The  arms,  back,  and  legs  are  not  the  muscles 
that  suffer  serious  injury,  for  they  can  rest  after  the 
contest ;  but  there  is  a  muscle  which  has  been  called 
upon  to  do  the  largest  and  hardest  share  of  the  work, 
and  has  had  no  chance  to  rest.  a"  It  is  the  Engine,  the 
heart,  which  has  forced  the  life-giving  fluid  through 
the  whole  system  during  the  strenuous  efforts  of  the 
whole  muscular  system.     "  It  has  been  compelled  to 

.5       * 


222  THE  MAN  WONDERFUL. 

contract  more  rapidly,  and  also  with  increased  force, 
in  order  to  overcome  the  great  tension  of  the  actively- 
working  muscles. 

88  Under  such  a  drill,  the  arms  would  increase  in 
size,  or,  as  we  say,  become  hypertrophied ;  and  the 
same  is  true  of  the  heart.  a9  For  a  time  it  grows 
larger  and  stronger ;  but  there  comes  a  limit  to  its 
growth  and  to  the  power  of  tension  in  its  fibres,  and 
when  this  point  has  been  reached  30  there  begins  a  de- 
generation of  its  fibres.  It  loses  its  tonicity,  and  be- 
comes 31  a  weak  heart,  and  the  person  owning  it  has 
lost  a  great  portion  of  his  physical  manhood,  and, 
what  is  far  more  serious,  can  never  wholly  regain  it. 
He  may  succeed  in  ordinary  efforts ;  but,  as  to  all 
great  physical  exertion,  he  is  an  invalid.  32  He  may 
not  be  conscious  of  it,  and  may  start  upon  a  contest 
with  all  his  former  buoyancy,  but  before  the  struggle 
is  ended  he  finds  his  best  efforts  are  fruitless  of  result. 
The  loss  of  heart-power  may  be  progressive,  and  in  a 
few  years  his  friends  are  surprised  to  find  him  3£  suf- 
fering with  some  chronic  disorder,  and  liable  to  lung 
trouble.  A  slight  inflammation  of  the  lungs  may 
prove  fatal,  simply  because  his  heart  can  not  perform 
its  duty,  and  he  dies  a  martyr  to  injudicious  physical 
training. 

34  Military  drill  is  a  method  of  physical  develop- 
ment which  can  be  made  beneficial  to  students,  pro- 
fessors, and  to  the  State,  and  which  can,  scarcely,  be 
made  responsible  for  the  same  injurious  results. 
86  Nearly  all  of  the  muscles  are  brought  into  play,  and 
an  erect  and  noble  bearing  is  taught.     36  The  disci- 


MILITARY  DRILL    VALUABLE.  22  3 

pline  of  prompt  obedience  is  a  valuable  mental  drill, 
and  the  ,7  mischievous  results  which  spring  from  emu- 
lation are  not  felt.  38  In  actual  life  occasions  may 
arise  where  in  panic,  excitement,  or  the  collecting  of 
mobs,  there  will  be  need  of  men  who  can  command 
men  as  soldiers,  and  need  of  men  who,  as  soldiers, 
can  obey.  Such  occasions  will  continue  to  arise,  and 
well  will  it  be  for  the  security  of  the  country  39  when 
her  young  men  know  how  to  perform  the  duties  of 
soldiers  in  order  that  there  may  be  neither  mobs  Jjor 
wars. 


CHAPTER   IV. 

MANHOOD. 

Ma*',  at  first,  like  other  animals,  knew  no  other  use 
for  b';s  mouth  than  to  make  it  a  receptacle  for  food, 
and  an  outlet  for  cries  of  need  and  pain.  Doubtless, 
man  had  in  the  beginning  the  same  perfect  vocal 
organs  as  now,  but  was  ignorant  of  their  use.  Ideas 
and  thoughts  he  had  not,  but  as  time  passed  on  and 
his  mental  powers  developed,  and  he  began  to  think, 
he  did  not  know  how  to  express  his  thoughts.  He 
would  first  express  them  by  grunts,  signs,  and  ges- 
tures, as  do  the  Indians,  when  they  meet  those  whose 
language  they  can  not  speak.  After  a  time,  these 
grunts  would  begin  to  differ  from  each  other,  and 
eventually  a  certain  sound  would  have  a  permanent 
meaning.  These  sounds,  at  first  made  wholly  in  the 
throat,  would  gradually  be  modified  by  the  action  of 
'other  organs,  until  at  last  the  tongue  and  lips  would 
unite  with  the  larynx  in  making  many  combinations 
of  vocal  sounds.  In  this  way,  slowly  and  laboriously, 
a  language  could  be  invented  which  would  be  in. 
creased  by  each  new  experience. 

The  mocking-bird  imitates  every  sound  it  hears, 
and  the  monkey  tries  to  do  whatever  he  sees  done. 
(224) 


MANHOOD.  225 

The  human  animal  combines  both  of  these  inclina- 
tions by  repeating  the  sound  he  hears  and  performing 
the  actions  he  sees,  so  that  his  young  easily  learn  to 
talk  and  to  do  most  things  done  by  the  parent. 

So  much  has  been  accomplished  by  the  Man  Won- 
derful in  all  directions,  that  a  lifetime  is  now  too 
short  for  one  person  to  learn  all  that  man  is  able  to 
do,  or  to  understand  all  that  the  vocal  organs  are 
capable  to  pronounce.  There  must  be  a  selection, 
and  this  should  be  of  those  things  which  are  most 
worthy  of  being  learned. 

Since  there  are  many  languages,  and  all  can  not  be 
learned,  let  the  youth  be  taught  those  which  will  be 
of  the  most  practical  benefit.  His  native  language  in 
perfection  should  be  his  chief  study ;  to  speak  it  cor- 
rectly and  fluently,  to  read  it  with  expression,  and  to 
write  it  with  ease.  To  speak  and  read,  so  as  to  give 
the  most  pleasure  to  hearers,  a  proper  use  of  the 
vocal  organs  is  needful.  Among  Americans  there  is 
a  tendency,  both  in  conversation  and  in  public  speak- 
ing, to  pitch  the  voice  too  high,  destroying  its  musical 
qualities  and  rasping  the  ears  of  hearers.  Orators  fancy 
that  to  be  heard  they  must  scream  and  strain  their 
throats,  when,  in  fact,  a  lower  tone,  if  the  words  are 
distinctly  articulated,  will  be  more  easily  understood, 
even  by  those  at  a  distance.  It  is  a  mistake  to  scream 
in  the  ears  of  deaf  persons.  It  is  distinctness  of  ar- 
ticulation that  is  needed,  not  a  high  pitch.  The 
voice  is  really  weakened  instead  of  being  made  more 
powerful  by  pitching  it  high.  These  vocal  organs 
which  the  Great  Architect  has  given  us  should  be  used 


226  THE  MAN  WONDERFUL. 

to  bring  to  us  the  most  good  and  to  give  the  greatest 
pleasure  to  others.  What  wonders  they  can  perform, 
trilling  like  a  bird,  bringing  tears  by  the  pathos  of 
their  tones,  speaking  in  thunder  or  tenderly  beseech- 
ing. And  how  marvellous  is  the  Man  Wonderful 
in  all  his  attributes.  Strength,  majesty,  power,  do- 
minion, are  his,  and  yet,  how  feeble  is  his  greatest 
achievement  compared  with  that  of  his  Maker. 
What  strange  contrasts  are  there  in  his  make. 

"  How  poor,  how  rich,  how  abject,  how  august, 
How  complicate,  how  wonderful  is  man  ! 
How  passing  wonder  He  who  made  him  such. 
Who  centred  in  his  make  such  strange  extremes 
From  different  natures  marvellously  mixed  ; 
Connection  exquisite  of  distant  worlds, 
Distinguished  link  in  being's  endless  chain, 
Midway  from  nothing  to  a  deity — 
A  being  ethereal,  sullied  and  absorpt ; 
Though  sullied  and  dishonored,  still  divine, 
Dim  miniature  of  greatness  absolute, 
An  heir  of  glory,  a  frail  child  of  dust, 
Helpless  immortal,  insect  infinite, 
A  worm,  a  God,  I  tremble  at  myself, 
And  in  myself  am  lost.     At  home  a  stranger, 
Thought  wanders  up  and  down,  surprised,  aghast, 
And  wondering  at  her  own.     How  reason  reels. 
Oh,  what  a  miracle  to  man  is  man." 

AS    HUNTER. 

How  do  you  suppose  that  sheep  and  cows  know 
that  grass  is  food?  If  you  were  to  ask  a  man  of  sci- 
ence he  would  tell  you  that  it  is  by  instinct.  And 
then  you  would  probably  ask,  what  is  instinct  ?    One 


ANIMAL  IXST1XCT. 


211 


of  the  hardest  things  in  the  world  is  to  give  a  defini 
Hon  of  a  word,  even  though  we  may  understand  it. 
Instinct  is  the  knowledge  animals  have  that  does 
not  come  to  them  by  any  process  of  thought  or  rea- 
son. They  do  not  stop  and  think,  "  Now  this  is  what 
I  want  to  do,  and  such  will  be  the  best  way  to  do  it." 
But  at  once,  without  thought,  they  do  it  and  in  the 
very  best  way.  They  are  guided  by  a  divine  impulse 
implanted  in  their  very  nature.  It  is  by  instinct  that 
the  bird  builds  its  nest.  By  instinct  it  flies  south 
when  winter  approaches.  By  instinct  the  young  of 
all  animals  seek  their  first  food,  and  by  instinct  they 
are  directed  to  a  change  of  diet  when  they  are  older. 
The  members  of  one  family  have  always  the  same  in- 
stincts. Sheep  eat  grass  and  wolves  eat  sheep,  and 
never  is  the  case  reversed.  Sheep  never  dine  on 
wolves,  or  wolves  on  grass. 

Man  possesses  in  less  degree  this  faculty  of  instinct, 
but  he  has  other  endowments  which  make  up  for  this 
deficiency.  In  his  savage  state  man  lives  among  wild 
beasts,  and  is  as  wild  and  ferocious  as  they.  Like 
them  he  hunts  his  food  as  prey.  But  as  he  can  not 
overpower  all  of  them  by  superior  strength,  he  must 
needs  bring  his  reason  to  his  aid,  and  this  teaches  him 
to  use  stratagem. 

He  takes  lessons  of  his  brute  companions,  but  he 
improves  on  their  methods.  The  members  of  the  cat 
family  steal  upon  their  prey.  Man,  too,  creeps  upon 
his  game,  but  meanwhile  he  studies  them,  and  learns 
their  habits  and  uses  this  knowledge  to  help  him 
to  success.      He  sees  the  trap  of  the  spider  or  of  the 


228  THE  MAN   WONDERFUL. 

ant-lion,  and  he,  too,  invents  traps,  not  of  one  but 
of  many  kinds. 

He  lures  the  wild  duck  by  decoys  in  the  shape  of 
wooden  ducks  placed  inside  his  trap.  He  deceives 
the  quail  by  the  clear  whistle  of  the  "  Bob  White." 
He  makes  pitfalls  for  the  unwieldy  bear,  and  with  las- 
soes catches  the  swift,  wild  horse. 

Animals  hunt  because  they  are  hungry.  Man  hunts 
not  only  because  of  hunger,  but  because  he  takes  pride 
in  overcoming,  by  his  skill,  the  strength  and  wariness 
of  animals.  He  feels  a  pride  in  his  success  which  an- 
imals do  not  feel. 

He  wears  the  feathers  of  eagles  as  a  headdress,  and 
the  claws  of  wild  beasts  as  jewels.  And  his  greatest 
pride  is  to  display  the  skin  of  a  leopard  or  tiger  that 
he  has  himself  killed. 

When  the  animal  has  satisfied  hunger  it  slays  no 
more  ;  but  man  continues  to  kill,  that  he  may  boast  of 
his  murderous  deeds. 

He  cultivates  his  endurance,  educates  his  eyes  and 
ears,  and  increases  his  ability  to  take  life  by  inventing 
weapons  of  death.  He  learns  the  panther's  cunning, 
and  adds  to  it  the  sharp  edge  of  the  tomahawk.  He 
disciplines  himself  in  running,  and  then  adds  to  his 
fleetness  the  swiftness  of  the  arrow  and  the  whizzing 
lasso. 

He  studies  the  habits  and  peculiarities  of  animals, 
and  uses  his  knowledge  to  bring  them  within  his 
reach.  He  can  not  run  as  fast  as  the  antelope,  but 
knowing  the  animal's  curiosity,  he  ties  a  bit  of  cloth 
to  a  stick,  and  hiding  himself  where  the  wind   will 


AS  HUNTER.  22Q 

blow  his  scent  away  from  the  antelope,  waits  for  him 
to  come  to  examine  his  bait,  and  shoots  him. 

Not  only  does  man  invent  weapons  to  help  him 
hunt,  but  he  employs  the  natural  hunting  qualifica- 
tions of  other  animals  to  aid  him.  The  hound  with 
his  keen  scent  can  track  the  deer,  the  greyhound  with 
his  fleet  foot  can  overtake,  and  seizin?  him  at  his  vul- 
nerable  point,  hamstrings  him,  and  thus  renders  him 
an  easy  prey  to  the  hunter.  The  yellow  hound  tracks 
the  game  by  scent  alone,  the  greyhound  by  sight 
alone,  and  when  he  can  not  longer  see  the  game,  is 
worthless  for  pursuing.  But  the  hunter  with  his 
keen,  educated  eye,  and  his  close  powers  of  observa- 
tion, unaided  by  scent,  will  observe  every  broken 
twig  and  every  overturned  leaf ;  note  every  circum- 
stance which  will  determine  the  course  of  the  deer, 
and  of  the  three,  will  be  most  sure  to  track  the  game, 
and  to  secure  it  when  brought  to  bay. 

Man  has  not  the  speed  of  the  deer,  but  has  greater 
endurance,  especially  when  aided  by  his  wisdom. 
The  hunter  chases  the  deer,  and  while  refraining  from 
more  than  sipping  water  at  the  streams,  allows  the 
poor,  hunted  animal  to  drink  his  fill,  and  he  thus  is 
made  less  active  and  enduring  by  the  excess  of  fluid 
taken.  The  hunter,  fresh  as  at  the  start,  keeps  on 
hour  after  hour,  until  the  animal  sinks  with  fatigue 
and  falls  a  certain  prey. 

He  devises  traps  for  catching  the  feathery  tribe, 
and  educates  the  falcon  to  aid  him  in  the  chase.  He 
does  not  stop  here,  but  enters  the  watery  element,  and 
contests  his  cunning  with  the  fish,  and  captures  even 
the  shark  and  the  mammoth,  mammal  whale. 


230 


THE  MAN   WONDERFUL. 


Thus  we  see  that  of  all  animals  man  is  the  greatest 
hunter.  He  is,  of  all,  the  most  courageous,  needing 
not  the  stimulus  of  hunger  to  make  him  face  danger 
or  death.  He  is  the  most  cunning,  his  intellect  mak- 
ing use  even  of  the  instincts  of  animals  to  bring  them 
into  his  power.  His  educated  eye  is  of  more  use  than 
the  keen  scent  of  the  foxhound  or  the  swift  foot  of 
the  greyhound.  His  educated  reason  renders  him  su- 
perior to  the  fleet  antelope  and  deer,  and  his  inven- 
tions make  him  able  to  combat  successfully  with  the 
fierce  inhabitants  of  wood,  or  sea,  or  jungle. 

AS   TAMER. 

When  you  have  been  playing  with  your  dog  or 
your  cat  did  you  ever  think  that  they  once  were  wild 
animals?  Of  course  I  do  not  mean  that  especial  cat 
or  dog,  but  that  ages  ago  all  of  the  canine,  or  feline, 
families  were  wild.  How,  then,  did  these  particular 
members  become  so  tame  and  gentle  ?  Let  me  ask 
you  another  question,  What  makes  the  ox  and  horse 
willing  to  work  for  you  and  obey  you  ?  Were  they 
ever  wild  ?  Yes,  all  of  our  domestic  animals  were 
once  wild  and  shunned  the  face  of  man.  But  man  by 
superior  wisdom  has  made  them,  not  only  his  com- 
panions, but  his  friends  and  assistants.  By  associat- 
ing with  man  many  of  their  characteristics  have 
changed.  They  are  no  longer  so  fleet,  so  ferocious, 
so  unworthy  of  trust,  but  have  become  mild,  gentle, 
trusty,  and  useful.  Did  you  ever  read  that  description 
of  a  horse  in  the  book  of  Job  ? 


AS  TAMER.  231 

"  Hast  thou  given  the  horse  strength  ? 
Hast  thou  clothed  his  neck  with  thunder  ? 
Canst  thou  make  him  afraid  as  a  grasshopper? 
The  glory  of  his  nostrils  is  terrible, 
He  paweth  in  the  valley  and  rejoiceth  in  his  strength  ; 
He  goeth  on  to  meet  the  armed  men." 

Yet  this  fierce,  strong,  mighty  creature  has  become 
the  willing  and  affectionate  servant  of  man.  He  is 
harnessed  and  made  to  bear  his  burdens ;  to  prepare 
the  ground  for  crops ;  to  bear  upon  his  back  the  joy- 
ous rider;  or  to  drag  after  him  safely  a  group  of 
laughing  children.     He  is  tamed,  subjugated. 

The  cat,  who  is  a  cousin  of  the  tiger  and  the  pan- 
ther and  the  lion,  is  our  household  pet.     The  dog, 
cousin  to  the  wolf,  shares  our  sports  as  well  as  our 
pleasures.    The  ox  and  the  sheep  are  so  tame  that  we 
rind  it  difficult   to  believe  that  they  were  ever  wild. 
They  furnish  us  food  and  clothing.     They  toil  for  us, 
and  are  cared  for  by  us.      The   elephant,  who  in  his 
wild  state  is  so  fierce  and  dangerous,  becomes  obedi- 
ent to  man,  and  not  only  works  for  him  but  tenderly 
watches  over  his  keeper's  little  child,  obeying  the  in. 
fant's  voice  as  if   ignorant   of    the  weakness  of  the 
child  and  his  own  monstrous  strength.     The  camel  is 
made  the  burden-bearer  of  the  merchant  over  desert 
wastes,  and  in  Arctic  snows  the  reindeer  is  harnessed 
to  the  sledge  of  the  native.     Boys  begin  very  early 
to  tame  animals,  and  their  numerous  pets  show  their 
skill.     Not  only  are  cats,  dogs,  or  chickens  made  pets, 
but  squirrels,  raccoons,  mice,  and  the  young  of  fiercer 
animals  are  subdued  by  the  juvenile  man. 


232  THE  MAN  WONDERFUL. 

But   men  are   not   content   merely  to  tame  those 
whom  he  can  make  use  of  in  his  work,  but  he  loves 
to  show  his  superiority  by  subduing  the  wildest  and 
most  ferocious.     You  have  seen  men  sitting  in  cages 
of   wild   animals,  tigers,  leopards,  or  lions,  and  have 
seen  how  they  were  not  afraid,  but  had  really  terrified 
even  the  king  of  beasts.      The  venomous  serpent  is 
made  to  obey  the   commands  of  his  ancient  enemy, 
man,  and  has  even  been  taught  to  dance  in  time  to 
music.    Is  man  the  only  one  among  all  created  beings 
who  enslaves  or  makes  use  of  his  fellow-creatures  ? 
O,  no !      The  cuckoo  lays  her  egg   in    the   nest    of 
other  birds,  and  thus  makes  them  feed  her  young, 
often  to  the  neglect  of  their  own.     She  does  this,  it 
may  be,  because  she  is  cowardly  or  lazy,  but  she  does 
it.    She  makes  the  other  bird  serve  her  purpose.    The 
great  red  ants,  called  Amazons,  make  slaves  of  the 
young  females  of  the  black  ants,  and  make  them  act 
as  nurses.     Man  is  not  the  only  captor.     But  he  cap- 
tures the  greatest  number,  and  not  only  tames  those 
whom  he  can  use,  but  he  gratifies  his  pride  by  over- 
coming those  whom  he  can  never  trust  to  work  for 
him,  as  is  the  case  with  the  lion  and  tiger.      Those 
whom  he  has  trained  to  be  his  faithful  servants  in  dif- 
ferent parts  of  the  world  are  the  horse,  the  ox,  the 
ass,  the  elephant,  camel,  dog,  goat,  reindeer,  buffalo, 
zebra,  sheep,  and  if  you  wish   to   make   up  a  round 
dozen  you  might  add   woman  to  the  list,  for  I  have 
seen,  in  Belgium,  a  woman  and  a  cow  hitched  toge- 
ther   plowing    in    the    field,   and   I    have  also   seen 
women  and  dogs,  in  Prussia,  working  together  to  pull 


AS  FARMER. 


233 


a  wagon.  But  if  this  adds  to  the  number  of  man's 
captives  I  do  not  think  it  adds  either  to  his  courage 
or  his  credit,  and  yet  it  speaks  well  for  the  human 
race,  for  it  shows  a  willingness  on  the  part  of  the 
mother  to  toil  and  to  endure  and  to  suffer,  if  need  be, 
for  the  support  of  her  young.  It  is  a  noble  charac- 
teristic of  the  human  family  that  they  will  work  and 
iabor  for  each  other's  good.  The  suffering  of  the  few 
rails  forth  the  sympathy  and  assistance  of  the  many. 

AS    FARMER.       ' 

Did  you  ever  try  to  satisfy  yourself  by  reflection 
how  man  became  a  farmer?  If  he  lived  upon  the 
fruits  and  seeds  of  plants  in  the  summer,  and  upon 
the  flesh  of  wild  animals  in  winter,  he  might  have  got 
along  for  a  time  ;  but  when  his  numbers  increased 
to  such  an  extent  that  food  failed,  he  must  do  some- 
thing. 

Did  he  then  invent  the  bow  and  arrow  before  he 
did  the  rude  hoe  which  he  used  for  digging  up  roots? 
It  is  certain  that  at  some  time  he  invented  tools 
for  tilling  the  soil,  and  for  clearing  away  the  forests. 
When  he  learned  that  he  could  direct  the  force  of 
other  animals,  he  made  harnesses  for  them,  and 
invented  plows  and  harrows.  As  we  look  back  we 
can  see  that  his  progress  was  extremely  slow.  In 
some  countries  more  so  than  in  others.  But  in  all 
countries  there  has  been  a  continual  progress.  Even 
the  stone  age  was  far  in  advance  of  the  age  when 
there  had  been   no  invention.      By  experience  man 


234 


THE  MAN  WONDERFUL. 


learned  which  plants  produced  the  most  food  with 
the  least  labor. 

A  few  years  ago  I  saw  at  Vienna,  Austria,  a  col- 
lection of  plows,  some  of  them  200  years  old,  and  I 
was  astonished  to  see  how  little  progress  there  had 
been  in  that  length  of  time.  In  Italy  I  saw  a  plow 
in  use  which  was  made  from  the  fork  of  a  tree,  and 
which  was  drawn  by  three  yoke  of  large  white  oxen. 
It  did  not  turn  a  furrow,  but  it  stirred  the  soil. 

Man  learned  to  improve  the  quality  as  well  as  the 
quantity  of  his  products.  The  knowledge  of  plant- 
life,  gained  by  experience,  has  been  a  great  aid ;  and 
in  the  last  fifty  years  science,  which  has  been  slow 
in  its  growth,  has  come  to  his  assistance.  Skilled 
hands  have  manufactured  light  hoes,  forks,  axes,  and 
scythes. 

The  grain-cradle  was  one  of  the  most  important 
inventions  ever  given  to  the  farmer,  but  its  import- 
ance is  now  hardly  appreciated  because  of  the  more 
skilful  inventions  that  followed  it. 

The  mowing-machine  was  the  most  wonderful  ad- 
vance in  farming,  and  stimulated  thought  for  farming- 
machinery  in  every  direction.  The  farmer  of  to-day 
plants  his  grain,  not  from  his  hand,  as  he  did  only  a 
few  years  ago,  but  from  the  drill.  The  horse  helps 
in  every  kind  of  labor.  He  plants  and  sows ;  he  reaps 
and  mows;  he  rakes  the  hay,  and  pitches  it  into  the 
mow  or  upon  the  stack.  He  not  only  cuts  the  grain 
and  puts  it  into  gavels,  but  he  binds  it  and  threshes 
it,  and  if  necessary  grinds  it.  He  plows  and  cultivates 
the  corn  while  his  driver  rides,  if  he  pleases,  protected 
by  his  umbrella  from  the  rays  of  the  sun. 


AS  WORKER. 


235 


It  would  appear  almost  as  if  man's  many  efforts  to 
make  the  horse  useful  had  been  the  cause  of  his  own 
advancement  as  a  farmer.  The  horse  makes  his  roads, 
digs  his  ditches,  pulls  his  stumps,  saws  his  wood,  and 
assists  him  to  fell  the  trees  of  the  forest. 

But  the  horse  has  not  always  been  sufficiently  pow- 
erful to  satisfy  his  ambition,  nor  yet  has  the  camel  or 
the  elephant,  and  so  the  steam-engine  has  been  har- 
nessed to  the  plow,  and  the  cultivator,  and  the  har- 
row, and  ten  or  twelve  plows  now  turn  their  furrows 
across  the  field  at  the  same  time. 

How  can  any  one  go  upon  a  well-equipped  farm 
and  see  the  practical  corn-planter  and  sulky-plow,  the 
strong  mower  and  the  ingenious  reaper  and  binder, 
working  in  all  their  perfection,  without  great  admira- 
tion for  the  Man  Wonderful. 

AS   WORKER. 

"The  groves  were  God's  first  temple,"  and  they 
were  also  man's  first  workshop.  His  first  tool  proba- 
bly was  a  stick,  with  which  he  knocked  down  fruit 
that  grew  out  of  his  reach,  or  dug  up  some  root  that 
he  desired  to  eat.  Out  of  wood  he  formed  his  first 
rude  bow  and  arrow,  and  wood  has  been  an  import- 
ant constituent  of  his  improved  weapons  of  warfare, 
as  well  as  of  his  implements  of  peaceful  toil.  The 
cunning  and  skill  of  his  hands  have  made  the  wood- 
work of  the  modern  plow  a  vast  improvement  over 
the  simple  forked  stick  with  which  the  primitive 
farmer  tilled  the  soil.  Man  soon  perceived  the 
adaptability  of  wood  to  building  purposes.     Begin- 


236  THE  MAN  WONDERFUL. 

ning  with  the  rough  poles  which  formed  the  frame 
work  of  his  wigwam  he  has  progressed  through  the 
log-cabin  and  board  "  shanty "  to  the  most  elegant 
modern  dwellings  made  and  ornamented  with  wood. 

With  his  axe  the  sturdy  backwoodsman  has  hewn 
through  the  heart  of  pathless  woods  a  road  to  honor 
for  himself  and  glory  for  his  country. 

With  the  historic  hatchet  from  the  historic  cherry, 
tree  he  has  carved  an  everlasting  figure  of  Truth,  and 
with  the  pine  stick  and  jack-knife  has  whittled  out 
the  renowned  wooden  hams  and  nutmegs  as  well  as 
whittling  himself  into  the  statue  of  the  representa- 
tive American. 

From  such  simple  labor  he  has  progressed  until 
wood,  under  the  carver's  hands,  has  become  not  only 
a  work  of  art,  attesting  the  genius  of  man,  but  a  con- 
tributor to  our  comfort  and  well-being  in  myriads  of 
forms,  and  each  particular  article  marks  the  progress 
of  man's  skill  in  wood-working.  The  board,  upon 
which  the  Indian  pappoose  is  strapped,  the  log  cradle 
of  the  pioneer's  baby,  and  the  elaborately  carved 
bassinet  of  the  infant  emperor  are  proofs  of  his  skill. 

From  the  first  rude  musical  pipes  made  from  the 
reeds  that  grew  by  the  river's  bank,  man  has  ad- 
vanced until  a  myriad  of  wooden  musical  instruments 
sound  forth  his  praise.  A  wonderful  instance  of  skill 
in  wood-working  is  found  in  a  Brooklyn  violin-maker, 
who  has  been  able  to  make  a  violin  that  as  soon  as 
completed  has  the  appearance  and  tone  of  an  ancient 
Stradivarius  or  Amati  centuries  old.  We  are  proud 
of  such  men  who  give  us  a  national  pre-eminence, 


AS  USER  OF  METALS.  237 

Mid  we  rejoice  in  the  simplest  efforts  of  our  boys 
and  girls,  because  they  are  the  prophecies  of  better 
things. 

The  rude  cross  by  the  roadside,  and  the  exquis- 
itely carved  pulpit  or  shrine,  are  not  merely  symbols 
to  be  regarded  with  reverence,  but  arc  incontrover- 
tible facts  which  attest  the  continued  growth  of  a 
divine  gift  to  man. 

AS    USER   OF   METALS. 

The  old  mythology  tells  us  how  fire  was  stolen 
from  the  gods.  I  have  often  tried  to  satisfy  myself 
that  man  obtained  it  through  some  skill  of  his  own, 
but  have  failed.  Like  many  of  the  most  important 
discoveries,  its  origin  was  doubtless  accidental. 

Equally  mysterious  is  it  how  man  learned  that  metals 
were  in  the  earth,  and  could  be  made  of  avail.  It  would 
be  of  intense  interest  indeed  to  know  who  made  the  dis- 
covery, and  how.  He  must  have  been  a  thoughtful 
man ;  but  no  matter  how  keen  his  natural  powers,  he 
could  not  have  had  the  faintest  idea  of  the  value  of 
his  discovery.  His  first  use  of  metals  was  doubtless 
in  producing  weapons  of  warfare,  and  the  skill  of  an- 
cient peoples  in  this  respect,  at  least  in  some  direc- 
tions, has  not  been  surpassed  by  modern  inventions, 
as  is  witnessed  by  the  keen  Damascus  blade  which 
could  be  tied  in  a  knot  without  breaking.  But  our 
modern  Vulcans  surpass  the  men  of  every  age  in  the 
manufacturing  of  metals  into  implements  of  peaceful 
industry.     The  useful  arts  made  but  slow  progress  in 

the  many  centuries  preceding  the  advent  of  gunpow- 

16 


338  THE  MAN   WONDERFUL 

dsr  and  the  making  of  cannon.  It  is  true  that  many 
beautiful  ornaments  had  been  made,  and  gems  had 
been  surrounded  with  metals  more  or  less  precious ; 
the  walls  of  the  Coliseum  had  been  bound  in  places 
by  iron  bands,  which,  later,  formed  a  mine  of  wealth 
to  the  Italians.  An  ignorant  and  arrogant  command- 
er had  attempted  to  put  an  unruly  river  in  chains,  but 
it  was  not  until  after  the  hoarse  sounds  from  the  throat 
of  the  cannon,  the  great  destroyer  of  human  life,  that 
men  awoke  to  an  appreciation  of  the  strength  and 
importance  of  iron.  The  search  for  liberty  and  the 
struggle  for  an  opportunity  to  develop  true  man- 
hood, established  a  new  nation  upon  a  new  continent; 
and  in  the  new  land  new  thoughts  awakened  a  new 
series  of  ideas.  The  steel  age  in  which  we  live  is  the 
age  of  earth's  greatest  advancement  and  prosperity. 
The  manufacturing  of  firearms  from  iron,  only  opened 
the  way  to  the  making  of  steam-engines,  railroads, 
and  bridges  of  steel.  Nearly  everywhere  iron  and 
steel  are  united  with  wood,  as  in  our  tools,  vehicles, 
and  ships,  but  in  many  places  steel  is  used  alone. 
The  "  swamp  angel,"  which  threw  solid  shot  seven 
miles  into  Charleston,  and  the  twenty-inch  cannon  at 
Fortress  Monroe,  fall  into  utter  insignificance  before 
the  skill  of  a  Krupp,  who  has  made  a  steel  gun  that 
throws  a  3COpound  solid  shot,  or  shell,  fifteen  miles. 

Steam  might  have  been  looked  upon  as  a  demon 
had  not  man  confined  him  within  bounds,  harnessed 
him  with  steel,  and  compelled  him  to  serve.  He  has 
made  for  him  steel  road-beds  upon  which  he  must 
travel  across  continents,  dragging  after  him  a  swelling 


HIS  MACHINES. 


239 


train  of  industry  and  wealth.  He  has  compelled  him 
to  descend  into  the  depths  of  the  earth  and  bring  up 
treasures  of  salt,  iron,  coal,  silver,  gold,  and  precious 
gems.  He  has  penetrated  those  vast  reservoirs  of  oil 
which,  from  creation's  birth,  lay  hid  beneath  primeval 
rocks,  bringing  from  the  very  abodes  of  darkness  a 
light  to  illuminate  and  cheer  the  world.  Steam  har- 
nessed in  steel  has  plowed  the  mighty  deep,  and 
transporting  summer  to  the  doors  of  winter's  fortress, 
has  returned  with  winter's  ice  to  cool  the  glow  of 
tropic  climes. 

By  machines  of  his  own  construction  man  has 
brought  from  hidden  fountains,  embowelled  deep  in 
rocky  beds,  pure  and  delicious  water  to  supply  a  city's 
needs,  or  render  productive  desert  wastes.  Bridges 
span  the  torrents,  men  travel  on  aerial  roads  of  iron, 
or  stretch  an  iron  thread  around  the  globe  to  bear 
their  words  to  earth's  remotest  bounds.  With  greater 
truth  than  Socrates,  may  the  man  of  this  steel  age  ex- 
claim, "  I  am  thinking  myself  to  be  a  citizen  of  the 
whole  world." 

So  man  has  found  his  greatest  wealth  among  the 
metals  to  arise,  not  from  the  shining  gold  that,  like 
an  evil  eye,  lures  him  from  home  and  comfort ;  nor 
yet  in  the  glittering  silver  which  gleams  from  the 
darkness  of  mine  or  cavern  ;  but  in  the  dark,  dull 
lead,  copper,  and  iron  which  he  fuses,  molds,  or  forges 
into  shapes  of  usefulness  and  enduring  strength. 

Since  Peter  the  Great  worked  his  way  through  the 
rough  paths  of  a  mechanic's  life,  and  learned  how  to 
build  ships  and  implements  of  warfare,  in  order  that 


240 


THE  MAN   WONDERFUL. 


he  might  teach  his  people  how  to  work  and  protect 
themselves,  it  has  become  fashionable,  and  almost 
necessary,  for  the  scions  of  royalty  to  learn  how  to 
do  some  kind  of  work.  Shall  the  sons  of  free  Amer- 
ica be  less  ambitious,  and  have  a  less  worthy  and 
solid  foundation  upon  which  to  build  ? 

The  fame  of  Washington  towers  above  that  of  any 
other  statesman  or  ruler,  and  a  grateful  nation  has 
erected  a  monument  to  his  glory  that  looks  down 
upon  all  other  monuments  made  by  men.  Happy 
the  people  who  have  produced  in  their  midst  noble, 
wise,  unselfish  patriots,  worthy  of  such  monuments. 
The  world  has  had  but  one  Washington,  and  he  an 
American. 

Some  men  are  able  to  build  and  carve  their  own 
monuments,  and  even  while  living  can  rejoice  in  en- 
during works  of  their  own  hands  which  are  emblems 
of  their  courage  and  constructive  skill.  The  mass- 
ive steel  bridge  across  the  Mississippi,  at  St.  Louis, 
is  a  lasting  monument  to  the  ability  of  Captain  Eads, 
and  the  deepened  mouth  of  the  Mississippi  declares 
his  greatness. 

The  magnificent  Brooklyn  Bridge  should  be  known 
as  the  Roebling  Bridge,  for  no  greater  monument 
to  the  honor  of  father  and  son  exists,  nor  should  the 
wife  of  the  son  be  forgotten,  for  without  her  care, 
intelligent  assistance,  and  womanly  devotion  it  might 
have  remained  incomplete.  A  courageous  young 
lieutenant,  a  scientific  investigator,  has  carried  the 
American  flag  into  the  home  of  the  North  Wind,  and 
by  so  doing,  defied  old  Frost  King  in  the  heart  of  his 


U'ORfl/y  AM  HI  HON. 


241 


own  empire.  The  lieutenant  with  his  twenty-foui 
comrades  built  a  house  in  a  province  of  the  em- 
pire, and  laughed  at  the  threats  of  the  Frost  King. 
During  two  years  they  surveyed  his  dominions  and 
mapped  out  his  unknown  posessions  and  caused  a 
record  to  be  made  of  his  boundaries ;  they  estimated 
the  strength  of  his  fortresses  and  defied  the  dangers  of 
his  crystal  mountains.  With  their  scientific  instru- 
ments, they  measured  the  blusterings  of  the  North 
Wind,  and  recorded  his  intemperate  changelcssness 
and  the  destructiveness  of  his  perseverance.  They 
brought  away,  as  trophies  of  their  courage  and  scien- 
tific skill,  the  records  of  their  researches. 

The  Frost  King  fortified  the  passages  of  their  re- 
treat and  prevented  their  meeting  with  comrades. 
Courageously  they  endured  privations  and  looked 
homeward  for  assistance  and  succor,  while  fifty  mill- 
ions of  their  countrymen  were  anxiously  wishing  to 
aid  them.  Six  of  the  twenty-five  immortals  have 
been  rescued  none  too  soon  for  the  glory  of  America 
Their  countrymen  are  proud  of  their  success  and  all 
nations  are  interested  in  these  achievements,  and  with 
admiration  speak  of  Lieut.  Greely.  Let  our  youths  be 
encouraged  to  exertion  in  every  worthy  field,  for 
the  monuments  are  numerous  that  may  yet  be 
erected  to  declare  the  glory  of  successful  labor 
and  ennobled  manhood. 


CHAPTER  V. 

DOUBTFUL    COMPANY. 

DID  you  ever  feel  that  there  was  something  that 
you  ought  to  say,  and  yet  you  wished  you  did  not 
have  to  say  it  ?  That  is  just  the  way  I  feel  now. 
There  are  two  foreigners  who  are  such  honored  and 
welcome  guests,  in  nearly  every  household,  that  I 
would  be  glad  to  speak  only  good  of  them,  or,  not 
being  able  to  do  that,  to  keep  silence  about  them  al- 
together. But  that  I  can  not  do.  So  I  will  tell  you 
what  science  says  in  regard  to  them. 

1  Once  upon  a  time,  about  two  hundred  years  ago, 
one  of  them,  whose  name  is  Coffea  Arabica,  was 
brought  to  France  and  England  for  the  first  time. 
Till  then  people  had  never  made  his  acquaintance  in 
those  countries.  Since  then  he  has  travelled  exten- 
sively, and  nations  widely  separated  have  made  his 
acquaintance,  and  have  become  much  attached  to 
him.  *  He  is  familiarly  known  as  Coffee.  I  need  not 
describe  him  to  you.  Many  of  you  see  him  every 
morning,  may,  perhaps,  have  even  more  than  a  bow- 
ing acquaintance  with  him.  You  like  him,  perhaps  ; 
and  you  begin  to  frown,  and  say :  "  You  need  not  tell 
me  that  he  is  a  bad  fellow.  I  know  better.  He  never 
harmed  any  one."     Well,  I  will  not  quarrel  with  you. 

I  will  only  tell  you  what  his  reputation  is  among  the 
(242) 


Doubt* ul  company.  243 

learned,  and  leave  you  to  say  whether  you  will  make 
a  friend  of  him  or  not.  3  Those  who  argue  in  his  fa- 
vor say  of  him  that  he  checks  waste,  and  therefore  is 
indirectly  a  food.  *  To  check  waste  is  to  fill  the  sys- 
tem with  dead  matter,  and  that  is  not  desirable. 

6 "Anything  that  checks  waste  disturbs  vital  func- 
tions," is  the  testimony  of  science.  "Coffee  contains 
some  nutriment,  but  its  chief  action  is  stimulating 
rather  than  nourishing.  7  It  makes  a  person  forget 
that  he  is  tired,  which  may  be  pleasant ;  and  yet,  after 
all,  may  not  be  desirable.  B  If  we  know  that  we  are 
tired  we  will  rest,  and  so  the  material  which  has  been 
worn  out  by  exercise  will  have  a  chance  to  be  re- 
moved and  replaced  by  new  material.  But  if  we  for- 
get that  we  are  weary,  we,  perhaps,  will  continue  to 
exercise  and  so  destroy  more  tissue  than  will  be  re- 
built, and  so  we  will  tend  to  break  down. 

8  Dr.  Bartholow,  who  treats  of  coffee  wholly  from  a 
scientific  point  of  view,  says :  "  If  used  to  excess,  as  a 
beverage,  coffee  deranges  the  organs  of  digestion,  pro- 
ducing acidity,  flatulence,  pyrosis,  eructations,  head- 
ache, vertigo,  ringing  in  the  ears,  and  wakefulness." 
That  is  not  the  effect  of  water  or  other  true  foods. 

10  Dr.  Emmet,  another  authority,  says :  "  I  find  cof- 
fee, even  when  weak,  to  exert  a  very  deleterious  in- 
fluence, in  consequence  of  its  indirect  influence  on 
nutrition.  ll  Whenever  a  patient  has  become  addicted 
to  the  use  of  stimulants,  anodynes,  or  coffee,  an  effort 
must  be  made  at  once,  without  a  compromise,  to 
break  up  the  dependence  upon  either  of  these  insid- 
ious poisons  to  the  nervous  system." 


244 


THE  MAX   WOXDERFUL. 


12  Because  coffee  is  so  widely  known  and  used  some 
people  think  it  is  a  necessity  to  man  ;  but  to  quote 
again  from  Bartholow :  13 "  Such  a  view  is  hardly  ten- 
able, the  highest  physical  and  mental  activity  not 
being  incompatible  with  entire  absence  from  it." 
14  That  is,  men  can  be  strong,  and  healthful,  and  intel- 
ligent, in  the  highest  sense,  without  ever  using  coffee. 

16  That  being  the  case  why  should  we  put  ourselves 
under  his  control,  for  he,  too,  is  a  guest  who  be- 
comes a  master?  16  We  can  keep  well,  and  strong,  and 
happy  without  him.     Why  not  stay  on  the  safe  side? 

17  The  other  foreigner,  of  whom  I  wish  to  speak,  is 
a  Chinaman.  But  I  do  not  imagine  that  our  people 
referred  to  him  when  they  said :  "  The  Chinese  must 
go."  In  fact  I  fancy  that,  if  they  had  supposed  the 
banishment  of  the  Chinese  from  our  shores  had  meant 
the  banishment  of  this  dear  friend  of  theirs,  they 
would  have  thought  more  than  twice  before  they  had 
said,  we  will  have  no  more  of  the  Chinese. 

1BThis  guest,  with  whom  you  are  all  more  or  less 
acquainted,  is  named  Thea  Chinensis,  but  familiarly 
called  Tea.  19  Sometimes  his  complexion  is  green, 
sometimes  black,  and  so  he  is  known  as  Black  or  Green 
Tea.  20  Tea  has  properties  similar  to  those  of  coffee, 
and,  as  might  be  supposed,  the  effects  are  similar. 
w  Green  tea  is  said  to  be  more  stimulating  than  black. 
ajThe  tannic  acid  in  tea  coagulates  albumen.  You 
can  decide  for  yourselves  whether  that  is  desirable  in 
the  body.  24  Long  cooking  of  tea  extracts  its  acid, 
and  therefore  increases  the  deleterious  qualities. 

Bartholow  enumerates  the  effects  of  tea  as  the  same 


TEA.  TIPPLING. 


245 


as  those  of  coffee,  and  adds :  "  The  habitual  effects 
and  the  evil  results  of  habitual  excess  are  best  seen  in 
sewing-women  addicted  to  tea-tippling.  "  It  is  not 
uncommon  for  these  women  to  live  upon  bread  and 
tea  for  long  periods,  resulting  in  their  becoming  ex- 
cessively nervous  and  dyspeptic.  The  mucus  of  the 
stomach  plays  the  part  of  a  ferment,  the  bread  under- 
goes the  acetic  fermentation,  and  this  process  is  facil- 
itated by  the  presence  of  a  quantity  of  a  weak  astrin- 
gent solution.  20  Disorders  of  digestion,  due  to  this 
cause,  can  be  removed  by  withdrawal  of  the  offending 
beverage."  ai  And  that  means  that  if  tea  is  harmful 
to  you,  don't  drink  it.  The  only  persons  who  can  drink 
tea  and  coffee,  with  a  reasonable  excuse,  are  those 
who  are  more  than  forty  years  of  age,  and  many 
of  these  can  not.  27  A  very  good  rule  of  conduct,  in 
all  cases  where  there  is  a  doubt,  is  to  give  yourself 
the  benefit  of  the  doubt.  There  is  not  the  least  doubt 
that  you  can  do  without  either  tea  or  coffee,  and  not 
be  harmed ;  therefore,  to  give  yourself  the  benefit  of 
the  doubt,  is  to  stay  on  the  safe  side,  and  not  use 
either.  28  Water  will  not  stimulate  you,  nor  harden 
the  albumen,  nor  check  waste.  29  Three-fourths  of 
the  body  is  water,  while  tea  and  coffee  are  not  natural 
constituents  of  the  body.  30  The  only  gocyd  they  do 
in  the  system  is  by  the  water  they  introduce. 

32  There  are  other  visitors  to  our  house  who  might 
also  come  under  the  head  of  doubtful  company. 
They  are  classed  under  the  general  term,  condiments. 
33  The  pepper,  sauces,  spices,  which  are  used  to  stim- 
ulate appetite,  do  so  by  irritating  the  mucous  mem- 


246  TtJE  MAN  WONDERFUL. 

brane,  in  reality  creating  an  excitement  in  the  kitch- 
en, and  making  the  servants  express  a  desire  to  get 
rid  of  these  friends  who  bite. 

34  Pepper  and  mustard,  put  upon  the  unsensitive 
epidermis,  will  raise  a  blister,  and  35  much  sooner  will 
they  have  that  effect  upon  the  delicate  mucous  mem- 
brane of  the  mouth,  stomach,  and  alimentary  canal. 

Like  many  other  things  which  are  not  true  foods, 
their  use  begets  a  36  desire  for  an  increased  and  in- 
creasing quantity ;  and  the  person  who  began  with  a 
small  amount  of  pepper  will  in  a  few  years  want  his 
food  quite  black  with  it.  37  Any  article  whose  use 
produces  an  intense  desire  for  its  continued  and  in- 
creasing use,  a  craving  which  no  other  article  will  sat- 
isfy, may  safely  be  set  down  as  injurious.  Wholesome 
food  never  creates  such  a  longing.  We  do  not  eat 
one  potato  to-day,  and  to-morrow  want  two,  and  next 
week  three,  and  so  on  increasing  the  quantity,  and 
feeling  unsatisfied  unless  we  have  potatoes.  And  the 
same  is  true  of  all  wholesome  foods.  But  tea,  coffee, 
and  condiments  demand  increase,  both  in  strength 
and  quantity,  and  create  a  desire  that  will  not  be  ap- 
peased by  any  wholesome  substitute. 

We  have  an  exceedingly  kind  and  faithful  friend, 
whom,  however,  we  do  not  love,  for  he  never  speaks 
to  us  unless  he  has  something  unpleasant  to  say. 
His  name  is  Pain,  and  when  he  begins  to  scold  and 
chide  us,  we  think  of  nothing  but  rinding  some  means 
of  silencing  him. 

There  are  certain  guests  who  are  sometimes  invited 
to  the  house  just  because  they  have  the  power  of 


FALSE  FRIENDS. 


24; 


compelling  Pain  to  keep  silent.  They  are  false 
friends,  for  if  we  are  not  very  careful-,  they  end  by 
enslaving  us,  and  what  is  worst  of  all,  we  may  come 
to  love  our  chains. 

One  of  these  doubtful  friends  is  named  Chloral 
Hydrate.  He  has  been  an  acquaintance  of  the  Man 
Wonderful  about  twenty  years.  At  first  he  was  con- 
sidered to  be  a  very  valuable  friend,  for  he  quieted 
Pain,  and  gave  the  Master  delightful  sleep. 

But  in  time  it  was  learned  that  he  veiy  sadly  inter- 
fered with  the  work  in  the  Kitchen  and  Dining-room, 
and,  as  a  consequence,  ultimately  with  the  health  and 
well-being  of  the  house.  The  Master  found,  when 
too  late,  that  after  employing  Chloral  Hydrate  to 
give  him  sleep,  he  became  unable  to  sleep  without 
the  soothing  effect  of  this  narcotic,  and  finally,  such 
large  and  increasing  doses  were  required,  that  the 
health  became  utterly  ruined,  and  Pain,  refusing,  at 
last,  to  yield  to  the  Tyrant's  dominion,  made  life  an 
intolerable  burden. 

Another  false  friend  who  comes  to  silence  Pain, 
and  ends  by  enslaving  the  Master  of  the  house,  is 
called  Opium. 

He  has  long  been  known  in  Eastern  countries,  and 
is  becoming  more  and  more  widely  known  in  our 
own  land.  His  personal  appearance  is  not  attractive, 
but  so  strong  is  his  influence  over  Pain  that  he  re- 
ceives a  very  cordial  welcome  by  those  who  suffer. 
Soon  after  he  enters  the  house  he  takes  Pain  by  the 
throat  and  throttles  him,  and  sends  a  wonderfully 
peaceful  feeling  through  the  whole  house      He  par- 


248  THE  MAN  WONDERFUL. 

alyzes  the  nerves  of  sensation  so  that  they  carry  no 
messages,  and  the  Master  fancies  that,  because  he 
hears  of  no  trouble,  none  exists.  But  after  a  time 
the  servants  of  the  house  are  aroused  from  the  torpor 
into  which  they  are  always  thrown  by  the  presence 
of  Opium,  and  begin  to  make  most  agonizing  com- 
plaints. Driven  by  this  torture  perhaps,  Opium  is 
again  invited  to  produce  quiet,  and  his  presence  acts 
like  magic,  and  in  this  way  he  comes  to  have  such  a 
power,  that  the  Master  is  willing  to  forgive  him  for 
all  the  ills  he  creates  because  of  the  power  he  seems 
to  have  in  soothing  them.  This  goes  on  until  the 
Man  becomes  a  perfect  slave  to  Opium,  who  alter- 
nately tortures  and  caresses  his  victim,  until  he  at 
last  forces  him  to  vacate  his  once  beautiful  house, 
now  despoiled,  and  rendered  utterly  unfit  for  habita- 
tion. The  slaves  of  Opium  may  possibly  be  freed 
from  his  chains,  but  it  is  very  doubtful  if  they  ever 
are. 

The  poet  Coleridge,  who  for  many  years  was  an 
opium  devotee,  writes  :  "  There  is  no  hope.  O  God  ! 
how  willingly  would  I  place  myself  under  Dr.  Fox 
in  his  establishment ;  for  my  case  is  a  species  of  mad- 
ness, only  that  it  is  a  derangement,  an  utter  impo- 
tence of  volition,  and  not  of  the  intellectual  faculties. 
You  bid  me  rouse  myself.  Go,  and  bid  a  paralytic 
in  both  arms,  to  rub  them  briskly  together,  and  that 
will  cure  him.  '  Alas ! '  he  would  reply,  '  that  I  can 
not  move  my  arms  is  my  complaint,  and  my  misery.' ' 
After  a  fearful  struggle  Coleridge  was  liberated  from 
the  dominion  of  Opium. 


A  VOID  DO  UB  TF  UI.   COM  I  'A  NY..  249 

De  Quincey,  who  also  freed  himself  from  this  tyr- 
anny, says  :  "  I  triumphed,  but  think  not  that  my  suf- 
ferings were  ended.  Think  of  me  as  of  one  who 
even  when  four  months  have  passed,  still  agitated, 
writhing,  throbbing,  palpitating,  and  shattered." 

This  is  how  Opium  serves  those  who  trust  him. 
Far  better  would  it  be  to  ask  why  Pain  is  chiding 
us,  and  to  so  regulate  our  lives  that  he  could  find  no 
chances  to  complain,  than  to  close  his  mouth  by 
Chloral  Hydrate,  Haschish,  Absinthe,  or  Opium,  and 
by  so  doing  become  their  abject  slaves.  Of  all  those 
who  come  under  their  dominion,  not  one  in  a  thou- 
sand has  strength  to  break  the  chains  and  become 
free. 

Some  preparations  of  opium  are  injected  under 
the  skin.  In  this  case  the  effect  of  the  drug  mani- 
fests itself  more  rapidly  than  if  taken  into  the  stom- 
ach, and  the  opium  habit  thus  formed  is  as  hard  to 
break  as  when  it  is  smoked,  or  taken  as  a  pill. 

If  ever  these  powerful  and  poisonous  drugs  are  in- 
troduced into  the  system,  it  should  be  under  the 
direction  of  a  competent  and  honest  physician,  who 
will  never  permit  a  patient  to  be  the  judge  of  when, 
how,  or  how  frequently  such  dangerous  guests  should 
enter  the  House  Beautiful. 

Come,  I  offer  you  my  hand.  Shall  we  agree  to 
keep  away  from  doubtful  company,  as  well  as  that 
which  we  know  to  be  injurious  in  the  extreme? 


CHAPTER    VI. 

BAD   COMPANY. 

"  A  MAN  is  known  by  the  company  he  keeps." 
Men  of  low  tastes  and  vile  habits  do  not  choose 
for  companions  those  who  have  pure  tastes  and  high 
aspirations.  '  You  have  not  forgotten  that  our  house 
is  guarded  by  twin-brothers,  Taste  and  Smell,  whose 
duty  it  is  to  examine  all  those  who  present  themselves 
as  candidates  for  the  acquaintance  or  friendship  of 
the  master  of  the  house.  *  They  are  both  very  candid, 
and  express  their  opinion  very  decidedly.  3  What- 
ever Taste  dislikes  is  sure  to  be  disagreeable  to  the 
other  servants  of  the  household  ;  4  and  if  the  master 
becomes  strongly  attached  to  bad  friends,  the  only 
thing  the  servants  can  do  is  to  try  and  make  the 
best  of  a  bad  matter.  "  It  is  then  to  the  master  of 
the  house  that  we  6  must  appeal,  if  we  would  prevent 
the  formation  of  hurtful  friendships  ;  and  it  is  he 
whom  we  must  educate  to  recognize  these  objection- 
able claimants  for  his  favor. 

7  The  first  one  of  whom  I  will  speak  is  a  native  of 

America,  but  is  widely  known  over  the  world.    3  When 

Columbus,  in  1492,  landed  on  the  shores  of  this  New 

World  he  was  met  by  this  distinguished  American. 

Cortez,  when  he  conquered  Mexico  in  15 19,  also  met 

(250) 


BAD  COMPANY.  25  I 

him.  ,0  He  was  always  present  among  the  North 
American  Indians  at  their  religious  ceremonies,  and 
was  indispensable  to  the  conclusions  of  treaties  of 
peace  as  well  as  to  declarations  of  war.  "  He  was 
soon  introduced  to  European  society,  and  received 
with  much  kindness.  ,a  He  was  taken  to  Spain  and 
to  France,  being  presented  to  the  Queen  Catherine  de 
Medici,  and  in  France  was  called  Her  be  de  la  Reine ; 
and  to  the  Church  authorities  of  Italy  about  the  year 
1560,  where  he  was  known  as  Erba  Santa  Croce. 

Quite  a  number  of  gentlemen  claim  the  honor  oi 
introducing  him  to  the  nobility  of  England,  lu  but 
Sir  Walter  Raleigh  generally  obtains  the  credit.  In 
1 60 1  he  was  carried  to  India,  and  in  1609  to  Java. 
He  was  popularly  supposed  to  have  great  powers  in 
the  curing  of  disease,  and  soon  became  very  gener- 
ally trusted.  u  James  the  First  of  England  was  the 
first  to  perceive  that  this  universally  beloved  and 
welcomed  guest  was  a  dangerous  friend,  and  de- 
nounced him  accordingly,  and  he  made  people  pay 
dearly  for  the  privilege  of  entertaining  him. 

This  American  fell  into  disgrace  among  the  Italian 
clergy,  i:'and  Pope  Urban,  in  1625,  issued  a  bull  ex- 
communicating all  persons  who  should  entertain  him. 
16  He  was  prohibited  by  royal  decrees  in  Persia, 
Turkey,  and  China.  Our  I7  Puritan  Fathers  made 
laws  against  him,  and  forbade  his  coming  to  church. 
lH  But  still  this  widely-travelled  American  had  many 
warm  friends  who  received  and  entertained  him  ;  and 
while  much  was  written  against  him,  much  was  also 
written  in  his  favor.  ,9  Charles  Lamb,  in  taking  leave 
of  him,  writes : 


2r2  THE  MAX  WONDERFUL. 

"Brother  of  Bacchus,  later  born, 
The   Old   World  was   sure  forlorn 
Wanting   thee  ; 

For  I  must  (nor  let  it  grieve  thee, 
Friendliest  of  plants,  that  I  must)  leave  thee. 

For  thy  sake,  Tobacco,  I 

Would  do  anything  but  die." 

You  know  that  it  is  not  his  20  beauty  nor  sweet- 
ness that  has  recommended  him  to  kings,  queens,  and 
nobles  ;  and  you  also  know  that  he  is  not  above  asso- 
ciating with  the  humblest  and  vilest  of  mankind. 
21  Tobacco  comes  of  a  bad  family.  Among  his  rela- 
tives we  find  the  deadly  nightshade,  the  horse-nettle, 
henbane,  and  Jamestown  weed.  "  But  he  has  some 
useful  kindred.  He  is  cousin  to  the  pepper  and  the 
night-blooming  jessamine,  and  second  cousin  to  the 
tomato  and  potato.  a3  There  are  many  opinions  as 
to  how  he  came  by  his  name,  but  there  is  no  doubt 
that  his  name  is  Tobacco.  As  we  know  him,  he  is  a 
black,  disagreeable  fellow,  with  a  bad  odor  and  a 
worse  flavor.  a4  One  would  imagine  that  if  a  person 
wanted  to  become  an  intimate  friend  of  a  family  he 
would  make  himself  especially  agreeable  at  the  first 
call ;  but  Tobacco  does  just  the  contrary.  As  soon  as 
he  enters,  the  whole  household  is  thrown  into  an  up- 
roar. All  the  servants  unite  to  get  rid  of  the  guest, 
whom  they  recognize  as  an  enemy  of  their  dear  mas- 
ter ;  a6  and  in  this  effort  the  whole  contents  of  the 
kitchen  sometimes  is  emptied  out  at  the  front  door, 
"  and  the  general  disturbance  is  so  great  that  work  in 


A/CO  T/NE—PR  C  r6  S/C  A  C/D. 


253 


the  whole  house  may  be  temporarily  suspended  until 
the  faithful  servants  can  recover  from  their  struggle 
with  the  foe. 

"7  If  Tobacco  be  admitted  again  and  again  the  ser- 
vants give  up  the  struggle  and  tolerate  the  visitor, 
because  the  master  likes  his  company,  but  they  re- 
move, as  fast  as  possible,  all  traces  of  his  presence, 
and  say  little  ;  because  being  compelled  to  endure 
him,  they  learn  to  do  it  silently.  a8  The  lungs  are 
busy  throwing  him  out  as  fast  as  possible.  "  We 
know  this  because  the  breath  is  tainted  with  his  poi- 
sonous odor;  3°  the  kidneys  are  overworked;  the  skin 
is  saturated;  and  the  bowels  are  sometimes  thrown 
into  slight  convulsions  (called  "  tetanic  contractions") 
in  their  violent  efforts  to  cast  out  the  foe.  Do  you 
think  foe  is  too  strong  a  word  to  use?  Wouldn't 
you  think  prussic  acid  a  foe?  Professor  Bartholow, 
who  is  authority  on  such  matters,  says  :  3I  "  The  active 
principle  of  tobacco  corresponds,  in  mode  and  intensity 
of  action,  to  PRUSSIC  ACID."  "  This  active  principle 
is  called  nicotine.  S3  A  single  drop  of  it  has  killed  a 
rabbit  in  less  than  four  minutes.  s*  If  a  dose  large 
enough  be  taken,  it  will  kill  a  man  in  less  than  five 
minutes,  and  it  does  not  take  such  a  very  large 
amount.  In  .using  tobacco  one  does  not  get  the  clear 
nicotine,  and  that  is  the  reason  its  bad  effects  are  not 
more  clearly  recognized. 

15  Tobacco  masquerades  under  different  forms  and 
different  dress,  but  his  personality  is  unchanged.  His 
most  universal  character  is  that  of  a  real  home  body. 
M  He  sometimes  plays  this  part  in  the  rough  garb  of 
a  peasant  or  pioneer  without  any  arts  of  adornment. 

17 


254  THE  MAN   WONDERFUL. 

31  In  this  coarse  dress  he  sits  down  with  the  tired 
farmer,  or  cow-boy,  and  tells  them  wonderful  tales  of 
his  goodness  to  them,  his  efforts  for  their  happiness, 
and  they  listen  while  38  he  steals  past  Olfactory  Sense, 
and  dulls  the  other  senses,  and  cheats  the  man  out  of 
the  best  of  life,  that  is,  the  delight  in  being  alive 
through  and  through.  To  be  stifled,  stunned,  or  par- 
alyzed is  not  to  live,  even  though  the  process  may 
destroy  the  consciousness  of  pain  or  trouble.  39  But 
Tobacco  takes  great  credit  for  his  self-sacrifice,  as  he 
terms  it ;  he  is  willing  "  to  give  his  body  to  be  burned  " 
to  promote  the  happiness  of  his  friends.  His  first 
appearance  in  this  character  of  a  self-immolator,  of 
which  we  have  any  record,  was  among  his  old  friends, 
the  "aboriginal  North  American  Indians,  where  he 
burned  in  the  calumet  or  pipe  of  peace.  41  And  it  is 
in  the  pipe  that  he  appears  in  his  character  of  bene- 
factor to  the  greatest  number  of  people. 

Tobacco  knows  well  how  to  adapt  himself  to  the 
company  he  is  in.  Humble  and  coarse  among  the 
ruder  classes  of  mankind,  4a  he  puts  on  more  style 
when  coming  among  those  more  pretentious  in  dress 
and  manners.  43  At  home  in  the  corn-cob  pipe  of  the 
pioneer,  or  the  briar-root  pipe  of  the  Indian,  he  is 
equally  at  home  in  the  expensive  brown-tinted  meer- 
schaum of  the  German  prince,  or  the  bejewelled 
hookah  of  the  Indian  nabob. 

But,  just  as  the  actor  under  all  disguises  is  the  same, 
so  Tobacco  is  ever  the  same  in  his  characteristics, 44  and 
in  the  influence  he  exerts  upon  the  master  and  the 
servants  of  the  House  Beautiful.     He  goes  about  the 


SNUFI  IN   Till:   SENATE.  255 

premises  doing  mischief  and  blinding  the  eyes  of  the 
owner,  or  deceiving  him  with  a  recital  of  his  good 
offices.  4"  lie  burns  the  tongue  and  mucous  membrane  ; 
"  he  changes  the  shape  of  the  red  corpuscles;  he 
paints  the  facade  an  ugly  yellow  color  ;  47  he  makes  the 
cook  unable  to  do  his  work  well,  and  thus  produces  a 
disease  called  dyspepsia  ;  48  he  stimulates  the  salivary 
glands  to  undue  labor,  and  so  wastes  their  power;  he 
irritates  the  bronchia,  and  increases  cough,  if  cough 
exist ;  "  and  sometimes  that  most  terrible  disease, 
cancer,  has  been  traced  to  the  use  of  the  pipe. 

"  Many  and  many  a  year  ago, 
In  kingdoms  across  the  sea," 

60  as  well  as  in  our  own  land,  Tobacco  was  carried  around 
in  the  pockets  of  his  friends  in  little  boxes.  51  He 
was  then  masquerading  in  the  character  of  confiden- 
tial friend  or  bosom  companion.  In  this  form  he 
claimed  to  be  exceedingly  refined,  and  was  admitted  in- 
to the  confidence  of  the  most  cultivated  of  both  sexes. 
Ll  Snuff-boxes  were  the  usual  gifts  of  kings  and  queens 
to  each  other,  and  were  made  of  silver  or  gold  and 
adorned  with  jewels.  But  even  in  this  form  Tobacco, 
true  to  his  nature,  did  not  disdain  the  common  peo- 
ple, and  in  cheap  boxes  of  tin  or  lacquer  kept  close 
by  their  sides,  and  won  their  confidence. 

63 1  wonder  how  many  of  you  know  that  the  item 
of  snuff  enters  into  the  annual  expense  account  of 
the  United  States  Senate  ? 

There  are  probably  few  if  any  snuff-takers  now  in 
the  Senate,  but  the  fact  that  it  was  once  considered  oi 


256  THE  MAX   WONDERFUL. 

so  much  importance  as  to  be  classed  among  the  nee 
essary  expenses  of  the  Senators,  shows  that  it  must 
have  been  generally  used.  64  A  public  snuff-box  stood 
by  the  table  of  the  Vice-President,  who  presides  in  the 
Senate,  and  we  are  told  that  Henry  Clay,  in  making 
his  great  speeches,  was  accustomed  to  pause,  and,  go- 
ing to  this  box,  deliberately  take  a  pinch,  and  then 
returning  to  his  place,  proceed  with  his  address. 

5;'Oneof  the  effects  of  snuff-taking  is  to  destroy 
the  sense  of  smell  b0  Smell  being  deadened,  Taste 
suffers  likewise,  for  we  have  learned  that  Taste  needs 
the  aid  of  his  twin-brother,  Smell,  to  be  able  to  form 
an  entirely  just  judgment  of  things.  Dyspepsia  also 
results  from  snuffing. 

57  Another  evil  effect  is  the  collection  of  snuff  in  the 
back  part  of  the  nose,  called  the  posterior  nares,  cut- 
ting off  communication  between  Olfactory  Sense  and 
the  master  of  the  house.  Such  a  collection  of  snuff 
in  the  nose  has  been  mistaken  for  a  tumor.  Snuff- 
taking  is  a  habit  that  enslaves.  58  A  snuff-taker  with- 
out his  snuff-box  can  not  think,  can  not  work,  can  not 
be  happy.  Like  the  Irish  clergyman,  he  begins  the 
day  with  the  sentiment, 

"  Before  I  budge  an  inch 
1  hail  Aurora  with  a  pinch." 

And  during  every  hour  of  the  day  he  says  with  the 
same  writer : 

"  Whate'er  I  do,  where'er  I  be, 
My  social  box  attends  on  me." 


CHAPTER   VII. 

BAD   COMPANY — TOBACCO   A   QUACK    DENTIST. 

TOBACCO  not  only  plays  the  part  of  a  bosom  friend 
i>r  that  of  a  self-immolator  for  man's  good,  '  but  he 
styles  himself  a  professional  gentleman,  and  takes 
upon  himself  to  act  the  part  of  a  dentist.  "  Only 
give  me  a  chance,"  says  he,  8  "  and  I  will  preserve  your 
teeth,  and  cure  your  tooth-aches ";  and  men  be- 
lieve him.  3  And  women  too  are  sometimes  misled, 
and  swab  their  mouths  with  snuff.  4  Tobacco  is  never 
so  disgusting  as  when  playing  dentist.  b  No  people 
except  the  Americans  employ  him  in  that  capacity  ; 
Southern  women  "  dip,"  and  men  both  North  and 
South  chew.  Not  only  is  he  disgusting,  but  he  does 
more  real  mischief  in  that  way  than  in  any  other. 
He  does  not  keep  his  word.  6  He  does  not  preserve 
the  teeth,  but  in  reality  stains  and  discolors  the  en- 
amel, weakens  the  gums,  wears  the  teeth  away,  makes 
the  breath  bad,  and,  in  short,  he  does  so  much  dam- 
age, that  if  he  were  any  other  than  a  quack  dentist, 
we  would  discharge  him  at  once.  7In  addition  to  the 
evil  which  he  does  unaided,  he  takes  advantage  of 
the  confidence  which  his  employers  have  in  him  to 
introduce  into  the  house  other  guests  only  less  inju- 
rious than  himself.     Some   of  these    are  burdock, 

(257) 


2c8  THE  MAN   WONDERFUL. 

lampblack,  sawdust,  colt's-foot,  plantain  leaves,  ful- 
ler's earth,  lime,  salt,  alum,  and  many  others.  They 
are  employed  because  they  are  cheaper,  and  they  are 
almost  as  mean  as  tobacco. 

8  While  Tobacco  is  pretending  to  be  a  dentist,  he  is 
quarrelling  with  the  cook,  irritating  the  salivary 
glands,  and  making  them  do  extra  work,  and  creating 
so  much  general  disturbance  in  the  household  by  his 
presence  that  the  master^suffers  with  dyspepsia  and 
probably  from  sleeplessness,  low  spirits,  nightmare, 
gloomy  forebodings,  fear  of  death,  pallor,  emaciation, 
dizziness,  rush  of  blood  to  th^head,  palpitation  of  the 
heart,  and  a  host  of  other  horrors,  and  all  the  while 
Tobacco  is  saying,  "  I  am  so  sorry  for  you  ;  but  I  am 
your  friend.  10  See  how  I  calm  you,  and  rest  you, 
and  comfort  you."  And  the  poor  devotee  believes 
this  false  friend,  and  remains  under  his  evil  influence. 
If  he  would  give  Tobacco  permanent  leave  of  absence 
he  would  soon  find  himself  relieved  of  all  his  domes- 
tic difficulties.  The  servants  glad  to  be  rid  of  such 
a  tyrant  would  again  work  harmoniously. 

11  Wherever  Tobacco  is  employed  he  puts  up  a  sign : 
"  Tobacco  is  dentist  here!  "  12  It  can  be  read  in  the 
snuffy  skin,  in  the  disagreeable  breath,  discolored 
teeth  and  flabby  gums.  As  with  all  dentists,  his  work 
speaks  for  itself. 

1S  In  the  matter  of  expectoration  of  tobacco-juice, 

America  has  a  world-wide  reputation.     14  It  has  be^ 

come  a  measure  of  public  safety  to  provide  in  public 

places  spittoons  of    enormous    dimensions,  and    the 

5  senatorial  atspidore  is  now  more  an  object  of  Gov- 


QUACK  DENTIST.  259 

ernmental  importance  than  the  public  snuff-box.  Not 
only  does  the  cuspidore  assist  (in  the  French  sense  ol 
the  word)  ,8  at  the  grave  and  weighty  discussions 
of  legislative  bodies,  but  finds  a  place  in  elegant 
homes  and  even  in  the  pulpit. 

17  It  is  said  that  cannibals  will  not  eat  the  flesh  of  a 
man  who  used  tobacco,  it  is  so  tainted  with  it.    There- 
fore, if  a  man  expects  to  be  killed  by  cannibals,  and 
cares  whether  he  is  eaten  after  death  or  not,  he  might 
secure  himself  from  such  a  fate  by  soaking  himself  in 
tobacco-juice.    But  I  have  never  heard  that  cannibals 
hesitate  about  killing  a  man  because  he  uses  tobacco. 
The  success  of  Tobacco,  in  his  capacity  of  dentist, 
is    in   inverse   proportion   to   his   promises.       8  Like 
some   other   dentists,    he    claims    to    be    a    medical 
assistant,  and  there  is  quite  a  long  list  of   diseases 
which  he  assumes  to  cure. 

This  is  an  age  of  nervous  diseases.  Every  physi- 
cian knows  that  they  are  rapidly  increasing.  Tobacco 
says,  19  "  I  can  cure  nervous  troubles";  and  the  suf- 
ferer trying  it,  and  finding  himself,  for  the  time  being, 
suffering  less,  believes  that  Tobacco  has  cured  him. 
What  he  has  done  is  to  20  paralyze  the  nerves  so  that 
they  can  no  longer  complain.  He  claims  to  cure 
spasmodic  diseases,  and  yet  we  find  spasmodic 
troubles  directly  traceable  to  the  use  of  tobacco.  To 
employ  Tobacco  as  doctor,  is  not  applying  the  hair  of 
the  dog  to  cure  the  bite,  but  getting  him  to  bite  you 
again  in  the  same  place. 

"  Tobacco,"  says  one  man,  "  causes  seventy  kinds 
of    disease.     ai  It  kills   twenty-five    per  cent,   of  the 


26o  -THE  MAN  WONDERFUL. 

vigor  of  the  country,  and  damaging  this  generation, 
injures  the  next."  Some  of  the  M  diseases  traceable 
to  tobacco,  are  ulceration  of  the  tongue,  lips,  tonsils, 
gums,  mucous  membrane  of  mouth  and  pharynx , 
constipation,  loss  of  appetite,  palpitation  of  the 
heart,  neuralgia,  dizziness,  trembling,  loss  of  manli- 
ness, general  debility  of  the  nerves,  deafness,  loss  of 
memory,  mania,  palsy,  apoplexy,  disease  of  the  liver, 
and  dyspepsia.  A  peculiar  influence  is  exerted  on 
the  glands  of  the  throat  and  tonsils."  23  Dr.  Richard- 
son says :  "  I  once  examined  the  throats  of  fifty 
smokers  of  different  ages  and  habits,  and  found  in 
them  the  enlargement  of  tonsils  so  common,  and  the 
other  appearances  so  marked  (that  is,  the  redness  and 
dryness  of  throat)  that  I  think  I  could  detect  an  im- 
moderate smoker  by  these  signs  alone."  He  also 
says,  "  The  smoker's  sore  throat  is  more  easily  in- 
duced by  the  use  of  cigars  than  of  pipes,  and  when 
established  is  incurable  so  long  as  the  cause  which  ex- 
cited it  is  allowed  to  continue,  but  soon  disappears  when 
the  cigar  or  pipe  is  laid  aside" 

24  This  condition  of  throat  creates  a  feeling  of 
thirst,  to  satisfy  which  many  a  man  is  led  to  the  use 
of  strong  drinks. 

Cancer  of  the  lip  is  often  induced  in  persons  who 
smoke  short  pipes,  breaking  out  at  that  part  of  the 
lip  whereon  the  pipe  presses.  25  Smoking  interferes 
with  the  heart's  power  of  contraction,  it  being  to  a 
certain  extent  paralyzed.  In  inveterate  smokers  the 
pupils  are  dilated  more  than  is  natural.  2e  In  reading, 
the  letters  become  blurred,  sometimes  bright  images 


TOBACCO  CHANGES  THE  EYE.  26l 

or  specks  float  before  the  eyes.  A  sure  test  of  the 
injury  done  by  tobacco,  is  in  the  impression  made 
upon  the  retina,  by  means  of  which  an  object  will  be 
seen  long  after  the  eye  is  shut,  or  the  object  itself  has 
disappeared.  Richardson  gives  an  instance  of  a  man 
who  could  retain  an  image  of  a  bright  object  as  long 
as  six  minutes  after  the  eyes  were  withdrawn  from  it. 
"  I  have  frequently  seen  Professor  Galazowski,  of 
Paris,  examine  with  an  ophthalmoscope  the  eyes  of 
strangers  who  came  to  him  for  treatment,  and,  with- 
out asking  a  single  question  as  to  their  habits  of  life, 
he  would  indicate  those  who  were  accustomed  to  use 
tobacco  to  excess.  This  he  was  able  to  do  by  ob- 
serving the  changes  made  in  the  nerve  and  retina  of 
the  eye. 

28  Indulgence  in  tobacco  also  affects  the  sense  of 
hearing,  causing  confusion  of  sounds  with  an  inability 
to  appreciate  distinctly  sounds  either  very  soft  or 
very  loud.  After  a  time,  another  symptom  will  be  a 
sudden,  sharp  ringing  in  the  ears,  like  the  ringing  of 
a  bell,  or  the  whistling  of  the  wind  ;  this  may  last 
some  minutes  and  may  be  accompanied  with  giddi- 
ness. 

29  The  nicotine  of  tobacco  affects  both  the  volun- 
tary and  involuntary  nerves.  It  excites  the  motor 
nerves,  and  causes  muscular  agitation,  followed  by 
temporary  suspension  of  action  and  paralysis.  It  ex- 
cites the  involuntary  nerves,  and  produces  muscular 
spasm  followed  by  loss  of  power.  This  is  what  pro- 
duces the  pain  in  the  stomach,  spasm  and  vomiting, 
and  the  palpitation  of  the  heart.     30  Tobacco  affects 


262  THE  MAN'  WONDERFUL. 

the  glands  of  the  system,  exciting  a  free  secretion, 
and  if  the  use  become  immoderate,  the  process  ol 
secretion  may  become  incontrollable,  because  of  a 
paralysis  induced.  31  These  are  the  opinions  of  the 
best  physicians  who  have  studied  closely  the  effects 
of  tobacco. 

32  Lizars  says  :  "  I  have  found  that  patients  addicted 
to  tobacco  were  in  spirit  cowardly,  and  deficient  in 
manly  fortitude  to  undergo  any  surgical  operation 
however  trifling." 

33  Professor  Hinds  has  come  to  the  conclusion  that 
if  the  American  people  desire  the  highest  perfection 
to  which  a  race  can  be  brought,  they  must  renounce 
tobacco  forever.  But  is  it  all  a  pretence  then  that 
tobacco  is  of  avail  as  a  remedy  ? 

34  Professor  Bartholow  says :  "  Tobacco  is  a  severe 
and  very  depressing  nauseant  and  emetic,"  and  giving 
the  diseases  to  which  it  is  applicable  as  a  remedy,  adds 
always  one  of  the  following  pertinent  remarks:  "It 
must  be  borne  in  mind  that  it  is  not  free  from  dan- 
ger." "  Care  must  be  taken  not  to  introduce  a  lethal 
quantity,  and  so  produce  death  by  asphyxia."  "  It  is 
so  horribly  depressing  that  the  remedy  may  justly 
be  considered  as  conducive  to  greater  evil."  "  Its  use 
is  rarely  justifiable."  "  We  possess  other  remedies 
less  dangerous."     This  is  Tobacco's  diploma. 


CHAPTER  VIII. 

BAD   COMPANY — TOBACCO   AS   A    DUDE. 

1  THE  "  Dude  "  is  a  creation  of  these  later  days,  and 
not  to  be  behind  the  times,  Tobacco  also  appears  as  a 
"  Dude."  a  It  is  a  character  particularly  attractive 
to  juvenile  minds,  and  boys,  so  young  as  not  to  be 
charmed  by  pipe  or  cigar,  are  captivated  by  the  Cigar- 
ette. 3  Slight  in  figure,  he  seems  to  be  too  insignifi- 
cant to  be  of  harm  to  any  one,  and  this  apparent  in- 
significance is  his  strong  point.  *  M  How  can  such  a 
tiny  fellow  as  I,  do  you  any  harm?"  he  asks.  And 
the  query  seems  to  be  such  an  absurdity  that  the 
only  appropriate  answer  would  be  a  smile.  Let  us 
see  if  this  dwarf  is  as  harmless  as  he  would  make  us 
believe.  5  The  fumes  of  the  cigarette  are  drawn 
more  directly  into  the  lungs  than  those  of  the  pipe 
or  cigar,  and  the  smoke  of  the  paper  in  which  they 
are  rolled  is  an  additional  abomination.  6  Sending 
the  smoke  through  the  nose  brings  the  delicate 
mucous  membrane  lining  it,  directly  under  the  in- 
fluence of  the  acrid  poison,  and  catarrh  is  a  result. 
1  He  is  assisted  by  the  vilest  companions.  Stumps 
of  old  cigars,  and  refuse  of  the  vilest  kinds,  are  in- 
corporated into  cigarettes. 

As  the  first  effect  of  tobacco  in  all  forms  is  to  in- 

(263) 


264  THE  MAN  WONDERFUL. 

terfere  with,  and  weaken  digestion,  '  we  can  see  at 
once  that  the  effect  on  growing  boys  will  be  particu- 
larly hurtful,  for  in  youth,  growth,  as  well  as  repair, 
is  a  law  of  the  system,  and  anything  that  interferes 
with  digestion  interferes  with  growth.  The  boy  who 
smokes  will  not  be  as  large,  or  as  strong,  or  as  healthy 
as  if  he  had  not  smoked. 

10  Girls  in  their  youthful  ignorance,  and  their  natu- 
ral love  of  gaiety,  sometimes  fancy  that  to  smoke  a 
cigarette  is  a  harmless  aping  of  masculine  folly;  and 
resenting,  perhaps,  Lamb's  assertion  that, 

"  Roses  and  violets  are  but  toys, 
For  the  smaller  sort  of  boys, 
Or  for  greener  damsels  meant, 
Thou  (tobacco)  art  the  only  manly  scent," 

they  claim  the  right  to  indulge  in  the  manly  per- 
fume ;  but  Tobacco  shows  no  partiality  for  sex.  "  He 
smiles  as  sweetly  on  the  feminine,  as  on  the  mascu 
line,  and  under  cover  of  his  smile  does  them  as  much, 
or  as  some  physicians  affirm  more,  harm. 

12  Boys  do  not  care  particularly  about  their  com- 
plexions, but  perhaps  they  will  listen  to  this  from 
Dr.  Bartholow  :  "  A  cigarette-smoking  boy  will  not 
make  a  strong  man.  He  will  have  impaired  diges- 
tion, small  and  poor  muscles,  irritable  temper,  and  a 
lack  of  capacity  for  sustained  effort  of  any  kind." 

13  "  The  growth  of  this  habit  is  insidious,  and  its 
effects  ruinous.  The  eyes,  the  brain,  the  nervous 
system,  the   memory,  and   the  power  of  application, 


SHUN  THE  DUDE.  26$ 

are  all  impaired  by  it.  '  It  is  nothing  but  a  cigar, 
ette,'  means  really  '  it  is  nothing  but  poison.'  " 

14  The  decision  of  the  doctors  is  that  it  makes  boys 
cowardly,  and  lacking  in  decision  and  courage.  It 
interferes  with  ability  to  study.  15  In  the  Polytech- 
nique  school  in  Paris,  the  non-smokers  were  found  to 
be  always  superior  in  their  classes  to  the  smokers. 
Out  of  38  who  smoked,  27  were  found  to  be  actually 
diseased  from  nicotine  poisoning,  and  the  minister 
of  public  instruction  forbade  the  use  of  tobacco  by 
pupils.* 

16  Boys,  shun  the  "  Dude." 

*  An  organ  of  the  liquor  and  tobacco  trade  says  :  "  The  to- 
bacco factories  supply  for  every  male  person  in  the  country  ten 
pounds  of  chewing,  and  three  ;.nd  a  half  pounds  of  smoking 
tobacco,  and  one-half  pound  of  sr  uff.  For  the  six  million  youths 
between  ten  and  twenty  years  of  age,  six  hundred  million  cigar- 
eUes  or  one  hundred  apiece,  are  manufactured." 


CHAPTER   IX. 

BAD   COMPANY — TOBACCO   AS   A  DANDY. 

1  THE  character  of  Dandy  is  one  of  Tobacco's  most 
successful  personations.  There  are  some  who  are 
fond  of  Tobacco  at  home  in  the  pipe,  but  who  object 
to  appearing  on  the  street  with  him  in  that  attire ;  so 
he  rolls  2  himself  up  in  a  cylindrical  form,  3  calls  him- 
self a  cigar,  or  segar,  if  he  apes  foreign  airs,  and 
becomes  at  once  a  dandy,  and  a  so-called  desirable 
friend.  Gentlemen  who  pride  themselves  on  being 
"  mirrors  of  fashion,"  stretch  out  their  jewelled  hands, 
and  take  him  up  with  a  graceful  twirl,  which  has  been 
acquired  by  long  practice,  and  strut  forth,  as  Lamb 
says, 

"  Bound  in  such  a  cloud 

That  each  man  through  the  heightening-  steam 

Does  like  a  smoking  vEtna  seem." 

4  The  dandyism  of  the  cigar  seems  to  have  blinded 
the  eyes  of  some  women  and  girls  so  that  they  permit 
smoking  in  their  presence ;  or  perhaps  they  make 
smoking-caps  or  tobacco  -  pouches  for  brother  or 
friends  without  thought  that  they  are  countenancing 
an  evil. 

6  Smoking  promotes  selfishness  and  even  a  disregard 
of  the  rights  of  others.    6  Air  is  our  most  important 
(266) 


TOBACCO  A   DANDY. 


267 


food,  but  the  man  who,  under  no  circumstances, 
would  poison  the  water  which  another  must  drink, 
or  the  food  that  he  must  eat,  7  will  not  hesitate  to 
poison  with  tobacco  smoke  the  air  which  another 
must  breathe.  8  The  father,  who  would  not  put  dust 
into  the  eyes  of  his  child,  or  submit  it  to  the  fumes 
of  sulphur,  will  take  it  in  his  arms  and  puff  tobacco 
smoke  into  its  face. 

And  in  still  more  important  ways  does  the  smoker 
disregard  the  rights  of  others.  9  Emerson  says,  "  A 
man's  son  is  the  son  of  his  thoughts  and  of  his  ac- 
tions," and  asks :  "  How  shall  a  man  escape  from  his 
ancestors,  or  draw  from  his  veins  the  black  drop  which 
he  drew  from  his  father's  or  mother's  life?"  The 
scientific  men  who  have  made  this  matter  a  great 
study,  have  found  that  a  10  weakened  constitution  is 
given  to  the  children  of  tobacco  -  users.  "One  of 
them  says:  "In  no  instance  is  the  sin  of  the  father 
more  strikingly  visited  upon  the  children  than  the  sin 
of  tobacco-smoking."  12  He  goes  on  to  enumerate 
the  weakness  of  nerves,  the  depression  of  mind,  pro- 
ducing melancholy  and  imagination  of  disease,  the 
insanity,  the  dwarfing  of  the  body,  the  suffering,  the 
consumption  and  early  death  which  are  among  the 
inheritances  of  tobacco-smoking  parents. 

13  Dr.  Elam  says  :  "  Children  inherit  the  mental  and 
moral  characteristics  and  the  acquired  habits  of  their 
parents  under  a  uniform  law." 

Dr.  Richardson  says  :  "  As  only  our  fathers  smoke, 
so  chiefly  by  our  mothers  is  the  integrity  of  the  race 
fairly  preserved." 


268  THE  MAN  WONDERFUL. 

14  Tobacco  under  all  disguises  is  a  spendthrift.  '*  It 
is  in  this  character  only  that  he  fulfils  more  than  he 
promises.  The  expenditure  of  money  for  that  which 
does  not  bring  a  fair  return  is  poor  economy.  The 
expenditure  for  that  which  is  a  physical  injury  is 
morally  wrong.  l6  Those  who  are  friends  with  Tobac- 
co are  spending  their  money  for  that  which  is  not 
bread,  and  their  labor  for  that  which  satisfieth  not. 
It  has  been  stated  that  the  American  Church  gives 
§5,000,000  a  year  to  Foreign  Missions,  and  $25,000,000 
a  year  is  spent  by  Americans  for  tobacco. 

17  The  most  moderate  smoker  will  not  spend  less 
fhan  $40  a  year  on  his  cigars.  ,8  A  New  York  mer- 
chant says  that  by  laying  up  the  money  that  he 
would  have  expended  on  cigars,  in  thirty-nine  years 
he  saved  $29,000.  19  Professor  Hinds  calculates  that  a 
young  man,  saving  the  money  he  would  spend  on  to- 
bacco and  buying  books  with  it,  will,  at  the  age  when 
he  should  marry,  have  a  nice  library  worth  from 
$1,000  to  $1,200;  while  the  young  man  who  has 
burnt  his  money  as  a  sacrifice,  not  of  "  a  sweet  smell- 
ing savor,"  to  Tobacco,  will  have  nothing  but  a  20  dis- 
eased body  to  reward  him. 

21  Insurance  agents  say  that  a  very  large  percentage 
of  losses  by  fire  come  from  the  spark  of  the  pipe  and 
the  cigar. 

"  A  spark  from  a  cigar  set  fire  to,  and  totally  de- 
stroyed $3,000,000  worth  of  property.  A  match, 
thrown  away  after  lighting  a  pipe,  resulted  in  the 
destruction  of  a  large  printing  establishment.  Five 
blocks    of    buildings    were    burned,    two    thousand 


DESTROYS  PROPERTY.  269 

employes  thrown  out  of  employment,  and  over 
$1,000,000  worth  of  property  destroyed.  A  young 
man  riding  with  a  young  lady  was  smoking;  a  spark 
from  his  cigar  set  fire  to  her  dress  and  she  was  burned 
to  death. 

When  I  tell  you,  that  the  sheets,  in  which  the  corpse 
of  a  veteran  user  of  tobacco  had  been  wrapped,  were 
saturated  with  a  fluid  like  tobacco-juice  which  was 
poured  out  upon  the  surface  of  his  body,  to  the 
amount  of  two  pints,  you  will  readily  understand  why 
cannibals  will  not  eat  such  flesh,  and  you  will  be 
ready  to  admit  that  vermin  will  be  killed  by  the 
water  in  which  such  a  person  has  bathed. 

I  have  now  mentioned  all  the  good  qualities  of  To- 
bacco, and  many  of  the  bad  ones.  I  will  not  stop  to 
mention  the  evil  influence  he  wields  as  a  companion 
of  the  pulpit  orator,  nor  of  the  odor  (not  of  sanctity) 
with  which  he  pervades  the  ministerial  library  ;  nor 
will  I  speak  of  the  incongruity  of  the  instructor  of 
youth,  teaching  one  thing  and  practicing  another. 
But  I  would  like  to  call  the  attention  of  the  boys, 
who  are  ambitious  of  becoming  men  of  importance 
and  greatness,  to  the  facts  which  prove  that  the 
friendship  of  Tobacco  will  be  in  every  way  a  hindrance 
to  the  accomplishment  of  their  worthy  ambitions. 

18 


CHAPTER   X. 

WICKED   COMPANY — THE   QUACK   DOCTOR. 

1  ONCE  upon  a  time  over  all  the  earth  were 
peace  and  prosperity.  Men  were  strong  and  indus- 
trious, women  were  smiling  and  happy,  and  the 
laughter  of  children  echoed  through  dale  and  over 
hill ;  their  cheeks  were  plump  and  rosy,  and  their 
eyes  sparkled  with  health  and  merriment,  and  the 
happy  parents  gathered  around  their  hearths  in  sweet 
contentment.  From  palace  and  cot  arose  songs  of 
joy,  and  in  all  the  land  there  was  not  the  shadow  of 
a  crime.  The  vineyards  bore  delicious  fruits,  whose 
fragrance  filled  the  air.  These  fruits  were  food  for 
man.  With  their  acids  they  cooled  his  blood  ; 
with  their  sweets  they  filled  his  body  with  whole- 
some fatness  and  made  the  eyes  of  his  children 
bright  with  health.  Men  picked  the  fruits  and  dried 
them,  and  thus  dried  they  were  wholesome  food, 
capable  of  sustaining  life  and  maintaining  health. 

2  Abou  Ben  Hassan,  wandering  in  his  vineyard, 
found  upon  the  ground  a  bottle  from  which  came  the 
beseeching  voice  of  an  imprisoned  spirit  pleading  for 
freedom.  3"Give  me  liberty,  O  most  wise  and  potent 
prince,"  besought  the  spirit,  "  and  I  will  be  your  most 
devoted  slave.    I  have  power  both  in  earth  and  air. 

(270) 


THE  QUACK  DOCTOR.  2yi 

The  winds  of  heaven  obey  me,  and  will  fan  away  from 
you  the  evils  of  the  race.  Your  children  shall  be  born 
under  favoring  stars.  Poverty  and  sickness  and  care 
and  crime  shall  recognize  me,  and  bow  beneath  my 
yoke.  The  blight  of  fever  will  know  my  relieving 
touch,  and  the  deadly  chill  will  yield  to  my  do- 
minion.  At  your  command  I  will  return  to  my  glass 
prison,  and  will  only  leave  it  at  your  request." 

Abou  Ben  Hassan  heard  with  charmed  ears,  but 
dared  not  grant  the  favor  besought  until  he  had  con- 
sulted with  his  friends.  To  them  he  repeated  the 
promises  which  had  been  made,  and  seeing  signs  of 
leniency  in  their  faces,  the  spirit  renewed,  with  even 
greater  urgency,  his  plea  for  liberty. 

4  "  I  am  A I  Go/in/,  the  Great.  To  me  is  given  the 
power  of  bestowing  gifts  on  man.  I  have  been  im- 
prisoned by  my  deadliest  foe,  who  wills  that  I  shall 
not  make  known  my  wondrous  powers.  If  you  grant 
me  freedom,  I  will  foil  his  selfish  plans.  You  shall 
never  know  storm  nor  blight ;  you  shall  never  fear 
disease  nor  death  ;  your  glory  and  renown  shall  be 
my  chief  care ;  laughter  shall  fill  your  hearts,  and  joy 
dance  attendance  on  your  footsteps." 

These  words  were  vague  to  man,  for  as  yet  crime 
was  unknown,  and  the  faces  of  poverty  and  disease 
had  been  but  dimly  seen  ;  but  trusting  in  these  prom- 
ises, and  lured  on  by  the  hope  of  fulfilling  dearer 
aspirations  for  fame,  Abou  Ben  Hassan  and  his 
friends  opened  the  bottle  and  gave  the  desired  free- 
dom to  the  spirit,  6  who,  creeping  from  his  narrow 
prison,  grew  before  their  wondering  eyes,  rising  like 


2^2  THE  MAN   WONDERFUL. 

a  vapor  and  filling  all  the  valley,  spreading  out  over 
the  plain  like  a  dense  fog,  and  towering  above  the 
mountains  like  a  cloud. 

Some  would  have  been  frightened  that  he  grew  to 
such  a  prodigious  size,  had  not  Abou  Ben  Hassan 
said,  6 "  That  is  evidence  of  the  truth  of  what  he  has 
told  us.  Did  he  not  say  that  he  had  power?  He  will 
hide  us  from  the  eyes  of  our  enemies  ;  he  will  be  a 
shield  between  us  and  harm." 

And  men  believed  and  trusted  the  spirit  Gohul, 
and  he  became  a  constant  companion  at  their  feasts 
and  merry-makings,  7  and  they  were  never  so  joyous 
before ;  the  laughter  was  never  so  loud,  nor  the  jest 
so  mirth-provoking,  as  now  that  Gohul  added  to  their 
wit  and  brilliancy.  He  made  their  tricks  and  pranks 
so  ludicrous,  and  he  seemed  to  knit  the  hearts  of  men 
into  a  bond  of  good-fellowship  never  felt  before.  8  So 
sympathetic,  too,  was  Gohul,  that  eyes  all  unused  to 
weeping  now  shed  tears,  and  hearts  that  were  hard 
and  unfeeling  melted  beneath  his  touch.  He  thus 
became  a  friend  to  the  sorrowful ;  he  soothed  the 
grieving  hearts  of  the  mourners,  and  presided  at  the 
wailing  ceremonies  for  the  dead.  9  Men  found  that 
by  his  presence  their  intellects  were  stimulated  to 
more  brilliancy,  and  he  was  invited  to  inspire  the 
poet  and  the  priest,  to  aid  the  orator  and  the  writer 
10  He  annihilated  fear,  and  was  thus  called  a  friend  to 
the  warrior,  the  scout,  and  the  explorer.  u  He 
silenced  pain,  and  men  besought  his  presence  at  their 
bedsides  when  sick,  and  the  dying  blessed  him  for 
his   soothing   touch.      12  Physicians,  finding   him   so 


WITH    WICKED  COMPANY.  273 

powerful  an  ally,  called  upon  him  often  for  assist- 
ance, ,3  until  at  last  he  began  to  arrogate  to  himself 
the  title  of  physician,  and  said,  "  "  Did  I  not  tell  you 
that  I  would  liberate  you  from  evils?  Have  I  not 
been  true  to  my  promises  ?  See  the  glow  upon  the 
cheek  of  health.  I  give  to  wine  the  power  to  bring 
this  healthful  flush  to  the  pale  cheek  of  the  invalid. 
It  is  I  who  make  wine  a  cosmetic  worthy  of  royal 
man  who  has  descended  from  the  gods.  It  is  I  who 
make  of  wine  more  than  a  cosmetic,  who  make  it  a 
cordial,  giving  courage  to  the  heart  and  strength  to 
the  limbs.  It  is  I  who  extract  from  herbs  their  heal- 
ing virtues.  Without  me  they  would  be  of  no  avail. 
I  even  add  to  their  powers,  virtues  of  my  own  which 
are  invaluable  to  man." 

And  the  confidence  of  men  increased  in  Gohul,  and 
6  they  continued  to  grow  in  their  intimacy  with  him. 
He  was  a  guest  at  their  tables,  and  even  the  women 
and  children  were  fond  of  him.  He  presided  at 
births  and  weddings,  at  christenings  and  at  funerals. 
16  Among  men  there  was  one  who  had  never  accepted 
the  friendship  of  Gohul,  who  had  always  distrusted 
him  to  some  degree,  and  who  had  employed  his  eyes 
in  constant  watchfulness  over  the  life  and  experiences 
of  those  who  were  the  associates  of  this  spirit.  1 1  is 
name  was  Observation.  "  He  noticed  that  although 
children  did  not  like  Gohul  at  first,  they  soon  grew 
to  be  very  fond  of  him,  and  also  that  he  was  too  rude 
a  companion  to  be  the  most  desirable  friend  for  them. 
He  overpowered  their  feeble  strength,  and  made  theii 
feet  tottering  and  unsteady,  and  Observation  said  :  "  It 


2^4  THE  MAN  WONDERFUL. 

is  not  best  to  become  too  intimate  with  Gohul  in 
youth."  18  Again,  Observation  noticed  that  Gohul 
was  not  the  wisest  friend  for  delicate  women,  for 
sometimes,  under  his  influence,  they  forgot  to  blush 
at  unseemliness  of  conduct  in  others,  and  acted  un- 
womanly themselves,  and  he  called  the  attention  of 
men  to  these  facts,  and  some  said :  "  Those  actions 
which  are  right  and  becoming  in  men,  do  not  suit  the 
gentle  modesty  of  women  ;  we  prefer  that  Gohul 
should  not  be  intimate  with  our  wives  and  daugh- 
ters." 

18  He  also  noticed  that  there  were  men  who  could 
not  associate  constantly  with  Gohul  because  of  their 
weakness ;  but  these  were  laughed  at  as  unfit  to 
mingle  in  the  strife  for  existence  with  the  strong  and 
manly,  to  whom  Gohul  seemed  ever  an  indispensable 
assistant. 

20  Observation  reported  that  Gohul  was  an  enemy 
and  not  a  friend  ;  that  diseases  were  on  the  increase, 
instead  of  being  lessened  ;  that  because  of  him  crime 
had  sway  in  this  once  peaceful  land  ;  that  he  had  put 
tears  in  the  eyes  of  women,  and  murder  into  the 
hearts  of  men. 

91  These  reports  threw  Gohul  into  a  rage.  "  What 
w  does  Observation  know?"  cried  he.  "  He  has  held 
himself  aloof  from  my  company.  He  is  envious  of 
my  success.  He  is  trying  to  take  from  you  all  that  is 
dearest  and  most  prized.  I  will  not  sit  quietly  by  and 
see  you  so  deceived,  nor  will  I  submit  in  silence  to  be 
so  maligned.  There  are  many  among  you  who  have 
experienced  my  healing  touch,  who  have  been  soothed 


MA yORI :  V  R /■: FOR  T.  275 

by  my  sympathy,  inspired  by  my  presence.  n  I  de. 
mand  an  investigation.  Call  together  the  men  who 
know  me,  and  let  them  testify  whether  I  am  an  en- 
emy." This  proposal  seemed  but  just,  and  it  was 
decided  that  Gohul  should  not  be  condemned  un- 
heard. 24  Gohul  demanded  that  a  committee  of  in- 
vestigation should  be  appointed  from  those  who  knew 
him  personally.  But  Observation  said  :  "  That  will 
not  be  just.  a5  These  are  all  prejudiced.  We  should 
have  in  this  committee  those  who  are  unbiased." 

But  Gohul  would  not  consent  to  this,  and  it  "  was 
at  last  agreed  that  all  the  committee  should  be  se- 
lected from  the  acquaintances  of  Gohul,  with  the  ex- 
ception of  one,  whom  Observation  might  select. 

"  The  committee  consisted  of  the  wise  men,  teach- 
ers, and  physicians,  and  the  one  whom  Observation 
had  selected,  Madame  Science.  '28  Much  time  was 
spent  in  examining  the  various  witnesses. 

This  committee  like  other  learned  committees  could 
not  agree,  and  "a  majority  report  was  first  sub- 
mitted. 

MAJORITY    REPORT. 

"  Your  committee  have  the  honor  of  reporting  that 
Gohul  is  personally  known  to  them,  that  he  has  long 
resided  among  us,  and  has  been  well  and  favorably 
known.  He  has  been  the  trusted  and  esteemed  friend 
and  adviser  of  our  best  and  wisest  men.  Our  honored 
judges  have  admitted  him  to  their  inmost  counsels; 
our  ministers  have  been  inspired  by  his  spirituality  ; 
our  legislators  have  welcomed   him    at   their  delibera- 


2y6  THE  MAN  WONDERFUL. 

tive  assemblies ;  the  executive  branch  of  our  govern, 
ment  has  received  from  him  efficient  aid ;  he  has 
enlivened  the  feasts  of  royalty,  and  his  brilliancy  is 
manifested  in  the  lucubrations  of  the  poet.  He  has 
not  disdained  the  poor  and  lowly  ;  he  has  been  a  uni- 
versal comforter  in  sorrow  ;  he  has  alleviated  the  suf- 
ferings of  the  sick;  he  warms  the  freezing;  he  cools 
the  burning  brow  of  fever  ;  he  stimulates  the  heart ; 
gives  strength  to  the  feeble,  and  supports  in  the  ab- 
sence of  food.  He  is  especially  valuable  to  the  phy- 
sician, and  we  find  that  he  has  been  to  man  all  that 
he  has  claimed  to  be.* 

Respectfully  submitted, 

Drs.  Hand  and  Gulp,  et  al. 


*  Dr.  Cartwright,  of  New  Orleans,  writes  in  the  Boston  Med- 
ical Journal  concerning  the  effect  of  tippling  upon  the  medical 
profession.  Some  thirty  years  before  the  time  of  his  writing  he 
went  to  Natchez,  Tenn.  Within  a  radius  of  fifteen  miles  he 
found  only  seventeen  temperate  doctors.  A  much  larger  number 
were  tipplers.  In  1823  the  average  age  of  the  temperance  doc- 
tors was  thirty-four  years,  and  the  five  that  died,  each  lived  to  be 
from  sixty  to  seventy-five  years  of  age.  Two  only  of  the  tipplers 
li/ed  to  be.  gray,  and  they  were  partly  temperate.  All  are  long 
since  dead,  and  their  average  of  life  was  less  than  thirty-five 
years.  Those  who  took  their  drinks  upon  an  empty  stomach  did 
not  reach  thirty  years  of  age.  They  generally  died  before  they 
had  been  practicing  ten  years.  Sixty-two  physicians  settled  in 
Natchez  between  1824  and  1835,  and  of  these,  thirty-seven  were 
temperate,  and  twenty-five  were  tipplers.  Of  the  former,  twenty- 
eight  are  living;  and  of  the  tipplers  all  are  dead  except  three, 
and  they  have  moved  away.  Thus  we  see  that  those  members  of 
the  medical  profession  who  sing  the  praises  of  alcohol,  and  whc 


MINORIT  Y  REPOR  T.  2JJ 

"  MINORITY   REPORT. 
By  Madame  Science. 

*"  Truth  compels  me  to  dissent  from  the  majority 
report.      33  I    have    employed    my  faithful   assistant, 
Chemistry,  in  making  this  investigation,  and  34  I  find 
that  the  accused,  who  is  known  to  you  as  Gohul,  is 
one  whom  I  have  long  known  as  Alcohol.    ,5  He  is  the 
offspring  of  decomposition.     36  When  any  fruits  are 
crushed  together  in   a  mass,  exposed  to  warmth  and 
air,  that  form  of  decomposition  takes  place  which  is 
known  as  fermentation.     In  other  words,  it  is  a  pro- 
cess of  rotting.     "  When  the  fluid  is  separated  from 
this    mass,    fermentation    continues    until,    as    it    is 
claimed,  it  has  cleansed  itself,  and  a  clear  liquid  re- 
sults.    This  is  known  as  wine,  and  is  made  chiefly  of 
water  and  alcohol.     39  The  different  varieties  of  wines 
are  made  from  different  kinds  of  fruits.     The  flavors 
differ  according  to  the  kinds  of  fruit  used,  or  to  the 
different  substances  used  for  flavoring. 

"To  increase  the  strength  of  the  wine,  sugar  is 
added  before  fermentation.  Where  the  sugar  is  all 
used  up  before  fermentation  ceases,  the  wine  is  sour, 


practice  as  they  teach,  suffer  the  same  penalty  as  the  most  igno- 
rant man  who  indulges  in  poisonous  drinks. 

Did  the  doctors  live  in  vain  ?  They  taught  what  was  not 
true,  and  for  practicing  as  they  taught  they  paid  the  penalty  of 
death.  They  assisted  Science  to  demonstrate  that  Alcohol,  under 
all  forms,  is  a  poison,  and  that  it  murders  its  own  friends.  But 
is  such  aid  to  Science  a  sufficient  evidence  that  an  educated  man 
has  not  lived  in  vain  ? 


2yS  THE  MAN  WONDERFUL. 

and  is  called  a  "  dry  wine."  Where  it  is  not  all  used 
up  the  wine  is  sweet,  and  is  known  as  "  fruity." 

40  Wine  is  injurious  according  to  the  amount  of  al- 
cohol which  it  contains, 41  and  even  home-made  wines 
have  a  certain  percentage  of  alcohol.  I  find  that  Al- 
cohol is  not  the  friend  to  man  that  he  has  claimed  tc 
be.     "  He  has  deceived  mankind  by  sophistries. 

43  He  has  not  been  a  true  friend  to  the  sick  and 
afflicted,  but  has,  in  fact,  deceived  the  physicians  them- 
selves, causing  the  diseases  which  he  has  pretended  to 
cure.  44  He  is  a  quack  doctor  and  leads  to  quackery. 
The  statements  of  those  who  are  influenced  by  Alco- 
hol ought  never  to  be  received  as  testimony  upon  this 

subject. 

Respectfully  submitted, 

Madame  Science. 

45  When  this  report  was  received  Al  Gohul  laughed 
and  boasted  of  his  vindication.  "  Did  not  the  majority 
report  in  my  favor?  46  Who  is  this  insignificant,  un- 
known, unfeeling,  and  cruel  Madame  Science  ?  She  is 
never  met  in  legislative  halls,  the  best  and  wisest  are 
scarcely  upon  speaking  terms  with  her.  She  is  sel- 
dom admitted  to  the  best  society.  She  is  not  witty, 
nor  brilliant.  47  She  is  a  plain,  plodding  person,  who 
in  truth  is  indebted  to  me  for  valuable  aid,  which  she 
is  not  honorable  enough  to  acknowledge." 

48  And  men  joined  with  Gohul  in  the  laugh  against 
Madame  Science,  and  her  report  was  laid  aside  and  by 
his  friends  forgotten. 


CHAPTER  XI. 

WICKED   COMPANY — THE   SHYSTER. 

1  Over  the  rolling  prairies,  and  up  the  sunny  hill- 
sides climbed  the  golden  grain,  smiling  in  the  light 
of  day,  and  waving  in  the  rollicking  wind.  The  corn 
was  whispering  of  merry-makings,  and  of  food  for 
hungry  men  and  cattle  ;  the  wheat  was  dreaming  of 
bread  in  abundance  for  all ;  the  rye  was  boasting  of 
its  wealth  of  strength  for  babes  and  mothers;  the 
sugar-cane  smiled  as  it  thought  of  the  sweets  to  be 
taken  from  its  stem  for  the  delight  of  young  and  old  ; 
and  the  potato  called  from  his  underground  bed  that 
he,  too,  had  food  for  all.  2  Gohul  looked  abroad,  and 
beholding  so  much  of  good,  whispered  to  himself: 
"  Would  that  I  could  turn  this  store  of  health  into  a 
source  of  disease  and  misery." 

3  Then  he  crept  into  the  hearts  of  men,  and  mur- 
mured pleasing  tales  of  how  wisdom,  and  strength, 
and  long  life,  and  joy  could  be  forced  from  the 
wholesome  grains,  and  they  be  made  more  truly  the 
servants  of  man,  to  minister  to  his  delight  and  wishes. 
4  And  men  listened  and  believed,  and  took  the  ripe 
and  health-giving  grains,  and  extracted  the  juices, 
and  subjected  them  to  fermentation,  and  said  :  5  "  Now 
we  have  liquid  bread  that  will  keep  for  years.  It 
will  give  us  health  and  strength  ;  it  will  soothe  our 

(279) 


28o  THE  MAN  WONDERFUL. 

pains ;  it  will  cheer  us  when  sad,  it  will  rest  us  when 
weary  ;  and  we  can  give  it  to  our  children  without 
harm."  8And  the  wicked  spirit  laughed  at  the  evil 
he  was  about  to  do,  but  he  kept  out  of  sight  of  men. 
Disguising  himself,  and  appearing  under  7  a  new  name 
of  Beer,  8  he  denied  that  he  had  any  acquaintance 
with  Gohul,  or  Alcohol,  adopting  the  name  given  by 
Madame  Science.  9  He  even  admitted  that  Alcohol 
was  injurious  under  some  circumstances,  but  he  had 
none  of  the  evil  effects  of  that  spirit.  He  never 
brought  men  to  lie  in  the  gutter,  but  instead  he 
nourished  the  young  and  the  old,  he  nerved  the  arm 
of  toil,  he  gave  food  to  the  hungry,  and  joy  to  all. 
10  He  was  no  longer  a  fine  aristocrat,  with  a  sparkling 
eye,  and  a  lively  mien.  He  was  a  jolly,  red-faced 
fellow,  with  a  big,  corpulent  body  and  swaggering 
air.  His  face  was  streaked  with  red  lines,  his  eyes 
were  dull  and  sleepy-looking,  and  his  step  was  heavy 
and  slow.  u  Sometimes  he  sat  for  hours  doing  noth- 
ing, thinking  of  nothing.  He  ate  enormously,  and 
12  loved  the  society  of  a  certain  blackamoor  named 
Tobacco.  13  And  he  said  to  men  :  "  See  how  fat  and 
jolly  I  am.  See  how  little  care  I  have.  If  you  are 
my  friends  I  will  make  you  like  myself.  If  you  do 
not  sleep  well,  I  will  give  you  sleep ;  if  you  have  pain, 
I  will  silence  it ;  if  you  eat  more  than  the  cooks  can 
manage,  I  can  force  them  to  do  more  work  ;  or  if 
they  can  not  dispose  of  the  surplus,  I  can  whip  up 
the  kidneys  to  get  rid  of  it.  And  not  only  that,  if 
you  have  poverty,  I  can  make  you  forget  it ;  if  you 
are  hungry,  I  will  be  food  for  you  ;  if  you  are  sick,  I 


BEER  SAID,   "/  CUkE  DRUNKENNESS?        28 1 

will  cure  you.  I  can  make  you  happy,  without  a 
cent  in  your  pocket,  and  with  your  family  starving 
around  you  and  crying  for  bread.  I  am  an  honest, 
sympathetic  companion,  who  cares  not  that  you 
should  be  rich  or  fine.  I  will  come  with  you  to  the 
humblest  or  lowest  places,  and  will  bless  the  beggar 
as  readily  as  the  prince." 

14  And  for  many  years  men  believed  these  promises 
of  Beer,  and  made  him  a  household  friend  and  com- 
panion. In  the  field  and  shop  he  was  welcomed  as  a 
helpful  friend.  Mothers  sought  his  aid,  and  gave  their 
sanction  to  his  association  with  their  children.  16  Wise 
men,  who  grieved  over  the  evil  wrought  by  alcohol 
in  wine,  now  said  :  "  Beer  is  good.  Let  us  invite 
him  to  sit  at  our  tables  and  be  our  daily  companion. 
He  will  cure  the  evils  wine  has  wrought." 

For  men  had  at  last  learned  that  :e  wine  caused  a 
strange  disease  that  made  them  weak,  and  stagger 
when  they  walked,  that  made  them  fall  into  the  fire 
and  the  water,  and  awakened  many  evil  passions, 
such  as  anger,  and  hatred,  and  murder.  "  And  they 
believed  that  Beer  had  no  such  evil  influence.  They 
said  :  ,8  "  Beer  is  a  cure  for  drunkenness."  And  Beer 
laughed  jollily,  and  said :  "  Yes,  yes,  I  cure  drunken- 
ness." 19  But  Observation  noticed  that  drunkenness 
did  not  diminish,  and  all  over  the  land  were  women 
with  breaking  hearts,  and  children  suffering  with 
cold,  and  hunger,  and  neglect.  20  And  again  he  called 
the  attention  of  men  to  these  facts,  and  they  "'  said  : 
"How  is  this?  we  use  only  beer,  and  yet  men  are 
dying    with     this   disease.     Where    is    the   dreadful 


282  THE  MAN  WONDERFUL. 

cause  ?  "  The  people  hearing  these  reports,  and  see- 
ing these  deaths,  and  knowing  that  drunkenness,  dis- 
ease, and  crime  were  increasing,  *2  called  for  an  in- 
vestigation, and  a  committee  was  appointed  to  search 
out  the  hidden  cause. 

3  This  committee,  made  up  of  wise  men,  and  phy- 
sicians, and  Madame  Science,  came  together,  and  ex- 
amined witnesses,  and  rendered  their  reports.  24  This 
committee  was  evenly  divided. 

25  REPORT  IN  FAVOR  OF  BEER. 

Your  committee  was  evenly  divided,  and  we  there- 
fore have  the  honor  to  report,  that  after  having  ex- 
amined numerous  witnesses  we  find  that  86  beer  is 
used  by  all  classes  of  men,  and  especially  by  the 
workmen,  who  are  unanimous  in  the  belief  that  it 
is  a  food.  The  testimony  of  all  who  use  it  is  that, 
when  taken  with  their  meals,  it  increases  their  appe- 
tites, and  aids  their  digestion,  and  at  the  same  time 
enables  them  to  live  on  a  less  amount  of  food.  It 
also  soothes  pain,  and  makes  them  forget  their  sor- 
rows. It  is  prescribed  by  the  oldest  medical  practi- 
tioners in  all  cases  of  debility.  The  small  amount  of 
alcohol  that  is  found  in  beer  is  not  prejudicial,  but  in 
fact  is  beneficial,  being  consumed  in  the  body,  and 
therefore  is  indirectly  a  food.  There  is  therefore  no 
reason   for  the  fanatical   outcry   against    the    use  of 

Beer. 

Respectfully  submitted, 

87  Dr.  Wiseacre, 

Professor  SWELLHEAD, 

Rev.  Esau  Timeserver,  et  al. 


REPORT  AGAINST  BEER.  283 

M  REPORT   AGAINST   BEER. 

This  branch  of  your  committee  have  the  honor  to 
report  that,  after  examining  many  witnesses,  we  find 
the  following  facts  :  "  That  the  people  have  been  de- 
ceived, for  alcohol  is  truly  to  be  found  in  beer  in  all 
of  its  forms.  In  ale,  and  porter,  and  stout,  it  is  from 
eight  to  fifteen  per  cent.,  while  in  beer  it  varies  from 
three  to  ten  per  cent.  Like  wine,  these  fluids  are  in- 
jurious in  just  the  proportion  in  which  alcohol  is 
found  in  them. 

3"  We  have  called  in  Chemistry, 31  who  has  explained 
to  us  the  process  of  making  beer.  "The  wholesome, 
healthful  grain  is  soaked  in  water  until  it  sprouts ; 
this  turns  the  starch  to  sugar.  When  it  has  sprouted 
sufficiently  34  it  is  dried  so  rapidly  as  to  kill  the 
germ.  ib  It  is  then  ground,  and  warm  water  and  a  bitter 
herb  are  added.  3b  It  is  then  boiled,  yeast  is  added,  and 
the  whole  mass  is  allowed  to  rot.  3;  This  is  the  same 
process  of  decomposition  known  as  fermentation. 
38  Sugar  is  changed  to  alcohol,  and  carbonic  acid  gas  is 
formed,  and  rising  to  the  top  makes  a  froth,  so  that 
when  the  cork  is  taken  out  of  the  bottle  it  appears  to 
boil  out.  39The  hop  is  added  to  keep  it  from  spoil- 
ing, and  its  bitter  is  a  stimulant  to  the  appetite. 
*°  During  the  process  of  fermentation  the  beer  is  put 
into  barrels,  or  bottled.  41  Stout,  ale,  and  porter  are 
similar  to  beer,  except  that  they  contain  a  larger  per- 
centage of  alcohol.  42  The  evils  of  these  drinks  are 
often  increased  by  adulterations.  °  Chemistry  finds 
in  beer  some  of  the  deadliest  poisons, — arsenic,  strych- 


284 


THE  MAN  WONDERFUL, 


nine,  ignatia  amara,  tobacco,  nux  vomica,  opium,  and 
especially  cocculus  indicus.*  44  This  last-named  drug 
claims  attention  on  account  of  its  general  use.  If 
can  produce  death,  and  when  not  taken  in  fatal  doses 
still  gives  rise  to  serious  symptoms, — such  as  un- 
pleasant taste  after  drinking,  burning  in  the  throat 
and  stomach,  weakness  and  partial  paralysis  of  the 
lower  extremities,  nausea  and  frequent  vomiting, 
stupor,  and  sometimes  convulsions. 

46  Beer  is  often  poisoned  by  passing  through  brass 
faucets,  verdigris  being  formed  by  the  action  of  the 
acid  upon  the  metal. 

46 "  The  effects  of  beer  upon  the  habitual  beer-con- 
sumer is  known  by  his  obesity,  his  flushed  face,  em- 
barrassed breathing,  puffy  hands,  and  yellow  con- 
junctiva. 4T  He  is  usually  short-lived,  and  the  end  is 
reached  by  hepatic  and  cardiac  disorders.  The  use  of 
malt  liquors  sets  up  fatty  degeneration  of  various  tis- 
sues, notably  of  the  liver  and  heart." 

8  Through  the  action  of  alcohol,  the  nerves  which 
govern  the  size  of  the  capillaries  are  paralyzed,  and 
they  become  distended  with  blood.  49  The  immense 
quantities  of  beer  required  by  the  constant  thirst  of 
the  beer-drinker  fills  the  system  with  fluid,  and  the 
veins  are  full  to  repletion.  50  These  two  facts,  the 
distension  of  capillaries  and  the  watery  state  of  the 


*  Two  men  in  Ithaca,  N.  Y.,  in  the  spring  of  1884,  died  sud- 
denly after  drinking  a  glass  of  beer,  put  up  by  the  Ithaca  Beer 
Company.  The  second  one  died  while  the  post-mortem  was 
being  made  upon  the  first.  The  symptoms  in  both  cases  were 
those  produced  by  cocculus  indicus. 


STOMACH  DISTENDED  ENORMOUSLY.  28 c 

blood,  unite  to  make  the  face  full  and  red,  a  color 
that,  in  this  instance,  is  not  one  of  health.  '  The 
same  conditions  are  the  cause  of  the  "swell  fronts" 
with  which  the  House  (no  longer  beautiful)  becomes 
deformed.  The  stomach  is  distended  enormously,  and 
the  liver  is  increased  in  size  almost  beyond  belief. 
02  A  liver  ordinarily  weighs  about  four  pounds,  "but 
the  liver  of  a  beer-drinker  has  been  known  to  reach 
the  incredible  size  of  fifty  pounds. 

M  People  often  tell  you  of  the  wonderful  health  and 
strength  of  the  beer-drinking  nations,  and  point  to 
their  ruddy  faces  and  corpulent  bodies  as  an  evidence 
of  this.  But  we  can  now  understand  why  their  faces 
are  ruddy  and  their  bodies  rotund  ;  and  when  we  in- 
vestigate we  find  that  they  are  not  as  strong  as  their 
looks  would  lead  one  to  believe.  They  have  not 
grown  in  muscle,  "they  have  only  stretched  the  body 
so  that  it  will  carry  the  refuse  that  the  servants  have 
not  been  able  to  get  rid  of.  57  The  truth  of  the  state- 
ment that  this  is  waste  matter,  and  not  muscle,  is 
proven  by  the  fact  that  men  who  in  youth  were 
strong,  nave,  as  they  increased  in  size  under  the  use 
of  beer,  lost  their  strength. 

68  Physicians,  both  in  Europe  and  America,  unite  in 
the  declaration  that  beer,  even  in  moderate  quanti- 
ties, taken  steadily,  is  injurious  to  the  health.  b0  They 
dread  to  perform  a  surgical  operation  on  a  beer- 
drinker,  for  they  know  they  can  not  calculate  on  his 
ability  to  stand  the  shock.  60  If  he  were  an  abstainer 
they  could  estimate  very  closely  his  chances  for  re- 
covery, but  if  he  is  even  a  moderate  drinker  his  sys- 

19 


2g6  THE  MAN  WONDERFUL. 

tern  may  not  be  able  to  endure  a  very  slight  injury 
in  addition  to  that  which  it  has  suffered  from  beer. 
61  The  unqualified  testimony  is  that  beer  injures  the 
digestion,  produces  dyspepsia,  rheumatism,  and  gout. 
,a  One  English  doctor  says  he  has  often  been  able  to 
cure  rheumatism  and  gout,  simply  by  inducing  his 
patients  to  entirely  abstain  from  their  usual  daily 
draughts  of  beer;  63and  of  1,540  cases  of  gout  only 
one  was  an  abstainer,  64  and  his  ancestors  were  beer 
and  wine  drinkers. 

66 "  Beer  is  not  food.  Four  hogsheads  of  beer  are 
not  equal  in  nourishment  to  one  loaf  of  bread."  6*The 
beer-drinker  is  not  soothed,  but  paralyzed  ;  he  is  not 
fed,  but  poisoned  ;  he  is  not  cured  of  his  maladies, 
but  he  is  made  diseased  in  every  part,  and  "  wears  his 
heart  on  his  sleeve  bare  to  a  death-wound,  even  from 
a  rusty  nail  or  the  claw  of  a  cat." 

Respectfully  submitted, 

Prof.  LlEBlG,  Chemist, 
Dr.  Bartholow, 
John  Bell,  et  aL 


CHAPTER   XII. 

WICKED   COMPANY — THE   THIEF. 

1  Sometimes  Gohul  was  so  strong  that  he  no  longer 
remained  in  his  glass  home,  but  burst  its  walls.  a  Seeing 
this,  men  exclaimed,  in  wonder  and  admiration,  "  Be- 
hold how  strong  is  Gohul.  If  now  we  could  add  this 
strength  to  our  own,  there  is  nothing  that  we  might 
not  do,"  s  and  from  this  desire  arose  an  effort  to  sepa- 
rate him  from  everything  that  might  be  a  hindrance 
to  his  manifestation  of  strength.  This  was  done,  and 
he  appeared  4  in  a  new  guise,  and  was  known  as  aqua 
vitce,  the  "water  of  life." 

6  It  was  believed  that  in  this  form  Gohul  was 
a  spirit  sent  from  heaven  to  be  the  friend  of  man,  and 
that  to  him  was  given  power  to  cure  all  the  ills  of  life, 
and  even  to  preserve  from  death.  6  Not  every  one 
thus  believed.  There  were  those  who  thought  him 
to  be  an  evil  spirit,  but  7  his  friends  were  still  many 
and  influential,  and  they  were  fierce  in  their  partisan- 
ship, *  and  some  of  them  devoted  themselves  to  in- 
troducing him  among  the  people  '  abandoning  all 
other  business  for  that  purpose.  They  formed  them- 
selves into  large  companies  for  the  manufacturing  of 
beer,  ale,  porter,  and  stout,  and  all  varieties  of  wines, 
and   especially   for  the   manufacture   of   this   newest 

(287) 


L38  THE  MAN   WONDERFUL. 

disguise  of  Gohul,  the  heaven-sent  aqua  vitcz.  9  Thesv. 
organizations  of  the  friends  of  Gohul  gave  to  the 
leaders  wealth,  and  positions  of  trust,  and  honor, 
10  and  through  his  influence  some  of  them  became 
members  of  legislative  bodies,  and  claimed  to  be  pub- 
lic benefactors. 

11  Gohul  was  now  happy.  12  He  had  obtained  a  foot- 
hold in  the  palace,  the  home,  and  the  church  ;  and  in 
silence  and  darkness  had  done  many  deeds  of  mischief 
which  the  majority  had  failed  to  trace  to  him.  ,3  He 
had  stolen  strength  from  the  strong,  and  increased  the 
weakness  of  the  weak.  M  He  had  dimmed  the  spark- 
ling eye,  enfeebled  the  strong  right  arm,  15  and  stolen 
the  cunning  from  the  skilful  fingers.  He  had  deep- 
ened the  rosy  bloom  of  the  cheek  to  a  dusky  purple, 
and  1B  had  added  a  flaming  torch  to  the  tip  of  the 
nose.  17  He  had  stiffened  the  supple  joints,  until 
they  groaned  with  the  pain  of  being  moved.  18  He 
had  dulled  the  brilliant  mind  and  made  the  wuty 
tongue  to  stammer  ;  ,9  he  had  spoiled  the  amiable  tem- 
per, and  despoiled  the  generous  heart;  ao  stolen  the 
noble  ambition  of  the  young,  foiled  the  undertakings 
of  the  middle-aged,  and  "  brought  disease  and  prema- 
ture death  upon  men. 

22  But  there  were  still  many  who  were  infatuated 
with  him,  who,  having  once  come  under  the  spell  of 
his  influence,  were  no  longer  able  to  exercise  an  un- 
prejudiced judgment  in  regard  to  him.  2:t  By  usurp- 
ing control  over  the  judgments  of  men,  Gohul  did 
them  the  greatest  harm.  24  They  became  his  blind, 
unreasoning  followers,  and  this  was  the  source  of  his 


SHUN    THE    THIEF.  2S9 

greatest  power.  lb  They  called  him  king,  and  bowed 
down  before  him,  and  paid  him  homage,  saying,  "  He 
is  a  spirit,  we  will  have  him  to  rule  over  us." 

"  Observation,  who  had  ever  kept  a  watchful  eye 
upon  those  who  associated  intimately  with  this  spirit, 
now  asserted:  ""Gohul  is  a  thief  and  a  robber;  he 
5"  steals  from  men  their  health  and  strength  ;  he  steals 
from  your  children  their  food,  and  the  covering  off 
their  poor  emaciated  bodies  ;  he  steals  the  happiness 
from  your  homes,  the  hope  from  the  hearts  of  your 
wives,  and  his  partisans  have  banded  themselves  to- 
gether to  steal  your  hard-earned  gold.  He  steals 
your  sense  of  right,  and  justice,  and  honor;  he  robs 
you  of  your  sense  of  shame,  of  your  courage,  your 
manliness,  and  your  paternal  affection." 

8a  These  assertions  were  stoutly  denied  by  Gohul's  ad- 
vocates. They  30  said,  "  It  is  only  because  men  are  weak 
that  they  do  these  things  ;  a  strong  man  will  never 
be  led  astray."  And  they  cried,  "  Look  at  me,  I  have 
associated  with  Gohul  daily  for  many  years,  and  I  am 
strong,  and  well,  and  honest." 

31  But  very  many  people  agreed  with  Observation, 
and  a  great  disturbance  arose,  3i  the  opponents  of 
Gohul  contending  that  he  should  be  banished  from 
the  country,  while  his  33  friends  maintained  that  he 
was  a  law-abiding  citizen,  and  contributed  large  sums 
of  money  to  the  support  of  the  Government,  and  that 
his  rights  should  be  respected. 

84  And  the  people  clamored  for  permission  to  vote 
upon  the  question  of  Gohul's  being  allowed  to  remain 
and  have  rights  as  a  citizen.     36  But  the  friends  and 


2qo  THE  MAM  WONDERFUL, 

partisans  of  Gohul  defeated  their  wishes.  38  Then  the 
people  cried  with  a  voice  that  was  heard  throughout 
the  land,  "  Vox  POPULI,  Vox  Dei  ":  "The  VOICE 
of  the  People  is  the  Voice  of  God."  "  Are  not 
we  the  people  ?  "  Is  not  the  Government  formed  of  the 
people,  by  the  people,  and  for  the  people  ?  Who  then 
is  this  Gohul  who  robs  the  people  of  their  rights? 
Listen  to  what  we  have  been  taught  by  Medicine, 
Chemistry,  and  Science." 

Chemistry  tells  us,  38"This  aqua  vitcs  is  not  the 
water  of  life ;  it  is  aqua  mortis,  the  water  of  death  ; 
it  is  obtained  by  fermentation  followed  by  dis- 
tillation." We  all  know  that  fermentation  is  a  rotting 
process,  39  and  distillation,  which  is  called  a  refining 
process,  does  not  change  the  properties,  but  increases 
the  strength  and  injuriousness  of  alcohol. 

From  40the  fermented  products  of  rye,  corn,  and 
potatoes,  whisky  is  distilled ;  from  4I  molasses,  rum  ; 
from  the  distillation  of  "wines,  brandies  are  made. 
Chemistry  43  shows  us  that  these  are  all  largely  adul- 
terated with  poisons,  and  also  proves  that  liquors 
having  the  same  flavors  can  be  made  wholly  from 
drugs. 

44  Science  echoes  strongly  the  cry  of  Observation 
that  Alcohol  is  a  thief.  45  He  begins  his  theft  as  soon 
as  he  is  introduced  into  the  system,  biting  the  tongue, 
and  stealing  from  the  mucous  membrane  of  the  mouth 
its  moisture,  leaving  it  dry  and  corrugated.  4B  He 
sets  up  a  cry  for  water,  a  cry  which  he  keeps  up  wher- 
ever he  goes.  Down  the  oesophagus  into  the  stomach 
he  goes  crying  "  give  me  water,"  and  47  taking  it  from 


THE   THIEF  IN  THE  BLOOD.  2Q1 

all  the  tissues  as  he  passes  along.  He  steals  it  from 
the  mucous  membrane  of  the  stomach,  48  producing 
an  inflamed  condition  known  as  gastric  catarrh 
ulcerous  patches,  and  finally  a  discharge  of  morbid 
matter  tinged  with  blood.  49  Leaving  the  stomach, 
alcohol  passes  directly  into  the  blood  and  is  carried 
at  once  to  the  liver.  60  He  is  at  once  recognized  as 
an  enemy,  and  an  effort  is  made  to  get  rid  of  him. 
§1  This  effort  makes  the  liver  at  first  grow  larger,  but 
at  length,  weakened  by  its  long-continued  labors,  M  it 
gets  smaller  and  harder  and  has  little  knots  on  the 
surface,  which  constitute  a  disease  known  as  cirrhosis 
or  hob-nailed  liver. 

"  Albumen  is  a  necessary  constituent  of  all  of  the 
tissues,  but  to  be  of  use  it  must  be  in  a  soluble  con 
dition.  "  Alcohol  hardens  the  albumen  wherever 
they  come  in  contact,  and  then  it  is  spoiled  for  the 
purposes  of  nutrition.  The  albumen  of  the  blood  is 
hardened  so  that  it  can  not  pass  through  the  walls  ol 
the  blood-vessels  to  nourish  the  body.  "Alcohol 
takes  the  water  from  the  red  corpuscles  and  leaves 
them  shrivelled  and  hard,  and  with  less  capacity  to 
take  up  the  needed  oxygen,  sometimes  making  them 
cling  together  so  that  they  can  not  get  through  the 
narrow  halls  of  the  capillaries.  58  Through  the  blood 
alcohol  is  carried  to  the  kidneys,  and  they,  too,  make 
an  effort  to  get  rid  of  him,  and  they  undergo  fatty 
degeneration,  the  membranes  of  the  kidneys  lose 
their  integrity,  and  that  dreadful  disorder,  Bright's 
disease,  is  the  result. 

"  Alcohol    is   an   especial   foe  to  the   heart.     "  In 


2Q2  THE  MAN  WONDERFUL. 

ordinary  health  the  heart  of  an  adult  beats  about 
100,000  times  in  twenty-foui  hours,  6B  each  stroke 
raising  nearly  six  ounces  of  blood,  making  60  600,000 
ounces  of  blood  in  a  day.  It  does  this  year  after  year 
during  the  whole  of  life.  61  It  is  stated  that  the  daily 
work  of  the  heart  is  equal  to  one-third  of  that  done 
by  all  the  muscles,  6a  and  that  if  its  energy  were  ex- 
pended in  raising  its  own  weight  straight  up  in  the 
air  it  would  be  raised  to  a  distance  of  20,000  feet. 

63  Alcohol  causes  the  heart  to  work  faster.  6i  If  a 
man  drink  but  one  fluid  ounce  of  alcohol  a  day,  his 
heart  will  beat  430  times  more  than  it  would  without 
alcohol.  05  Eight  ounces  will  make  it  beat  about 
25,000  times  more  than  normal;  that  is,  instead  of 
beating  100,000  times  in  twenty-four  hours,  it  will 
beat  125,000  times.  6C  It  is  often  said  that  two  ounces 
of  alcohol  can  be  taken  in  a  day  without  harm. 
t?  This  is  about  what  would  be  taken  in  a  pint  and  a 
half  of  ale,  or  five  glasses  of  sherry  wine  ;  but  these 
two  ounces  of  alcohol,  evenly  distributed  throughout 
the  day,  will  raise  the  number  of  beats  of  the  heart 
by  6,000. 

68  This  hurry  of  the  heart  is  to  send  out  of  the  sys 
tern  that  which  it  recognizes  to  be  a  poison.  But 
that  is  not  the  only  reason  of  its  haste.  69  The  heart, 
at  every  beat,  sends  the  blood  through  the  arteries 
until  it  reaches  the  capillaries,  where  it  receives  a 
check.  70  It  can  not  run  so  fast  through  these  tiny 
passageways.  The  walls  of  the  capillaries  are  firm 
and  resist  undue  pressure  of  the  blood,  and  it  is 
therefore   compelled  to   go  slow.     71  This  tonic  state 


BANDED   THEMSELVES  TOGETHER.  29*- 

of  the  capillaries  is  overcome  by  the  paralyzing  effect 
of  alcohol  upon  the  nerves,  and  the  blood  rushes 
through  the  capillaries  with  increased  speed,  n  and 
the  heart,  feeling  that  resistance  is  removed,  has  no 
longer  a  guide  to  govern  it  and  keep  it  beating  regu- 
larly, and  so,  under  the  irritation  it  feels  at  the  pres- 
ence of  alcohol,  and  the  absence  of  the  resistance  of 
the  capillaries,  it  runs  faster  and  faster  until  the  enemy 
has  been  driven  out,  and  then  it  sinks  down  worn 
out  and  enfeebled. 

73  Medicine  says  that  "  many  diseases  that  were 
formerly  supposed  to  be  benefited  by  alcohol  are 
less  fatal  if  alcohol  is  not  used.  74  In  case  of  general 
debility,  and  in  convalescence  from  continued  fevers, 
milk  is  found  to  be  far  preferable  to  any  alcoholic 
preparation.  75  Physicians  acknowledge  that  drunk- 
enness has  often  been  caused  by  following  the  pre- 
scriptions which  contained  alcohol."  78  And  the 
women,  who  had  been  the  greatest  sufferers  through 
the  evils  of  alcohol,  believed  the  statements  of  Sci- 
ence, Chemistry,  and  Medicine,  "and  banded  them- 
selves together  to  fight  this  arch  deceiver,  and  prayed 
mightily  to  the  Great  Father  of  all,  that  they  might 
be  enabled  to  wrest  the  sceptre  from  his  hand,  and 
overthrow  his  dominion  over  mankind. 

78  Then  a  great  tumult  arose  ;  the  people  were  de- 
termined to  banish  Alcohol  from  the  land,  and  to  de- 
stroy his  power;  70  and  the  rulers  seeing  this  great 
commotion  asked :  "  What  is  the  cause  of  this  dis- 
turbance?" 80And  the  people  replied:  "Teach  us 
and  our  children  what  are  the  crimes  for  which  Alco- 
hol is  responsible." 


CHAPTER   XIII. 

WICKED   COMPANY   -THE   MURDERER. 

HEARING  this  demand  of  the  people,  Gohul  threw 
off  his  mask,  and  appearing  in  his  true  character 
exclaimed : 

1  "  '  To  do  aught  good  never  will  be  our  task, 
But  ever  to  do  ill  our  sole  delight, 
As  being  the  contrary  to  His  high  will 
Whom  we  resist.     If  then  His  Providence 
Out  of  cur  evil  seek  to  bring  forth  good, 
Our  labor  must  be  to  pervert  that  end, 
And  out  of  good  still  to  find  means  of  evil.'  " 

1  These  sentiments,  so  boldly  expressed,  aroused  a 
general  feeling  of  indignation,  and  the  3  Government 
was  forced  to  appoint  a  committee,  to  which  was 
given  power  to  send  for  persons  and  papers.  4  This 
committee  consisted  of  representatives  from  the  pro- 
fessional,  moral,  and  scientific  portions  of  the  com- 
munity, and  the  legislative  and  judicial  branches  of 
the  Government. 

REPORT    OF   THE    COMMITTEE. 

Your  Committee  have  the  honor  to  report  that 
they  complied  most  carefully  with  the  instructions 
given  them,  5  and  have  examined  manufacturers  of 
alcoholic  beverages,  and  their  books  and  their  meth- 
ods of  preparing  such  beverages,  and  other  parties 
(294) 


THE  MURDERER.  295 

who  were  able  to  give  information  upon  this  all- 
important  subject.  We  have  called  on  Madame  Sci- 
ence, and  she,  after  a  long  and  careful  investigation, 
reports  as  follows  : 

REPORT   OF    MADAM    SCIENCE. 

a  "  I  find  that  whisky  contains  from  forty  to  fifty  per 
cent,  of  alcohol.  That  brandy  has  about  fifty-five 
per  cent.,  and  wine  from  five  to  twenty  per  cent. 
'  Beer  has  from  three  to  eight  per  cent.,  while  ale  and 
porter  are  much  stronger.  8  They  are  all  harmful, 
according  to  the  amount  of  alcohol  they  contain. 
*  Alcohol  is  always  a  product  of  death  and  decay. 
10  It  originates  in  the  decomposition  or  rotting  of 
vegetable  matter,  "  and  for  its  production  needs 
warmth,  sugar,  and  moisture.  ia  In  the  fermentation 
of  grains  the  starch  is  changed  to  sugar,  and  this  to 
alcohol.  13  The  legitimate  uses  of  alcohol  are  to  be 
found  in  the  mechanical  and  chemical  arts  ;  and  there 
are  those  who  assert  that  even  in  these  it  is  not  abso- 
lutely necessary.  M  It  is  always  injurious  to  man.  15  I 
find  that  man  is  the  only  animal  who  desires  any  other 
drink  than  water,  and  I  also  find  that  16  water  is  the 
only  fluid  which  quenches  thirst.  17  The  desire  for 
other  drinks  is  abnormal.  18  ALCOHOL  IS  NOT  A 
FOOD.  It  does  not  supply  salts,  albumen,  case- 
ine,  fibrin,  nor  any  of  the  substances  which  go  to 
build  up  the  body.  It  is  not  changed  in  the  body. 
It  goes  in  as  alcohol  and  is  eliminated  as  alcohol.  It 
therefore  can  not  be  a  food.  On  the  contrary,  IT  IS 
"  UNDER     ALL     CIRCUMSTANCES     A    POISON,     20  AND 


296 


THE  MAN  WONDERFUL 


A  POISON  WHOSE  EFFECTS  ARE  CUMULATIVE.  ai  If 
taken  continually,  even  in  small  doses,  it  produces 
decay  and  leads  to  paralysis,  and  tends  toward  death. 
32  It  is  all  the  more  injurious  because  it  works  so  in- 
sidiously that  its  evil  consequences  are  often  23  not 
recognized,  either  by  the  victim  or  his  friends  until 
they  are  beyond  repair. 

*'  It  saturates  every  tissue.  The  stomach,  the  spleen, 
the  kidneys,  the  spinal  cord,  the  liver,  the  lungs,  and 
the  brain  are  all  2"  engorged  with  blood  by  its  paralyz- 
ing influence  upon  the  nerves  which  govern  the  size 
and  tonicity  of  the  capillaries.  25  After  a  time  these 
changes,  at  first  temporary,  become  permanent,  and 
incurable  diseases  of  these  organs  ensue. 

20  "  Alcohol  prevents  the  red  corpuscles  taking  up 
oxygen,  and  as  a  consequence  the  lungs  are  affected. 
27  The  delicate  membranes  of  the  lungs  are  also 
hardened,  so  that  osmosis  is  interfered  with,  and 
from  this  twofold  cause,  the  28  carbonic  acid  gas  is 
retained  in  the  air-cells,  and  returned  to  the  system 
to  poison  it.  29  Every  organ  of  the  body  is  wrapped 
in  a  membrane.  The  bones  have  their  periosteum, 
the  muscles  their  perimysium,  the  intestines  are 
folded  in  a  membrane  called  the  peritoneum,  the  brain 
wrapped  in  membranes,  and  so  too  is  each  minute 
cell  and  fibrilhz  of  the  body.  30  Most  of  these  mem- 
branes are  filters  through  which  the  nourishment 
must  pass  to  reach  the  tissues.  To  work  perfectly 
they  should  be  charged  with  water.  sl  Alcohol  lays 
his  destroying  hand  upon  those  delicate  membranes 
and  abstracts  the  water,  and  they  become  thick  and 


HE  POISONS  THE   TISSUES. 


297 


hard,  so  that  the  nourishing  part  of  the  blood  can 
not  filter  through  to  reach  the  tissues;  or  they  be- 
come too  porous,  and  allow  the  precious  foods  of  the 
body  to  leak  out  and  be  cast  away;  thus  depriving 
the  system  not  only  of  health,  but,  little  by  little,  of 
life  itself.  32  The  whole  repair  and  growth  of  the 
body  depends  upon  the  integrity  of  the  membranes. 
If  they  are  too  thick,  they  become  loaded  with 
foreign  material  and  prevent  repair;  if  too  porous, 
the  33  fluids  may  accumulate  in  the  closed  cavities 
and  dropsy  be  the  result.  34  The  engorgement  of 
the  cutaneous  capillaries  gives  a  feeling  of  warmth, 
but  there  is  no  actual  increase  of  bodily  heat.  M  On 
the  contrary,  the  heat  radiating  from  the  surface  cre- 
ates a  cooler  condition  of  the  internal  organs.  6  This 
is  demonstrated  by  the  thermometer,  which  shows 
that  in  the  various  stages  of  intoxication  there  is  a 
continual  fall  of  bodily  heat  from  one  to  three  de- 
grees. 37  It  takes  three  or  four  times  as  long  to  regain 
the  normal  heat  as  it  did  to  lose  it ;  "  therefore,  there 
is  a  chilly  feeling  in  getting  over  the  effects  of  alco- 
holic poisoning  called  intoxication. 

"  The  statement  that  alcohol  checks  waste  is  true. 
19  We  have  already  seen  that  it  does  not  permit  car- 
bonic gas  to  be.  sent  off  through  the  air  cells,  40  but 
compels  it  to  be  retained  in  the  system  to  poison  it. 
4  It  hardens  the  membranes  so  that  they  will  not 
allow  albuminous  materials  to  pass  through,  for  the 
nourishment  of  the  tissues  ;  nor  the  waste  matter  to 
pass  out  from  the  tissues,  '*  so  that  the  body  is  filled 
with  waste  material  which  is  wrongly  called  fat.   43  All 


2q8  the  man  wonderful. 

the  processes  of  life  are  full  of  change,  and  anything 
which  interferes  with  this  change  is  injurious,  because 
it  interferes  with  vital  action.  44  To  check  the  ordi- 
nary waste  of  the  system  is  to  tie  the  body  to  its 
own  corpse.  4:>  Alcohol  is  not  a  food,  for  it  dimin- 
ishes nutrition.  46  It  apparently  increases  digestion 
by  inducing  a  superficial  congestion  of  the  mucous 
membrane  of  the  stomach,  and  a  dilation  of  the  arte- 
rioles which  will  ultimately  produce  gastric  catarrh. 

47  "  The  delicate  membranes  of  the  nerves  do  not  es- 
cape the  shrivelling  touch  of  alcohol,  but  are  de- 
prived of  their  moisture,  and  becoming  hard  and 
shrunken  press  on  the  nerves,  causing  neuralgic  pains. 

46  "  The  power  of  the  nerves  to  transmit  messages  to 
the  brain  is  lost,  and  deadly  injury  may  be  done  to  a 
part  of  the  body  without  the  man  being,  at  the  time, 
aware  of  it.  49  Men,  under  the  influence  of  alcohol, 
are  frozen  because  their  nerves  do  not  warn  them  of 
their  danger,  and  also  because  the  brain  can  not  con- 
trol the  working  of  the  limbs.  The  brain  is  no  longer 
governor.  5u  The  brain  itself  is  partially  destroyed  by 
alcohol.  All  the  principles  of  which  brain  matter  is 
composed  (with  the  exception  of  the  albuminous 
framework)  are  soluble  in  warm  alcohol,  and  the 
framework  becomes  hardened,  so  that  the  brain  of  a 
drinker  not  only  actually  decreases  in  size,  but  be- 
comes hardened  in  consistency. 

"  The  following  is  a  partial  list  of  the  diseases  caused 
by  alcohol :  61  Inflammation  of  stomach,  congestion 
of  liver,  diabetes,  inflammation  and  palpitation  and 
fatty  degeneration  of  heart,  gout,  premature  old  age; 


REP0R7   OF  EXPERIENCE.  295 

irritable  temper,  indecision,  cowardice,  rheumatism, 
asthma,  pleurisy,  atrophy  of  liver,  fatty  degeneration 
of  kidneys,  dropsy,  Bright's  disease,  consumption, 
sleeplessness,  epilepsy,  neuralgia,  apoplexy,  inflamma- 
tion of  brain  and  spinal  cord,  paralysis,  delirium  tre- 
mens, moral  perversion,  softening  of  brain,  idiocy, 
insanity,  and  madness." 

REPORT   OF   EXPERIENCE. 

We  have  also  examined  "  Experience,  and  he  re- 
ports as  follows : 

"  I  find  that  alcohol  does  not  increase  "  a  man's 
strength  and  working  ability.  Men  who  train  as 
athletes  have  learned  that  they  must  avoid  alcohol 
if  they  wish  to  be  successful.  I  find  that  under  all 
circumstances  men  can  endure  exposure  and  work 
harder  under  extremes  of  heat  and  cold;  keep  in  bet- 
ter health  and  have  sounder  judgment,  when  not 
using  alcohol,  than  they  can  when  using  it  ever  so 
moderately.  In  shipwrecks,  in  Arctic  explorations, 
in  long-continued  exhausting  labor,  the  advantage  is 
always  with  the  abstainer  from  alcohol.  I  find  that 
64  rheumatism,  and  other  difficulties  which  are  pro- 
duced by  alcohol,  can  often  be  cured  by  totally  ab- 
staining from  it,  without  giving  any  other  remedies, 
I  find  that  even  moderate  drinkers  are  more  suscep- 
tible to  the  influence  of  epidemics.  "  In  Tiflis,  a 
city  of  20,000,  in  an  epidemic  of  cholera  every  drunk- 
ard died.  6C  I  find  that  drinking  men  are  never  sc 
sure  to  recover  from  surgical  operations  as  abstainers 
I  find  57  that  men  who  do  not  use  alcohol,  in  any  form, 


300 


THE  MAN   WONDERFUL. 


are  much  less  affected  by  changes  in  climate  than  are 
those  who  are  addicted  to  its  use,  and  are  not  subject 
to  the  dangerous  and  troublesome  diseases  which  af- 
fect the  drinker.  58 1  find  that  the  majority  of  sun- 
strokes occur  among  those  who  use  alcohol  in  some 
form;  that  a  great  number  of  the  diseases  and 
other  ills  from  which  men  suffer  are  caused  by  alco- 
hol ;  and  that  the  ;'9  water-drinker  loses  nothing  and 
gains  everything." 

REPORT   OF   HEREDITY. 

80  Heredity  being  inquired  of  in  regard  to  the  ef- 
fects of  alcohol  upon  posterity  replies  :  6I  "  I  find  that 
children  inherit  the  mental  and  moral  attributes  of 
their  parents,  and  I  find  that  they  especially  inherit 
the  acquired  vices  of  parents.  The  Chinese  recog- 
nize this  truth  and  inquire  not  only  into  the  facts  of 
crime,  but  also  into  the  temperament  and  physical 
habits  of  the  accused,  and  of  his  ancestry,  knowing 
that  criminals  beget  criminals.  I  find  that  drunkards 
beget  drunkards.  62  That  the  use  of  alcohol  in  a  man 
produces  physical  and  moral  degeneracy  in  his  pos- 
terity. Drunkards  beget  idiots.  Idiocy  is  a  manu- 
factured article.  Among  intemperate  people  the 
children  may  seem  intelligent  up  to  a  certain  age,  and 
then  lose  their  minds.  63 1  find  that  convulsive  dis- 
eases, hysteria  and  irritability,  are  also  inherited  from 
drunken  parents.  Even  if  the  child  have  not  the 
same  habits  of  the  parent,  it  will  have  a  faulty  and 
defective  organization.  Of  those  who  are  well  nour- 
ished  otherwise,  but  who  use  alcohol,  the   children 


REPORT  OF  ECONOMY.  301 

may  be  weak,  nervous,  excitable,  and  prone  to  morbid 
conditions.  But  in  the  children  of  those  who  drink, 
not  having  sufficient  food,  the  condition  is  still  worse 
I  find  that  in  thousands  of  cases  where  people  being 
temperate  have  children,  and  afterward  becoming  in- 
temperate, have  other  children,  the  latter  become 
intemperate  more  frequently  than  the  older  children 
in  a  proportion  of  five  to  one." 

REPORT   OF   FXONOMY. 

"The  testimony  of  Economy  is  as  follows  :  "  I  find 
that  the  "5  production  of  alcohol  destroys  enormous 
quantities  of  wholesome  food.  fi6  It  employs  men  in 
a  debasing  business  which  deprives  the  honorable  in- 
dustries of  the  world  of  the  service  of  many  work- 
men. 67  I  find  that  the  making  of  alcoholic  drinks  is 
expensive,  and  that  $800,000,000  a  year  is  expended 
in  the  purchase  of  these  poisonous  beverages,  68thus 
robbing  families  of  money  for  food  and  clothing  and 
other  necessaries  of  life.  I  find  that  the  drinkers  of 
"alcoholic  drinks  lose  much  valuable  time  by  drunk- 
enness, sickness,  and  idleness ;  that  lives  are  lost, 
,0  some  by  being  shortened  by  the  use  of  alcohol,  others 
by  the  deprivation  which  has  come  through  the  use 
of  alcohol  by  those  who  should  have  provided  them 
with  the  necessaries  of  life,  others  by  accidents  which 
have  occurred,  directly  or  indirectly,  through  the  use 
of  alcohol.  71  I  find  that  it  costs  the  country  vast 
sums  of  money  to  provide  police  to  look  after  those 
who  are  accustomed  to  drink  ;  to  employ  legal  ser- 
vices in  trials  for  crimes  occurring  through  alcohol  ; 

20 


302 


THE  MAX   IVO.YDEREUL 


in  building  prisons  to  confine  criminals  made  such  by 
alcohol  ;  to  build  insane  asylums  for  those  who  are 
made  such,  directly  or  indirectly,  by  alcohol  ;  to  build 
and  maintain  idiot  asylums,  poorhouses,  institutions 
for  vagrants  and  outcasts,  who,  if  it  were  not  for  al- 
cohol, would  be  useful  citizens.  I  find  that  there  are 
at  least  600,000  drunkards  in  the  United  States.  72  I 
find  that  at  least   60,000   drunkards   die   every  year, 

73  that  100,000  men  and  women  under  the  influence  of 
intoxicating  drinks   are  sent    annually  to  prison,  and 

74  200,000  children  to  the  poorhouse  ;  that  7fl  300  mur- 
ders yearly  are  committed  under  alcohol,  and  400  sui- 
cides ;  7C  that  200,000  orphans  are  yearly  left  to 
charity.  77 1  find  that  it  costs  the  United  States 
$60,000,000  every  year  to  support  pauperism  and 
crime  caused  mostly  by  alcohol." 

REPORT   OF   MORALITY. 

16  Morality  being  questioned  reports  as  follows : 
1 1  find  that  in  79  drunkards  the  moral  sense  is  espec- 
ially perverted.  I  find  that  the  use  of  alcohol  re- 
moves, gradually,  the  restraints  which  80  conscience 
or  a  sense  of  decency  imposes.  That  man  under  the 
influence  of  intoxicating  drinks  does  and  says  things 
at  which,  in  his  sober  moments,  he  blushes.  81  His 
reason  is  perverted,  and  he  is  incapable  of  forming 
correct  judgments  on  minor  matters,  and  much  more 
so  on  matters  of  importance.  6a  This  vitiation  of 
judgment  is  the  cause  of  many  of  the  accidents  for 
which  alcohol  is  accountable.  8S  In  time  of  danger 
the  captain  of  the  vessel  takes  a  drink,  and  his  reason 


REPORT  OF  MORALITY 


303 


being  thereby  impaired,  he  no  longer  gives  judicious 
orders,  and  wreck  and  death  are  the  result. 

"  The  engineer  who,  when  sober,  is  watchful  and 
careful,  under  the  influence  of  a  slight  amount  of 
alcohol,  becomes  careless  and  foolhardy,  runs  his 
train  into  danger  and  causes  great  loss  of  life. 

"  Then  I  find  that  alcohol  loosens  the  passions,  and 
under  its  84  influence  the  'gentle '-man  becomes  a 
fiend,  beating,  cursing,  and  perhaps  killing  wife  or 
child,  and  awakening  next  day  to  a  knowledge  of  a 
crime  which  will  fill  him  with  remorse  to  the  day  of 
his  death.  e5The  statement  of  the  grand  jury  of  a 
great  city  is  that  nine-tenths  of  the  crimes  entered 
were  due  to  alcohol. 

"  I  find  that  because  of  the  inexorable  demands  of 
the  appetite  of  the  drunkard  for  alcohol,  and  the 
immense  gains  accruing  from  88  gratifying  this  de- 
mand, men's  moral  sense  and  love  of  humanity 
are  so  perverted,  that  they  are  willing  to  engage  as  a 
business  in  the  sale  of  that  which  they  know  is  put- 
ting an  enemy  into  a  man's  mouth  to  steal  away  his 
brains ;  that  which  they  are  aware  will  take  the 
bread  from  the  mouths  of  starving  children,  and  de- 
prive wives  of  the  care  and  protection  of  their  hus- 
bands, and  destroy  every  noble  impulse  of  the  man 
himself.  I  find  that  they  are  even  willing  to  sell 
liquor  to  women  and  children,  and  that  having  made 
drunkards  of  them,  they  are  not  willing  to  bear  the 
blame  and  expense  of  the  results  of  their  own  labor 
They  turn  the  poor  poisoned  inebriate  out  into  the 
street  to  freeze,  or  starve,  or  die,  while  they  live  upon 


304  THE  MAN   WONDERFUL. 

the  proceeds  of  his  toil,  or  from  the  pawning  of  the 
clothes  of  his  children. 

'7  "  I  find  that  women  who  use  alcohol  lose  theif 
charm  of  womanhood,  that  they  are  no  longer  mod- 
est, pure,  and  delicate,  but  become  profane,  immod- 
est, lying  in  the  streets  without  a  blush,  forgetting 
their  helpless  babes,  caring  nothing  for  home,  or 
decency,  becoming  filthy,  homeless  outcasts  and  wan- 
derers, criminals  themselves,  and  inciting  to  crime. 

"  I  find  that  children  who  use  alcohol  are  as  degraded 
as  children  can  possibly  become,  and  show  marks  of 
hardness  and  degradation,  that  it  would  seem  impos- 
sible for  a  child  to  reach. 

"  I  find  that  where  alcohol  is  prohibited  crimes  are 
almost  unknown.  88  A  city  of  10,000  inhabitants 
with  no  grog-shop,  has  but  one  policeman,  and  little 
use  for  him.  Places  of  3,000  inhabitants  without 
liquor -saloons  have  neither  police,  criminals,  nor 
paupers.  In  such  communities  I  find  nothing  lack- 
ing because  of  the  absence  of  alcohol.  Health,  mor- 
als, prosperity,  happiness,  legitimate  business,  relig- 
ion, all  flourish  without  the  contrasting  elements  of 
vice,  crime,  indigence,  insanity,  incendiarism,  fatal 
affrays,  and  degraded  manhood. 

"  I  find  that  89  the  use  of  fermented  wine  at  the  sac- 
rament is  often  attended  with  serious  downfalls  of 
those  who  have  striven  to  get  free  from  the  chain  of 
the  monster  appetite,  and  I  believe  that  the  church 
which  continues  to  use  it,  tampers  with  its  moral 
sense,  and  with  the  temporal  and  eternal  welfare  of 
those  weak  ones  who  have  committed  themselves  to 
the  care  of  the  church  for  help  in  a  fearful   struggle 


THE  GOVERNMENT  CAN  PROHIBIT.  305 

for  life,  and  also  endangers  the  safety  of  the  young 
who   take   their   first  sip  of  wine  at  the  table  of  the 
Lord. 
"Certainly  no  other  than  unfermentedwtne 

SHOULD   BE    USED   AT  THE   SACRAMENTAL   TABLE." 

Your  committee  fully  endorse  all  of  the  above 
findings,  and  they  are  fully  satisfied  that  it  would  be 
better  for  the  Government,  and  for  the  people,  if  the 
sale  and  manufacture  of  alcohol,  for  any  other  than 
mechanical  and  chemical  purposes,  were  prohib- 
ited and  abolished,  and  your  committee  believe  that 
the  Government,  as  suggested  by  the  Supreme  Court, 
has  the  power,  under  the  Constitution,  not  only  to 
regulate,  but  also  to  prohibit  the  sale  and  manufac- 
ture of  alcoholic  beverages.  We  would  also  call 
your  attention  to  the  fact  that  many  of  the  so-called 
patent  medicines,  bitters,  and  hop  bitters  are  often 
the  most  dangerous  and  deadliest  forms  of  alcohol. 
We  also  concur  in  the  opinions  expressed  by  the 
medical  profession  that  alcohol  should  be  classed 
with  the  most  dangerous  poisons,  never  to  be  used 
except  when  prescribed  by  a  wise  and  conscientious 
physician.  Respectfully  submitted, 

Truthfulness, 

Charity, 

Goodness. 

When  the  report  of  this  committee  was  made  pub 

lie,  Gohul  called  together  his  followers; 

"  And  round  he  throws  his  baleful  eyes, 
Mixed  with  obdurate  pride  and  steadfast  hate, 


306 


THE  MAN  WONDERFUL. 

He  views  the  dismal  situation  waste  and  wild ; 
No  light ;  but  rather  darkness  visible 
Served  only  to  discover  sights  of  woe, 
Regions  of  sorrow,  doleful  shades,  where  peace 
And  rest  can  never  dwell ;  hope  never  comes 
That  comes  to  all  ;  but  torture  without  end. 

And  with  bold  words, 
Breaking  the  horrid  silence,  thus  began  : 

'  What  though  the  field  be  lost, 
All  is  not  lost ;  the  unconquerable  will, 
And  study  of  revenge,  immortal  hate, 
And  courage  never  to  submit  or  yield, 
And  what  is  else  not  to  be  overcome ; 
That  glory  never  shall  their  wrath  or  might 
Extort  from  me.' 

And  thus  answer'd  soon  his  bold  compeer : 
.  .  .  .  •  To  bow  and  sue  for  grace 
With  suppliant  knee,  and  deify  their  power, 
Who  from  the  terror  of  their  arms  so  late 
Doubted  their  empire  ;  that  were  low  indeed, 
That  were  an  ignominy,  and  shame  beneath 
This  downfall.' 

Whereto  with  speedy  words  the  archfiend  replied 
'  Seest  thou  yon  dreary  plain,  forlorn  and  wild, 
The  seat  of  desolation,  void  of  light, 
Save  what  the  glimmerings  of  these  livid  flame?. 
Cast  pale  and  dreadful?     Thither  let  us  tend, 
From  off  the  tossings  of  these  fiery  waves  ; 
There  rest,  if  any  rest  can  harbor  there ; 
And,  reassembling  our  afflicted  powers, 
Consult  how  we  may  henceforth  most  offend 
Our  enemy  ;  our  own  loss  how  repair  ; 
How  overcome  this  dire  calamity; 
What  reinforcement  we  may  gain  from  hope; 
If  not,  what  resolution  from  despair.'  " 


EFFECTS  OF  ALCOHOL  OX  THE  STOMACH.  ^0j 

The  appearance  of  the  stomach  after  death  aids 
us  in  understanding  the  injurious  effects  of  alco- 
hol. Dr.  Sewall,  Professor  of  Pathology,  after 
thirty  years  of  careful  observation  and  post-mor- 
tem examinations,  made  a  number  of  plates  which 
show  the  progressive  changes  that  take  place  in 
the  stomachs  of  those  who  use  alcohol.  Other  in- 
vestigators have  confirmed  the  accuracy  of  Dr. 
Sewall's  work.  The  first  illustration  (after  Dr. 
Kellogg)  shows  the  internal  surface  of  the  mucous 
membrane  of  the  stomach  in  health,  when  the  per- 
son has  been  entirely  temperate.  The  innumer- 
able blood-vessels  give  a  pinkish  color. 

The  second  illustration  shows  the  internal  sur- 
face of  the  stomach  of  the  temperate  drinker,  who 
takes  a  little  at  his  meals  and  a  toddy  on  going  to 
bed.  The  blood-vessels  are  dilated  and  so  dis- 
tended with  blood,  that  they  can  be  seen  individ- 
ually. A  person  with  such  a  stomach  has  a  sensa- 
tion as  if  this  delicate  coat  of  the  stomach  was  on 
fire,  and,  most  of  the  time,  asking  for  water.  The 
third  illustration  shows  the  progressive  destruc- 
tive changes  where  alcohol  is  continually  used. 
The  man  is  now  a  confirmed  drunkard.  The  mu- 
cous membrane  has  an  angry  look,  and  the  blood- 
vessels are  greatly  enlarged,  and  later  cancer  and 
other  forms  of  organic  disease  may  appear.  The 
last  illustration  shows  the  stomach  thoroughly  dis- 
eased, and  the  sufferer  beyond  all  hope  of  com- 
plete recover)-.  He  is  afflicted  with  a  gnawing 
pain,  sinking  sensations,  and  a  disturbance  of  all 
the  functions  of  the  body.  The  House  Beautiful 
he  has  turned  into  a  house  of  anguish  and  suffer- 
ing, and  he  will  abandon  it  lashed  and  maddened 
by  a  conscience  that  condemns  him  while  suffer- 
ing the  horrors  of  alcoholic  self-destruction. 


CHAPTER     XIV. 

GOOD   COMPANY. 

The  wise  man  chooses  his  friends  wisely  He  does 
not  invite  as  guests  to  his  house  those  who  are  dead- 
ly enemies  to  his  welfare.  He  does  not  coi  sort  with 
thieves  and  murderers,  nor  will  he  make  intimate 
friends  of  those  whose  only  recommendation  is  their 
power  to  amuse.  He  proves  his  wisdom  by  associat- 
ing with  those  who  are  helpful  to  him,  who  bring 
strength  by  their  presence,  and  encouragement  by 
their  truly  helpful  qualities.  His  friends  are  not 
chosen  because  of  their  fine  dress  or  elegant  manners, 
but  for  their  sterling  worth,  their  truthfulness,  and 
their  candor.  The  Man  Wonderful  who  truly  appre- 
ciates the  glory  of  his  beautiful  house,  and  desires  to 
keep  it  in  perfect  repair,  a  credit  to  himself,  and  an 
honor  to  its  Great  Creator,  will  keep  aloof  from  the 
whole  tribe  of  doubtful,  bad,  and  wicked  companions 
of  whom  we  have  told  you.  His  guests  will  be  woik- 
ers,  who  will  be  selected  for  their  special  duties  with 
a  wise  forethought.  '  If  company  were  never  re- 
ceived and  entertained  in  the  house  it  would  sooii  fall 
into  a  ruinous  condition  and  become  uninhabitable. 
*  But  on  every  side  we  find  stores  of  iron,  potash, 
lime,  soda,  and  all  the  substances  needed  to  keep  us 
in  perfect  repair.  3  The  first  guest  who  is  invited  to 
(308) 


Good  company.  ^og 

enter  the  House  Beautiful  is  called  Milk.  She  is 
sweet,  fair-complexioned,  and  attractive,  and  is  wel- 
comed with  gladness.  She  deserves  this  welcome,  for 
she  brings  with  her  *  everything  that  is  needed  in  the 
house.  The  lime  and  the  soda,  the  fat  and  the  sugar, 
all  come  in  right  proportions  when  brought  by  Milk. 

The  various  guests  whose  help  is  needed  in  keeping 
the  house  in  repair  have  very  big  names.  There  are 
the  6  Albuminoids,  an  important  company  of  workers, 
who,  in  looks,  resemble  the  white  of  egg.  They  form 
the  greater  part  of  the  whole  body.  6  They  are  found 
in  both  the  animal  and  vegetable  foods,  and  have  dif- 
ferent names  according  to  their  location.  7  In  the 
blood  they  are  called  fibrin,  and  are  the  substances 
which  are  hardened  by  the  touch  of  alcohol  and 
thus  are  rendered  incapable  of  passing  through  the 
membranes  and  doing  their  work.  In  wheat  these 
albuminoids  are  called  gluten,  and  in  milk  they  are 
called  caseine.     8  Milk  is  the  most  perfect  of  foods. 

As  a  certain  writer  says :  "  Nature  folds  us  in  her 
arms  and  feeds  us  milk."  9  Even  our  solid  food  is 
made  up  of  the  same  material  as  was  the  milk  which 
nourished  us  as  babes. 

10  The  next  guest  who  is  invited  into  the  house  is  a 
pale  individual,  we  might  almost  say  insipid,  but 
very  important.  His  name  is  H20,  but  he  is  very 
willing  to  be  known  by  his  common  name  of  Water. 
Would  you  believe  that  your  "  body  is  about  three- 
fourths  water?  ,2  that  even  the  bones  are  one-eighth, 
and  the  brain  two-fifths  water  ?  13  This  proves  that 
Water  is  a  valuable  friend  and  should  receive  a  kindly 


jI0  THE  MAN  VVONDERFUl. 

welcome.  14  We  need  to  take  about  three  pounds  of 
water  every  day.  But  do  not  imagine  that  we  have 
to  drink  so  much.  15  Everything  we  eat  is  largely 
made  up  of  water,  and  if  we  did  not  drink  at  all  we 
should  still  take  a  good  supply  of  fluid  into  the 
system. 

18  Even  beefsteak,  which  we  are  accustomed  to 
think  of  as  solid  food,  is  three-fourths  water,  while 
parsnips  and  turnips  are  nine-tenths  water.  1T  Fruits 
are  flavored  and  sweetened  water,  but  they  have 
other  work  to  do  besides  furnishing  a  pleasant  drink. 
16  They  contain  a  certain  proportion  of  muscle-form- 
ing material,  as  well  as  sugar,  when  they  are  ripe. 
When  unripe  they  contain  much  starch,  which  the  sun 
changes  into  sugar.  But  this  is  not  all.  19  Fruits 
have  certain  acids  which  unite  with  other  materials  in 
the  system,  and  produce  the  carbonates  and  phos- 
phates of  lime,  and  the  carbonates  of  soda  and  potash. 
10  These  we  know  are  needed  in  the  bones,  so  that  we 
may  learn  from  this  that  fruits  are  good  company,  es- 
pecially for  children,  who  particularly  need  such  bone- 
making  substances,  and  who  may  have  the  calcareous 
material  in  their  systems,  but  it  can  not  be  used  be- 
cause it  needs  the  acids  of  the  fruits  to  set  it  free  ;  this 
being  done  they  unite  with  the  acids  and  form  the 
phosphates  and  carbonates  for  which  the  bones  ate 
continually  calling.  21  It  needs  only  a  small  failure  in 
bone-forming  material  to  produce  the  disease  called 
rachitis,  or  rickets. 

11  "  No  thought  without  phosphorus,"  say  the  Ger- 
mans.    And  so  the  Man  Wonderful  asks,  as "  Where 


OBLIGING  NEIGHBORS.  3  j  j 

shall  I  find  this  necessary  friend  of  mine,  for  I  must 
think?"  ai  He  has  learned  that  lime  and  iron  and  pot- 
ash and  phosphorus  are  in  the  soil,  but  he  has  also 
learned  that  he  can  not  use  them  in  the  form  in  which 
they  exist  in  the  soil.  They  must  be  made  over,  for 
his  use.  Who  then  has  made  Phosphorus  over  so 
that  he  can  become  a  welcome  guest  to  the  House 
Beautiful?  Ah,  "man  has  some  very  obliging  neigh- 
bors. They  eat  the  minerals  from  the  soil,  and  he 
"  in  turn  eats  them.  It  seems  like  base  ingratitude, 
doesn't  it  ?  Holland,  in  his  beautiful  poem  of  Bitter- 
Sweet,  says : 

"  Life  evermore  is  fed  by  death, 

In  earth,  or  sea,  or  sky, 
And  that  a  rose  may  breathe  its  breath, 

Something  must  die. 
The  milk-white  heifer's  life  must  pass 

To  feed  thy  own, 
As  fled  the  sweet  life  from  the  grass 

She  fed  upon." 

27  The  vegetable  and  animal  world  are  the  obliging 
neighbors  who  prepare  our  food  for  us.  *'  The  plants 
take  from  the  soil  the  minerals  and  assimilate  I  hem, 
that  is,  make  them  over  into  their  own  substance, 
changing  the  inorganic  materials  into  organic  forms. 

29  Inorganic  materials  are  those  which  have  no  or- 
gans, and  grow  by  adding  like  materials  to  the  outside. 
*°  Organic  substances  are  those  which  have  organs,  and 
grow  by  taking  food  into  themselves,  and  assimilating 
it.  31  Plants  and  animals  are  organic,  sa  but  they  dif- 
fer in  this,  that  plants  can  live  upon  inorganic  mate- 
rials. 


3J2  THE  MAN  WONDERFUL. 

"Phosphorus  is  an  inorganic  substance,  and  is  found 
in  an  organized  form  in  both  animals  and  vegetables, 
but  especially  in  the  germs  of  grains.  Therefore 
•4  wheat,  rye,  barley,  and  oats  are  good  food  for  think- 
ers. Man  is  the  animal  who  thinks  and  reasons,  say 
some  who  wish  to  mark  the  distinction  between  man 
and  his  quadruped  friends.  "  Man  is  the  animal  who 
laughs,"  say  others.  There  is  one  thing  which  truly 
distinguishes  man  from  all  other  animals.  Man  is  the 
animal  who  cooks  his  food.  Experience  has  taught 
us  that  heat  ruptures  the  starch  cells  of  food,  and 
thus  enables  us  to  bring  the  starch  into  quicker  con- 
tact with  the  fluids  which  act  upon  it.  35  All  grains 
need  long  cooking  in  order  thus  to  rupture  the  starch 
cells. 

36  Rice,  tapioca,  corn-starch,  and  such  foods  are  not 
suitable  as  diet  for  babies,  because  infants  have  no 
saliva.  37  Their  salivary  glands  are  not  developed 
until  they  have  teeth.  s8  And  as  these  foods  are 
largely  starch  they  need  the  action  of  the  saliva  for 
their  digestion.  39  Starch  is  known  under  the  name 
of  amylaceous  food. 

40  Next  come  the  saccharine  foods,  which  are  guests 
most  heartily  welcomed  by  the  little  people  who  are 
said  to  have  a  "sweet  tooth."  "We  find  sugar  in 
nearly  all  foods,  and  we  find  it  as  sugar  in  the  sugar- 
bowl.  42  It  is  made  from  the  sugar-cane,  from  beets, 
and  as  some  of  us  know  by  delightful  experience,  it 
can  be  made  from  the  sap  of  maple  trees.  It  is  found 
in  corn,  wheat,  rye,  milk,  figs,  peaches,  in  fact  in  all 
grains  and  fruits,  so  that   if  we   never  went  to   the 


HAVE  GOOD  FOOD.  313 

sugar-bowl    we    should    still    be    eating    sugai    every 
day. 

41  The  oleaginous  or  oily  foods  come  next.  Some 
young  folks  are  very  fastidious,  and  do  not  like  these 
greasy  fellows,  and  say,  "  I  hope  they  are  not  neces- 
sary company."  Fortunately  for  those  who  do  not 
like  fat  meats  we  can  obtain  fat  elsewhere.  M  Nuts 
are  about  half  oil,  and  butter  is  largely  oil.  Fat  ex- 
ists in  all  vegetables  and  grains,  so  you  are  eating  fat 
when  not  aware  of  it. 

45  Starch  and  fat  are  consumed  in  the  production  of 
heat  and  energy.  "  They  are  our  engineers,  4T  while 
the  other  substances  may  be  called  our  busy  builders. 
48  The  food  we  eat  should  be  suited  to  our  age,  health, 
habits  of  life,  and  the  season  of  the  year. 

49  The  food  of  the  child  should  consist  of  less  ani- 
mal food  than  that  of  the  adult.  The  invalid  should 
consult  the  state  of  his  digestive  organs.  60  The  sed- 
entary man  should  not  eat  as  much,  nor  the  same  kind 
of  food,  as  the  laboring  man,  and  in  winter  we  may 
eat  more  fatty  foods  than  in  summer. 

51  The  youth  who  comes  from  the  active,  outdoor 
life  of  the  farm  to  the  school  should  change  his  diet 
with  his  habits,  or  he  will  lay  the  foundation  of  a 
future  dyspepsia.  M  The  question  of  what  we  shall 
eat  is  one  that  deserves  our  earnest  study  and  thought. 
The  bountiful  Giver  of  all  good  has  in  this  our  native 
land,  placed  at  our  hand  the  greatest  variety  of  whole- 
some foods  from  which  to  choose.  6S  He  who  makes 
the  wisest  choice  will  reap  a  reward  in  health,  and  in 
ability  to  enjoy. 


3i4 


THE  MAN   WONDERFUL. 

The  food  we  eat  must  with  the  sunshine  glow. 

It  must  be  filled  with  pure  life-giving  light; 

It  must  have  drunk  the  very  air  of  heaven  ; 

Through  it,  the  universe  must  work  in  us, 

That  each  and  all  of  us  may  truly  live. 

So  nature  with  an  ever  liberal  hand 

Pours  forth  the  treasures  of  both  land  and  sea> 

To  give  to  man  a  wide  and  vig'rous  life, 

Participant  of  all  variety. 

Freely  for  him  the  palm,  the  date,  the  pine, 

Wheat,  rye,  oat,  maize  spread  harvests  to  the  ai 

Apple,  plum,  peach  invite  his  ready  hand. 

Beneath  his  feet  lie  stored  the  sugary  beet, 

The  starch  of  the  potato,  while  all  space 

Is  rich  with  juicy,  all-inviting  herbs. 

The  solid  flesh  of  bird,  and  fish,  and  beast, 

As  victims  for  the  sacrifice  prepared, 

Wait  ready  to  make  firm  the  arm  of  toil, 

Or,  in  the  brain-cells  light  the  torch  of  thought. 

Eat  and  be  merry.      Let  earth's  varied  life 

And  power  be  marshalled  in  its  ruler's  breast. 


CHAPTER   XV. 

THE     ROYAL     GUEST. 

Amid  my  morning  dreams  I  heard  a  soft 
And  gentle  tapping  on  my  window-pane, 
And,  raising  on  my  elbow,  strove  to  break 
The  filmy  band  that  Sleep  had  woven  soft 
Across  my  eyelids,  while  I,  through  its  veil, 
Beheld  a  dim  and  shadowy  form,  with  robes 
Wind-blown  and  fluttering  in  the  misty  air, 
And  heard  against  the  pane  the  ceaseless  beat 
Of  slender  fingers,  urgent  in  demand 
For  entrance  to  my  sheltered  domicile. 
Who  art  thou,  then,  impatient  stranger,  who 
All  uninvited  seek'st  to  enter  here  ?  " 
A  voice,  like  chimes  of  crystal  bells,  replied  : 
I  am  a  king,  and  thy  most  helpful  friend." 
I,  doubting,  answered  querulously  back: 
If  thou'rt  a  king,  why  com'st  thou  not  in  guise 
Of  royalty?     Why  at  my  window-pane 
Demand  admission  ?     If  thou  art  a  king,  * 
Over  what  mighty  realm  dost  thou  hold  sway  ? ' 
Again  the  crystal  tones  made  sweet  reply  : 
Three-fourths  of  earth  to  my  dominion  yield  ; 
Without  me  were  not  ocean,  lake,  nor  stream, 
Nor  thund'rous  surges  of  the  mighty  deep, 
Nor  gurgling  music  of  the  tireless  rill. 
Without  rx\2  earth  were  one  vast,  arid  waste, 
With  no  oasis  cheering  longing  eyes  ; 
No  tender  leaf  would  bud,  i  o  flower  would  bloom. 

(3i5) 


316  THE  MAN  WONDERFUL. 

Here  were  I  not,  King  Sol  would  scorch  the  plain 

And  melt  the  very  earth  with  fervent  heat. 

But  now  my  power  doth  stretch  a  canopy, 

A  thin  and  mottled,  gauzelike  awning,  placed 

Thee,  and  his  far  too-ardent  gaze  between. 

Without  me  ne'er  would  heaven's  cloudy  hosts 

March  valiantly  across  the  azure  field 

To  sound  of  thunder's  martial  music,  nor 

The  blessed  fusillade  of  rain-drops  fall, 

To  raise,  not  blight  the  drooping  heads  of  flowers. 

Without  me  would  the  mountain's  hoary  head, 

Uncapped  with  brilliant  whiteness,  rise  aloft, 

Bald,  dreary,  desolate  and  all  uncrowned. 

Without  me  would  no  glacier  rivers  send, 

From  their  deep  hearts,  the  mountain  streamlet  down 

To  cheer  the  thirsty  vales  waiting  below. 

I  am  the  teeming  heart's  blood  of  the  world." 

"  O,  mighty  king,"  I  hastened  to  respond, 

*  If  thou  so  vast,  so  wondrous,  so  divine 
A  kingdom  hast,  why  humblest  thou  thyself 
To  beg  of  me  admission  here  ?     What  gift 
Have  I  to  offer  monarch  so  august  ?  " 

"'  My  simple  child,  'tis  1  who  come  to  give. 
I  bring  thee  health,  and  wealth,  and  food,  and  life. 
Dost  thou  not  know  that  three  parts  of  thy  House 
So  Beautiful  belong  to  me  ?     That  I 
Myself  do  humble,  truly  thee  to  serve  ? 
Thy  Housekeeper  I  ever  walk  beside, 
Her  parcels  carry,  open  wide  the  doors 
Which  she  would  pass  through,  and  which,  but  for  rao 
Would  never  open  ;  sweep  from  every  nook 
The  tiny  particles  of  waste  that  check 
Her  progress,  and  disdaining  not  the  toil 
Of  humblest  menial,  keep  thy  dwelling  clean. 
Closed  were  thine  eyes  to  all  dear  sights  did  I 


TO  SA  VE    THE    WORLD. 


3'7 


Not  dwell  within  their  orbs.     Dead,  dead  were  Taste, 

Ami  his  Twin-Brother,  were  I  to  depart. 

'Tis  I  who  quench  the  thirst  of  arduous  toil, 

Who  cool  the  burning  heat  of  fever's  touch. 

Willi  every  friend  who  visits  thee  I  come, 

To  aid  his  friendship;  and  with  every  foe, 

To  half  disarm  him  of  his  deadly  shafts 

With  which  he  aims  to  strike  thy  very  heart. 

King  Alcohol,  without  me,  would  have  more 

And  deadlier  power  against  thee,  but  with  me 

Allied,  he  loses  strength,  and  harms  thee  less. 

And  yet  he  loves  me  well,  and  calls  for  me 

Where'er  he  goes,  and  by  his  love  doth  drag 

Me  forth  against  my  will,  to  leave  my  work, 

And  join  his  baleful  train  of  direst  ills. 

0  child  of  earth,  be  wise,  be  wise  in  time, 
And  shut  thy  door  against  King  Alcohol, 
For  he  doth  much  degrade  his  royal  name. 
But  I,  /  worthy  am  to  be  a  king. 

Look  thou  abroad  upon  the  fields,  and  see 
Each  emerald  leaf  doth  well  proclaim  me  good 

1  deck  the  world  with  verdure,  gem  with  dew 
The  silken  robes  of  flowers.     I  adorn 

Thy  wintry  window  with  a  filigree 

Of  crystal.     With  the  brilliant  rainbow-scarf 

Of  God's  own  promise  do  I  gird  the  heavens. 

My  robes  unsullied  typify  the  truth  ; 

My  crystals,  emblems  are  of  purity  ; 

My  dewdrop-gems,  the  type  of  innocence. 

Born  of  the  earth,  I  yet  ascend  to  heaven, 

And  from  that  glorious  height  oft  I  descend,- 

l'o  bless,  and  purify,  and  save  the  world." 

21 


CHAPTER    XVI. 

THE   MAN   WONDERFUL. 

WHEN  we  compare  the  inhabitant  of  the  House 
Beautiful  in  his  physical  nature  with  other  animals, 
we  find  that  he  far  surpasses  them.  Born  the  most 
helpless  of  living  creatures,  through  his  manual  skill 
he  emulates  all  other  animals  in  their  most  pre-em- 
inent qualities.  In  his  wild  nature  he  subsists  upon 
the  fruits  and  seeds  of  plants,  and  the  flesh  of  other 
animals.  He  is  the  most  cunning  of  still  hunters, 
far  surpassing  even  the  cat  family,  for  with  his  swift 
arrow,  or  the  ball  from  his  unerring  rifle,  he  reaches 
his  game  before  they  are  aware  of  danger.  As  a  trap- 
per, he  is  more  skilful  than  the  spider,  and  he  is  not 
content  with  one  kind  of  trap  or  one  species  of  prey. 

The  speed  of  the  greyhound  and  the  scent  of  the 
foxhound,  both  together,  do  not  make  them  so  cer- 
tain of  following  and  overtaking  the  game,  as  his 
untiring  pursuit  and  his  keen  observation  of  every 
broken  twig,  every  overturned  leaf,  every  crushed 
blade  of  grass  left  by  the  flying  deer.  Our  numerous 
domestic  animals  prove  that  he  tames  the  wild  crea- 
tures of  the  woods  and  makes  them  serve  him. 

In  order  to  have  a  secure  means  of  subsistence,  he 
has  learned  to  cultivate  the  soil,  and  in  every  depart- 
ment of  this  industry  he  has  demonstrated  his  supe- 
riority. Nature  gave  him  only  hands  as  tools,  and 
(318)  * 


HE  DISCOVERS   THE  FORCES  OF  NATURE. 


3<9 


these  none  too  strong ;  but  with  these  he  has  devised 
and  manufactured  all  kinds  of  useful  implements  and 
machinery  for  farming.  He  no  longer  digs  in  the 
ground  unaided,  but  employs  other  animals  to  assist 
him,  while  the  hoe,  the  axe,  the  plow,  the  harrow,  the 
corn-planter,  the  wheat-drill,  the  sulky-plow,  gang- 
plow,  and  the  mower,  reaper,  and  binder,  and  the 
thresher,  all  testify  to  his  genius.  Unable  to  breathe 
in  the  water,  he  yet  constructs  armor  and  machinery, 
by  means  of  which  he  dives  to  the  depths  of  ocean, 
and  walks  among  the  finny  tribes  apparently  as  much 
at  home  as  they. 

Discovering  the  force  of  gunpowder,  he  devises 
means  of  using  it  to  blast  rocks  or  to  destroy  his 
enemies,  and  with  the  forces  of  nature  obedient  to 
his  will  digs  in  submerged  rocks  vast  chambers  which 
he  fills  with  explosives  and  displaces  the  very  foun- 
dations of  old  ocean. 

He  is  not  content  merely  to  discover  steam  and 
electricity  and  the  other  great  forces  of  nature,  but 
he  harnesses  them  to  his  plows  and  wagons,  and  con- 
tinues to  invent  machinery  by  means  of  which  they 
may  be  still  more  useful  to  him. 

By  steam  he  moves  the  engines  which  his  genius 
has  invented,  and  thus  transports  himself  across  con- 
tinents and  seas.  Electricity  becomes  his  swift-flying 
messenger,  bearing  his  commands  with  lightning  speed 
over  mountains  or  under  oceans,  and  chaining  it  he 
compels  it  to  be  his  midnight  sun.  He  stores  up 
electricity  and  transports  it  as  his  prisoner  from  place 
to  place  to  do  his  bidding.     He  seals  up  the  rays  of 


320 


THE  MA  X    U  r0N  DERFVL 


the  sun  and  carries  them  into  dark  places,  there  to 
work  as  his  assistant  in  artistic  labors. 

He  has  invented  the  microscope,  by  means  of  which 
he  beholds  in  a  drop  of  water  an  ocean  swarming 
with  life. 

Studying  plants,  he  has  not  only  named  and  clas- 
sified them,  but  can  examine  their  minute  construc- 
tion,their  tissues  and  cells,  and,  not  content  with  this, 
has  invented  ways  of  dissolving  and  analyzing  them, 
as  to  the  ultimate  substances  of  which  they  are  com- 
posed. He  has  compelled  Nature  to  divulge  to  him 
her  laws  concerning  the  elementary  substances  of  the 
earth.  Nor  lias  this  satisfied  his  ambition,  for  with 
his  telescope  he  has  dared  to  peep  into  the  private 
chambers  of  far-off  heavenly  bodies,  and  with  his 
spectroscope  has  required  them  to  tell  of  what  ele- 
mentary substances  they  are  composed. 

Earth,  air,  fire,  and  water  become  his  obedient  vas- 
sals ;  or,  if  they  rebel,  their  very  stubbornness  arouses 
his  defiant  will,  and  he  never  rests  until  they  are  sub- 
dued, and  yield  to  his  sway.  Undismayed  by  horror 
of  cold,  hunger,  or  even  death,  he  has  visited  the 
home  of  the  North  Wind,  and  recorded  the  laws  of 
its  nature,  and  is  now  able  to  tell  "  whence  the  wind 
cometh  and  whither  it  goeth,"  and  gives  forewarnings 
of  the  uprising,  course,  and  speed  of  storms. 

He  has  a  method  of  communicating  with  his  kind 
superior  to  that  possessed  by  any  other  animal.  He 
has  invented  a  language  which  he  teaches  to  his 
children,  and  has  even  taught  a  part  of  it  to  other 
animals.     Not  satisfied  with  a   spoken   language   he 


LOOKS  I  POX  HIMSELF  AND  J/ IS  GOD. 


321 


has  invented  the  art  of  writing,  so  that  his  valua- 
ble thoughts  might  not  perish  with  his  removal  from 
his  earthly  abode,  but  be  preserved  for  the  benefit  of 
succeeding  generations.  But  even  this  has  not  satis- 
fied him,  and  he  has  invented  the  printing  of  books. 

Turning  his  eyes  upon  himself,  he  studies  his  own 
frame  and  the  powers  which  give  him  motion  ;  looks 
into  the  construction  of  every  tissue,  and  notes  the 
relation  of  it  to  life  and  the  changes  through  which 
it  passes  to  decay;  learns  that  the  cells  of  the  brain 
have  a  relation  to  the  nerves,  and  distinguishes  nerves 
from  each  other  by  the  offices  which  they  perform, 
and  does  not  stop  in  his  audacious  career  until  he  has 
located  himself  in  his  own  brain. 

His  presumption  leads  him,  successfully,  still  fur- 
ther, and  he  looks  upon  himself  within  his  House 
Beautiful  and  sees  his  own  functions.  By  comparison 
he  estimates  the  relation  of  memory  and  thought, 
and  recognizes  the  importance  of  will-power  and  the 
delights  of  the  imagination. 

Not  content  with  naming  the  earth  and  all  it  con- 
tains, nor  yet  with  weighing  the  planets  and  mapping 
out  their  courses  through  the  heavens,  nor  yet  with 
handling  in  his  thought  the  mysteries  of  his  own  na- 
ture, he  assumes  to  discuss  the  powers  and  attributes 
of  the  Great  Final  Cause,  and  to  lift  the  veil  from  the 
unknowable.  Marvellous  and  incomprehensible  are 
the  powers  of  this  inhabitant  of  the  House  Beautiful, 

The  Man  Wonderful. 


SUGGESTIONS   TO   TEACHERS    AND   SCHOLARS. 

Students  who  desire  to  fully  understand  the  con- 
struction of  the  House  Beautiful,  and  teachers  who 
wish  to  teach  successfully,  would  do  well  to  give  some 
attention  to  dissecting.  The  eye  or  heart  of  a  sheep 
or  calf  will  give  a  good  idea  of  those  organs. 

From  a  cat  the  position  of  the  internal  organs  in 
situ  can  be  learned.  The  first  lessons  can  be  upon 
the  Kitchen,  Butler's  Pantry,  and  Dining-room,  and 
these  being  removed,  the  other  organs  can  be  studied. 
In  dissecting  the  eye  it  can  be  opened  with  sharp- 
pointed  scissors  by  cutting  all  the  way  around  in  the 
sclerotic,  a  little  ways  from  the  border  of  the  cornea ; 
the  eye  will  thus  be  opened  with  the  lens  in  place. 
Do  this  while  holding  the  eye  in  a  basin  of  water. 
Put  a  large  pin  through  the  lens  and  take  it  out.  If 
fresh,  it  will  be  transparent ;  if  not,  it  will  look  like 
an  opal,  and  when  a  pencil  of  light  falls  on  it,  will  call 
forth  exclamations  of  wonder  at  its  beauty.  With 
equal  care  the  other  parts  of  the  eye  can  be  separated, 
and  will  be  sure  to  be  admired.  With  children,  see 
ing  is  knowing,  and  it  is  seeing  that  awakens  interest 
and  compels  attention. 

A  chicken  can  be  used  to  demonstrate  how  birds 
grind  their  food  without  teeth,  their  gizzard  being 
the  mill  which  grinds  and  their  crop  a  storehouse  in 
which  to  keep  their  provision  before  grinding. 

Feelings  of  repugnance  at  such  work  are  soon  for- 
gotten in  the  unfolding  of  unknown  and  unsuspected 
beauties,  and  in  admiration  of  the  Divine  wisdom 
which  constructed  each  and  every  part  and  adapted 
them  with  infinite  skill  for  their  harmonious  working 
(322) 


AIDS  TO  TEACHERS  AND  SCHOLARS 


PART  I. 


Questions  on  Chapter  I. — Page  9. 

1.  In  what  kind  of  houses  did  men  first  live  ?  2.  What  are 
the  "  modern  improvements"  ?  3.  Who  built  the  first  House 
Beautiful  ?  4.  Has  the  Architect  improved  upon  the  original 
plan  ?  5.  Who  owned  the  first  House  Beautiful  ?  6.  What  is 
this  house  ?  7.  Is  it  you  ?  8.  Of  what  are  our  dwellings  made  ? 
9.  What  is  chemistry  ?  10.  What  is  an  elementary  substance  ? 
11.  Of  how  many  elements  is  the  earth  composed?  12.  What 
elements  are  used  in  the  House  Beautiful?  Name  them.  13. 
Where  do  we  obtain  them?  14.  What  is  being  sick  ?  15.  Of 
what  is  every  organ  made?  16.  What  is  protoplasm?  17. 
What  becomes  of  these  cells  ?  18.  What  is  growth  ?  19.  What 
should  we  study?  20.  Why?  21,  What  is  the  effect  of  exer- 
cise ?     22.  Why  do  we  get  hungry  ? 


Questions  on  Chapter  II. — Page  16. 

1.  What  is  the  first  thing  in  building  a  house?  2.  What  is 
.he  foundation  of  the  House  Beautiful  ?  3.  When  put  together 
ivh-at  called  ?  4.  What  different  shapes  have  bones  ?  5.  Of  what 
two  materials  are  they  made  ?  6.  How  can  you  obtain  the  earthy 
material?  7.  How  can  you  obtain  the  animal  matter?  8.  Is 
there  more  animal  or  earthy  matter  in  the  bones  of  children  ?  9. 
What  is  it  to  ossify?  10.  When  are  the  bones  strong?  11. 
What  forms  the  earthy  matter  in  bones?  12.  Where  do  we  ob- 
tain it  ?  13.  Who  repairs  the  House  Beautiful  ?  14.  Who  selects 
food  for  the  different  tissues?     15.  What  is  the  periosteum  ?    16 

(323) 


•24  AIDS  TC    TEACHERS  A  YD  SCHOLARS, 

:-'-  it   i:  :      :~.  For  what  are  the  holes  in  bones?     it 

s   the  lifference  between  a  dead  and  a  living  bone?     19 

:  we  call  the  animal  matter  of  bones  ?     20.  How  should 

a  baby  be  lifted?     Why?     21.  Is  there  more  animal  or  earthy 

D  i  fcer  in  the  bones  of  old  people?     22.  Why  is  it  dangerous  for 

people   -_:   fall?     23.  What  is  "rickets"?     24.  What  is  the 

best  bone-building  food  ?     25.  What  does  "  bolting  "  do  : 


Questions  on  Chapter  III. — Page  21. 

1.  What  is  the  framework  of  our  House  Beautiful?     2.  How 
do  the  walls  of  our  house  differ  from  bricks  ?     3.  Why  do  they 
not   wear   out  ?     4.  Do  we  ever   know   anything  about  it  ?     5. 
at  irz  these  walls  called  ?     How  many  muscles  are  there?    6. 
How  is  the  framework  held  together?     7.  How  do  these  braces 
hold  it  ?     8.  What  are  joints  ?     9.  How  many  kinds  are  men- 
tioned?    10.  What  covers  the  end  of  a  bone  at  a  joint?     Why? 
11.  He ""  is  the  knee  joint  enclosed?     How   held?     12.  What 
makes  the  joints  move  ?     13.  Of  what  is  the  largest  part  of  our 
body  made?     14.   How   are   muscles   made?     15.  How7  does  a 
musc't  resemble  thread  ?     16.  What  wraps  each  muscular  fibre  ? 
17.   What  is  this  blanket  called  ?     18.  What  is  this  sheath  called  ? 
19.  How  are  the  fibres  placed  together  ?     20.  Of  what  are  fibres 
made?     21.  What  takes  place  in  them  ?     22.  What  might  these 
nbrillse  be  called  ?     23.  What  is  the  sheath  that  encloses  a  mus- 
cle called?     24.  What  does  it  mean  ?     25.  Where  is  fat  always 
found?     With  what?     26.  With  what  are  muscles  supplied ?   27. 
C ;■■""'".:     :    e  muse  7 5  attached  to  the  bone?     28.  What  gives  the 
fcs  shape?     29.  What  effect  has  use  upon  muscles?     30. 
-.  v  are  they  arranged  on  the  trunk  of  the  body  ?     31.  Why  is 
inangement  r:  od  ?     32.  How  can  you  make  muscles  strong- 
er a  zt  ':     33.  What  is  the  result  of  overwork  ?     34.  When 
s  repaired  ?  35.  Why  is  it  wise  to  build  up  strong  walls  ? 
-  we  think  of  a  house  that  needed  external  sup- 
por.E  '■      37.    Does   our   house    need    external    supports?      38 
:n  should  we  trust  ? 


QUESTIOXS  ON  CHAPTER  IV. 


Questions  on  Chapter  IV.— Page  28. 


3^5 


1.  What  is  a  minister?  What  is  a  servant  ?  2.  What  depends 
upon  the  servants  of  the  House  Beautiful  ?  3.  Under  what  two 
heads  are  they  comprised?  Name  them.  4.  Where  do  we  find 
the  voluntary  muscles,  and  what  is  their  use  ?  5.  How  do  we  re- 
semble a  snail  ?  6.  How  are  joints  formed  ?  7.  What  is  upon 
the  end  of  each  bone?  And  what  is  it  like  ?  8.  How  oiled  ?  9. 
What  holds  the  bones  in  place?  10.  What  is  mulishness  in  a 
boy  called  ?  11.  What  is  obstinacy  in  a  grown  person  called  ? 
12.  What  is  perseverance  in  a  ligament  called  ?  13.  Of  what  use 
is  it  ?  14.  If  you  feel  up  and  down  your  back  what  will  you  find  ? 
15.  Of  what  is  the  spinal  column  made  ?  16.  How  are  they  fas- 
tened together  ?  17.  What  is  between  the  rings  of  the  backbone  ? 
18.  What  happens  when  you  lean  forward  ?  19.  What  do  the 
ligaments  do  when  you  straighten  up  ?  20.  What  is  the  business 
of  the  ligaments?  21.  What  do  they  do  when  a  bone  is  dis- 
located ?  22.  Do  the  bones  help?  23.  Do  all  the  muscles  help? 
24.  What  does  this  teach  us  ?  25.  What  is  tonicity  ?  26.  What 
is  sensibility  of  a  muscle  ?  27.  What  is  contractility  of  a  mus- 
cle ?  28.  How  are  the  muscles  that  move  the  arm  fastened  ?  29. 
What  bends  the  elbow  ?  What  straightens  it  ?  30.  Why  must 
we  have  two  sets  of  servants  or  muscles?  31.  What  are  the 
flexors  ?  The  extensors  ?  32.  Do  they  ever  interfere  with  each 
other  ?  33.  Does  a  muscle  change  in  size  in  contracting  ?  34. 
Where  does  the  weight  of  the  body  rest  when  standing  erect? 
35.  What  muscles  keep  us  erect  ?  36.  How  do  we  walk  ? 
What  protects  us  from  jars?  38.  Do  the  muscles  assist  us  in 
sitting  ?  39.  When  do  we  rest  best  ?  40.  Of  what  servants  have 
we  been  speaking?  41.  Of  what  do  the  involuntary  muscles 
take  charge?  42.  Why  is  standing  more  tiresome  than  walking? 
— Ans.  Because  in  standing  only  one  set  of  muscles  is  employed. 
while  in  walking  there  is  a  constant  change  from  one  set  to  ano- 
ther. 


326  AIDS  TO   TEACHERS  AND  SCHOLARS. 


Questions  on  Chapter  V. — Page  38. 

1.  What  is  peculiar  about  our  House  Beautiful  ?  2.  What  kind 
of  a  covering  should  such  a  house  have  ?  3.  What  is  the  sid- 
ing ?  4.  How  fastened? — Ans.  To  elastic  tissue.  5.  What  is 
the  sheathing  of  the  house  ?  6.  Of  what  is  it  made  ?  7.  What 
causes  "goose  flesh"?  8.  What  is  the  second  layer  called? 
Describe  it.  9.  Where  can  you  see  these  papillae?  10.  What 
Is  above  the  true  skin?  11.  What  is  in  the  lower  layer  ?  12. 
What  is  the  color  of  the  true  skin  of  a  negro?  13.  What  is 
the  outer  layer  of  the  epidermis  called  ?  14.  Of  what  is  it  made  ? 
15.  How  many  of  these  cells  to  the  square  inch? — Ans.  A  bil- 
lion. 16.  Of  what  use  is  the  epidermis  ?  17.  What  makes  cal- 
lous places  on  the  skin  ?  18.  What  is  the  function  of  an  organ  ? 
— Ans.  It  is  the  office  which  it  performs.  The  function  of  the 
stomach  is  digestion;  of  the  liver,  secretion  of  bile.  19.  What 
are  two  functions  of  the  skin  ?  20.  What  does  the  owner  do  it 
the  house  gets  too  hot  ?  21.  How  is  the  cooling  process  accom- 
plished ?  22.  Describe  the  sweat  glands.  23.  How  long  a  tube 
would  these  coils  make?  24.  How  many  to  a  square  inch  on  the 
cheeks?  Forehead?  Palms?  25.  What  is  passing  out  through 
them?  26.  What  is  it  called  ?  27.  How  much  is  thrown  out  in 
24  hours  ?  28.  Under  severe  exercise  how  much  ?  29.  Why  can 
men  stay  in  a  hot  oven  without  harm  ?  30.  What  is  the  normal 
(natural)  temperature  of  the  body  ?  31.  What  is  the  effect  of  the 
solid  part  of  the  perspiration  remaining  on  the  skin  ?  32.  What  is 
the  effect  of  stopping  all  the  pores  of  the  skin  ?  33.  What  is  a  third 
function  of  the  skin  ? — Ans,  It  absorbs  ;  medicines  are  sometimes 
administered  through  the  skin  by  absorption.  34.  What  are  the 
nails  ?  35.  What  about  the  layers  ?  36.  What  do  they  protect  ? 
37.  What  is  a  thatch  ?  38.  What  can  you  tell  about  the  roof  of 
our  House  Beautiful  ?  39.  How  should  we  care  for  it?  40. 
What  is  at  the  root  of  each  hair?  41.  Who  makes  the  best 
nair-oil  ?  42.  Where  else  are  these  hairs?  43.  What  is  the 
barr?     44.  Of  what  does  it  consist  ?     45.  Where  do  the  roots  of 


quest io ys  oy  CHAPTER  VI.  327 

the  hair  originate  ?  46.  What  and  where  is  the  mother  of  the 
hair?  47.  Where  is  the  coloring  matter  of  the  hair  ?  48.  Wht 
is  the  form  of  the  root  of  the  hair?  What  empties  there  3  49. 
What  are  the  oil-boitles  called  ?  And  where  found  ?  50.  vVhat 
is  their  use?     51.   How  many  hairs  on  the  head? 


Questions  on  Chapter  VI.— Page  45. 

1.  What  is  an  observatory?  2.  Who  resides  in  the  observa- 
tory of  our  house  ?  3.  How  many  bones  in  the  head  ?  4.  What 
bone  is  movable  ?  5.  Where  is  it  joined  to  the  other  bones  of  the 
head  ?  6.  How  are  the  bones  of  the  skull  divided  ?  7.  How 
many  form  the  cranium  ?  8.  Name  the  one  at  the  back  of  the 
head.  9.  Name  the  two  at  the  sides.  10.  What  one  makes  the 
arches  over  the  two  windows?  II.  What  is  on  the  outside  of 
the  skull  ?  12.  Where  are  the  windows  ?  How  many  are  there  ? 
13.  Upon  what  does  the  observatory  rest?  14.  What  holds  up 
the  observatory  ?  15.  What  is  the  name  of  this  bone?  16.  How 
does  it  differ  from  other  vertebras  ?  17.  How  is  the  opening  in  it 
divided  ?  18.  What  passes  behind  this  band?  19.  What  passes 
up  before  it  ?  20.  What  does  this  form  ?  21.  What  is  this  second 
vertebra  called  ?  22.  What  rests  upon  the  two  depressions  of  the 
atlas?  When?  23.  What  forms  the  neck?  24.  What  is  their 
use?  25.  What  different  motions  has  the  head?  26.  Why  is 
there  no  need  of  a  skylight?  27.  How  much  will  the  cavity  of 
the  skull  hold  ?  28.  What  does  it  contain  ?  29.  What  lines  the 
bony  cavity  of  the  skull  ?  30.  What  does  dura  mater  mean  ? 
31.  What  membrane  is  inside  of  this  ?  32.  What  is  inside  of  the 
arachnoid  ?  What  does  it  contain  ?  33.  What  does  a  French 
writer  call  the  brain  ?  34.  Describe  the  brain.  35.  What  are  the 
depressions  in  the  external  surface  of  the  brain  called? — Ans. 
Sulci.  36.  What  do  the  number  and  depth  of  these  sulci  de- 
note ?  37.  What  two  colors  in  the  substance  of  the  brain  ?  38 
Which  is  on  the  inside  ?  39.  Of  what  is  the  gray  matter  com- 
posed ?     40.  What  does  it  generate?     41.  Of  what  is  the  white 


323  AIDS  TO   TEACHERS  AND  SCHOLARS 

matter  composed  ?  What  is  its  office  ?  42.  Is  the  brain  hard  ot 
soft?  43.  What  is  the  average  weight  of  a  brain?  44.  How  is 
the  brain  divided  ?  45.  Where  is  the  great  brain  ?  46.  Where 
is  the  small  brain  ?  47.  What  connects  the  two  ?  48.  What 
holds  the  brain-cells  together  ?  49.  What  is  a  cluster  of  them 
called  ?  50.  What  forms  a  battery  ?  51.  What  does  it  produce  ? 
52.  Of  what  use  is  this  battery  ? 


Questions  on  Chapter  VII. — Page  53. 
1.  How  many  front-doors  has  our  House  Beautiful  ?  2.  What 
color  are  they?  3.  What  can  they  do?  4.  What  is  mucous 
membrane?  5.  Where  is  it  found?  6.  How  many  teeth  have 
we  ?  7.  What  are  the  four  in  the  centre  called  ?  8.  What  are 
those  next  to  the  incisors?  9.  Which  are  the  bi-cuspids  ?  Why 
so  called  ?  10.  Which  are  the  molars  ?  How  many  ?  11.  What 
do  these  different  teeth  do  ?  12.  Why  do  babies  have  no  teeth  ? 
13.  What  assistants  are  there  in  the  hall?  W here  located  ?  14. 
Where  are  the  teeth  before  they  appear  to  view  ?  1 5.  How  many 
first  teeth  are  there?  16.  When  can  babies  begin  to  eat  starchy 
foods?  17.  Why  not  before?  18.  How  must  starch  be  changed 
to  be  digested  ?  19.  Who  does  this  work?  20.  Where  are  the 
second  teeth  while  the  first  are  in  the  mouth?  21.  Which  sec- 
ond teeth  appear  first?  At  what  age  ?  22.  Which  next  ?  At 
what  age  ?  23.  When  do  the  second  incisors  appear  ?  24.  The 
bi-cuspids  ?  The  canines  ?  The  second  molars  ?  The  wisdom  ? 
25.  Will  we  have  a  third  set  of  teeth  ?  26.  Are  the  teeth  bone  ? 
What  are  they  ?  27.  How  are  they  set  in  the  gum  ?  28.  What 
is  the  enamel  ?  29.  What  is  inside  of  this  ?  30.  What  is  in 
the  cavity  of  the  tooth  ?  31.  Which  is  the  crown  of  the  tooth  ? 
Which  the  fang?  The  neck?  32.  How  should  we  care  for  the 
teeth? 


Questions  on  Chapter  VIII.— Page  59. 
I.  What  is  the  uvula?    What  does  it  do?    o.  What  is  the 
pharynx  ?— Ans.  The  back  part  of  the  throat.     2.  What  are  the 


QUESTIONS  OX  CHAPTER  IX.  329 

kitchen  stairs  called  ?  3.  What  is  the  peculiarity  of  the  oesoph- 
agus? 4.  What  is  at  the  bottom  of  the  oesophagus?  5.  What 
is  this  door  called  ? — Ans.  The  cardiac  orifice.  6.  What  is  the 
shape  of  the  kitchen  ?  What  is  its  color?  7.  What  is  peculiar 
about  the  walls?  8.  What  is  this  for?  9.  What  are  in  the 
walls?  10.  What  are  these  hollows? — ANS.  They  are  glands. 
11.  What  is  their  function? — Ans.  The  secretion  of  gastric 
juice.  12.  What  do  we  call  gastric  juice? — Ans.  The  cook. 
13.  What  organ  do  we  call  the  kitchen  of  our  house? — Ans. 
The  stomach.  14.  How  many  walls  has  the  stomach?  15 
What  power  have  they?  16.  In  which  direction  do  the  different 
walls  contract?  17.  What  effect  has  this  upon  the  food  in  the 
stomach?  18.  How  long  is  this  motion  continued?  19.  What 
does  gastric  juice  do  ?  20.  What  opening  leads  out  of  the 
stomach  ?  21.  What  is  a  sphincter  muscle? — Ans.  It  is  a  cir- 
cular muscle  that  closes  an  orifice,  as  the  sphincter  muscle  of  the 
mouth?  22.  What  is  done  with  fluids  taken  into  the  stomach  ? 
23.  What  is  the  effect  if  fluids  are  taken  during  digestion  ?  24. 
What  if  the  fluids  are  cold  ?  25.  What  is  the  normal  tempera- 
ture of  the  stomach  ?  26.  Why  should  we  chew  our  food  thor- 
oughly? 27.  Why  should  we  not  eat  too  much?  28.  Why- 
should  we  eat  regularly  ?  29.  Ought  we  to  take  fluids  between 
meals  ?  30.  Ought  we  to  drink  cold  fluids  during  digestion  ? 
31.  Ought  we  to  drink  hot  fluids  during  digestion? 


Questions  on  Chapter  IX. — Page  65. 

I.  What  is  the  door  leading  out  of  the  stomach  called?  2. 
What  does  it  mean  ?  3.  When  is  the  food  allowed  to  pass  this 
guard  ?  4.  If  food  is  not  digested  what  happens?  5.  If  it  can 
not  be  digested  what  happens  ?  6.  What  effect  may  this  have  on 
the  pylorus  ?  7.  If  dangerous  substances  are  taken  into  the 
stomach  what  happens  ?  8.  How  long  a  time  is  employed  in 
stomach  digestion  ?  9.  What  is  the  duodenum? — ANS.  It  is  the 
beginning  of  the  small  intestines.     10.  Why  is  it  so  called  ?     11 


330  AIDS  TO    TEACHERS  AXD  SCHOLARS. 

With  what  is  the  duodenum  fitted  up  ?  12.  What  is  their  func 
tion  ? — Ans.  First,  to  present  a  larger  surface  for  secretion 
second,  to  prevent  the  food  passing  along  too  fast ;  third,  by  thus 
preventing  a  too  rapid  passage  of  the  food  to  assist  in  mixing  it 
more  thoroughly.  13.  What  assistants  begin  their  work  in  this 
room?  14.  What  organ  secretes  pancreatic  juice?  15.  What 
organ  secretes  bile?  16.  How  do  they  reach  the  duodenum? 
17.  Are  they  alike  in  their  functions  ?  18.  What  are  the  kinds 
of  food  we  eat?  Name  them.  19.  What  does  saliva  digest ? 
20.  What  does  gastric  juice  digest  ?  21.  What  does  pancreatic 
juice  digest  ?  22.  What  does  bile  digest  ?  23.  What  other 
work  does  he  do?  24.  What  is  biliousness  ?  25.  Why  do  we 
need  fat  ?  26.  Why  do  we  need  less  meat  in  summer  than  in 
winter  ? 


Questions  on  Chapter  X. — Page  71. 

1.  How  wide  and  long  is  the  dining-room?  2.  Where  is  it 
situated  ?  How  many  walls  ?  Describe  them.  3.  What  are  the 
first  two-fifths  of  the  dining-room  called  ?  4.  What  are  the  other 
three-fifths  called  ?  5.  What  is  the  dining-room  ?  6.  What 
fluid  is  secreted  by  the  small  intestines  ?  7.  What  is  its  func- 
tion ?  8.  What  are  found  in  the  small  intestines  ?  9.  What  are 
the  functions  of  the  villi  ?  10.  What  is  the  food  in  the  small  n- 
testines  called  ?  11.  What  do  the  villi  do  for  us  ?  12.  What  do 
they  do  with  what  they  eat?  13.  Follow  a  mouthful  of  food 
through  the  process  of  digestion.  14.  What  moves  the  food 
through  the  intestines?  15.  What  is  this  motion  called?  16. 
What  may  cause  a  pain  in  the  bowels  ?  17.  What  do  we  find 
at  the  lower  end  of  the  small  intestines  ?  18.  Into  what  does  it 
open  ?  19.  What  lines  the  walls  of  the  colon  ?  20.  Is  all  the 
food  which  we  eat  entirely  used  up  ?  31.  What  really  nourishes 
us"* 


QUESTIONS  ON  CHAPTER  XI.  33 ) 


Questions  on  Chapter  XL— Page  79. 

1.  How  many  tenants  has  the  House  Beautiful  ?  2.  What  hap- 
pens when  the  tenant  moves  out  ?  3.  How  can  we  tell  whether 
the  tenant  has  moved  out  ?  4.  What  is  peculiar  about  the  House 
Beautiful  ?     5.  In  very  new  house*    how  does  the  engine  work  ? 

6.  At  one  year  old  how  many  strokes  will  it   make  in  a  minute? 

7.  At  three  years  old?  8.  At  thirty  years?  At  eighty?  9.  It 
the  engine  varies  from  this  what  do  we  know?  10.  What  is 
the  engine?  n.  Where  does  the  heart  lie  ?  12.  What  shape  is 
the  heart?  13.  How  is  the  heart  divided  first?  14.  How  is  it 
then  divided?  15.  What  are  the  upper  divisions  called?  16. 
What  are  the  lower  divisions  called  ?  17.  Which  are  the  larger? 
— Ans.  The  ventricles.  18.  What  kind  of  blood  is  in  the  right 
side  of  the  heart?  19.  What  kind  in  the  left  side?  20.  Wh&t 
brings  the  blood  from  the  upper  part  of  the  body  to  the  heart  ? 
21.  What  brings  it  from  the  lower  part  of  the  body?  22.  Where 
does  it  empty? — Ans.  Into  the  right  auricle.  23.  What  sends 
the  blood  into  the  right  ventricle?  24.  What  is  there  between 
the  auricle  and  ventricle?  25.  Why  can  not  the  valves  swing 
back  into  the  auricle  ?  26.  Where  does  the  blood  go  from  the 
right  ventricle  ?  27.  What  valves  are  here?  28.  What  brings 
the  blood  to  the  left  auricle?  From  where  ?  29.  Where  does 
the  blood  go  from  the  left  auricle  ?  33.  Where  from  the  left  ven- 
tricle? 31.  Where  from  the  aorta?  32.  Where  are  the  bi-cus- 
pid  valves  ?  33.  Where  are  the  tri-cuspid  valves  ?  34.  What 
other  name  have  the  bi-cuspid  valves  ?  Why?  35.  Which  side 
of  the  heart  has  the  thicker  walls?  Why?  36.  How  much  will 
sach  ventricle  hold  ?  37.  How  often  does  a  man's  heart  beat  in  a 
minute?  38.  How  often  in  an  hour?  39.  How  many  strokes 
will  that  make  in  an  hour?  40.  How  many  strokes  in  a  day? 
41.  How  many  ounces  will  the  heart  raise  in  a  day  ?  How  many 
tons  ?  42.  When  does  the  heart  rest  ?  43.  When  does  it  rest 
most  ?     44.    What  is  the  effect  of  over-exertion  upon  the  heart  ? 


332  AIDS  TO    TEACHERS  AND  SCHOLARS. 


Questions  on  Chapter  XII. — Page  87. 

I.  What  is  the  duty  of  a  housekeeper  ?  2.  Who  does  the  re- 
pairing? 3.  Who  selects  the  material?  4.  And  gives  it  td 
whom  ?  5.  Who  is  the  housekeeper  of  our  house  ?  Starts  from 
where  ?  6.  What  makes  the  color  of  her  dress  ?  7.  With  what 
f.re  the  red  corpuscles  loaded  and  what  do  they  do  ?  8.  What 
is  the  shape  of  these  corpuscles?  9.  How  many  of  them  in  an 
inch  side  by  side?  10.  What  else  does  the  blood  carr)  ? 
1 1.  What  size,  and  how  many?  12.  In  what  do  these  corpuscles 
Moat?  13.  Through  what  hall  does  the  housekeeper  go?  14. 
What  force  hurries  her  along  and  through  what  doors?  I5# 
Where  does  she  go  through  the  halls?  16.  Describe  these 
halls,  their  name.  17.  How  can  you  feel  the  blood  passing 
through  the  arteries?  18.  When  the  halls  are  very  narrow  what 
are  they  called?  19.  How  does  blood  change  her  dress  in  the 
capillaries  ?  20.  What  does  she  carry  back  toward  the  heart  ? 
21.  How  does  she  leave  the  capillaries?  22.  How  does  she 
reach  the  heart  from  the  feet  ?  23.  How  from  the  upper  part  of 
the  body  ?  24.  How  do  the  veins  differ  from  the  arteries  ?  25. 
Do  they  communicate  with  each  other  ?  26.  What  veins  are 
provided  with  valves  ?  27.  What  does  holding  your  hand  above 
your  head  prove  ?  28.  How  does  the  blood  flow  through  veins  ? 
Through  arteries  ?     29.  How  is  knowledge  of  this  fact  useful  ? 

30.  What  is  the  difference  between  cutting  an  artery  and  a  vein  ? 

31.  How  much  more  blood  do  the  capillaries  contain  than  the 
arteries  ?  32.  What  portion  of  the  body — in  weight — is  blood  ? 
33.  Hew  long  is  the  blood  in  passing  through  the  heart  ?  34. 
Where  does  the  blood  travel  faster — in  arteries  or  veins  ?  35. 
How  many  inches  in  a  second  near  the  heart  ?  36.  At  the  foot 
how  many  ?  37.  How  do  the  corpuscles  move  in  the  capillaries  ? 
38.  Do  they  crowd  each  other?  39.  Where  do  capillaries  ex- 
ist ?  40.  What  is  blushing?  41.  What  is  finer  than  a  needle- 
point ?  42.  What  will  the  housekeeper  do  if  the  door  is  opened  ? 
4.3.     Who  stops  bleeding  when  it  occurs  ?     44.  What  does  she 


QUESTIONS  ON  CHAPTER  XIII.  333 

carry  with  her?  Who  tangles  around  her  feet?  45.  Wnat  is 
this  tangling  called  ?  How  does  it  act  ?  46.  What  stops  the 
bleeding?  47.  Where  does  nutrition  take  place?  48.  How? 
49.  What  does  a  nerve  say?  50.  What  does  a  bone  say  ?  5 l.  A 
muscle?  52.  What  does  a  hair  say?  53.  What  does  each 
one  get  ?  54.  What  if  each  does  not  get  what  he  desires  ?  55. 
Who  has  provided  everything  needful  ?  56.  Where  do  we 
obtain  food  ? 


Questions  on  Chapter  XIII. — Page  95. 

1.  Who  is  our  washerwoman?  2.  Where  does  she  enter? 
3.  What  if  she  is  cold  ?  4.  What  occurs  to  foreigners  ?  5.  Where 
does  she  now  enter ?  6.  Through  what  stairway  does  she  go? 
Its  name?  7.  What  keeps  it  open?  How  many?  S.  Where 
does  the  trachea  divide?  9.  Where  do  they  lead?  10.  What 
are  they  called?  II.  In  what  do  they  terminate?  12.  How 
large  are  these  tubs?  13.  How  many  tubs  or  air-cells  in  the 
lungs?  14.  How  thick  are  the  walls  of  these  air-cells  ?  15.  How 
large  a  surface  would  they  cover?  16.  How  does  the  blood  reach 
the  lungs?  17.  How  small  are  the  smallest  capillary  tubes  ?  18. 
What  do  they  resemble  ?  19.  What  are  they  called  ?  20.  What 
do  they  encircle  ?  21.  With  what  are  they  filled  ?  22.  Of  what 
does  the  laundry  consist?  23.  What  is  remarkable  about  these 
rooms  ?  24.  What  is  the  floor  of  the  thorax  called  ?  Its  shape  ? 
25.  How  does  this  change  the  cavity  of  the  thorax  ?  26.  What 
are  the  bony  walls  of  the  thorax  ?  27.  With  what  covered  ?  How 
do  they  act?  28.  How  do  we  breathe  the  air  out?  29.  What 
is  breathing  in  called?  Breathing  out?  30.  Both  together? 
What  is  expiration  ?  31.  What  do  physiologists  say  ?  32.  Why 
are  the  two  types  of  breathing  so  called  ?  33.  WThat  is  my  se- 
cret ?  34.  Which  type  of  breathing  is  artificial  ? — ANS  The 
♦hoiacic.  35.  Who  know  how  to  breathe  ?  36.  Why  did  Aura 
enter  the  house  with  alacrity  ?  37.  What  is  she  always  trying  to 
do?  38.  What  is  Aura's  washing  fluid?  39.  What  does  she 
receive  from  the  blood  ?     40.  What  does  she  give  to  the  blood  ? 


334 


AIDS  TO    TEACHERS  AND  SCHOLARS. 


41  What  effect  does  this  have  on  the  blood?  42.  What  effect 
on  Aura  ?  43.  What  would  happen  if  you  invited  her  back 
at  once?  44.  Where  should  she  shake  her  garments?  What 
happens  ?  45.  What  is  osmosis  ?  46.  Describe  washing  the 
blood.  47.  How  often  does  Aura  go  in  and  out  ?  48.  Why  do 
we  breathe  ?  49.  What  is  the  most  important  food  of  the  body  ? 
Why?  50.  Why  must  the  supply  be  constant?  51.  Where  do 
we  get  hungry?  52.  Where  do  we  get  thirsty?  53.  What  is 
sighing?  Yawning?  54.  Are  the  lungs  filled  and  emptied  at 
every  breath  ?  55.  What  is  a  cube  ?  56.  How  much  does  a  pint 
cup  hold  ?  57.  How  much  goes  in  and  out  with  every  breath  ? 
58.  What  is  this  called  ?  59.  What  is  complemental  air  ?  60. 
What  is  reserve  air?  61.  What  is  residual  air?  62.  What  is 
vital  capacity  ?  63.  What  peculiarity  of  the  Gas  family  is  men- 
tioned ?  64.  What  is  this  called  ?  65.  What  are  the  cilia  ?  66. 
What  do  they  do  ?  67.  What  ought  we  to  think  about  breath- 
ing ?  68.  What  is  our  best  food  ?  69.  What  poison  does  Aura 
sometimes  take  with  her?  70.  Have  we  a  right  to  pure  air? 
71.  By  what  door  should  Aura  enter  and  depart?  72.  What  is 
snoring  ?  73.  What  doors  should  you  shut  on  going  to  sleep  ? 
74.  Why  should  you  shut  the  mouth  ?  75.  When  should  you 
shut  your  mouth  and  open  your  eyes  ? 


Questions  on  Chapter  XIV. — Page  107. 

1.  Where  is  the  furnace  located?  2.  What  is  the  furnace? 
3.  What  are  glands?  4.  What  does  the  liver  manufacture? 
How  do  we  know?  5.  How  can  we  prove  that  there  is  a  fire? 
6.  How  much  does  the  liver  weigh  ?  7.  How  large  is  it  ?  8. 
Where  does  it  lie  ?  9.  What  effect  has  a  tight  dress  ?  10.  How 
does  it  complain?  11.  What  does  being  bilious  mean?  12. 
How  is  the  liver  divided?  13.  What  is  in  a  niche  in  the  right 
jobe?  14.  How  much  does  it  hold?  With  what  filled?  Its 
name?  15.  What  makes  the  quartette  of  quintettes ?  16.  What 
does  the  portal  vein  say?     17.  What  is  the  portal  system  ?     18 


QUESTIONS  OX  CHAPTER  XVI.  335 

Wh.it  are  lobules  ?  19.  What  between  the  lobules  ?  20.  What 
artery  brings  blood  to  the  liver?  21.  What  does  the  hepatic  duct 
do?  22.  How  much  bile  made  each  day?  23.  How  is  the  bile 
used?  24.  Where  is  the  bile  probably  made?  25.  Where  ia 
the  sugar  made  ?  26.  What  is  stranger  than  a  fairy  tale  ?  27. 
Out  of  what  do  they  make  the  sugar?  28.  How  is  sugar  used 
in  the  body  ?  29.  Why  should  we  not  eat  too  much  candy?  30. 
What  is  the  normal  temperature  of  our  house?  31.  Are  we  as 
warm  as  we  suppose  when  we  run  ?  32.  What  is  a  second  way 
in  which  our  house  is  heated?  33.  What  is  oxidation?  34. 
What  is  the  third  way  of  warming  our  house?  35.  What  do 
the  lungs  do  to  the  cold  air  ?  36.  What  three  modes  then  of 
heating  the  house?  37.  How  much  does  sawing  wood  raise  the 
temperature  of  the  biceps  muscle  ? 


Questions  on  Chapter  XV.— Page  115. 
1.  What  is  secretion?  2.  What  is  excretion  ?  3.  Why  are 
the  mysterious  chambers  not  excretory  organs  ?  4.  What  are 
they  ?  5.  Why  are  they  not  for  secretion  ?  6.  Where  is  the 
thyroid  gland  ?  7.  Where  is  the  thymus  gland  ?  8.  What  can 
you  tell  about  them  ?  9.  Where  are  the  pituitary  body  and  pi- 
neal gland?  10.  Who  find  out  about  their  use?  11.  Where 
are  the  supra-renal  capsules?  12.  What  did  Addison  think  they 
were  for  ?  13.  Where  are  the  tonsils  ?  They  are  a  pair  of  mys- 
terious chambers  in  the  hall  or  mouth,  just  in  front  of  the  pink 
curtain.  14.  What  can  you  say  about  them?  15.  What  is  the 
last  mysterious  chamber,  and  where  located?  16.  How  large  is 
it?  17.  What  is  the  spleen  ?  18.  What  have  physiologists  no- 
ticed ?     19.  Of  what  do  they  feel  sure  ? 


Questions  on  Chapter  XVI.— Page  122. 
1.  Where  is  the  central  office  in  our  telegraph  system?    Name 
it.     2.  How  many  cells  are  employed  by  the  Western  Union  Tele- 


336  AIDS   TO    TEACHERS  AND  SCHOLARS. 

graph  Company?  How  many  in  our  system ?  3.  What  do  we 
call  our  electricity  ?     4.   What  do  we  call  our  telegraph   wires  ? 

5.  How  many  pairs  of  nerve-cables  go  out  from  the  central  office  ? 

6.  What  is  a  nerve-cable  ? — Ans.  A  great  number  of  nerves  go- 
ing out  in  a  bundle  enclosed  in  one  sheath.  7.  Where  are  our 
bi  anch  offices  located  ?  8.  How  many  of  them  are  there  ?  9. 
How  are  the  vertebrae  put  together?      10.  What  passes  down 

h rough  these  holes  ?  1 1.  Of  what  is  the  spinal  cord  made  ?  12. 
Where  are  the  gray  cells  in  the  brain?  13.  Where  are  they  in 
the  spinal  cord  ?  14.  By  what  are  they  surrounded  ?  15.  What 
does  this  white  material  form  ?  16.  From  what  points  do  they 
issue?  17.  Where  are  these  white  threads  distributed ?  18. 
What  is  a  ganglion?  19.  What  may  it  be  considered?  20. 
What  is  the  cerebro-spinal  nervous  system?  21.  What  is  the 
meaning  of  insulated  ? — Ans.  When  a  wire  is  wrapped  in  such 
a  way  that  the  electricity  can  not  pass  from  that  wire  to  another 
it  is  called  insulated.  22.  What  is  the  sheath  of  the  nerve-cable 
called  ?  23.  Describe  a  nerve.  24.  What  is  the  axis  cylinder  of 
a  nerve?  25.  What  is  communicated  through  it  ?  26.  How  do 
nerve-fibres  terminate  ?  27.  Do  nerve-cables  interchange  fibres  ? 
28.  Do  the  fibres  lose  their  identity  ?  29.  How  many  kinds  oi 
nerve-fibres  ?  30.  What  is  the  duty  of  a  nerve  of  sensation  ?  31. 
What  is  the  duty  of  a  nerve  of  motion  ?  32.  Do  they  ever  ex- 
change works  ?  33.  Do  they  communicate  with  each  other  ?  34. 
Where  do  they  go  to  give  their  information  ?  35.  What  are  the 
nerve-cables  that  pass  out  from  the  front  of  the  spinal  cord  ?  36. 
What  from  the  back  part  of  the  cord  ? 


Questions  on  Chapter  XVII.— Page  129. 

1.  What  is  a  phonograph  ?  2.  Have  we  anything  like  it  in  our 
House  Beautiful  ?  3.  What  does  it  repeat  ?  4.  What  is  it  called  ? 
5.  What  do  we  find  on  the  sensory  nerves  of  the  cerebro-spinal 
system  ?  6.  What  are  these  ganglia  ?  7.  Where  does  the  other 
division  begin?     8.  How  many  of  these  ganglia?     9.  Where  do 


QUESTIONS  ON  CHAPTER  XVIII.  337 

they  pass?  10.  How  are  they  intimately  connected  with  the 
cerebro-spinal  system?  11.  What  do  we  find  in  every  part  oi 
the  body  ?  12.  What  do  the  fibres  of  the  sympathetic  system 
form?  13,  Where  are  they  found?  14  What  is  a  plexus? 
15.  Where  does  the  cerebro-spinal  system  carry  messages?  16. 
From  whom  does  the  sympathetic  system  receive  its  orders  ? 
17.  What  govern  all  bodily  processes  which  are  not  under  contra1 
of  the  will  ?  iS.  Give  an  illustration.  19.  How  can  we  gov  1 1 
the  action  of  the  lungs  ?     20.  What  can  you  say  of  swallowing  ? 

21.  What  two   nervous  systems  govern  the  act  of  swallowing? 

22.  Is  digestion  voluntary?  23.  Describe  digestion.  24.  What 
orders  are  given  when  food  enters  the  duodenum?  25.  What 
takes  place  in  the  small  intestines  ?  26.  Into  what  glands  does 
the  food  pass  ?  27.  Through  what  duct  ?  2S.  Into  what  vein  ? 
29.  Where  ?  30.  What  is  done  with  that  which  is  not  nourish- 
ing ?  31.  What  are  the  strainers  ?  32.  What  do  they  separate 
from  the  blood  ? 


Questions  on  Chapter  XVIII. — Page  134. 

r.  What  safeguard  has  our  House  ?  2.  What  have  you 
learned  in  regard  to  the  Observatory  ?  3.  What  in  regard  to 
the  Telegraph  ?  4.  For  what  purpose  are  some  of  these  wires 
and  batteries  used  ?     5.  To  what  part  of  the  House  do  they  go  ? 

6.  What  nerves  are  we  speaking  of  and  where  do  they  arise  ? 

7.  What  is  said  of  Pain  ?  8.  What  in  regard  to  his  warnings  ? 
9.  Where  do  the  Nerves  of  Sensation  end  ?  10.  Where  are  they 
most  abundant  ?  II.  What  can  we  see  at  the  ends  of  our  fin- 
gers ?  12.  Where  are  the  tactile  corpuscles  in  greatest  num- 
bers ?  13.  What  proportion  of  them  on  the  ends  of  the  fingers  ? 
14.  What  on  the  second  joint  ?  15.  What  is  the  forearm?  16. 
Why  should  we  expect  that  the  forearm  would  not  be  very  sen- 
sitive ?  17.  Why  are  some  parts  of  the  body  more  sensitive  than 
others  ? — Ans.  Because  they  are  supplied  with  a  greater  propor- 
tion of  tactile  corpuscles  in  the  papillae.  18.  What  sensations 
have  we  besides  pain?  19.  What  illustration  of  how  the  sense 
of  touch  can  be  educated  ? 

15 


338 


AIDS  TO   TEACHERS  AND  SCHOLARS. 


Questions  on  Chapter  XIX. — Page  137. 

1.  How  many  senses  have  you  been  told  that  you  have 
2.  How  many  have  you  ?  3.  What  can  you  tell  of  yourself  with 
your  eyes  shut?  4.  In  lifting  a  pail  of  water,  of  what  do  you 
think  ?  5.  Do  you  have  to  try  twice  in  order  to  know  how  much 
strength  to  use  to  lift  it?  6.  How  do  you  know  just  how  much 
strength  Xr  use?  7.  What  do  we  call  this  sixth  sense?  8. 
What  do  you  learn  by  muscular  sense  ?  9.  How  acute  does 
this  sense  become  by  cultivation  ?  Illustrate.  10.  In  walking 
what  does  muscular  sense  tell  us?  II.  How  does  the  loss  of 
this  sense  in  the  legs  and  back  affect  one?  12.  Can  one  sense 
assist  another?  13.  What  sense  assists  muscular  sense?  14. 
What  is  necessary  when  muscular  sense  is  lost  ?  15.  Illustrate. 
16.  Can  muscular  sense  supply  loss  of  sight?  Illustrate.  17. 
Who  have  muscular  sense  well  developed?  18.  Can  you  illus- 
trate this  by  an  incident  of  a  great  fire  in  New  York  ? 


Questions  on  Chapter  XX. — Page  141. 

1.  What  is  the  finest  musical  instrument?  2.  What  is  in  the 
throat  ?  3.  Describe  the  larynx.  4.  What  is  the  epi-glotth  ? 
5.  When  is  it  open  ?  6.  When  closed  ?  7.  What  do  we  find 
near  its  top?  8.  How  are  they  situated?  What  named?  9. 
How  can  you  illustrate  the  larynx  ?  10.  Try  it.  What  do  your 
thumbs  represent  ?  11.  What  does  the  opening  between  your 
thumbs  represent  ?  12.  What  is  the  movement  when  we  breathe  ? 
13.  What  is  it  to  vibrate  ?  14.  If  sufficiently  rapid  what  will  it 
produce  ?  15.  What  kind  of  a  tone  does  a  long  string  produce  ? 
A  short  one?  16.  How  many  vocal  chords  are  there?  17. 
What  do  the  nine  little  muscles  do?  18.  What  is  the  effect  of 
tightening  the  chords  ?  19.  What  causes  the  tone  in  the  flute  ? 
20.  With  what  does  the  pitch  of  a  note  vary?  21.  How  is  the 
human  voice  produced  ?  22.  In  low  sounds  how  is  the  column 
of  air  affected  ?  In  high  sounds  ?  23.  What  is  the  reed  of  a 
melodeon  ?     24.  What   effect  has  shortening  the  chords  ?     25 


QUEST/OXS  Qti  CHAPTER  XXI.  33Q 

What  causes  the  chords  to  vibrate  ?  What  acts  as  the  sound- 
ing-board of  the  human  organ  ?  26.  What  effect  has  a  sound- 
ing-board ?  27.  What  are  the  bellows  of  the  voice  ?  28.  What 
pumps  these  bellows  ?  29.  What  difference  is  there  invoices? 
30.  What  makes  the  bass  voice  ?  31.  What  the  baritone  or  tenor  ? 
32.  What  the  contralto  or  soprano  ?  33.  What  is  said  of  our 
simple  instrument  ?  34.  What  is  the  range  of  the  human  voice? 
35.  What  is  the  average  compass  ?  36.  What  is  timbre  in  a 
voice  ?  37.  Upon  what  does  it  depend  ?  38.  Can  the  timbre  of 
the  voice  be  changed  by  proper  instruction  ?  39.  Upon  what 
does  the  strength  of  the  voice  depend  ?  40.  How  is  the  voice 
like  a  violin  ?  41.  Why  is  it  like  a  piano  ?  42.  Why  like  a  flute  ? 
43,  Why  more  like  an  organ  ? 


Questions  on  Chapter  XXL— Page  148. 

1.  What  is  the  pinna?  2.  How  is  it  attached  to  the  head  ?  3. 
How  many  muscles  has  each  ear?  4.  What  are  they  called? 
5.  Try  and  move  your  ears.  6.  What  is  in  the  centre  of  the 
pinna?  7.  What  guards  are  stationed  at  the  entrance  to  the 
ear? — Ans.  Hairs  and  ear-wax.  8.  Where  does  the  doorway 
lead  ?  9.  What  is  the  name  of  the  bone  through  which  the  chan- 
nel is  tunneled  ?  10.  How  is  it  lined?  What  is  it  called?  11. 
What  directions  does  this  channel  take?  12.  Does  it  get  larger  ? 
[j.  How  long  is  this  canal?  14.  How  is  it  closed?  15.  Is  it  a 
movable  curtain  ?  16.  How  can  we  get  on  the  other  side  of  the 
curtain?  17.  What  passage  leads  from  the  throat  to  the  ear ? 
10.  How  long  is  it?  19.  What  is  the  auditorium  ?  20.  Where 
is  it  ?  21.  What  is  this  curtain  called?  22.  Which  way  does 
the  top  lean  ?  23.  What  is  the  furniture  of  the  middle  ear.  24. 
Upon  what  does  the  head  of  the  hammer  play?  25.  To  what  is 
the  handle  attached  ?  26.  What  other  furniture  is  there  in  the 
middle  ear?  27.  For  what  is  the  stirrup  used?  28.  What  is 
this  window  called?  29.  Of  what  material  is  this  furniture 
made?     30.   How  arranged  ?    31.   What  is  necessary  ?    32.  How 


340  AIDS  TO   TEA  CHARS  AND  SCHOLARS. 

many  muscles  are  needed  for  this  purpose?  33.  How  are  b  > 
attached  ?  34.  What  is  the  effect  of  their  action  ?  35.  Through 
what  does  an  air-wave  communicate?  36.  What  fills  the  mid- 
dle ear?  37.  How  does  it  communicate  with  the  outer  air?  38. 
How  can  pain  in  the  ear  sometimes  be  relieved  ? 


Questions  on  Chapter  XXII.— Page  155. 

1.  Where  is  our  whispering  gallery?  2.  From  what  point  do 
we  start  to  visit  this  gallery  ?  3.  What  do  we  find  there  ?  4. 
What  do  they  form  ?  5.  What  nerve  does  it  touch  in  passing 
out?  6.  Where  does  it  hide  itself?  7.  Where  does  it  divide ? 
8.  Where  does  one  portion  go  ?  9.  What  kind  of  waves  do  we 
hear?  10.  Through  what  do  they  pass  ?  11  Name  the  three 
bones.  12.  What  closes  the  oval  window?  13.  What  is  be- 
yond this  oval  window?  14.  What  is  the  first  division  of  the 
whispering  gallery?  15.  How  have  we  already  reached  this  same 
place?  16.  To  what  is  the  vestibule  an  entrance?  17.  What 
is  the  meaning  of  labyrinth  ?  18.  What  do  we  find  in  the  vesti- 
bule ?  19.  What  are  the  name  and  shape  of  the  first  ?  20.  What 
of  the  second  ?  21.  What  do  they  contain  ?  22.  What  are  their 
names?  23.  In  what  animals  are  they  found?  24.  What  open 
out  of  the  vestibule?  25.  Where  do  they  lead  ?  26.  By  what 
is  it  surrounded  ?  27.  How  many  of  these  passageways  are 
there  ?  28.  What  do  they  contain  ?  29.  What  is  their  shape  ? 
30.  If  we  enter  one  where  will  we  come  out  ?  31.  Where  is  the 
branch  of  the  nerve  going  to  the  vestibule  distributed?  32. 
Where  do  some  think  the  nerves  terminate  ?  33.  Can  we  hear 
without  the  otoliths?  34.  What  begin  in  the  vestibule?  35. 
How  often  do  they  wind  around  ?  36.  What  is  the  top  like?  37. 
What  is  the  cochlea  ?  38.  What  is  said  of  the  wall  between 
these  sf airways  ?  39.  What  is  in  this  hollow?  40.  What  fills 
this  stairway?  41.  What  do  we  find  climbing  this  stairway? 
42.  How  are  they  standing?  43.  What  do  they  form?  44. 
How  many  of  them  ?     45.  How  many  of  the  little  clubs  make 


QUESTIONS  cW  CHAPTER  XXIII.  34, 

an  inch  in  length?  46.  Where  do  we  find  the  shortest?  47. 
Where  the  longest  ?  48.  What  are  they  called  ?  Why  ?  49. 
What  are  they  altogether  called  ?  50.  Where  does  the  second 
branch  of  this  nerve  go?  51.  What  do  they  pass  through  next? 
52.  Where  is  it  believed  that  they  terminate?  53.  Does  the  air 
make  waves?  54.  Are  they  of  different  sizes?  55.  How  do 
they  affect  the  drum  of  the  ear?  56.  What  is  noise?  57.  What 
are  strokes?  58.  What  is  a  buzz  or  humming?  59.  What  are 
musical  tones?  60.  What  are  tones  of  influence? — ANS.  When 
the  vibrations  of  one  tuning-fork  are  communicated  through  the 
air  to  a  second  fork  of  the  same  pitch  the  tones  produced  by  the 
second  fork  are  called  tones  of  influence.  61.  How  are  the  pil- 
lars of  Corti  acted  upon  ?  62.  What  do  they  whisper  to  us  ? 
63.  What  is  the  range  of  vibrations  heard  by  the  ear?  64. 
What  is  the  compass  of  the  best  ear?  65.  What  is  the  compass 
of  an  ordinary  ear?  66.  Who  could  not  hear  the  chirp  of  the 
common  sparrow?  67.  What  produces  waves  of  water?  68. 
What  waves  do  the  most  harm  ?  69.  How  does  the  agitation  0/ 
the  ocean  affect  it?     70.  What  improves  the  air  in  cities? 


Questions  on  Chapter  XXIII. — Page  165. 

I.  How  many  windows  in  our  House  Beautiful  ?  2.  Where 
located  ?  3.  What  separates  them  ?  4.  What  protects  them 
below  ?  5.  What  is  the  hollow  within  these  bones  called  ?  6. 
What  nearly  fills  it  ?  7.  What  is  behind  the  eyeball  ?  8.  What 
does  it  do  ?  9.  Why  are  the  eyes  so  protected  ?  10.  What  is 
there  over  each  ?  11.  When  does  it  come  down?  12.  How  is 
it  trimmed  along  the  edge  ?  13.  Is  this  fringe  all  for  looks  ? 
14.  How  does  it  protect?  15.  What  moves  these  awnings? 
16.  When  do  they  work,  and  how  ?  17.  What  do  they  do  when 
you  are  asleep  ?  18.  What  is  the  name  of  these  awnings  ?  19. 
What  is  the  shape  of  the  windows  ?  20.  Are  they  like  a  sphere  ? 
21.  Which  diameter  is  the  greater?  22.  What  is  the  outside 
covering  of  the  eyeball  called  ?     23.  What  proportion  of  the  eye- 


342 


AIDS  TO   TEACHERS  AND  SCHOLARS. 


ball  does  it  cover?  24.  What  is  it  generally  called  ?  25.  Why 
is  it  opaque  ?  26.  What  covers  the  other  sixth  of  the  eyeball  ? 
27.  How  thick  is  it  ?  28.  How  strong  is  it  ?  29.  What  does 
transparent  mean  ?  30.  Where  are  the  curtains  ?  31.  What  are 
they  like  ?  32.  How  many  of  them  ?  33.  What  are  they  called  ? 
34.  What  form  the  first  coat  of  the  eye  ?  35.  What  the  second 
coat  ?  36.  What  is  its  color  ?  37.  What  part  of  the  eyebal' 
does  it  cover  ?  38.  What  does  it  leave  in  front  ?  39.  What 
covers  this  on  the  outside  ?  40.  How  are  the  edges  of  this  cir- 
cular opening  arranged  ?  41.  What  are  they  called  ?  42.  What 
laps  on  over  these  ?  43.  What  is  the  ciliary  muscle  ?  44.  What 
is  its  function  ?  45.  What  is  the  Latin  name  of  the  portiere  in 
the  window  ?  46.  What  does  it  mean  ?  47.  What  has  the  iris 
in  the  centre  ?  48.  How  large  is  this  opening  ?  49.  How  large 
is  the  curtain  ?  50.  What  color  ?  51.  With  what  does  its  color 
generally  harmonize  ?  52.  What  is  the  opening  in  the  iris  called  ? 
53.  What  closes  the  pupil  ?  54.  Who  manages  these  curtains  ? 
55.  What  is  the  third  coat  called  ?  56.  Where  is  it  located  ? — 
Ans.  Inside  of  the  choroid  coat.  57.  What  is  inside  of  this 
coat  ?  58.  What  kind  of  a  body  is  it  ?  59.  What  shape  is  it  ? 
60.  How  is  it  in  front?  61.  Where  is  this  hollow?  62.  What 
is  in  this  hollow  ?  63.  What  is  the  shape  of  a  convex  lens  ? 
64.  What  is  the  shape  of  this  crystalline  lens  ?  65.  Where  is  it 
placed?  66.  What  passes  through  it?  67.  What  holds  it  in 
place  ?  68.  What  kind  of  a  membrane  is  it  ?  69.  What  com- 
pletes the  choroid  coat  ?  70.  What  hangs  in  front  of  the  lens  ? 
71.  How  does  the  iris  divide  the  eye?  72.  What  are  these  two 
chambers  called  ?  73.  Who  washes  these  windows  ?  74.  Where 
is  the  lachrymal  gland  ?  75.  What  does  it  do  ?  76.  What  se- 
cretes the  tears  ?  77.  How  many  ducts  has  it  ?  78.  Where 
does  this  watery  fluid  collect  ?  79.  Where  is  it  used  ?  For 
what?  80.  What  is  winking?  What  prevents  friction?  81. 
Where  does  this  fluid  go  after  it  has  washed  the  eye  ?  82.  What 
opening  along  the  lower  lids  ?  83.  What  do  they  furnish  ?  84. 
What  does  it  do  ?  85.  What  is  the  effect  if  the  tears  run  over 
the  cheeks  ?  86.  What  effect  has  sorrow  ?  87.  What  animal 
can  weep  over  the  sorrows  of  others  ? 


QUES7 /O.YS  Oft  CHAPTER  XXIV.  343 

Questions  on  Chapter  XXIV.— Page  175. 

2.  Who  sits  in  darkness  and  silence?  2.  When  does  he  leave 
4he  House  Beautiful  ?  3.  How  does  he  learn  of  the  outer  world  ? 
4.  What  originate  among  the  nerve-cells?  5.  What  do  they 
constitute?  6.  How  does  the  man  become  acquainted  with  him- 
self? 7.  How  does  he  become  acquainted  with  the  "  Not  me  "? 
8.  What  indicates  the  importance  of  the  double  telescope  ?  9. 
What  is  a  telescope?  10.  What  are  used  to  change  their  posi- 
tion ?  11.  What  kind  of  telescopes  has  the  Man  Wonderful  ? 
12.  What  is  the  common  name  for  them?  13.  How  many  mus- 
cles are  there  to  move  each  eye  ?  14.  What  is  said  of  the  su- 
perior oblique  muscle  ?     15.  What  cause  the  eyeball  to  rotate? 

16.  Which  is  the  most  important  nerve  that  goes  to  the  eye  ? 

17.  Where  does  it  have  its  origin?  18.  What  form  the  optic 
commissure?  19.  What  is  the  arrangement  of  nerve-fibres  in 
the  optic  commissure  first  ?  Second  ?  Third  ?  Fourth  ?  20. 
Where  do  these  fibres  enter  ?  21.  With  what  do  they  connect  ? 
22.  Give  a  review  of  these  nerve-fibres.  23.  What  arrange- 
ment would  connect  the  eyes  more  intimately?  24.  What  is 
said  of  the  point  where  the  optic  nerve  enters  the  eye?  25. 
What  is  the  relation  of  the  optic  nerve  and  the  central  axis  of 
the  eye  ?  26.  What  is  there  at  the  central  axis  of  the  eye  ? 
27.  What  is  its  hoiizontal  diameter  ?  Its  vertical  diameter  ?  28. 
What  is  it  called  ?  29.  What  is  in  the  centre  of  it  ?  Its  name  ? 
What  light  falls  upon  the  fovea  centralis  ?  30.  What  does  the 
optic  nerve  form?  31.  Wrhat  is  its  thickness  at  the  yellow 
spot?  32.  Does  it  get  thicker?  33.  What  rests  upon  this?  34. 
How  many  layers  of  eels  at  the  yellow  spot  ?  35.  What  kind  of 
cells  ?  36.  What  does  each  one  do  ?  37.  Are  filaments  sent  in 
the  other  direction  ?  38.  With  what  do  these  latter  filaments 
connect  ?  39.  Where  are  the  rods  and  cones  ?  40.  What  are 
they?  41.  Where  does  the  light  strike?  42.  To  what  is  the 
impression  transmitted  ?  43.  What  happens  if  the  light  does 
not  strike  the  centre  of  the  yellow  spot  ?  44.  What  must  be 
done  to  effect  this  change  ?  45.  Through  what  transmitted  ? 
What  nerves  ?     46.  To  what  ?     47.  When  too  much  light  enters 


344 


AIDS  TO  TEACHERS  AND  SCHOLARS. 


the  eyes  what  happens  ?  48.  When  the  object  is  too  near  ?  49 
What  makes  the  lens  more  convex?  50.  Are  such  messages 
sent  often  ?  51.  When  the  eyes  do  not  act  together  what  do  we 
call  it  ? — Ans.  Cross-eyed.  52.  What  enters  with  the  optic  nerve  ? 
53.  What  does  it  do  ?  54.  What  is  the  effect  of  the  reflected 
light  ?  55.  What  is  the  effect  of  light  passing  through  the  air? 
56.  What  does  the  analysis  of  light  show  ?  57.  What  is  a  radi- 
ometer ?  58.  Of  what  is  light  compounded  ?  59.  What  deter- 
mines the  color  of  light  ?  60.  What  is  the  length  of  a  wave  of 
red  light  ?     61.  At  what  rate  does  light  travel  ? 


Questions  on  Chapter  XXV. — Page  184. 

1.  Where  will  we  find  one  guardian  of  our  house?  2.  What 
is  his  appearance  and  nature  ?  3.  Does  he  ever  go  out  of  the 
house  ?  4.  Is  he  bashful  about  expressing  his  opinion  of  visitors  ? 
5.  What  is  said  of  his  friendships  ?  6.  What  is  said  of  material 
for  repairs  ?  7.  Who  examines  it  ?  8.  Is  his  decision  final  ?  9. 
What  does  he  say?  10.  What  is  his  name  ?  11.  By  what  name 
generally  known  ?  12.  Can  he  always  be  trusted  ?  13.  Of  what 
is  he  very  fond?  14.  What  effect  has  this  upon  the  assistants 
in  the  kitchen  ?  15.  Where  do  they  send  it  ?  16.  Is  this  agreeable 
to  taste  ?  17.  If  the  servants  are  not  strong  enough  to  send  out 
the  offending  material,  what  happens  ?  18.  What  does  the  doctor 
do  ?  19.  What  is  the  result  ?  20.  Will  taste  avoid  the  disturb- 
ing substance  after  this?  21.  What  is  therefore  important?  22. 
Who  can  discharge  him?  23.  What  must  we  then  do?  24. 
What  will  he  then  do  ?  25.  Who  should  be  master  of  the  house  ? 
26.  When  can  taste  be  trusted  ?  27.  What  will  he  like  ?  28. 
How  does  he  lose  his  ability  to  judge  correctly  ?  29.  Why  should 
we  give  him  a  good  education  ?  30.  What  does  the  taste  oi 
children  sometimes  demand?  31.  What  do  papas  or  mammas 
sometimes  do  ?  32.  What  is  the  effect  ?  33.  What  effect  has  it 
to  deprive  him  of  company  ?  34.  What  bad  habits  may  he  ac- 
quire ?      35.  How  does  it  affect  the  cooks ?     Why?     36.  When 


QUESTIONS  O.Y  CHAP  TF.R  XXV '//.  345 

reason  does  not  govern  taste,  what  happens  ?  37.  What  is  the 
effect  of  eating  too  much  ?  38.  What  is  another  bad  habit  ?  39. 
What  does  this  cause  ?  40.  What  is  the  effect  of  indigestion  ? 
41.  Is  the  house  well  repaired  ?  42.  What  is  the  advantage  ol 
eating  slowly  ?  43.  What  is  a  third  bad  habit  ?  44.  What  food 
is  good  ? 


Questions  on  Chapter  XXVI. — Page  191. 

1.  Where  does  another  guardian  make  his  home?  2.  Who 
discovered  his  hiding-place  ?  3.  Where  is  it  ?  4.  Who  presides 
over  foods  and  drinks  ?  5.  Whom  can  not  he  examine  ?  6. 
Who  assists  him?  7.  What  is  said  of  Aura?  8.  To  whom  is 
she  related?  9.  What  enemy  to  life  is  spoken  of?  10.  What 
does  smell  detect?  11.  How  does  Aura  act?  12.  If  there  is 
bad  air  in  a  cellar  what  will  you  do?  13.  What  will  Aura  do? 
14.  When  does  smell  fail  to  do  his  duty?  15.  At  this  time  can 
we  tell  the  true  taste  of  food  ?  16.  When  has  smell  lost  his  con- 
science ?  17.  What  is  the  effect  of  sleeping  with  closed  win- 
lows?  18.  What  opinion  does  smell  express?  19.  What 
causes  the  bad  odor?  20.  Illustrate  the  uncleanliness  of  bad 
air.  21.  Is  it  necessary  to  have  a  draft  in  a  sleeping-room? 
22.  How  can  we  catch  the  gases  that  are  lighter  than  air  ?  23. 
What  gas  is  being  thrown  off  from  the  lungs?  24.  What  is 
said  of  this  gas?  25.  What  effect  has  it  upon  a  lighted  taper?' 
26.  If  we  leave  a  cup  full  what  happens  ?  27.  How  do  we  be- 
come acquainted  with  the  smell  of  a  substance?  28.  What  is 
said  of  a  grain  of  musk  ?  29.  What  of  contagious  diseases  ? 
30.  What  of  disinfectants  ?  31.  What  is  the  perfect  disinfect- 
ant ? 


Questions  on  Chapter  XXVII. — Page  196. 

I.  What  is  the  facade  of  a  house?  2.  Why  so  called?  3. 
How  may  it  be  ornamented?  4.  What  makes  an  object  beauti- 
ful''    5.  What  is  said  of  symmetry?     6.  What  is  said  of  the 


15* 


346  AIDS  TO   TEACHERS  AND  SCHOLARS. 

useful  ?  7.  What  is  said  of  our  foundations  ?  8.  What  of  the 
muscles  ?  9.  What  beauty  can  not  be  expressed  by  a  statue 
10.  From  what  does  the  beauty  of  the  human  form  arise?  II 
Describe  a  world  of  chance.  12.  Why  should  we  not  find  fault 
with  our  bodies?  13.  Does  the  shepherd  need  the  strength  of  a 
warrior?  Why?  14.  What  do  the  proportions  of  man  signify? 
Those  of  woman?  15.  What  do  we  look  for  in  boyhood?  In 
manhood?  16.  Where  do  we  look  for  strength  in  the  wrestler? 
In  the  racer?  17.  Will  fitness  alone  constitute  beauty?  18. 
What  else  is  needed  ?  19.  How  can  we  judge  of  the  Man  Won- 
derful ?  20.  What  can  we  tell  about  him  ?  21.  What  does  the 
form  of  the  babe  indicate?  Of  the  youth  ?  Of  the  man?  22. 
What  is  unity  of  design  ?  23.  What  part  of  the  body  is  the 
most  expressive?  24.  From  what  do  we  judge  of  character? 
25.  How  do  we  sometimes  speak  of  lifeless  things?  26.  What 
gives  expression  to  the  face  ?  27.  What  can  you  do  with  your 
face  to  affect  your  feelings?  28.  What  does  attitude  of  the  body 
express?  29.  What  two  ways  have  we  of  expressing  feeling? 
30.  What  is  said  of  ancient  statues?  31.  What  aids  the  public 
speaker  ?  32.  What  adds  beauty  to  the  facade  ?  33.  When  will 
the  expression  be  the  same  ?  34.  What  changes  the  expression 
of  the  face  ?  35.  What  is  said  of  anger  ?  36.  What  most  re- 
veals the  feelings  ?  37.  What  do  we  see  when  the  man  looks 
out  of  the  windows  ?  38.  What  unspoken  language  expresses 
character?  39.  Is  the  same  gesture  always  appropriate  ?  40. 
What  is  said  of  the  coloring  of  the  house  ?  41.  What  causes 
the  color  of  the  face  to  change?  42.  How  may  anger  affect  the 
face  ?  43.  What  should  color  be  ?  44.  What  does  Ruskin  say 
of  color?  45.  What  makes  the  best  complexion  ?  46.  What  is 
better  than  regular  features?  47.  Where  then  does  our  beauty 
lie?  48.  What  will  awaken  admiration  and  awe?  49.  How 
does  the  House  Beautiful  differ  from  these  cathedrals?  50  Who 
aids  us  to  remould  our  features? 


PART   II. 

Questions  on  Chapter  I. — Page  205. 

1.  What  is  now  the  condition  of  the  House  Beautiful?  2 
What  have  we  admired  ?  3.  What  is  peculiar  about  the  house  ? 
4.  Is  the  house  to  be  inhabited  ?  5.  What  is  peculiar  about  the 
tenant  ?  6.  What  will  you  learn  about  him  without  seeing  him  ? 
7.  WTho  is  this  tenant?  8.  What  is  he?  9.  To  what  is  he  a 
stranger?  10.  Why  is  the  house  not  complete?  11.  Whc 
are  untrained  ?  1 2.  Of  what  is  the  Master  incapable  ?  1 3. 
Does  he  look  out  of  the  windows?  14.  What  appears  to 
be  in  working  order?  Why?  15.  What  is  said  of  the 
human  baby?  16.  What  of  calves,  colts,  etc.  ?  17.  What  will 
the  baby  do  if  left  alone?  18.  Why?  19.  To  what  is  he  su- 
perior, and  why?  20.  Of  what  are  they  a  prophecy?  21.  What 
was  the  design  of  the  Architect  ?  22.  When  is  the  house  some- 
times vacated?  23.  What  apology  can  be  made  for  this?  24. 
What  advantage  has  man  over  brutes  ?  25.  What  could  he  pre- 
vent ?  26.  What  does  a  baby  need  first  ?  27.  Where  can  we 
find  a  model  garment  ?  Why  ?  28.  What  should  be  avoided  in 
a  baby's  dress  ?  29.  How  happy  will  a  baby  be  ?  30.  If  it  is 
unhappy  what  is  the  reason?  31.  What  is  personal  magnetism? 
32.  Who  feels  this  ?  How  do  we  know  this  ?  33.  What  is  said 
of  the  child's  electrical  condition?  34.  What  does  this  explain? 
35.  What  is  the  next  need  of  a  child  ?  36.  What  is  said  of  regu- 
lar habits  ?  37.  What  takes  place  in  sleep  ?  38.  What  should 
you  not  do  ?  39.  What  will  you  do  to  secure  quiet  sleep  for  a 
child?  40.  What  now  happens?  41.  What  is  the  inhabitant 
of  the  house  beginning  to  do  ?  42.  Of  what  is  he  unconscious  ? 
43.  How  are  his  voluntary  movements  made  ?  44.  Why  does  he 
keep  in  motion?  45.  What  is  the  baby's  business?  46.  What 
ought  he  to  have  ?  47.  What  will  he  first  learn  ?  48.  Then 
what?     49.  What  is  there  in  this  wriggling  thing?    50.  To  what 

(347) 


548  AIDS  TO   TEACHERS  AND  SCHOLARS. 

does  it  impel  the  child  ?  51.  Then  what  happens?  52.  Wha 
is  said  of  walking?  53.  What  is  walking  called?  54.  Why  is 
running  more  difficult  than  walking?  55.  What  is  remarkable 
about  the  first  five  years  of  life  ?  56.  What  teaches  the  child  ? 
57.  What  does  the  rattle  teach?  58.  The  doll?  The  baby- 
jumper?  Tl.i  rocking-horse  ?  59.  The  swing?  The  skipping- 
rope  ?  Rolling  the  hoop?  60.  Playing  marbles  and  ball-play- 
ing ?  61.  What  does  repeating  a  task  do?  62.  What  is  the 
child  becoming?     63.  What  is  said  of  calisthenics? 


Questions  on  Chapter  II. — Page  212. 

1.  What  does  the  Man  Wonderful  include?  2,  What  is  the 
girl  ?  3.  What  is  said  of  her  house  ?  4.  How  will  she  g.t  a 
strong  body  ?  5.  What  girl  has  not  been  well  educated  ?  6.  In 
what  are  girls  like  boys  ?  7.  Upon  what  do  girls  pride  them- 
selves? 8.  Upon  what  do  boys  pride  themselves?  9.  What 
hands  are  the  most  beautiful  ?  10.  In  what  is  the  greater  part 
of  life  to  be  spent  ?  11.  What  can  be  taught  little  people  ?  12. 
How  can  the  mother  amuse,  the  child?  13.  What  will  careful 
training  do  ?  14.  What  is  more  attractive  than  playing  keep 
house?  15.  What  can  a  girl  of  eight  years  do?  16.  What 
should  a  girl  of  fourteen  be  able  to  do  ?  17.  What  time  is  suffi- 
cient to  learn  this  ?  18.  Who  has  found  skilled  hands  of  use? 
19.  What  is  worth  more  than  money?  20.  What  have  girls  got? 
For  what  ?  21.  What  may  boys  and  girls  find  of  value  to  them  ? 
22.  What  is  said  of  boys  and  girls  ?  23.  Who  gave  this  impulse 
for  activity  ?  24.  What  should  take  the  place  of  "  it  is  not  lady- 
like"? 25.  What  should  girls  think  of  ?  26.  For  what  should 
she  plan  ?  27.  What  is  fortunate  for  a  girl  ?  28.  What  employ- 
ments are  open  to  women  ?  29.  What  does  a  knowledge  of 
practical  work  do  ?  30.  Which  is  better,  to  know  how  to  make 
bread,  or  play  the  piano  ?  31.  For  what  should  she  have  an  anv 
bition  ?     32.  What  says  Solomon  ?     Proverbs  ? 


QUESTIONS  ON  CHAPTER   V.  ^g 

Questions  on  Chapter  III.— Page  219. 

1.  In  what  is  there  pleasure?  2.  Should  this  desire  be  culti- 
vated ?  3.  What  must  the  majority  of  people  do  all  their  lives? 
\.  What  would  be  a  valuable  addition  to  our  schools  ?  5.  Where 
have  such  schools  been  tried  ?  6.  How  could  they  be  arranged  ? 
7.  What  advantage  to  a  boy  would  these  schools  be?  8.  What 
would  he  learn?  9.  What  is  he  thus  becoming?  10.  What 
effect  would  these  schools  have  upon  laws?  11.  Upon  the  time 
spent  in  school?  12.  Why  might  girls  learn  the  use  of  tools  ? 
13.  Or  boys  cooking?  14.  What  is  true  education?  15.  What 
does  it  develop  ?  16.  What  did  the  ancient  Greeks  believe  ?  17. 
What  is  the  effect  of  cultivating  the  mind  and  not  the  body?  18. 
Of  cultivating  the  body  and  not  the  mind  ?  19.  What  is  said  of 
college  students  ?  20.  Of  what  use  is  a  symmetrical  body  ?  21. 
Of  what  do  young  men  too  often  think?  22.  What  is  the  golden 
mean  in  education?  23.  What  is  the  result  of  separating  physi- 
cal and  mental  education  ?  24.  Why  is  there  now  no  need  of 
extreme  development  of  body?  25.  How  may  the  body  be  in- 
jured? 26.  What  organ  suffers  in  a  rowing  contest  ?  27.  Why? 
28.  What  is  the  effect  of  the  exercise  on  the  heart?  29.  Is  this 
a  continued  growth?  30.  What  then  begins?  31.  What  does 
the  heart  become?  The  person  ?  32.  Will  he  be  conscious  of 
this  ?  33.  What  may  be  the  final  result  ?  34.  W7hat  is  said  of 
military  drill?  35.  What  muscles  are  brought  into  play?  36. 
What  valuable  mental  result  ?  37.  What  mischievous  result 
avoided  ?  38.  What  need  may  arise  in  actual  life  ?  39.  What 
will  be  for  the  security  of  the  country  ? 


Questions  on  Chapter  V.— Page  242. 
1.  What  foreigner  was  brought  to  England  and  France  two 
hundred  years  ago  ?  2.  What  is  he  familiarly  called  ?  3.  What 
do  his  friends  say  of  him  ?  4,  What  is  checking  waste  ?  5. 
What  is  the  testimony  of  science  ?  6.  What  is  the  chief  action 
of  coffee  ?  7.  What  does  it  do  ?  8.  Why  is  it  not  desirable  to 
23 


35o 


AIDS  TO   TEACHERS  AND  SCHOLARS. 


forget  that  we  are  tired  ?  9.  What  does  Dr.  Bartholow  say  o\ 
coffee  ?  10.  What  does  Dr.  Emmet  say?  11.  What  effort  does 
he  think  should  be  made,  and  why?  12.  What  do  some  people 
think  ?  13.  What  does  Dr.  Bartholow  say  of  this  ?  14.  What  does 
that  mean?  15.  What  question  can  we  ask  ourselves?  16. 
How  can  we  be  without  coffee  ?  17.  Who  is  the  other  foreigner  s 
18.  What  is  his  name  ?  What  usually  called  ?  19.  What  is  his 
complexion?  20.  What  are  the  properties  of  tea?  21.  Which 
is  the  more  stimulating  ?  22.  What  effect  has  the  tannic  acid  of 
tea  ?  23.  Why  is  that  undesirable  ? — Ans.  Because  albumen  is 
an  important  food,  and  when  coagulated  can  not  be  absorbed, 
and  therefore  can  not  nourish  the  body.  24.  What  effect  has 
long  cooking  of  tea  ?  25.  What  is  the  result  of  living  on  bread 
and  tea  alone  ?  26.  How  can  disorders  caused  by  tea  be  cured  ? 
27.  What  is  a  good  rule  ?  28.  Why  is  water  a  better  drink  than 
tea  ?  25.  How  much  of  the  body  is  water  ?  30.  What  good 
do  tea  and  coffee  do?  31.  Who  can  not  drink  tea  and  coffee? 
32.  What  other  doubtful  visitors  are  mentioned  ?  33.  What  do 
they  irritate  ?  34.  What  is  the  effect  of  pepper  and  mustard  on 
the  epidermis  ?  35.  What  effect  on  mucous  membrane  ?  36.  What 
do  they  beget  ?     37.  What  would  you  say  of  such  articles  ? 


Questions  on  Chapter  VI. — Page  250. 

1.  What  twin-brothers  guard  our  house?  2.  What  is  their 
character?  3.  What  is  said  of  the  dislikes  of  taste?  4.  What 
if  the  master  becomes  attached  to  bad  friends  ?  5.  To  whom 
must  we  appeal,  and  for  what  ?  6.  How  must  we  educate  the 
master  ?  7.  Who  is  the  first  bad  guest  mentioned  ?  8.  Who 
met  him,  and  when  ?  9.  Who  met  him  in  15 19,  and  where?  10. 
When  was  he  indispensable  to  the  Indians?  11.  When  intro- 
duced to  Europe,  and  how  received  ?  12.  To  what  queen  was  he 
presented?  13.  Who  has  the  credit  of  introducing  him  to  Eng 
land  ?  14.  Who  discovered  him  to  be  a  dangerous  friend  ?  15. 
Who  issued  a  bull  against  him  ?     16.  Where  was  he  prohibited  ? 


QUES TIONS  OX  C//.-1  P  TF.R   VII.  3  ;  x 

17.  Who  made  laws  against  him  3  18.  What  was  written  about 
him?  19.  What  did  Charles  Lamb  say  ?  20.  To  whom  does 
his  beauty  and  sweetness  introduce  him?  21.  What  is  said  ol 
his  family  ?  22.  Mention  some  of  his  kindred.  23.  What  are 
his  name  and  personal  appearance  ?  24.  What  is  his  conduct 
at  a  .first  call  ?  25.  What"  is  sometimes  emptied  by  this  uproar? 
26.  What  may  be  suspended  ?  27.  What  is  the  effect  of  admit- 
ting him  frequently  ?  28.  Who  are  engaged  in  throwing  him 
out?  29.  How  do  we  know  this  ?  30.  Who  assist  the  lungs  in 
getting  rid  of  him  ?  3;.  He  is  a  foe  like  what  acid  ?  32.  What 
is  this  poison  called  ?  33.  How  much  will  it  take  to  kill  a  rabbit 
in  four  minutes?  34.  Whom  would  it  kill  in  five  minutes?  35. 
Who  masquerades  under  different  forms?  36.  What  character 
does  he  play  most  universally  ?  37.  What  does  he  tell  the  farmer 
or  cow-boy  ?  38.  What  does  he  do  while  thus  talking  ?  39. 
For  what  does  he  take  great  credit  ?  40.  How  did  he  appear 
among  the  Indians  ?  41=  What  is  said  of  the  pipe  ?  42.  Does  he 
ever  put  on  more  style?  Where?  43.  Where  is  he  equally  at 
home  ?  44.  Where  does  he  exert  the  same  baneful  influence  ? 
45.  What  does  he  do  to  the  tongue?  46.  What  to  the  red  cor- 
puscles? 47.  To  the  cook?  48.  To  the  salivary  glands?  49. 
What  has  been  traced  to  the  use  of  the  pipe  ?  50.  How  was  he 
carried  by  his  friends  ?  51.  What  was  his  character  then  and 
his  claims  ?  52.  Of  what  were  snuff-boxes  made  ?  53.  What 
was  an  annual  expense  of  the  United  States  Senate?  54.  Who 
had  charge  of  the  Government  snuff-box  ?  55.  What  is  the  effect 
of  snuff-taking  ?  56.  Who  suffers  next  ?  57.  Where  does  snuft 
rollect?     58.  What  is  said  of  the  snuff-taker? 


Questions  on  Chapter  VII.— Page  257. 

1.  What  does  he  sometimes  style  himself?  And  takes  what 
profession  ?  2.  What  does  he  claim  to  preserve  ?  And  what 
cure  ?  3.  How  do  women  use  tobacco  ?  4.  When  is  he  most 
disgusting?     5.  What  people  employ  him  as   dentist?     How? 


352 


AIDS   TO    TEACHERS  AND  SCHOLARS. 


6.  What  does  he  do  to  the  teeth  and  gums?  7.  What  othei 
quests  does  he  introduce  into  the  house  ?  8.  How  does  he  treat 
the  cook  and  the  glands  ?  9.  How  does  he  affect  the  master  of 
the  house  ?  10.  What  does  he  claim  to  do  for  all?  11.  What 
sign  does  he  put  up  where  he  is  used  ?  12.  How  can  you  read 
•his  sign  ?  13.  For  what  have  Americans  a  world-wide  reputa- 
lion?  14.  What  measure  of  public  safety  is  necessary?  15. 
What  assists  in  legislation  ?  16.  What  sometimes  adorns  homes 
and  pulpits?  17.  In  what  case  only  is  tobacco  useful?  18. 
What  next  does  he  claim  to  be?  19.  As  medical  assistant  what 
diseases  does  he  claim  to  cure  ?  20.  How  does  he  cure  disease  ? 
21.  What  effect  does  he  have  on  the  vigor  of  the  country  ?  22. 
Mention  some  of  the  diseases  he  creates.  23.  What  does  Dr. 
Richardson  say?  24.  What  leads  to  strong  drinks ?  25.  How 
does  it  affect  the  heart  power?  26.  What  effect  does  it  have 
upon  the  eye?  27.  What  can  the  French  professor  do?  28. 
What  other  sense  does  tobacco  affect  ?  How  ?  29.  How  does 
it  affect  the  nerves?  What  nerves?  30.  How  does  it  affect  the 
glands?  31.  Whose  opinions  have  we  been  stating?  32.  What 
says  Dr.  Lizars  ?  33.  What  observation  is  made  by  Professor 
Hinds?  34.  What  is  said  by  Professor  Bartholow  of  tobacco  as 
a  medicine? 


Questions  on  Chapter  VIII. — Page  263. 

1.  What  is  the  next  character  tobacco  assumes?  2.  To 
whom  is  this  character  attractive  ?  3.  What  are  his  name  and 
appearance  ?  4.  What  question  would  you  be  apt  to  answer 
with  a  smile  ?     5.  Where  does  the  smoke  from  the  cigarette  go  ? 

6.  What  is  the  effect  of  blowing  the  smoke  through  the  nose? 

7.  Who  are  the  companions  of  the  cigarette?  8.  What  is  the 
first  effect  of  tobacco  ?  9.  What  would  be  its  effect  on  growing 
boys?  Why?  10.  What  foolish  thought  have  girls  some- 
times ?  11.  How  does  tobacco  treat  women  ?  12.  What  says  Dr. 
Bartholow  ?  13.  What  is  said  of  this  habit  and  its  effect  ?  14. 
What  is  its  effect  on  courage?  15.  What  is  the  report  from 
Paris  ?     16.  Whom  should  the  boys  shun  ? 


Q  UE  S  TIOXS  ON  CHA  / '  J  I  R  X.  353 

Questions  on  Chapter  IX.— Page  266. 

1.  What  is  tobacco's  most  successful  character?  2.  What 
ittire  does  he  assume  ?  3.  What  does  he  call  himself?  4.  How 
nas  the  dandy  blinded  the  eyes  of  girls  and  women?  5.  What 
does  smoking  promote?  6.  What  is  our  most  important  food? 
7.  Who  will  poison  this  food?  8.  How  does  the  father  treat  the 
child?  9.  What  says  Emerson?  10.  Whose  children  have 
weakened  constitutions?  II.  Who  suffers  for  the  sins  of  the 
tobacco-smoker?  12.  How  does  it  affect  the  children?  13. 
What  says  Dr.  Elam  ?  14.  What  is  tobacco  under  all  disguises? 
15.  In  what  does  he  fulfil  more  than  he  promises?  16.  For 
what  does  the  user  of  tobacco  spend  his  money?  17.  How 
much  will  a  smoker  spend  in  a  year?  18.  How  much  did  the 
New  York  merchant  save  in  thirty-nine  years?  19.  What  does 
Professor  Hinds  calculate  ?  20.  What  will  the  smoker  have  as 
his  reward?  21.  What  do  insurance  agents  say?  22.  What 
illustrations  are  given  ?  23.  What  is  tobacco  to  worthy  ambi- 
tions? 


Questions  on  Chapter  X.— Page  270. 

1.  What  is  first  said  of  the  condition  of  the  earth  and  man  ? 
2.  What  did  Abou  Ben  Hassan  find  ?  3.  What  did  the  spirit 
say?  4.  WThat  did  he  promise  to  him  and  his  friends  ?  5.  What 
happened  when  the  spirit  was  liberated  ?  6.  Of  what  did  Ben 
Hassan  think  this  a  proof?  7.  What  effect  did  Gohul's  presence 
have  at  feasts  ?  8.  How  did  he  become  a  friend  to  the  sorrow- 
ful ?  9.  How  did  he  seem  to  affect  the  intellect  ?  10.  Why  was 
he  called  the  friend  of  the  warrior?  11.  Why  of  the  sick  ?  12. 
Who  employed  him  ?  13.  What  did  he  at  last  begin  to  call  him- 
self? 14.  What  did  he  say  that  he  did?  15.  What  was  the  ef- 
fect of  increased  confidence  in  Gohul  ?  16.  Who  had  n^verbeen 
friends  with  Gohul?  17.  What  had  Observation  noticed  in  re- 
gard to  children?  18.  What  in  regard  to  womer.  ?  19.  Whal 
:n  regard  to  some  men  J    20.  What  did  Observation  report  ?    21 


354  AIDS  TO   TEACHERS  AND  SCHOLARS. 

What  effect  did  this  have  upon  Gohul  ?  22.  What  did  he  say  ol 
Observation?  23.  What  did  he  demand?  24.  Whom  did  he 
want  in  this  committee  of  investigation  ?  25.  Why  would  this 
not  be  just  ?  26.  What  was  agreed  upon  ?  27.  Of  whom  was 
the  committee  composed  ?  28.  What  occurred  ?  29.  What  re- 
port was  first  submitted?  30.  What  was  this  report  ?  31.  What 
was  the  other  report  ?  32.  What  did  she  first  say  ?  33.  Whom 
did  she  employ  as  an  assistant?  34.  Whom  did  she  find  Gohul 
to  be  ?  35.  Whose  offspring  is  he  ?  36.  What  is  fermenta 
tion  ?  37.  What  is  wine  ?  38.  How  are  different  wines  made 
and  flavored  ?  39.  What  increases  the  strength  of  wine  ?  40. 
What  makes  wine  injurious?  41.  Have  all  wines  alcohol  in 
them  ?  42.  How  has  alcohol  deceived  man  ?  43.  Has  he  been 
a  friend  to  the  sick  ?  Why  not  ?  44.  What  did  science  call 
Gohul  ?  45.  What  did  Gohul  say  to  the  report  of  Science  ?  46. 
What  question  did  he  ask  ?  47.  How  did  he  answer  this  ques- 
tion ?     48.  What  became  of  her  report  ? 


Questions  on  Chapter  XI.— Page  279. 

1.  What  picture  of  peace  is  here  presented?  2.  Who  saw 
this,  and  what  did  he  say  ?  3.  What  did  he  do  ?  4.  What  did 
men  do  ?  5.  What  did  they  imagine  they  had  obtained  ?  6. 
How  did  this  affect  Gohul  ?  7.  What  new  name  did  he  adopt  ? 
8.  Was  he  an  acquaintance  of  Gohul  ?  9.  What  comparison  did 
he  make  between  himself  and  Gohul  ?  10.  What  was  now  his 
personal  appearance  ?  n.  How  did  he  act  ?  12.  Whom  did  he 
love?  13.  What  said  he  to  men?  14.  What  was  the  effect  ol 
these  fine  speeches?  15.  What  did  even  wise  men  say?  16. 
What  strange  disease  was  caused  by  wine  ?  W17.  hat  did  they 
think  of  beer  ?  18.  For  what  did  they  think  beer  a  cure  ?  19. 
What  did  Observation  notice  ?  20.  What  did  he  do  ?  21.  What 
did  men  say  ?  22.  What  did  they  do  ?  23.  Who  made  up  this 
committee  ?  24.  How  did  this  committee  agree  ?  25.  Whal 
was  the  first  report  ?     26.  What  was  said  in  favor  of  beer?     27 


QUE  ST/OX  S  OX  CHAPTER  XII.  35$ 

Who  signed  this  report  ?  28.  What  was  the  other  report  ?  29 
What  did  this  branch  of  the  committee  find  ?  30.  Whom  had 
they  consulted  ?  31.  What  did  Chemistry  explain  ?  32.  De- 
scribe the  process  of  beer-making.  33.  What  is  the  first  step  in 
making  beer  ?  What  takes  place  ?  34.  The  second  step  ?  What 
does  this  do  ?  35.  The  third  step  ?  36.  The  fourth  step  ?  yj. 
What  is  this  process  ?  38.  What  takes  place  ?  39.  Why  arc 
hops  added  ?  40.  When  is  beer  barrelled  or  bottled  ?  41.  What 
are  ale,  porter,  and  stout  ?  42.  What  increases  the  evils  of  these 
drinks?  43.  What  does  Chemistry  find  in  beer?  44.  What  is 
said  of  cocculus  indicus  ?  What  symptoms  arise  from  it  ?  45. 
How  else  is  beer  sometimes  poisoned  ?  46.  How  is  the  habitual 
beer-drinker  known  ?  47.  What  else  is  said  of  him  ?  48.  How 
does  alcohol  affect  the  nerves  which  govern  the  size  of  capil- 
laries ?  49.  What  do  the  immense  quantities  of  beer  do  ?  50. 
What  results  from  these  two  things?  51.  What  other  result  ? 
52.  What  does  a  natural  liver  weigh  ?  53.  What  may  a  beer- 
drinker's  liver  weigh  ?  54.  What  is  said  of  beer-drinking  na- 
tions ?  55.  Why  are  their  faces  ruddy? — Ans.  Because  of  the 
paralysis  of  the  capillary  nerves,  and  from  the  excess  of  water  in 
the  blood.  56.  What  has  been  done  instead  of  gaining  strength  ? 
57.  How  can  you  prove  that  this  is  waste  matter  and  not 
strength  ?  58.  What  is  said  by  physicians  in  Europe  and  Amer- 
ica ?  59.  Why  do  they  dread  to  perform  surgical  operations  on 
beer-drinkers?  60.  What  about  abstainers?  61.  What  is  the 
unqualified  testimony  ?  62.  What  does  one  English  doctor  say  ? 
63.  Of  1,540  cases  of  gout  how  many  were  abstainers?  64. 
What  else  about  him  ?  65.  What  does  the  great  German  chem- 
ist Liebig  say  ?     66.  What  is  finally  said  of  the  beer-drinker  ? 


Questions  on  Chapter  XII.— Page  287. 

1.  What  resulted  from  Gohul's  great  strength?  2.  What 
effect  did  this  have  on  men  ?  3.  What  desire  arose?  4.  What 
was  Gohul  in  his  new  guise  called  ?     5.  What  was  now  believed 


356  AIDS   TO    TEACHERS  AND  SCHOLARS. 

of  him  ?  6.  Did  all  believe  this  ?  7.  Who  were  his  friends  ? 
8.  How  did  many  prove  their  friendship  ?  9.  What  did  thesr 
organizations  do?  10.  What  came  through  the  influence  ol 
Gohul?  II.  How  did  this  affect  Gohul?  12.  What  had  he 
done?  13.  What  had  he  stolen  ?  14.  What  dimmed?  What 
enfeebled?  15.  What  else  had  he  stolen?  What  deepened? 
(6.  What  had  he  done  to  the  nose?  17.  What  had  he  done  to 
the  joints?  18.  How  had  he  truly  affected  the  mind?  The 
tongue?  19.  How  had  he  affected  the  mind,  heart,  and  temper? 
2.0.  What  had  he  done  to  the  young?  The  middle-aged  ?  21. 
What  had  he  brought  to  all  ?  22.  Did  this  open  the  eyes  of  all? 
23.  What  was  the  greatest  harm  he  had  done  to  men  ?  24. 
What  was  his  greatest  source  of  power?  25.  What  did  men 
call  him  ?  26.  What  had  Observation  been  doing  meanwhile  ? 
27.  What  did  he  say?  28.  What  had  Gohul  stolen?  29.  Who 
denied  these  assertions?  In  what  word's?  30.  How  did  they 
try  to  prove  that  Gohul  was  not  bad  ?  31.  What  now  occurred  ? 
32.  What  did  Gohul's  opponents  demand?  33.  What  answer 
was  made  by  his  friends  ?  34.  What  did  the  people  ask  ?  35. 
Was  their  request  granted  ?  36.  What  did  the  people  say  ? 
What  is  the  meaning  of  "  Vox  populi,  vox  Dei"  ? — Ans.  The 
voice  of  the  people  is  the  voice  of  God.  37.  How  is  the  Gov- 
ernment formed  ?  38.  What  does  Chemistry  tell  us  ?  39.  What 
is  distillation  called  ?  Is  this  true  ?  40.  From  what  is  whisky 
distilled?  41.  From  what  is  rum  distilled?  42.  From  what  is 
brandy  distilled  ?  43.  What  does  Chemistry  show  ?  44.  What 
cry  does  Science  echo?  45.  Where  and  how  does  he  begin  his 
theft?  46.  What  cry  does  he  setup?  47.  Where  does  he  get 
water  ?  48.  What  does  he  produce  in  the  stomach  ?  49.  Whei  e 
does  he  go  from  the  stomach  ?  50.  What  does  the  liver  think  of 
him?  And  what  does  it  do?  51.  What  effect  does  this  effort 
have  on  the  liver?  52.  What  is  cirrhosis?  53.  What  is  said  of 
albumen  ?  54.  What  effect  has  alcohol  on  albumen  ?  55.  What 
on  the  red  corpuscles  of  the  blood  ?  56.  Where  else  does  alco- 
hol go,  and  with  what  effect?  57.  How  does  alcohol  affect  the 
heart  ?  58.  How  many  times  does  the  heart  naturally  beat  in 
twenty-four  hours?     59.  How  many  ounces  of  blood  raised  al 


QUESTIONS  OX  CHAP  TEA'  XIII.  357 

each  stroke?  60.  Mow  many  ounces  in  a  day?  How  many 
tons  is  that  ?  61.  To  what  is  the  daily  work  of  the  heart  equal  ? 
62.  What  surprising  statement  is  made  ?  63.  What  does  alco- 
hol cause  the  heart  to  do?  64.  What  will  be  the  effect  of  one 
fluid  oimce  a  day?  65.  Of  eight  ounces?  66.  What  is  often 
said  of  taking  two  ounces  of  alcohol  daily?  67.  In  what  would 
one  drink  two  ounces  of  alcohol  ?  68.  Why  is  the  heart  in  such 
a  hurry  ?  69.  What  does  the  heart  do  at  every  beat  ?  70.  Why 
does  the  blood  receive  a  check  in  the  capillaries?  71.  What 
does  alcohol  do  to  the  capillaries,  and  how?  72  What  is  the 
result?  73.  What  is  the  testimony  of  medicine  ?  74.  What  is 
preferable  to  alcohol  as  a  tonic?  75.  What  do  physicians  ac- 
knowledge ?  76.  Who  especially  believed  these  teachings  ?  77. 
What  did  they  do  ?  78.  What  resulted  ?  79.  What  did  the  rulers 
ask  ?     80.  What  did  the  people  reply  ? 


Questions  on  Chapter  XIII. — Page  294. 

1.  What  does  Gohul  say?  2.  What  feeling  was  aroused  by 
these  ?  3.  What  was  done  ?  4.  Of  whom  did  the  committee 
consist  ?  5.  Whom  did  they  examine  ?  6.  What  per  cent,  of 
alcohol  in  whisky?  In  brandy?  In  wine?  7.  What  per  cent. 
in  beer?  Are  ale  and  porter  stronger  than  beer  ?  8.  Which  of 
them  are  harmful?  9.  Of  what  is  alcohol  a  product?  10. 
Where  does  it  originate?  11.  What  is  needed  for  its  produc- 
tion ?  12.  What  does  fermentation  do  to  grains?  13.  What 
are  the  legitimate  uses  of  alcohol?  14.  When  is  it  injurious  to 
man?  15.  Who  desires  other  drinks  than  water?  16.  What 
fluid  quenches  thirst?  17.  What  is  abnormal ?  18.  Is  alcohol 
a  food?  19.  What  then  is  it?  20.  What  kind  of  a  poison? 
21,  What  is  the  effect  of  small  doses?  22.  How  does  it  work? 
23.  How  long  may  its  evil  effects  remain  unrecognized?  24. 
What  organs  are  engorged  with  blood  by  its  use?  Why?  25. 
Time  effects  what  changes?  26.  What  effect  does  alcohol  have 
on  the  red   corpuscles  ?     27.  What  on  the   membranes  of  the 


358  AIDS  TO   TEACHERS  AND  SCHOLARS. 

lungs?  28.  What  results  from  this  ?  29.  What  is  said  of  mem- 
branes ?  30.  What  are  most  of  these  membranes?  31.  What 
effect  does  alcohol  have  on  these  membranes?  32.  Upon  what 
does  the  growth  of  the  body  depend  ?  33.  How  may  dropsy  be 
caused  by  alcohol?  34.  What  causes  a  feeling  of  warn:th?  35. 
What  effect  does  this  have  on  internal  organs  ?  36.  What 
changes  in  temperature  during  intoxication?  37.  How  long 
does  it  take  to  recover  from  this  loss  of  heat?  38.  When  is  a 
chilly  feeling  experienced  ?  39.  How  does  alcohol  check  waste  ? 
40.  What  does  this  do  to  the  system?  41.  What  effect  has 
hardening  the  membranes  ?  42.  How  does  this  affect  the  body  ? 
43.  What  is  the  peculiarity  of  vital  processes?  44.  What  com- 
parison is  used  in  regard  to  checking  waste?  45.  Why  is  alco- 
hol not  a  food  ?  46.  Does  it  seem  to  increase  digestion  ?  47. 
How  does  it  affect  the  nerves  ?  48.  What  is  lost  ?  With  what 
result  ?  49.  Why  may  men  under  the  influence  of  alcohol  be 
frozen?  50.  How  does  it  affect  the  brain?  51.  How  many 
diseases  mentioned  in  the  list  caused  by  alcohol?  52.  Whom 
has  science  questioned?  53.  How  does  alcohol  affect  man's 
physical  powers  ?  54.  How  has  the  rheumatism  of  drunkards 
been  cured?  55.  What  is  said  of  cholera  and  alcohol?  56. 
Alcohol  and  surgical  operations?  57.  What  is  said  of  those 
who  do  not  use  alcohol  ?  58.  What  of  sunstroke  and  alcohol  ? 
59.  What  is  said  of  the  water-drinker  ?  60.  Whom  next  does 
science  question  ?  61.  What  do  children  inherit  ?  What  is  the 
meaning  of  inherit  ?  62.  What  effect  does  alcohol  have  upon 
the  children  of  those  who  use  it?  63.  What  diseases  may  chil- 
dren inherit  from  drinking  parents  ?  64.  Whom  next  does 
science  question  ?  What  does  alcohol  ?  65.  What  does  the 
production  of  alcohol  destroy?  66.  What  kind  of  a  business  is 
it?  67.  What  amount  yearly  is  spent  for  alcohol?  68.  What 
effect  does  this  expenditure  have  upon  families  ?  69.  How  do 
drinkers  lose  time?  70.  How  does  alcohol  shorten  life?  71. 
How  does  alcohol  cost  the  country  large  sums  of  money  ?  72, 
How  many  drunkards  die  every  year  ?  73.  What  number  does 
alcohol  send  yearly  to  prison  ?  74.  How  many  children  to  the 
ooorhouse  ?     75.  Wh-U  causes  murders?     And  suicides?     76 


QUESTIONS  ON  CHAPTER  XIV  3-9 

How  many  orphans  left  to  charity  annually  ?  77.  What  amount 
is  spent  yearly  to  support  paupers  ?  7S.  Whom  does  science 
next  question  ?  79.  What  perverts  the  moral  sense  ?  80. 
What  destroys  conscience  ?  81.  What  effect  has  alcohol  on  the 
reason  and  judgment?  82.  What  does  it  cause?  83.  What 
causes  shipwreck  ?  84.  Mow  does  alcohol  affect  the  gentleman  ? 
85.  What  is  the  statement  of  the  grand  jury  ?  86.  What  is  the 
effect  upon  those  who  sell  liquor?  8j.  What  upon  women  and 
children  ?  Would  you  like  to  live  where  no  alcohol  is  sold  ? 
88.  What  is  said  of  a  city  where  no  alcohol  is  sold  ?  89.  What 
is  said  of  using  fermented  wine  at  the  sacrament  ?  90.  What 
kind  of  wine  should  be  used  at  the  sacrament  ? — Ans.  Unfer- 
mented.     How  should  we  vote  on  this  subject  ? 


Questions  on  Chapter  XIV.— Page  308. 

1.  What  would  be  the  result  if  company  were  never  entertained 
in  the  house  ?  2.  What  do  we  need  to  keep  us  in  repair  ?  3. 
Who  is  the  first  guest  invited  to  the  house  ?  4.  What  come  in  with 
milk  ?  5.  Who  are  the  Albuminoids?  What  do  they  form  ?  6. 
Where  are  they  found  ?  7.  What  are  they  called  in  the  blood  ? 
In  wheat?  In  milk?  8.  What  kind  of  a  food  is  milk?  9.  Of 
what  is  solid  food  made  up?  10.  Who  is  the  next  guest?  11. 
What  proportion  of  the  body  is  water?  12.  What  of  the  bones? 
The  brain  ?  13.  What  does  this  prove  ?  14.  How  much  water 
do  we  need  in  a  day?  15.  Where  do  we  get  it  ?  16.  What 
proportion  of  beef  is  water  ?  Of  turnips?  Parsnips?  17.  What 
are  fruits  ?  18.  What  else  do  they  contain  besides  water  ?  19. 
What  work  do  the  acids  of  fruits  do  in  the  system  ?  20.  Why 
are  fruits  good  company  ?  And  for  whom  ?  21.  What  causes 
rickets?  22.  What  say  the  Germans  of  phosphorus  ?.  23.  What 
does  the  Man  Wonderful  ask?  24.  What  has  he  learned?  25. 
What  neighbors  has  man  ?  What  do  they  do  for  him  ?  26. 
What  does  he  do  for  them  ?  27.  Who  are  these  neighbors  ?  28. 
What  do  plants  do?      29.  What  are  inorganic  materials?      30. 


360  AIDS  TO   TEACHERS  AND  SCHOLARS. 

What  are  organic  substances ?  31.  What  are  plants  and  ani- 
mals? 32.  How  do  they  differ  ?  33.  What  is  phosphorus,  and 
where  found?  34.  For  whom  are  grains  good  food?  35.  Why 
do  grains  need  long  cooking  ?  36.  What  foods  are  not  suitable  for 
infants  ?  Why  ?  37.  Why  have  infants  no  saliva  ?  38.  Why  do  rice 
and  tapioca  need  saliva  ?  39.  What  is  starch  called  ?  40.  What 
guests  are  welcomed  by  children  ?  41.  Where  do  we  find  sugar  ? 
42.  From  what  is  it  made  ?  43.  What  foods  come  next  ?  44. 
Where  can  we  obtain  fats?  45.  How  are  starch  and  fat  used  ? 
46.  What  may  they  be  called  ?  47.  What  may  other  substances 
be  called  ?  48.  To  what  should  our  food  be  suited  ?  49.  Should 
the  child  or  adult  eat  most  meat?  50.  Which  should  eat  the 
larger  quantity,  the  laborer  or  the  lawyer?  51.  What  is  said  ol 
the  farmer's  boy  who  becomes  a  student?  52.  What  question 
deserves  our  attention  ?     53.  What  rewards  a  wise  choice  ? 


INDEX. 


A.BroMiNAL  cavity 71 

"           type  of  respiration   ...  99 

Absorption  of  the  fooi     ...           .  60 

of  fluids  b j  stomach f>4 

by  the  lacteals.      .    74.77 

xt  oxygen  in  respiration 102 

process  of,  by  osmosis . .  102 

purposes  of 69 

by  colon    78 

Absorbents . .  77 

Accommodation  of  the  eye   .    .  181 

Adipose  tissue  (see   Fat) 25 

Adam1-;  apple 141 

Air.  atmospheric,  composition  of. .  in 

changes  in,  in  respiration     100 

contamination  by  respiration...  .  101 
transmission  of  vibrations   .  ..    152.  161 
in  tympanum  necessary  for  hear- 
ing     ■ >52 

the  mode  of  keeping  pure  in  na- 
ture      164 

Air-cells   97 

Air-passages.      .      96,97 

Albumen  of  the  blood S8 

of  food 67 

action  of  alcohol  upon 291 

action  of  tea  upon 244 

Albuminoids     309 

Alcohol,  produced  by  fermentation  277 

as  quack  doctor 270 

as  shyster 279 

as  thief     287 

offspring  of  decomposition 277 

product  of  death    277 

how  produced    277 

effects  on  mucous  membrane.    290,  296 

on  nerves  of  capillaries 284,  293 

on  heart   292 

on  br.iin 29S 

on  liver 285  291 

on  kidneys 291 

on  tongue    290 

on  stomach 291 

on  heat  of  the  body 297 

testimony  of  Arctic  explorers   . . .  299 

hereditary  diseases  produced  by..  301 

a  cause  of  crime 302 

a  cause  of  pauperism 302 

a  tax  on  Government    302 

insanity  caused  by 302 


Alcohol  not  a  food.  .    .. 

effect  on  red  corpuscle. 

checks  waste 

diseases  produced  by.  . 

Heredity  on     ... 

Economy  on  

Morality  on.       . 

a  poison 

Alimentary  canal,  differenr  parts  of. 

Anatomical  elements  of  b>  dy 

Animal  heat  necessary  to  life.. 

how  produced 109,113, 

regulated  by  perspiration 

Anvil 

Aorta.    ...  

Aqueous  humor     

Arachnoid  membrane 

Arterial  blood  differs  from  venous. 

change  of,  in  the  circulation 

Arteries,  distribution  of 

elasticity  of     

pulsation  of 8c 

movement  of  blood  through 

Artery,  pulmonary  

Atlas 

Auditorium 

Auditory  canal 

Aura 

Auricles  of  the  heart 

Axis 


Bauv,  the 

Backbone 3 

Baritone  voice 

Bass  voice   

Beauty 

of  motion  .    .    . 

of  expression 

of  utility.    

Beer.    ...      

alcohol  in.   .      

how  made  

effect  of,  on  body 

not  food  ...         

Bicuspid  teeth 

Bicuspid  valve 

Bile,  formation  of,  in  the  liver.  . 

accumulation  in  gall-bladder 

function  of,  in  digestion ci 

quantity  secreted 

(361) 


295 

296 
297 
298 
3<.c 
301 
302 
295 
7a 

I I 
toy 
1  14 

4» 

i5« 

88 

172 

49 

84 

89 

89 

89 

,90 

89 

8c 

47 
148 
15c 

95 
82 

47 

205 
"3 
145 

145 
190 
198 
200 

197 

283 
283 
283 
2S4 
286 
54 
85 
11c 

1 1C 
O,  113 

I II 


362 


INDEX. 


Bleeding,  how  stopped 92 

Blood 87 

color  of,  how  caused 11,88,  101 

corpuscles  of 88 

entire  quantity  of ...  91 

absorption  of  oxygen  by 100 

change  of,  in  respiration 101 

through  heart  and  lungs 97 

temperature  of 113 

circulation  of 83 

alieration  of,  by  alcohol 291 

exposure  to  air  in  lungs 102 

tibrifi  of,  its  use 93 

water  in      ..;.  88 

Blood-corpuscles,  movement  of,  in 

capillaries 91 

uses  of 88 

Blushing 92 

Bones,  number  of 16 

formation  of 18 

composition  of. 17 

uses  of. 16 

of  children 17  and  19 

of  the  aged 19 

periosteum  of 18 

building  food 20 

Boyhood 219 

Brain,  where  situated 48,  122 

structure  of  and  membranes  of..  48,  49 

weight  of 50 

Breathing  makes  heat 114 

Breathing,  two  types  of 99 

organs  of 96 

through  nose 166 

frequency  of 102 

Bronchial  tubes 96 

Butler's  pantry 65 

Butter,  fat  in 313 

Burglar  alarm,  the 135 

Calcium  in  body n 

Calisthenics    211 

Canal,  auditory 150 

semi  circular 157 

lachrymal 172 

Capacity  of  heart 85 

Capillaries 89,92,98 

circulation  in 92 

influence  of,  on  circulation 292 

passage  of  corpuscles  through. . .  91 

capacity  of. 91 

Carbonic    acid    exhaled   from    the 

lungs 102 

weight  of 193 

in  sleeping-rooms   192 

Cartilage 19  and  23 

Caseine  in  milk 308 

Cells,  definition  of 12,14 

contents  of  and  shape  of 12 

Cercbro-spinal  nervous  system 124 

Chambsrs,  mysterious. 115 

of  eye 172 

Chemistry,  definition  of 10 


Chloral  hydrate »4J 

Chords,  vocal 14a 

Choroid  coat  of  eye 168 

Chyle 73 

Cilia 104 

Ciliary  processes 168 

muscle _ 168 

Circulation  of  the  blood,  rapidity  of.  91 

through  heart  and  lungs 84,  97 

through  capillaries  91 

Coagulation 93 

Coats  of  the  eyeball 166 

Colon 7? 

Column,  spinal 123 

Cochlea  of  ear 15? 

Coffee • 243 

Company,  bad  250,  257,  263,  266 

wicked 270,  279,  294 

doubtful 242 

good 308 

Complemental  air 104 

Complexion,  the 201 

Conjunctiva 168 

Contractility 33 

Contralto  voice 145 

Convolutions  of  brain. 49 

Cornea 167 

Corpuscles  of  blood 88 

Corti,  organ  of 159 

Cranial  nerves,  how  many 124 

Cranium   46 

Crystalline  lens,  uses  of . 170 

Cuticle  (see  Skin). 

Deglutition,  involuntary  133 

Dentition 54 

Dentine 58 

Derma 4© 

Diaphragm 98 

Diffusion  of  gases 104 

Digestion 59 

involuntary 132 

organs  of.   66 

of  albuminous  matters 68 

of  starch 68 

of  fat 68 

of  sugar 112 

Digestive  secretions 68 

Dipping 257 

Doing,  a  pleasure 219 

Drum  of  the  ear 151 

Doctor,  Quack . 270 

Duct,  biliary  (see  Hepatic  duct). 

pancreatic 67 

Ductless  glands.      116 

Duodenum 67,  119 

Dura  mater   48 

Ear,  external,  internal,  middle.    142,  151 

tympanum  of 15c 

bones  of 152 

Eating,  regularity  in   69,  208 

Elasticity  of  muscle . .    25,  31 


INDEX. 


363 


122 

79 
40 
142 
150 


Flements,  names  of  and  number  of 

I. nam-'l  of  the  teeth 

Encephalon.   ...  

Engine 

Epidermis    

Epiglottis 

Eustachian  tube        

Kxrretion,  definition  of ,l5 

Exsrcise  needful   2°9 

over-exercise 222 

...       99 

33 

176 
...      .65 

16s 

166 


Expiration 

Extensors 

External  oblique  muscle. 

Fye,  structure  of 

Eyeball. 
Eyelash* 


Eyelids ,66 

Facade '96 

Face,  expression  of *99 

Farmer,  the.     233 

Fat. •  25 

source  of,  in  food '",  312 

Fcms-tra  ovalis J52 

Fermentation 377,283 

cau>ed  ry  tea 245 

Fibres,  muscular 24 

of  nerves,  motor  and  sensory..    .  125 

ribrilhx     

Fibrin  of  the  blood 


93 

Flexors 33 

72 
43 
31 


67.  3=7 
59 
68 
68 
68 
68 
72 

..     308 

•  312 

•  .78 


Follicles  of  Lieberkuchn 

of  the  hair 

Food, cooking  of  

kinds  of .... 

digestion  of .  . .    •      

action  of  saliva  on     .    ..  • 

of  gastric  juice. 

of  pancreatic  juice 

cf  bile _ 

of  intestinal  juice 

albuminous  importance  of 

heat-producing 

Fovea  centralis 

Function  of  bones *7 

of  ligaments   

of  muscles 

of  teeth   

of  saliva 

of  tongue.  _  . 

of  gastric  juice. 

of  intestinal  juice   

of  pancreatic  jui^e 

of  the  villi 73 

of  the  liver lo8 

of  the  gall-bladder "° 

of  the  bile «' 

of  the  blood  corpuscles o» 

of  the  lungs  95 

of  the  heart.. 84 

of  the  perspiration 4* 

of  the  nerves •    ■ I27 

Df  the  choroid  coat  of  the  eye...      168 


Function  of  the  cranial  nerves 

of  the  retina 171 

of  the  crystalline  lens.      »7° 

of  the  tears                '7s 

of  the  eustachian  tube 15° 

of  the  auditory  nerve 15* 

of  the  chain  of  ear  bones 15' 

of  the  olfactory  nerve 19« 

of  the  gustatory  nerve.  . 18; 

discharge  of,  attended  with  death 
of  cells "iM 

Furnace io7 

Cai  i. -Bladder   io9 

Ganglion 124 

of  the  spinal  cord '24 

of  the  sympathetic  system          •  ■  130 

Gases,  oxygen io3 

carbonic  acid . .  IGI 

diffusion  of io4 

Gastric  fluid,  secretion  of. 

action  of °* 

Gate-keeper 65 

Gesture,  force  of 2°° 

Girlhood 2" 

Glands,  definition  of 1°° 

salivary 55,  i°8 

parotid 56 

sub-maxillary 

sub-lingual 

lachrymal 

perspiratory. ....... 

pineal  and  pituitary 

sebaceous 


55 
172 

41 
117 

43 


116 
142 
M3 


Glycogen   - . ■ 

Gray  matter  of  brain 

Gustatory  sense. 

Guest,  the  royal 


ductless "6 

thyroid 

Glottis.. 

action  of.  in  singing.    ...... 

protection  of,  in  swallowing 59 

narrowing     of,    proportioned     to 

height  of  note   M3 

Gluten  of  wheat   .  .    3°8 

iia 

"J 

184 

3'4 

Hair *a 

Hammer 15' 

Hand,    principal   scat   of  sense   of 

touch.    .      37 

education  of 2I3 

Head,  an  observatory ... .       45 

Hearing,  sense  of '60 

range  of x"3 

Heart.    79 

location  of 81 

cavities  of °2 

workings  of 80,83,85 

circulation  through.  . 84 

valves  of. 85 

capacity  of. °| 

rest  of 8* 


364 


INDEX. 


Heat,  soufce  of. * 113 

necessity  of 113 

regulation  of 113 

Hepatic  duct iii 

if  eredity,  report  of 300 

Housekeeper,  the 87 

Hunger,  sensation  of. 14 

Hunter,  the 226 

Ileum ...   ..  76 

Incisor  teeth 54 

Industrial  education. 216,  219 

1  Jifancy,  Man  Wonderful  in 205 

.fcorganic  substances  in  body  and 

food 11,309 

Inspiration 99 

Intestinal  juice 72 

Internal  ear  (see  Whispering  Gal- 
lery). 

Intestines,  digestion  in  small ?2 

villi  of 73 

movement  of,  in  digestion. ..... .  76 

Involuntary  muscles 35 

1  is : 168 

function  of. 169 

I  on  in  blood 11 

iwv,  lower,  movable 46 

junum 72 

■tting  flow  of  blood  in  arteries. ...  90 

J  >ints,  how  formed 30 

kinds  of ...  23 

J  lice,  gastric 68 

pancreatic 68 

intestinal 72 

Kidneys 133 

Labyrinth 156 

Laundry,  the 95 

Large  intestines  77 

Larynx,  structure  of.   ■ 142 

movement  of,  in  singing  144 

Lens,  crystal!;  \-. 170 

Ligaments 22  and  31 

Lime  in  bones it 

Liver 107 

size  of 109 

lobes  of no 

formation  of  sugar  in 112 

lobules  of in 

Lobes  of  liver no 

of  lungs 96 

Lungs,  where  located 98 

capacity  of 103 

structure  of 96 

purification  of  air  in. ...  102 

Man  Wonderful,  the 405 

Manhood 224 

Malpighian  corpuscles 118 

Mastication,  organs  of. 54 

importance  of  saliva  in 56 

effect  of,  on  food 55 


Medulla  oblongata 50,  5i 

Membrane  of  the  bones it 

of  the  brain 4S 

of  the  muscles 24 

of  the  nerves 1 24 

Membrani,  tympani  (see   Drum  of 
the  ear). 

Membrane,  mucous     5; 

serous i §i 

Membranes,      passage      of     fluids 

through 6q 

Mesentery,  the 75  to  75 

Milk  as  food 306 

Molar  teeth S4 

Mouth 53 

Mucous  membrane     .    . .  .• 53 

Movements  in  walking   ?*:c 

in  running 21c 

beauty  of 200 

of  stomach  .. 6i 

of  intestines 76 

Mtiscles,  strength  of 26 

properties  of     31  to  35 

elasticity  of 25  and  31 

contractility  of 33 

tonicity  of 32 

number  of 22 

flexor  and  extensor     35 

voluntary  and  involuntary.. 28 

Muscular  fibres 24 

Muscular  sense 137 

Musical  sounds,  how  produced..  ..  143 

Mustard     246 

Mysterious  chambers 115 

Nails 4a 

Nasal  passages 194 

Nerves 135 

of  smell '.94 

Nerve-fibres,  impressions  by 127 

Nervous  cerebro-spinal  system.   124,  132 
sympathetic  system.   ..    .....    130,132 

Nervous  fibres,  sensory 127,130 

motor  128 

termination  of. .  .    37,  125  135 

continuity  of 125 

Network,  capillary 98 

Neurilemma 124 

Nutrition  of  organs ...  93 

Oblique  muscles  of  the  eye 176 

Odors,  perception  of . .  .    195 

Oesophagus,  peculiar  action  of ... .  59 

Oil,  source  of,  in  food 312 

Olfactory  sense 191 

Opium     247 

Optic  commissure 177 

Orbit  of  the  eye 165 

Organ;  the 141 

Organic  substances  as  food   311 

Osmosis 93-104 

Ossification 17 

Otoliths 157 


INDEX. 


36; 


Oxidation    113 

1   xygen   . 105 

as  washing  fluid ico 

Tain,  ser.sation  of 135 

a  friend 135,  246 

Pancreas.  ...    119 

Pancreatic  juice,  uses  of 67 

Palate,  soft  (see  Uvula). 

Papillae  of  skin  40*136 

Parotid  gland 56 

Pepper  246,252 

Periosteum   18 

Peristaltic  action 76 

of  cesop'iagus   60 

of  stomach    61 

Perimysium   25 

Pericardium    82 

Personal  magnetism. 207 

Perspiration,  uses  of 41 

Perspiratory  glands,  length  of 41 

Pharynx 59 

Phonograph,  the 129 

Phosphorus  in  body   310 

Pia  mater 49 

Pigmer.-t  of  skin  ... 40 

Pineal  gland 117 

Pinna 148 

Pitch  of  voice 143 

Pituitary  body 117 

Play,  a  teacher 210 

Plexus 131 

Pons  va/o'.ii 51 

Portal  vein no 

Porial  system no 

Potash  in  blood n 

Protection  of  nostrils  during  swal- 
lowing   59 

of  glottis  during  swallowing 60 

Protoplasm 12 

Pulmonary  veins  and  arteries 80 

rulse,  frequency  of 85 

Pupil  of  the  eye. . .. 169 

Pylorus 65 

Quantity  of  blood  in  body 91 

of  saliva 56 

ofbile   in 

of  air  used  in  breathing 103 

of  air  in  lungs 104 

of  tidal  air 103 

ot  reserve  air  .     104 

ofcomplemental  air   104 

of  residual  air 104 

Rapid  eating 189 

Red  corpuscles 88 

Repair  when  most  active 208 

Repose,  need  of 208 

Reserve  air 104 

Residual  air 104 

Respiration 99 

necessity  of 103 


Respiration,  organs  ol 95.96 

changes  of  blood  in 100 

thoracic  type  of     99 

abdominal  type  of 100 

frequency  of 10a 

object  of 103 

Rest,  need  of 86 

Retina   170 

Rickets   19 

Rods  of  Corti,  use  of 162 

Rods  and  cones 179 

Running   210 

Saccharine  foods 112 

Sacule 157 

Saliva 108 

Salivary  glands 108 

Sarcolemma    24^ 

Schneiderian  membrane 191,  194 

Sclerotic  coat  of  eye. 166 

Sebaceous  glands 43 

Secretion,  definition  of 115 

Semi-circular  canals. 157 

Semi-lunar  valves 84 

Senses,  the  sight 165 

taste 185 

smell 191 

hearing 148 

touch 37,  136 

Sense,  muscular 137 

Serous  membrane 82 

Sight,  sense  of 165 

Singing,  mechanism  of 143 

Sighing 103 

Silica n 

Skin,  structure  and  use  of 38 

Skull..   ... 46 

Small  intestine 72 

villi  of.    73 

peristaltic  movement 76 

secretion  of 72 

Smell,  sense  of 191 

usefulness  of 193 

Snoring 106 

Snuff. 256 

Soprano  voice. 145 

Sound,  how  produced 160 

Spinal  column 123 

Spinal  cord 123 

Spinal   nerves,  sensory  and  motor 

roots 128 

Spleen    118,119 

Starch,  action  of  cooking  on 311 

digestion  of,  in  mouth «5 

in  stomach ob 

in  small  intestine . .       72 

improper  food  for  infants  and  why      56 

Stirrup 151 

Sternum og 

Stomach,  lining  membrane  of.     ...       61 

secretion  of  6a 

peristaltic  action  of. 61 

structure  of ...       6* 


366 


INDEX. 


Stomach,  temperature  of 64 

Substance,  elementary 10 

Sugar,  formation  of,  in  liver 112 

Supra-renal  capsules 117 

Swallowing,  involuntary . . . .  132 

Sympathetic  nervous  system,  origin 

of 130 

connection    with    cerebro-spinal 

system 130 

influence  on  involuntary  motions  131 

Suspensory  ligament   171 

Tactile  corpuscles 135 

Tamer,  the 230 

Taste,  sense  of. 185 

associated  with  smell. 192 

Tea,  effects  of 244 

Tears,  use  of. 172 

Teeth,  development  of 54 

temporary 56 

permanent 57 

bicuspid    54 

canine 54 

molar ...    ..  54 

incisor 54 

care  of. 58 

Telegraph    122 

Temperature  of  body 113 

Tenoi  voice 145 

Thoracic  duct 75 

Thorax 98 

Throat  (see  Pharynx). 

Timbre  of  voice 145 

Tidal  air 103 

Tobacco,  aboriginal  American....  250 

as  dentist 257 

as  medical  assistant 257 

as  dude 263 

as  dandy 266 

effect  of,  on  mucous  membrane..  255 

on  throat  ...    260 

on  lungs   2^5 

on  nasal  passages 256 

on  strength .  .    264 

on  nerves 259 

on  courage 262 

on  red  corpuscles 255 

on  sight    261 

on  offspring 267 

adulterations  of 258 

expense  of 268 

nicotine  of 261 

Tool,  the 36 

Tone  of  muscles 32 

Tone  of  voice 143 

Tones  of  influence.   161 


Tonicity  of  muscles 3* 

Tongue,  use  of i8j 

Touch,  sense  of 37,  137 

Trachea 95 

Tri-cuspid  valve 85 

Tubs,  stationary gt 

Tympanum  (see  Drum  of  ear). 

Twin-brothers 184 

Utricule 157 

Uvula 59 

Valves  of  the  heart 85 

Veins 9c 

movement  of  blood  in  portal nc 

valves  in 9c 

Vena  cavse 8j 

Venous  blood,  changes  in  respira- 
tion    100 

Velocity  of  blood  in  arteries gi 

in  capillaries 91 

Ventilation,  need  of. 192 

Ventricles  of  heart 83 

Ventricle,  fourth 156 

Vestibule  of  internal  ear 156 

Vibration,  definition  of. 143 

of  air  waves 153,160 

of  water  waves 16c 

of  vocal  chords 144 

Villi  of  in  testines 73 

Vision,  organ  of. 165 

Vitreous  humor 170 

Vital  capacity 104 

Vocal  chords 142 

Voice,  organ  of 142 

production  of 144 

range  of 145 

varieties  of. 145 

qualities  of. 145 

Voluntary  muscles 28 

Walking 210 

Waste,  removal  of. 133 

Water,  composition  of 10 

waves  of 160 

proportion  of,  in  body 309 

in  food 309 

Whispering  gallery,  the 155 

White  corpuscles 88 

Windows,  the . . . 165 

Wine,  fermentation  of. 277 

effects  of. 273 

Worker,  the 235 

Work,  royal 239 

Yawning »oj 


